


BrailleNote QT
USER GUIDE
V6.1 D1.0
P/N NT284





PULSE DATA INTERNATIONAL LIMITED
1 Expo Place
P.O. Box 3044, Christchurch, New Zealand.
Telephone	+64 3 3844555. Fax +64 3 3844933
Email:	enquiries@pulsedata.com
World Wide Web:	http://www.pulsedata.com



Head Office

Pulse Data International Limited
1 Expo Place, P.O. Box 3044
Christchurch, New Zealand


Phone:
+64 3 384 4555


Fax:
+64 3 384 4933


Email:
enquiries@pulsedata.com


Web:
www.pulsedata.com



Pulse Data Humanware

175 Mason Circle
Concord, CA 94520, USA








Phone:
(800) 722 3393
(925) 680 7100




Fax:
(925) 681 4630


Email:
usa@pulsedata.com



Pulse Data Europe

3 Blotts Barn Business Centre
Brooks Road, Raunds
Northamptonshire NN9 6NS
United Kingdom


Phone:
01933 626000




Fax:
01933 626204


Email:
europe@pulsedata.com






Bredaseweg 108a
4914 NS Oosterhout
The Netherlands


Phone:
31 162 437 910




Fax:
31 162 437 904


Email:
holland@pulsedata.com






Sjouddev. 8, 35246 Vxj
Sweden


Phone:
46 470 764 490




Fax:
46 470 711 088


Email:
sweden@pulsedata.com



Pulse Data Australia
Pulse Data Asia

Suite 2, 711 Railway Street
P O Box 944, Baulkham Hills
NSW 2153, Australia


Phone:
(02) 9686 2600




Fax:
(02) 9686 2855


Email:
sales@pulsedata.com.au








Copyright  2004 Pulse Data International Limited, Christchurch, New Zealand.
All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without the express written permission of Pulse Data International Limited. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained in this user guide is correct at the time of issue. Neither Pulse Data International Limited nor its agents assume responsibility for errors or omissions in this information. No liability is assumed for damages resulting from the use of this information.
This product complies with the requirements of EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
Braille translation copyright  19752003 Duxbury Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
The patent for the touch cursor technology incorporated in the BrailleNote is owned by ALVA BV.


Authorised European Union Representative:
Pulse Data Europe
3 Blotts Barn Business Centre
Brooks Road, Raunds
Northamptonshire NN9 6NS
United Kingdom
phone:	+44 (0) 1933 626 000
fax:	+44 (0)1933 626 204
email:	europe@pulsedata.com
web:	www.pulsedata.com



Susceptibility to Interference.
There may be temporary degradation of the image when the BrailleNote QT is subjected to a strong radiofrequency field, electrostatic discharge or transient electrical noise.
FCC Warning.
This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used properly, in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules and Regulations, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1. Reorient the receiving antenna.
2. Relocate the equipment with respect to the receiver.
3. Move the equipment away from the receiver.
4. Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the equipment and receiver are on different branch circuits.
If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the booklet prepared by the Federal Communication Commission helpful: "How to Identify and Resolve RadioTV Interference Problems". This booklet is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Stock No. 004000003454.
Shielded cables and certified Class B peripherals must be used on this product. Using unshielded cables or uncertified peripherals may result in this unit not complying with FCC Rules Part 15. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Notice for Canada.
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment regulations.



Modem Information (USA ONLY)
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. Located on the equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN). If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN's contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
This equipment cannot be used on the telephone companyprovided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to State Tariffs.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact:
Pulse Data HumanWare
175 Mason Circle
Concord CA 94520
Phone 8007223393
If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you to remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C
It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrester in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. This is to avoid damaging the equipment caused by local lightening strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment is HearingAid Compatible (HAC).
The telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or longdistance transmission charges.)


Table of Contents
1	Getting Started.	9
1.1	Equipment Checklist.	9
1.2	General Features.	10
1.3	Software Features.	11
1.4	Software Features.	13
1.5	Orientation.	14
1.6	Thumb Keys.	15
1.7	Braille Display.	15
1.8	Touch Cursor.	15
1.9	Keyboard.	16
1.10	Power Switch.	17
1.11	Speech.	18
1.12	Earphones.	19
1.13	KeySoft Concepts.	19
1.14	The KeySoft Menus.	22
1.15	A First Experience.	25
1.16	Switching Between Tasks.	33
1.17	Keyboard Assistance.	34
1.18	Saving before Switching off.	34
1.19	Setting Time and Date.	35
1.20	User Settings.	36
1.21	User Guide.	37
1.22	Where to Now.	41
2	BrailleNote QT Hardware.	43
2.1	Charging the Battery.	43
2.2	AC Adapter and Battery.	44
2.3	Checking Power Status.	45
2.4	Battery Care.	45
2.5	Calibrating the Battery Gauge.	46
2.6	Long Term Storage.	48
2.7	Ports.	49
2.8	Braille Display Care.	52
2.9	PC Cards.	53
2.10	Compact Flash Cards.	55
2.11	Using a Visual Display.	56
2.12	Braille Terminal for Screen Reader.	59
2.13	Remote Synthesizer.	60
2.14	General Care.	60
3	Word Processor.	61
3.1	What is a Word Processor.	61
3.2	Text and Braille.	62
3.3	The KeyWord Menu.	62
3.4	Documents Folders and Drives.	63
3.5	Opening a Document. Q	65
3.6	Naming a Document. Q	67
3.7	Creating a Document. BQ	68
3.8	Reading a Document.	68
3.9	Review Commands.	74
3.10	The Cursor.	75
3.11	Braille Display Modes.	78
3.12	Format Indicators.	80
3.13	Editing a Document.	85
3.14	Breaking your Document into Pages	88
3.15	Searching a Document.	89
3.16	Checking the Cursor Position.	92
3.17	Going to a Specified Position.	92
3.18	Marking Places for Quick Reference.	92
3.19	The Spelling Checker.	94
3.20	Opening ASCII and Plain Braille format Documents	99
3.21	Large Documents.	101
3.22	Switching Between Documents.	102
4	Book Reader.	103
4.1	Instant Braille Transcription.	103
4.2	Reading the Sample Book.	103
4.3	Braille Display thumb Key Commands.	104
4.4	The Review Cursor.	105
4.5	Additional Reading Commands.	106
4.6	Miscellaneous commands.	108
4.7	Review Book Opening Options.	109
4.8	Reading Books Stored on Other Drives.	111
4.9	Exiting KeyBook.	113
4.10	Bookshare.	113
5	General Functions.	117
5.1	Date.	118
5.2	Time Options.	118
5.3	Grade of Keyboard Braille Entry.	121
5.4	Braille Display Options.	121
5.5	Keyboard Settings.	126
5.6	Review Voice.	128
5.7	Visual Display.	131
5.8	Next Appointment.	131
5.9	Power and Battery Status.	132
5.10	User Guide.	132
5.11	Insertion.	132
5.12	Repeat and Spell.	134
5.13	Hear Punctuation.	134
5.14	Move to Another Task.	135
5.15	Front Thumb Keys On/Off.	136
5.16	Change Speech Volume Rate and Pitch.	136
5.17	Editing at a Prompt.	137
6	Embossing and Printing Documents.	139
6.1	Setting Up the Embosser or Printer.	139
6.2	Printing a Braille Document.	140
6.3	Embossing or Printing a Document.	141
6.4	Embossing Options.	142
6.5	Embossing a Group of Documents.	143
6.6	The Embosser Setup List.	143
6.7	Testing the Embosser.	147
6.8	The Printer SetUp List.	148
6.9	Testing the Printer.	148
7	Advanced Word Processing.	149
7.1	Overview.	150
7.2	Document Types.	151
7.3	Formatting a Text Document.	152
7.4	Formatting a Text Document for Embossing.	165
7.5	Block Commands.	172
7.6	Cursor Movement Modes.	180
7.7	Moving to the Start of the Next Line.	181
7.8	Moving to the Next Tab.	181
7.9	Inserting the Time, Date or Calculator Result.	182
7.10	Binding Spaces.	183
7.11	Pasting an Address.	183
7.12	Working with Documents on other Drives.	184
7.13	Saving a Document.	185
7.14	Quitting a Document.	186
7.15	Creating Other Document Types.	187
7.16	Braille Documents.	187
7.17	Formatting a Braille Document.	190
7.18	Extended Characters.	199
8	Scientific Calculator.	207
8.1	Entering KeyPlus.	207
8.2	Entering a Calculation.	208
8.3	Basic Operations.	210
8.4	Memory Operations.	212
8.5	Scientific Operations.	213
8.6	Inserting a Result or a Calculation.	217
9	Planner.	219
9.1	Entering the Planner.	219
9.2	The KeyPlan Menu.	219
9.3	Selecting a Date.	220
9.4	Scheduling Appointments.	224
9.5	Recurring Appointments.	226
9.6	Reviewing the Appointments.	232
9.7	Changing an Existing Appointment.	234
9.8	Selecting Another Date.	237
9.9	Alarms.	237
9.10	Embossing and Printing.	241
10	Address List.	243
10.1	Introduction.	244
10.2	Adding an Address.	245
10.3	Looking Up an Address.	247
10.4	Changing a Field or Adding More Information.	249
10.5	Deleting a Record.	250
10.6	Duplicating a Record.	251
10.7	Inserting an Address into a Document.	251
10.8	Embossing Addresses.	252
10.9	Printing Addresses.	254
10.10	Templates.	254
10.11	Copying Addresses.	258
10.12	Selecting an Address List.	260
10.13	Creating an Address List.	261
10.14	Using KeyList to Manipulate Databases	263
11	Email.	265
11.1	What Can KeyMail Do.	266
11.2	KeyMail Menu.	266
11.3	Before You Start.	269
11.4	Correcting Input Errors.	270
11.5	Writing an Email Message.	270
11.6	Attaching a file to an email.	272
11.7	Read Email.	273
11.8	Connect to Send and Receive Email.	286
11.9	Setup Options.	290
12	Web Browser.	295
12.1	Overview.	295
12.2	Connecting to the World Wide Web.	296
12.3	Changing to another Part of KeySoft.	296
12.4	Logging on.	297
12.5	Navigation.	298
12.6	Moving from Page to Page or Site to Site.	302
12.7	Page Management.	303
12.8	Application Management.	306
12.9	Favorites.	308
12.10	History.	310
12.11	Saving and Refreshing Web Pages.	312
12.12	Tables.	314
13	Connectivity	315
13.1	Understanding Connectivity Concepts.	316
13.2	Connection Configurations.	317
13.3	The Connectivity Menu.	317
13.4	Using a Wireless Connection.	318
13.5	Dial up and LAN Connections.	323
13.6	Active Connection Details.	327
13.7	Review an existing connection configuration.	328
13.8	Glossary of terms:	329
13.9	Troubleshooting.	330
13.10	Firewalls.	330
13.11	Accessing the Network through your BrailleNote QT.	331
13.12	ActiveSync.	336
13.13	KeySync.	342
14	File Manager.	359
14.1	Selecting Files Folders and Drives.	360
14.2	Checking the Spelling of Folder or File Names.	360
14.3	The Directory Option.	361
14.4	Folder Manager.	361
14.5	Document and File Types.	363
14.6	Copying a File.	365
14.7	Erasing a File.	366
14.8	Renaming a File.	366
14.9	Moving a File.	367
14.10	Protecting a File.	367
14.11	Groups of Files and Wild Cards.	368
14.12	What is a Directory.	370
14.13	Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories.	373
14.14	File Translation.	376
14.15	Translation Menu.	377
14.16	Importing Files.	377
15	Utilities Menu.	393
15.1	Backup or Restore Files.	393
15.2	Pronunciation Dictionary.	397
15.3	Date and Time Set.	401
15.4	KeySoft Application Programs.	402
15.5	Miscellaneous Options.	403
15.6	Key Management.	404
16	Accessories.	405
16.1	Media Player.	405
17	Command Summary.	411
17.1	General Commands.	411
17.2	Wordprocessor.	416
17.3	Calculator.	425
17.4	Planner.	427
17.5	Address List.	432
17.6	Email.	433
17.7	Unicode Characters.	435
17.8	Web Browser.	436
17.9	Stopwatch.	439
17.10	Media Player.	440
18	Index	36
 

1 Getting Started.
Welcome to the BrailleNote QT, an innovative personal productivity system, from Pulse Data International. BrailleNote QT incorporates a computer style keyboard, a choice of 18 or 32 cell Braille display, high quality responsive speech, and a suite of powerful applications running under the Windows CE operating system, all packaged into a truly portable system. This user guide tells you all about the BrailleNote QT.


1.1 Equipment Checklist.
Carefully unpack your BrailleNote QT. Save the box and packing materials for future use. Your BrailleNote QT package comprises the following items:
BrailleNote QT;
AC adapter;
Slim line carrying case;
Earphones;
Modem data cable;
Serial communications cable;
9 to 25 pin cable adapter;
Audio tape containing a "Getting Started Tutorial;"
Command summary in embossed Braille;
Command summary in inkprint;
PC software for BrailleNote Family on CDROM.
Your BrailleNote QT may also include a modem cable adapter if you live in the UK, Australia or New Zealand.


1.1.1 Optional items include:
MicroDrive Storage Cards.
BrailleNote GPS.
Braille Manual.
Multilingual  add on languages including french, german and spanish.
Software Maintenance agreements.


1.2 General Features.
The BrailleNote is a compact portable Personal Organizer with a computer style keyboard, and a Braille display. The Braille display may be either 18 or 32 cells with each cell comprising 8 dots, allowing for both the display of 6 dot and 8 dot Braille. Each cell of the Braille display has an associated cursor routing button. Four thumb keys on the front of the BrailleNote supplement the Braille display and provide convenient navigation control.
The BrailleNote also has synthesized speech output that can be used in conjunction with the Braille display or on its own.
The BrailleNote QT runs under the Windows CE 4.2 operating system. It has standard serial and parallel ports as well as a highspeed infrared port. A Type 2 Compact Flash slot and a Type 2 PC card slot allow for additional storage and LAN and/or wireless Network options.
The BrailleNote QT uses flash memory technology to retain information indefinitely even if the batteries run flat, and its user memory can currently be expanded up to 48 Megabytes.


1.3 Software Features.
A multipurpose program, called KeySoft, running under the Windows CE operating system, is especially designed for people with a visual impairment. KeySoft provides the following functions:
A word processor called KeyWord that is powerful yet surprisingly simple to learn. KeyWord has most of the features of an office word processor, including unlimited text insertion, search and replace, indents, clipboard operations, spell check and so on. It can even directly import and export the popular Microsoft Word format documents.
An email program called KeyMail that lets you send and receive electronic mail. KeyMail works using a standard email connection. You can also send and receive attachments with your email.
An internet browser called KeyWeb, that allows you to search and use the world wide web and also read locally stored html documents.
A Media player that plays a range of audio format files. You can play files by themselves, or in the background of other tasks.
A calendar, scheduler and planner called KeyPlan. Your entries may include alarms that sound even if the BrailleNote QT is switched off.
An address list manager called KeyList that sorts your entries and allows flexible searching. Addresses can be copied into letters and email.
A synchronization Tool called KeySync that works in conjunction with KeyPlan and KeyList.
A 10 digit scientific calculator called KeyPlus. Support is provided for both Nemeth and British braille mathematics.
A book reader called KeyBook that enables you to read braille books, or books in any standard text format including Microsoft Word format. Books opened in KeyBook are protected from accidental editing.
A Keyboard Learn function that helps you to learn the keyboard layout and the available quick key functions.
A File Manager that allows folder management and files to be copied, renamed, protected, deleted or translated.
A program called ActiveSync that allows the BrailleNote QT disk structure to be viewed and managed on a PC running Microsoft Windows.
A Remote Synthesizer mode that allows the BrailleNote QT to act as a speech synthesizer for other computers.
You can switch easily between these KeySoft tasks, which are fully integrated so you can transfer information between them.
KeySoft has both forward and back translators, so a text document can be imported into the BrailleNote QT and translated automatically into an uncontracted (grade 1) or contracted (grade 2) braille document, and vice versa.
The BrailleNote QT can output its display to a separate visual display using the serial port. Sighted observers or teachers can use the visual display screen to view what you are doing on the BrailleNote QT. A remote screen viewer based on the Palm handheld computer is also available.
Information can be transferred to and from another computer such as a PC or Apple Macintosh, or specialized equipment such as a selfcontained scanning system.


1.3.1 The Windows CE Operating System.
The Windows CE operating system is a modern, powerful operating system designed for small handheld computers. It supports many technologies such as email, highspeed infrared communications, desktop PC synchronization, portable mass storage and more. Handheld computers have quite different processors from the Pentium type processors incorporated in PC's that run the standard Windows operating system. Standard Windows programs like Microsoft Word and Excel do not run under Windows CE. Furthermore, programs like Pocket Word and Pocket Excel that run on handheld computers under Windows CE generally require a builtin visual display. Consequently standard Windows CE programs are not suitable for the BrailleNote QT.


1.4 Software Features.
A multipurpose program, called KeySoft, running under the Windows CE operating system, is especially designed for people with a visual impairment. KeySoft provides the following functions:
A word processor called KeyWord that is powerful yet surprisingly simple to learn. KeyWord has most of the features of an office word processor, including unlimited text insertion, search and replace, indents, clipboard operations, spell check and so on. It can even directly import and export the popular Microsoft Word format documents.
An email program called KeyMail that lets you send and receive electronic mail. KeyMail works using a standard email connection. You can also send and receive attachments with your email.
An internet browser called KeyWeb, that allows you to search and use the world wide web and also read locally stored html documents.
A Media player that plays a range of audio format files. You can play files by themselves, or in the background of other tasks.
A calendar, scheduler and planner called KeyPlan. Your entries may include alarms that sound even if the BrailleNote QT is switched off.
An address list manager called KeyList that sorts your entries and allows flexible searching. Addresses can be copied into letters and email.
A synchronization Tool called KeySync that works in conjunction with KeyPlan and KeyList.
A 10 digit scientific calculator called KeyPlus. Support is provided for both Nemeth and British braille mathematics.
A book reader called KeyBook that enables you to read braille books, or books in any standard text format including Microsoft Word format. Books opened in KeyBook are protected from accidental editing.
A Keyboard Learn function that helps you to learn the keyboard layout and the available quick key functions.
A File Manager that allows folder management and files to be copied, renamed, protected, deleted or translated.
A program called ActiveSync that allows the BrailleNote QT disk structure to be viewed and managed on a PC running Microsoft Windows.
A Remote Synthesizer mode that allows the BrailleNote QT to act as a speech synthesizer for other computers.
BrailleNote QT has a onehanded Braille input keyboard mode, providing convenience for people restricted to the use of one hand.
You can switch easily between these KeySoft tasks, which are fully integrated so you can transfer information between them.
KeySoft has both forward and back translators, so a text document can be imported into the BrailleNote QT and translated automatically into an uncontracted (grade 1) or contracted (grade 2) braille document, and vice versa.
The BrailleNote QT can output its display to a separate visual display using the serial port. Sighted observers or teachers can use the visual display screen to view what you are doing on the BrailleNote QT. A remote screen viewer based on the Palm handheld computer is also available.
Information can be transferred to and from another computer such as a PC or Apple Macintosh, or specialized equipment such as a selfcontained scanning system.


1.5 Orientation.
BrailleNote QT is supplied in a slim line wrap around leather carry case. To open the case, lift the flap on the front edge. Fold back the case to allow operation of the BrailleNote QT. On the front edge of the BrailleNote QT you will find 4 buttons called thumb keys. Position the BrailleNote QT with these keys facing you. You can operate the BrailleNote QT while it is in its carry case.


1.6 Thumb Keys.
The four keys facing you are normally operated by your thumbs so we call them Thumb keys to differentiate them from the main keyboard keys. They are used in conjunction with the Braille display when reading and navigating menus and lists. They can be operated using your thumbs without moving your fingers from the Braille display discussed in the next section.
The thumb keys can be set up for lefthanded or righthanded operation. You can also create a custom thumb key set up to suit your personal preference as discussed in page 5.4.14 Thumb Key Set. The factory setting is righthanded.
The thumb keys are named as follows: PREVIOUS,BACK,ADVANCE and NEXT. In the righthanded configuration the key functions are assigned from left to right in that order with PREVIOUS on the left and NEXT on the right. For the lefthanded configuration the functions are assigned in the reverse order with PREVIOUS on the far right and NEXT on the far left.


1.7 Braille Display.
If you put your thumbs on the thumb keys and drop your fingers, they will be positioned on or about the Braille display. The electronic Braille display comprises either eighteen or thirtytwo identical eight dot cells that can display any Braille symbol. Each dot of the Braille display is, in fact, a pin that is controlled electronically. To display a dot the pin is raised and the pin is lowered when there is no dot. When the display is off all dots are raised slightly and are somewhat spongy to touch. The Braille display is able to be refreshed; it can be written and rewritten repeatedly.


1.8 Touch Cursor.
If you run your finger up past Braille cell, you will notice that there is a curved, springy strip above it with a raised vertical ridge through the middle. This is the touch cursor button for that Braille cell. It is especially useful when editing a document. In KeyWord, for example, when you press a touch cursor button, the cursor moves to that cell. You can then edit the character displaying on that cell, if any. This is discussed in chapter 3.
The touch cursor can also be used to select an item from a menu or list.


1.9 Keyboard.
The keyboard has a standard typewriter layout for letters and numbers. To position your hands correctly there are small raised dots on each of the "home" keys, Fand J.There is also a raised dot on the Ikey.
As discussed later, the Keyboard Learn mode, accessible from the Main Menu, is an invaluable aid towards learning the placement of the various keys.
The bottom row of keys, from the left, consists of 11 keys as follows: CONTROL,HELP,MENU,FUNCTION,SPACEBAR,REPEAT,SINGLEQUOTE,DELETE,LEFTARROW,DOWNARROW,and RIGHTARROW. The function key has a raised dot on it.
On the second row, SHIFT is at the lefthand end and SLASH is the rightmost key. The last five keys on the second row are: COMMA,PERIOD,SHIFT,UPARROW, andSLASH.
On the third row, the leftmost key is READ and the rightmost key is ENTER. Between Land ENTER are the usual SEMICOLONand APOSTROPHE keys.
On the fourth row, TAB is at the lefthand end and the BACKSLASH key is at the righthand end.
The fifth or top row consists of ESCAPE, the numbers 1 through 9, then 0 followed by DASH,EQUALS, and BACKSPACE. To help you locate the number keys, the 3, 7, and 0 keys have raised dots on them.
In this User Guide, combination key presses are described in the following way. The instruction: Press READwithT, means that you should hold down the READ key, press the T key briefly, then release both keys. It is important that you fully depress the first key, in this case theREAD key, before you press the second key, which is in this case the Tkey.


1.10 Power Switch.
From the front edge of your BrailleNote QT, move your hand along the left side of the case and towards the rear. You will first notice a raised circle that identifies the earphone socket. Continue to move your left hand towards the rear of your BrailleNote QT. You will come upon another raised feature surrounding the rocker type power switch. To switch the BrailleNote QT on, press the power switch near the front of the rocker. A power on message is displayed, the content of which will depend on where the BrailleNote QT was when you last switched off. To switch off, press the power switch near the rear of the rocker.
Every time you switch the BrailleNote QT on, its operation resumes in exactly the same place as it was when you switched it off. If you are not sure if the BrailleNote QT is on or off, feel the position of the power switch.
If you dont use the BrailleNote QT for approximately 10 minutes it will enter hibernate mode, where the power drawn from the battery is the same as if the unit was switched off. Pressing any key will end the hibernate mode, but it is recommended that you momentarily press the ENTER and BACKSPACE keys together to end the hibernate mode. This will avoid the possibility of inserting unwanted characters if a document was open when the unit entered the hibernate mode.
If your BrailleNote QT displays "Batterylow," or does not come to life, you should plug in the AC adapter. The power socket is located at the rear of the BrailleNote QT on the extreme left. Locate the socket then the small plug on the end of the AC adapter cable. Plug the small AC adapter plug into the socket. Plug the AC adapter into a wall socket. The message "ACadapteron" is displayed to confirm battery charging is in progress.
If the BrailleNote QT does not start, wait 30 seconds or so and try switching it off then on again. If this does not work then press the Reset button. The BrailleNote QT immediately beeps to confirm that it has been reset. After about 10 seconds, if the speech is on, KeySoft displays a sign on message and resumes from the Main Menu.


1.10.1 Resetting the BrailleNote QT.
The Reset button is located just behind the Power switch. The Reset button is recessed to avoid accidental operation, so you may need to use a pointed object to press it.
Details of when and how to reset the BrailleNote QT are mentioned in context throughout this user guide. There is also a detailed description of each type of reset in Appendix C Troubleshooting, as well as reference to each type under Reset Topics in the online index.


1.11 Speech.
You can listen to the BrailleNote QT using either the builtin loudspeaker at the center back of the BrailleNote QT or headphones. If headphones are plugged in, the loudspeaker is automatically disabled.
The headphone socket is on the back of the BrailleNote QT, directly to the right of the central "bump".
The speech volume, speed and pitch can all be controlled by keyboard commands. These commands are described fully in 1.15.4.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch, but nevertheless it is important to know how to control the volume of the speech right now.
To increase the volume press FUNCTIONwithPERIOD To gradually increase the volume you can hold down the FUNCTION key and tap the PERIOD key repeatedly.
To decrease the volume press FUNCTIONwithCOMMA.
The speech supplements the Braille display. You might prefer the Braille display when editing text, reading detailed material or accessing notes during meetings but prefer speech for reading longer documents such as novels when reading for pleasure. We will explain how to turn off the speech or the Braille display later.


1.12 Earphones.
BrailleNote QT comes with a set of earphones.
To use the earphones, adjust the volume to a comfortable level after fitting the earphones and while the BrailleNote QT is speaking. The BrailleNote QT will also work with a wide range of other popular ear and headphone styles.


1.13 KeySoft Concepts.
Learning to use the BrailleNote QT is easy because the User Interface is very consistent. Similar operations in different parts of KeySoft are carried out in similar ways. This section covers the concepts behind the way KeySoft operates.


1.13.1 Help Messages.
At any point in KeySoft you can get information about the options that are available. To do this, press HELP. KeySoft help is context sensitive, which means that you are only given help relevant to your current situation. Remember to press HELP for Help when you need it. It does not affect your work in any way, and after you have finished reading the Help message, you are returned to the point at which you selected Help.
When the help system is being used to review a list of available commands, pressing ENTER on the displayed command will cause that command to be executed.
To read a longer Help message on the Braille display, use the ADVANCE thumb key and to review the message use the BACKthumb key. 
The Braille grade used when displaying text can be selected. The factory setting is Grade 2 Braille. You can change the setting as described in 5.4.6 Preferred Reading Grade.


1.13.2 Prompts.
Whenever KeySoft requires input from you, a brief message called a prompt is displayed. The prompt indicates what input is required from you. If you are unsure how to respond, press HELP for help. Where possible, KeySoft offers reasonable suggested choices.
BrailleNote QT provides prompts in Braille, speech or both together. The factory set up turns on both the Braille display and speech and the following discussion assumes that both are on. You can read the Braille display or listen to the voice or do both. When this User Guide states that the BrailleNote QT "displaysamessage" it is referring to both the message appearing on the Braille display and being spoken. You will notice that the prompt that appears on the Braille display is often in shorter form than the announced version, which is the one quoted in this User Guide. For example, the BrailleNote QT will announce, "Foldername?PressENTERforGeneral" while it displays, "Foldername?General".
You can turn off one or other of the outputs; refer to 1.15.4.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off and 1.15.4.2 Turning Speech On or Off.


1.13.3 Reading Prompts on the Braille Display.
Generally the prompts displayed in Braille are identical to what is spoken. Sometimes there are slight differences because what is appropriate in speech does not need to be displayed in Braille. Also, because the Braille display has a limited length, Braille output is limited to the number of whole words that fit on the display. If a prompt is longer than the Braille display or you are reading a long passage of Braille, you can scroll the Braille display to see the next group of words by pressing the ADVANCEthumb key. In the following discussion it is assumed that you will scroll to read the full prompt as necessary. Remember you can also scroll back to see the previous display by pressing the BACKthumb key.
To help reading longer messages and prompts you can press PREVIOUStogether with BACK to move the Braille display one word to the left. Pressing PREVIOUS together with ADVANCE moves the Braille display one word to the right.
You can return to the previous prompt by pressing PREVIOUSat any time.


1.13.4 Repeating Spoken Prompts.
If you miss hearing a prompt when it is spoken the first time, don't worry. You can listen to it again by pressing REPEAT.


1.13.5 Menus.
KeySoft uses a series of menus to provide a quick and easy way of performing many complex functions. Each menu contains a list of options from which to choose. For example, the Main Menu allows you to select the Word Processor, Planner, Address List, and so on. The selection of items is described in 1.14.3 Reviewing the Main Menu.


1.13.6 Exiting the Current Activity.
Another concept used throughout KeySoft is that of exiting what you are doing and taking one step back to the previous option point.
You can do this by pressing ESCAPE particularly while using the keyboard, orthe PREVIOUS thumb key particularly when you are using the Braille display.


1.13.7 Automatic Cutoff of Prompts.
KeySoft gives detailed spoken prompts and messages to help you learn the system. To prevent these messages slowing down an experienced user, speech is cut off automatically by the next keystroke.


1.13.8 Instant Access.
You can switch from one KeySoft task to another with a simple key sequence. For example, you can switch from the Word Processor to the Planner, and then return to the same point in your document. For information on how to do this, refer to 1.16 Switching Between Tasks.


1.14 The KeySoft Menus.
1.14.1 Structure.
The entry point to KeySoft is the Main Menu, which contains 14 items. You can display each of these items in turn, and select one.
When you have done this, you are generally presented with another menu. The system may extend to 3 or 4 levels of submenu. This structure is an important aspect of KeySoft. Items are grouped together for easy location, so a huge range of functions can be found from one starting point, the Main Menu.
For example, if you start at the Main Menu and choose the Word processor option, you are presented with the KeyWord menu. This contains the following items: Create a document, Open a document, Emboss a document, Print a document, and Setup options. These all relate to wordprocessing.
If you choose to Emboss a document, you are presented with a further choice of Embossing, or Setting up the embosser, and so on.
Now let's see how the Main Menu works.


1.14.2 Reading a List or Menu.
You can read through any menu or list using only the thumb keys and Braille display. Consequently, you can keep your hands on the Braille display avoiding the need to go back and forwards between the Braille display and keyboard.
The thumb keys perform the following functions:
To step forwards through a menu  press the ADVANCEthumb key. Menu items are displayed one at a time.
To step back through a menu  press the BACKthumb key.Menu items are displayed one at a time in reverse order.
To select a menu item  press the NEXTthumb key.
To exit a menu  press the PREVIOUSthumb key.


1.14.3 Reviewing the Main Menu.
To start with, go to the Main Menu by pressing MENU. KeySoft displays: "MainMenu."
To display the first item of the Main Menu, press SPACEorADVANCE. KeySoft displays: "Wordprocessor."
You could select the word processor at this point, but our present object is to review all the items in the Main Menu. So, press SPACEorADVANCErepeatedly, pausing to read and listen to each of the 14 options in the menu, which are:
Planner;
AddressList;
Email;
Internet;
MediaPlayer;
BookReader;
ScientificCalculator;
FileManager, which allows files to be copied, translated, etc;
Utilities, which is a group of general purpose functions;
TerminalforScreenReader, which allows the BrailleNote QT to act as a Braille display for other computers;
RemoteSynthesizer, which makes the BrailleNote QT act as a speech synthesizer for other computers;
KeyboardLearn, which helps you to learn the Braille keyboard functions;
ForInformationpressREADwithI,which provides information about the BrailleNote QT such as the serial number and software version.
FortheOptionsMenu,pressFUNCTIONwithO,anywhere, which is a reminder of how to access the Options Menu.
The last item is: "EndofMenu." Having stepped forward along the menu by pressing SPACEorADVANCErepeatedly, you can step back by pressing BACKSPACEorBACKrepeatedly.
When using speech, if you don't want to hear a complete announcement, you can cut it off and move to the next item by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE. This speech cutoff occurs at all points in KeySoft.


1.14.4 Selecting from the Main Menu.
When KeySoft displays the option you want, press the ENTERkey. The exceptions are Information and OptionsMenu, where you need to press SPACE with the initial letter to access them. Don't worry about getting in over your head, because you can always back out of a selection by pressing ESCAPE for exit on the keyboard.
When you have selected an item from the Main Menu, you are generally presented with another menu, from which you can again select an item. To display a Help message describing your options at any point, press HELP. To return to the previous menu, press ESCAPE. To go directly to the Main Menu, press MENU.


1.14.5 Keyboard shortcuts.
As well as moving through the menus an item at a time as described in the previous section, you can take a keyboard shortcut directly to the menu item by typing its first letter. This automatically selects the item, so instead of having to press ENTER when the item is displayed, KeySoft takes you straight to the action selected when you would have pressed ENTER.
For example, if you were at the Main Menu and you wanted to go to the Word processor, you could press W. Instead of "Wordprocessor", KeySoft will go straight to "KeyWordMenu". Press O and instead of "OpenaDocument", KeySoft will go straight to "FolderName". This is a real time saver.


1.15 A First Experience.
Most people hate reading User Guides. They would much rather just have a go, on the presumption that if the product is any good, it should be obvious how it works.
If that's you, then this is your section. We'll go through two simple demonstrations: in the first we'll create a basic word processor document, and in the second we'll do an addition with the calculator. You should only need the simple commands that have been introduced so far.
If you are not keen on jumping in at the deep end, don't panic. It's not essential to follow these demonstrations, because after this part we'll revert to normal manual mode, and describe in detail all the wonderful things that the BrailleNote QT can do.

1.15.1 General.
ost people hate reading User Guides. They would much rather just have a go, on the presumption that if the product is any good, it should be obvious how it works.
If that's you, then this is your section. We'll go through two simple demonstrations: in the first we'll create a basic word processor document, and in the second we'll do an addition with the calculator. You should only need the simple commands that have been introduced so far.
If you are not keen on jumping in at the deep end, don't panic. It's not essential to follow these demonstrations, because after this part we'll revert to normal manual mode, and describe in detail all the wonderful things that the BrailleNote QT can do.


1.15.2 Writing a Simple Document.
The aim of this first exercise is to write a very simple document with the word processor.
To reach a common starting point, go to the Main Menu by pressing MENU. Your BrailleNote QT displays: "Main menu."
To get to the word processor, press W.Your BrailleNote QT displays: "KeyWord menu."
To Create a document, press C, for Create, and your BrailleNote QT displays: "Folder name? Press ENTER for General,"
KeySoft is asking which part of its filing system you want to use, and is offering the "General" folder. This is fine for now, so follow the prompt and press ENTER. KeySoft then displays: "Document to create?"
Notice that, a little after the question mark there is a cell which has dots 7 and 8 on. This is the cursor. It shows where the character that you type will be entered. Dot 7 is below dot 3 and dot 8 is below dot 6.
You are being asked to provide a name for the new document, so type a name such as: "test." When you have typed the name, press ENTER. Your BrailleNote QT displays:
"Top of document. Blank."
This means that you have created a new document named "Test," and the cursor is sitting at the top of it. The Braille display is completely blank.
You are now free to type whatever you like. For this demo we'll limit ourselves to: "This is a test of my new BrailleNote QT." The characters are displayed on the Braille display as you type. The cursor, dots 78 appears to the right of the last character brailled. As before this shows where the next character will be entered. Each word is spoken when you press the space bar..
That's all we'll write for now. To finish this little exercise, press ESCAPE. Your BrailleNote QT displays: "KeyWord menu." You are back at the Word processor menu, and your new document has been automatically saved. If you press ESCAPE again you arrive back where you started, at the Main Menu.


1.15.3 Trying Out the Calculator.
You might also like to try out the Calculator, which you can do without any extensive knowledge of the BrailleNote QT. From the Main Menu, go to the Scientific Calculator by pressing S.You hear: "KeyPlus.Zero."
Just 0, number sign followed by the letter J, is displayed on the Braille display. This means that the Calculator is ready. If someone has previously used the Calculator and the display is not zero, you can clear it by pressing CONTROLwithI.
Let's try calculating 2 + 3. The plus function is obtained by pressing the EQUALS key, you don't need to press SHIFT to obtain the plus function. To calculate the result, press ENTER. Your BrailleNote QT should display the answer "5".
On the Braille display both the Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics and the UK Braille Mathematics Notation are supported. The correct code for your country is automatically selected when you set up your Calculator Braille Language as described in 5.4.9 Calculator Braille Language.
You can review the calculation by pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys together. The Braille display will show 2+3=5, in either Nemeth or UK mathematics notation depending on the selected calculator language. Pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys again will return to just displaying the answer. If the speech is on, the speech will mirror the content on the Braille display.
To complete the exercise, press MENU, to return to the Main Menu.


1.15.4 General Functions.
Some useful general functions are available wherever you are in KeySoft. These functions may be accessed from the Options Menu, or often more conveniently via a Quick Command sequence.
The general functions allow display of Time, Date, Braille settings and so on. You could be using the Word processor, or using the Calculator, or reading a menu when you request one of these functions. After display of the requested function you are returned to the place from where you initiated the request.
The Quick Commands typically use the SPACE,BACKSPACE or ENTER key in combination with another letter. For example, FUNCTIONwithT displays the current time.
Not all items on the Options Menu have an associated Quick Command key combination.
Pressing FUNCTION with O anywhere in KeySoft will access the Options Menu. KeySoft displays: "Optionsmenu." The Options Menu can then be reviewed by pressing the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys on the keyboard. The Options Menu comprises a long list of items. Only some of the items are relevant at this point but the complete list is provided so you know what to expect when you read the menu. Where applicable, the equivalent Quick Command is also given.
The Options Menu contains the following items:
Date;	FUNCTIONwithD
Time Options;	For Time press FUNCTIONwithT
	For Stopwatch press FUNCTIONwithW
Grade for Braille entry and Keyboard type;
Braille display options;
Keyboard settings;	FUNCTIONwithK
Review voice;	FUNCTIONwithR
Connectivity;
Visual display;
Next appointment;	FUNCTIONwithN
Power and battery status;
User Guide;	READwithHELP
Insertion;	FUNCTIONwithA
Spell. Repeat and spell;	FUNCTIONwithL
Hear punctuation. Repeat with maximum punctuation;	FUNCTIONwithP
Change task;	FunctionwithS
Front thumb keys On/Off;
and finally the speech settings, a list of 6 items that tell you how to adjust the volume, speed and pitch of KeySoft's speech.
The "Insertion" item is displayed only when it is appropriate to insert such things as the date or time such as in KeyWord.
To select an item, move through the menu until the required item is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, from anywhere in the Options menu, press the initial letter of your choice. This does not apply to the speech settings, which are discussed in 1.15.4.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch.
We will now deal with some of the more commonly used items in the Options menu. All the functions in the Options Menu are detailed in Chapter 5.


1.15.4.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off.
To turn off the Braille display, hold down the NEXTthumb key, press SPACE, then release both keys. The same key combination turns the Braille display on.
Note that if the Braille display is turned off when speech is off, speech is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
The function to turn the Braille display off is also available from the Options Menu, under Braille Display Options.


1.15.4.2 Turning Speech On or Off.
There are three speech options: Speech On, Speech on Request and Speech Off. If speech is currently on, hold down PREVIOUS, press SPACE, then release both keys to select Speech on Request. KeySoft displays: "Speechonrequest."
To select the next option, Speech Off, press the same key combination again. KeySoft confirms that speech is off by displaying "Speechoff" only on the Braille display. To turn Speech On again, press that key combination again. KeySoft displays: "Speechon."
You are returned to where you started with Speech On.
When the Speech on Request option is selected, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command that is a specific speech command. For example, in KeyWord, the word processor, when you move forward wordbyword using SPACEwithdot5, nothing is spoken. However if you use the dedicated "Speak Word under Cursor" command, READwithK, the word under the cursor is spoken.
Note that if speech is turned off when the Braille is off, the Braille display is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
The function to select Speech On, Speech on Request, or Speech Off is also available from the Options Menu, under Review Voice.


1.15.4.3 Startup Braille and Speech Mode.
The BrailleNote QT may be forced to start in one of three modes when it is switched on. You may choose to start with Braille only, speech only, or both Braille and speech.
This feature is very convenient if, for example, you have previously been using both Braille and speech, but you are now attending a meeting and for privacy you wish to start in the Braille only mode.
To start with speech only, hold down dot2 while powering on.
To start with Braille only, hold down dot3 while powering on.
To start with both Braille and speech, hold down dots23 while powering on.


1.15.4.4 Setting the Keyboard Voice.
The first of these settings determines how KeySoft speaks what you type. Press FUNCTIONwithO, then K for Keyboard. KeySoft displays: "Keyboardvoice?Words."
The options are as follows:
To turn off speech altogether, press F followed by ENTER;
To spell words as they are typed, press Sfollowed by ENTER;
To speak whole words, press Wfollowed by ENTER;
To both spell and speak words, press B followed by ENTER;
Or just press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
The suggested setting is "Words."
You can request help, using HELP for a reminder of these options.
Three further Keyboard settings are then presented relating to your preferred typing Braille grade, alerting of prompts requiring input of computer Braille and whether you wish to use 6 or 8 dot computer Braille. See.
To leave the Keyboard Settings, press ESCAPE.


1.15.4.5 Repeating an Announcement.
As we have already mentioned, you can get KeySoft to say a prompt again by pressing REPEAT if you didn't quite catch it. To repeat the prompt with variables such as file names or folder names spelled out, press FUNCTIONwithL.
To reveal the most detail, you can repeat the last prompt with full punctuation and spaces. To do this, press FUNCTIONwithP.
After either command you are returned to your original place in KeySoft.


1.15.4.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch.
The characteristics of BrailleNote QT's voice can be changed anywhere in KeySoft, as follows:
For higher volume, press FUNCTIONwithPERIOD;
For lower volume, press FUNCTIONwithCOMMA;
For faster speech, press FUNCTIONwithEQUALS;
For slower speech, press FUNCTIONwithDASH;
For higher pitch, press SHIFTwithFUNCTIONwithEQUALS;
For lower pitch, press SHIFTwithFUNCTIONwithDASH.
There are 32 volumes, 16 speeds and 16 pitches, and they change one step at each key press. A reminder of the commands is given in the Options Menu, at the end of the list.


1.15.4.7 Power and Battery Status.
The BrailleNote QT Power & Battery status can be obtained at any time. Press FUNCTIONwithO, then P.
KeySoft displays the battery charge level as a percentage of fully charged, and whether the AC Adapter is On or Off.


1.16 Switching Between Tasks.
KeySoft allows you to move directly from one KeySoft task to another without returning to the Main Menu. You can switch between the Word processor, Scientific Calculator, Planner, Address List, EMail, Book Reader, Browser, Media Player and Terminal for Screen Reader. For example, if you are writing a document and you need an address, you can switch directly to the Address List, look up the address, and then return to the Word processor. You are placed back at the same point in your document.
The following hot keys are available for switching tasks:
To select the Word processor press FUNCTIONwith4;
To select the Scientific Calculator press FUNCTIONwith5;
To select the Planner press FUNCTIONwith6;
To select the Address List press FUNCTIONwith7;
To select the Email system press FUNCTIONwith8;
To select the Book Reader press FUNCTIONwith9;
To select the Terminal for Screen Reader press FUNCTIONwithB;
To select the Internet browser, press FUNCTIONwith0(zero);
To select the Media Player, press FUNCTIONwithM.
There is also a Task menu available. To access this, either:
1. Press FUNCTIONwithO for the Options menu then Mfor Move to another task, or
2. PressFunctionwithS.
KeySoft displays: "Taskmenu."
You can make a selection by either:
1. Review the menu items using SPACEorADVANCEand select one by pressingNEXTorENTER. or,
2. Press the initial letter of the task; for example, Wfor Word Processor.
Remember that, if necessary, you can always get back to the Main Menu by pressing MENU.


1.17 Keyboard Assistance.
There are two ways of getting help with keyboard input. The first is available from the Main Menu, and is called "Keyboard Learn." In Keyboard Learn, KeySoft displays the function of the key that you press and also speaks it, but no further action results. It also displays the function of the thumb keys and key commands that are always available. For example, pressing FUNCTIONwithT will give the response displaythetime.
Keyboard Learn is invaluable for familiarizing yourself with the keyboard layout and Quick Commands that are available at any point within KeySoft.
The second mode works in the Word processor, Web browser, Calculator, Planner and Book reader. It is called Announce Key mode, and can be entered by pressing READwithA. In addition to displaying letters and signs, the function of any key or key combination is displayed. For example, in the Word processor, READwithJ displays: "Backoneword," without causing any further action.
Announce Key mode is helpful for learning the commands available in the selected KeySoft application.
You can exit either mode by pressing ESCAPE.


1.18 Saving before Switching off.
Before you switch off your BrailleNote QT, it is good practice to return to the Main Menu first. This ensures your current work is saved. If you don't do this, and subsequently the battery becomes discharged, the current version of your work will be lost. That's fairly unlikely, but it's good insurance for the cost of one keystroke.
If you have a disk drive or electronic storage card, you should consider backing up your work regularly. It's a common thing to do with any computer. It minimizes the amount of data you could lose should a computer or software "crash" occur. You can back up all your working files by using the Back up function in the Utilities menu, as described in 15.1.1 Backing Up.


1.19 Setting Time and Date.
When you first get your BrailleNote QT you should check that the time, date and Time Zone settings are correctly set. By selecting your correct time zone, you can have the BrailleNote QTs clock adjust automatically when you select whether you are in or out of daylight saving time.
If the BrailleNote QTs battery goes completely flat, the system will advise that the time and date need to be set when the machine is restarted.
To display the current day and date, press FUNCTIONwithD.
To display the current time, press FUNCTIONwithT.
These commands are available from any place within KeySoft. If either the date or the time is incorrect you can set new values and have them displayed in your preferred format from the Date and Time Set option in the Utilities Menu.
To set the Date and time, follow this procedure. Remember that online help is available at any point by pressing HELP, and that if you wish to leave a displayed value unchanged, just press ENTER to move onto the next item in the list. You may exit the setup list at any point by pressing ESCAPE.
1. Return to the Main Menu by pressing MENU.
2. Press U to go to the Utilities Menu.
3. Press D to go to the Date and Time set option.
4. Choose your preferred date format. For USA format where the date is in the form month/day/year press S, or for UK format where the date is in the form day/month/year press K. To save your entry, press ENTER.
5. Choose your preferred time format, 12 or 24 hour. For a 12hour clock press A, for a 24hour clock press B then complete your entry by pressing ENTER.
6. Select your Time Zone. To cycle through the list of time zones, press CONTROLwithSPACE.Alternatively press the initial letter. Complete your entry by pressing ENTER.
7. In daylight saving time: Press Yif you are in daylight saving time, or N if you are not, followed by ENTER.
8. Enter the current time. Press HELP to display instructions on how to enter the time in the format you have selected.
9. Enter the current date. Press HELP to display instructions on how to enter the date in the format you have selected.
After setting the time and date you will be returned to the Utilities Menu.


1.20 User Settings.
BrailleNote QT provides many user definable options. As you get to know more about how your BrailleNote QT works, you can change the way it behaves to better suit your personal preferences. Your BrailleNote QT supplier will most probably have set the User settings most appropriate to your needs. The following items will be of principal interest:
Speech; volume, rate, and pitch;
Time and date correctly set, and in preferred format;
Keyboard input voice setting; words, characters, or off;
Review or reading voice settings; punctuation settings, numbers or digits;
Preferred cursor shape on Braille display;
Preferred Braille reading grade;
Braille language; US, UK, or Australian;
Braille grade for keyboard input; grade 1, or 2;
Calculator language Nemeth or UK math;
Computer Braille language; US, or UK;
Computer Braille 6 dot or 8 dot;
thumb key layout;
Spelling checker dictionary language installed;
Address list database installed;
Email database installed.
Some of these items have already been covered in this chapter, but for convenience, Appendix A of the User Guide provides additional assistance and, if appropriate, a reference to the relevant section in the User Guide. The next section explains how to use the Electronic User Guide to read a particular section of the user guide. After reading this next section, you could use the Electronic User Guide to read Appendix A, User settings for the BrailleNote QT.


1.21 User Guide.
The User Guide is built into KeySoft, so that you can look it up any time you want. Using either the Table of Contents or the Index to locate a reference, the User Guide will take you directly to the topic you wish to read.
If you wish to read the User Guide like a book rather than look up specific references, simply open the chapter or appendix in the Book Reader like any other book file. You will find the files in the Manuals folder on your KeySoft System Disk.
Alternatively, the entire User Guide is available in several PC friendly formats on the CDRom that came with your BrailleNote QT. This gives you the option of working through a chapter trying things out on the BrailleNote QT while reading the user guide on a PC, printing or embossing a copy etc.
The rest of this section concentrates on the onboard User Guide, how to access it and how to use it.


1.21.1 Electronic User Guide
The text of this user guide is stored in your BrailleNote QT and is available for reference at any time. It is accessed through the Options Menu, or by the quick command READwithHELP. You can look up a topic in the Table of Contents or Index, and read that section of the user guide. When you are finished with that section, you can return to the Table of Contents or Index or exit the user guide. You are returned to your original place in KeySoft when you exit.
If you have edited your user guide KeyWord Text files in any way (a practice we do not recommend as it can interfere with the table of contents and index functions) it is important to note that the user guide files are loaded on every reset. This means that to save any edited copies, you should first change the file names so the newly loaded copies do not over write them.
To refer to the User Guide press FUNCTION with O for the Options menu, then U for the User Guide.
If this is the very first time you have accessed the Electronic User Guide your BrailleNote QT displays: "LookupTableofContentsorIndex?"
Press Tto select the Table of Contents or Ito select the Index. KeySoft confirms your selection.
If you have accessed the User Guide before, your BrailleNote QT prompts: "Continuereading(reference)?"
where "reference" is the last topic accessed. If you press Yto continue you are returned to that topic. If you press Nyou go to the Table of Contents or Index.
Use the SPACE or BACKSPACE to move through the Table of Contents or Index listing, which is in alphabetical order. Press any letter to jump to the items starting with that letter.
Once the desired item has been found, press ENTER to select it. If the item has subindexes, repeat the selection procedure.
Once you have entered the User Guide at a particular place, the following review commands are available for reading the content:
To read from the start of the previous sentence, press READwithU;
To read from the start of the current sentence, press READwithI;
To read from the start of the next sentence, press READwithO;
To read from the start of the previous paragraph, press READwith7;
To read from the start of the current paragraph, press READwith8
To read from the start of the next paragraph, press READwith9;
To skip back one section, press READwithT;
To advance one section, press READwithB;
To go back to the Table of Contents or Index press BACKSPACE;
To exit the User Guide and return to your original place in KeySoft press ESCAPE.
To continuously read a section of the User Guide using speech, select your starting point from the Table of Contents or Index as discussed above, then press READwithG. To pause reading, press READwithSPACE.
You can issue the review commands while reading is in progress or after it has stopped. If you give a command while reading is in progress, what is currently being read is cut off and reading begins immediately from the new position. This provides a very convenient method of quickly panning through a section of the User Guide. If you are reading continuously, you are able to jump forward or back through the text by sentence or paragraph without halting the continuous reading function.
To read the User Guide continuously from the Braille display, select your starting point and press MENU. To stop the Braille display advancing, press PREVIOUS and NEXT together. You can adjust the rate at which the Braille display advances. Press PREVIOUS to slow down and NEXT to speed up the refresh rate.


1.21.2 Location of User Guide Files.
As an alternative to accessing the Electronic User Guide through its Table of Contents or Index, you can also read the User Guide as a number of KeyWord documents. Each chapter and appendix is a separate KeyWord text document. As of version 5.0 of KeySoft, you may notice that each file name ends with a two letter code such as bb, bq, pk, vb or vq. This identifies the model type  the first letter is b for BrailleNote or v for VoiceNote, the second letter is b for BT, q for QT. The PK files have pk after them. If the code is not correct for your model, contact your distributor.
These files are all stored in a folder called "Manual" on your KeySoft System Disk drive.


1.21.2.1 User Guide Version Check.
There is a simple version check built into the User Guide. Simply access the Index, and select the "Version" entry in the usual way. When you press ENTER it will announce the heading "Version" after which it should say, "ThismanualisfortheBrailleNoteQTusingversionx.xofKeySoft." If the model name or version is not what you expected, contact your distributor.


1.21.2.2 Version
This manual is for the BrailleNote QT using version 6.1 of KeySoft.

1.22 Where to Now.
By now you should have a good basic knowledge of the BrailleNote QT and KeySoft. The entire User Guide is stored in the BrailleNote QT so you can read each chapter at your leisure.
The User Guide can be read using your BrailleNote QT as previously described. A good starting point is to browse through the Table of Contents, as this will provide you with an appreciation of the topics covered in the User Guide. The distributor who sold you your BrailleNote QT can supply this. There is also a folder on the BrailleNote Family CDRom provided with your BrailleNote QT that contains text versions of all the model's user guides, so that you can read it using a PC.
Please read the next chapter, which concerns practical hardware matters like the batteries, port connectors and card slots. To read chapter 2, follow the procedure discussed in the previous section. You will find chapter 2 in the Table of Contents so you can select it from there and start reading.
After Chapter 2, the remainder of the User Guide is all about KeySoft and you can pick and choose what to read. If you are new to KeySoft, you might want to work through Chapter 3, which introduces the basic Word processor functions. You might then want to read Chapter 5, which deals with the functions available via the Options Menu, or Chapter 7 for advanced word processing features. Alternatively, you can read Chapter 8 on the Calculator, Chapter 9 on the Planner, or Chapter 10 on the Address List.
If you are interested in using email or accessing the internet, and/or using the other connectivity options the BrailleNote QT offers, read Chapter 13 on Connectivity, then Chapter 11 on Email, or Chapter 12 on the Web Browser, depending on your interest and requirements.
Chapter 13 describes use of the File and Folder Manager, and the translation of files from Text to Braille and other formats. Chapter 14 covers the Utilities menu, where topics like backing up, restoring files and software upgrades are discussed.
Chapter 16 covers the Media Player.
Chapter 17 provides a convenient listing of all the keyboard commands for the BrailleNote QT. These are categorized under general commands as well as commands for each of the applications of KeySoft.
You might find it tedious to read a User Guide, but we have endeavored to make sure it is full of useful information, and it's surprising what sticks in your memory. When people say, "I didn't know you could do that!" it usually means that they havent read the User Guide.
And remember; please make frequent use of BrailleNote QTs superb Help that you can access at any point by pressing HELP. It's a valuable source of information, whatever part of KeySoft you are using.



2 BrailleNote QT Hardware.
2.1 Charging the Battery.
To charge the battery, simply plug the AC adapter in and the BrailleNote QT looks after the battery charging itself.
If the BrailleNote QT battery is flat and the AC adapter is connected, the battery is fast charged in about 2 hours. Charging takes less time if the battery is only partially discharged. You can charge the battery and run the BrailleNote QT simultaneously although the battery may take longer to charge. You can leave the AC adapter connected indefinitely without any risk of damaging the battery. To connect the AC adapter, locate the power socket on the back of the BrailleNote QT, near the lefthand corner of the case. Insert the plug on the AC adapter cable into the socket, and plug the AC adapter into a wall socket. The BrailleNote QT displays: "ACadapteron.
The message is displayed even if the BrailleNote QT is switched off. If this message is not displayed after a second or two, check that the AC supply is switched on, and that the plug on the end of the AC adapter cord is inserted securely into the BrailleNote QT's power socket.
When the battery is charging, if the AC supply is interrupted, or the AC adapter is disconnected the BrailleNote QT displays: "ACadapteroff.
This message, too, is displayed even if the BrailleNote QT is switched off.
The messages are both spoken and appear on the Braille display, assuming both speech and Braille are on. Of course, if speech is off, the message only appears on the Braille display. If the Braille display is off the message is only spoken.


2.2 AC Adapter and Battery.
The BrailleNote QT can operate from its internal rechargeable battery or from its AC adapter. The length of time you can run the BrailleNote QT from a fully charged battery is typically over 20 hours before it becomes flat. Activities like printing, emailing and communicating using the serial or infrared port increase the drain on the battery. Using the builtin modem also drains the battery more than editing documents. PC cards that draw their power from the BrailleNote QT's battery reduce the available battery life too.
The BrailleNote QT warns you if the battery is getting low. When the battery gauge indicates that the battery is down to 10% full or less the following warning is displayed periodically: "Batteryislow."
If possible, connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery now. You typically have about 2 hours of battery life remaining. If the battery continues to run down and becomes nearly flat, KeySoft displays the following message: "Batteryiscritical."
If this message is displayed you should act within the next 30 seconds or your BrailleNote QT may switch itself off. The time available to switch off may be as little as 30 seconds but it is typically 15 to 20 minutes if you are not using high current accessories. You have two options. You can connect the AC adapter and carry on working indefinitely, or you can save your current work and switch off. To save your work, just return to the Main Menu. If the BrailleNote QT switches itself off, it cannot be switched on again until it is powered from the AC adapter.
Your BrailleNote QT automatically manages its power usage to give you the maximum life from the battery. The hibernate mode is entered after approximately 10 minutes of inactivity. Pressing any key will end the hibernate mode, but it is recommended that you momentarily press the CONTROLkeys to end the hibernate mode. This will avoid the possibility of inserting unwanted characters if a document was open when the unit entered the hibernate mode. You can help by switching off your BrailleNote QT when you are not going to be using it for a while. Remember that you can switch your BrailleNote QT off and on without affecting your work in any way and your BrailleNote QT resumes from where you were when you switched off.


2.3 Checking Power Status.
You can check the stateofcharge of the battery and whether the AC adapter is connected from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing FUNCTIONwithO,thenP.
First, the batterystateofcharge in percent is displayed: Levelcpercent,
where c is the battery's stateofcharge. Then the AC adapter status is displayed: "Adapter(status),"
where "status" is either "on" or "off." After these messages are displayed, you are returned to your original place in KeySoft. To clear the battery status message from the Braille display, press ADVANCE..


2.4 Battery Care.
Like all rechargeable batteries, as the BrailleNote QT battery ages its capacity reduces. If your BrailleNote QT is used every day we expect that the battery will last typically 18 months before the battery's capacity is noticeably lower than it was 18 months before. We recommend that you send the BrailleNote QT back to an authorized BrailleNote QT service center to replace the battery. Replacement batteries are expected to last typically 18 months before they too, need replacing.


2.5 Calibrating the Battery Gauge.
BrailleNote QT incorporates a battery gauge that is originally calibrated at the Factory. For best performance, the gauge needs to be calibrated periodically as the battery ages during its life. Remember that as the battery ages its capacity reduces. When the battery gauge is calibrated it measures the battery capacity. If the battery's capacity is reduced then the battery gauge over estimates the remaining charge in the battery. The most noticeable sign that the battery gauge needs to be calibrated again is if the "batteryislow" warning is closely followed by the "batteryiscritical" warning. There should be a gap of from one to two hours of continuous operation between these warnings. The battery gauge should never need to be calibrated more than once every two months and usually much less frequently.
Note that if the battery goes completely flat, the battery gauge will no longer be accurate, and it will need to be recalibrated.
To calibrate the battery gauge, first fully charge the unit, and then run the BrailleNote QT without the AC adapter until the BrailleNote QT freezes. Next plug in the AC adapter and completely recharge the battery. To assist with this process, a special "battery drain" mode is included, as described in the following section,. As you discharge the battery you need to ignore the battery warnings and continue to run the battery down. It may be convenient to continue using the BrailleNote QT normally but make sure you have saved your work once the "batteryiscritical" warning is given.


2.5.1 Support Information Mode.
You can check the battery and battery gauge characteristics using the Support Information mode. Included is an option to "drain" the battery which assists with recalibration of the battery fuel gauge. To enter the support information mode from anywhere in KeySoft press FUNCTIONwithO, followed by SPACEwithI. You can now select the following options:
1. To find out if the battery gauge has been calibrated and is accurate, press A. For example, if the battery gauge is calibrated KeySoft will prompt: "Gaugeisaccurate."
If the gauge is inaccurate, it means that the battery charge level may not be being reported correctly. Refer to item 6 below for instructions on how to recalibrate the battery gauge. After executing this command you are returned to the Support Information mode.
2. To determine the "Last charge" information for the battery, press B. The reported time indicates the time it took to fully charge the battery after plugging in the AC Adapter. The report is in the form:
Last charge:	234 minutes.
Completed:	Friday, February 9, at 2:47pm.
Started:	Friday, February 9, at 10:53am.
After executing this command you are returned to the Support Information mode.
1. To determine the charge available from the battery, press C. For example, a typical message is: "Nominalavailablecharge16,640."
The higher the value the greater the capacity. After executing this command you are returned to the Support Information mode.
2. To review the last measured discharge count of the battery, press D. The last measured discharge is the learned battery capacity. For example, a typical discharge message is: "Lastmeasureddischarge26,136."
The higher the value the greater the capacity available from the battery when it is fully charged. The factory default value is 33,904, which indicates that the gauge is not calibrated. This could happen for example, if the BrailleNote had been in storage for several weeks and the battery had completely discharged. After executing this command you are returned to the Support Information mode.
3. To review the cell voltage critical warning value, press E. This value cannot be changed. After executing this command you are returned to the Support Information mode.
4. There are two types of battery "drain" mode. These modes are used for flattening the battery in order to recalibrate the battery capacity gauge. To have KeySoft continuously repeat the message, "I'mtalkinguntilmybatterygoesflat.Thisrepetitionisenoughtodrivemecrazy.Howaboutyou?"press F. Alternatively, to drain the battery using the Braille display if your model has one, press X. This causes the rows of dots on the Braille display to pop up and down in turn. To prematurely stop the battery drain mode once it has begun, press ESCAPE.
Follow these steps:
a) Fully charge your BrailleNote QT by leaving the Adapter connected for at least 3 hours. Check by pressing FUNCTIONwithO,thenP, that the capacity is showing 100%.
b) Disconnect the AC Adapter from the BrailleNote QT.
c) To start the "battery drain" mode, place the BrailleNote QT in a place where it won't indeed "driveyoucrazy", and allow it to continue until the unit completely freezes. During this process the BrailleNote QT will first report many times that the "batteryislow", eventually followed by "batteryiscritical". Some time thereafter the unit will freeze. Pressing SPACEwhile the "batterydrain" message is being spoken will announce the time at which the process started, and the elapsed time.
d) Reconnect the AC Adapter, and the BrailleNote QT should restart. The message "ACAdapterOn" should be spoken, followed by the message that the "Batterytestiscompleted".To hear details on the battery test, press SPACE. The time taken to Discharge the battery from its fully charged state is given.
5. To determine the charging status, press S. For example, if the AC adapter is connected, the BrailleNote QT displays: "Fastcharging."If not, BrailleNote QT displays "Discharging."
After executing this command you are returned to the Support Information mode.
6. To display the cell voltage of the battery, press V. For example: "Cellvoltage1.5Volts"
After executing this command you are returned to the Support Information mode.
To return to the place where you selected the Options menu, press ESCAPE.


2.6 Long Term Storage.
If you store a BrailleNote for more than two to three weeks, the battery will become completely flat. If the battery was less than fully charged prior to storing the BrailleNote, the time for the battery to become fully flat will be shorter. This is because BrailleNote's battery self discharges internally and because BrailleNote QT draws a very small amount of current even when it is switched off. The battery gauge will be inaccurate at that point, and if you use this feature, you will need to recalibrate the gauge as described in page 2.5 Calibrating the Battery Gauge.
If you intend to leave the BrailleNote switched off for more than a few days, fully charge the battery beforehand, or leave the AC adapter connected if this is convenient. If you intend to store a BrailleNote for more than two to three weeks without the AC adapter connected, ensure your work is saved by returning to the Main Menu, and fully charge the battery before putting the BrailleNote into storage.
When you take a BrailleNote out of longterm storage, first connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery. Try switching the BrailleNote on. If it does not resume normally, press the Reset switch with a pointed object. The BrailleNote beeps to confirm that it has been reset. Wait a few seconds while the BrailleNote initializes itself. If the battery has gone quite flat, you will be prompted to reset the time and date and so on. Press ENTER several times if you want to leave that for later or refer to Appendix C, which describes the procedure for initializing the BrailleNote.


2.7 Ports.
The BrailleNote QT has a range of ports available  Serial, Parallel, Infrared and modem.


2.7.1 Using the Serial Port.
Reach beyond the keyboard to the back of your BrailleNote QT and investigate the layout of the back panel. There is a recessed panel comprising from the right, a modem jack, female 25 pin parallel port, a card slot and a nine pin male port. This nine pin male port is the serial port.
The serial port can be used to provide a connection to a visual display, PC or other equipment. You can use the serial port to connect to a terminal, an embosser or printer that has a serial interface, a modem or to other computers to import and export documents and files. You can use the BrailleNote QT as a remote speech synthesizer by connecting the serial port to a suitable driver. You can also run ActiveSync on a PC and access your BrailleNote QT through the serial port like an extension of the PC.
Your BrailleNote QT is supplied with a serial cable that has two identical nine pin plugs on each end of the cable. You don't have to identify which is the right end of the cable, either end will do. The connectors can only be plugged in one way. To plug in the connector hold the plug horizontal and push it gently into the socket. If it does not engage turn it through 180 degrees and try again.
The cable supplied is called a "null modem cable." This cable works with most equipment except external modems. A different cable is needed to communicate with a modem and equipment that emulates a modem.
The 9 pin plugs on each end of the serial cable incorporate two locking screws designed to secure the plug when it is plugged in. Use of these screws is recommended to prevent the plug falling out in use. The screws can be tightened and undone by hand. In the usual way, turning them clockwise does them up and turning them anticlockwise undoes them. Do not over tighten the screws; a light force is sufficient to hold the connector.
Don't forget to disconnect the cable when you are done. As a precaution check for anything connected to your BrailleNote QT before transporting it.


2.7.2 Using the Parallel Port.
To the right of the rear panel is a 25 pin female connector. This is the parallel port. It can be used to connect to an embosser or a printer that has a parallel interface. A compatible cable is supplied with your printer. It is convenient to leave one end of the printer cable connected to the printer. The other end can be plugged into the BrailleNote QT when required.
The 25 pin plug is similar to the 9 pin plug but the plug is much longer. It too can only be plugged in one way. To plug in the connector, hold it horizontally and try pushing it gently into the socket. If it does not engage, turn it through 180 degrees and try again.
Use the locking screws to prevent the plug falling out in use. The screws can be tightened and undone by hand. In the usual way, turning them clockwise does them up and turning them anticlockwise undoes them. Do not over tighten the screws; a light force is sufficient to hold the connector.


2.7.3 Using the Infrared Port.
The infrared port is located at the rear of your BrailleNote QT on the right, directly behind the ENTER key. Run your hand across the back of the BrailleNote QT on the extreme right and you will feel a vertical channel. The infrared port communicates though a window that is located in the channel.
The BrailleNote QT's infrared port conforms to the Infrared Data Association specification for infrared communications. This standard is called "IrDA" for short. This is a new type of infrared communications that can work up to a high speed.
The BrailleNote QT's infrared port can be used for printing or for communicating with a remote visual display. You can also run ActiveSync on a PC and access your BrailleNote QT through the Infrared port like an extension of the PC.
Using the infrared port, you can print to a printer equipped with an infrared port. You can also print to a printer that is connected to an IrDA compatible accessory such as the JET EYE printer adapter. This adapter is normally connected between a PC and a printer without an infrared port. Embossing and printing using the infrared port is described in 6.6.6 Embosser Port.
To communicate with a remote visual display using the infrared connection, an IrDA compatible port is needed on the PC. The JET EYE PC is an accessory that provides such a port. It is designed for use in conjunction with a PC or a lap top computer, plugging into a serial port on the host computer. Terminal software running on the PC enables the PC's screen to display output from the infrared port of the BrailleNote QT. This provides a sighted teacher with a text display matching the BrailleNote QT display. Using BrailleNote QT's infrared port to communicate with a remote visual display is described in page 2.11 Using a Visual Display.
IrDA compatible infrared communications work over a distance of up to about three feet (1 meter) for standard power devices and up to at least eight inches (200 millimeters) for low power devices. The BrailleNote QT is a standard power device. The host's and BrailleNote QT's infrared ports must face each other but they do not have to be lined up exactly because the infrared beam is quite wide. After a little experimentation, you will be able to determine the most convenient arrangement of equipment that works reliably.


2.7.4 Using the Modem.
The internal modem can be used for sending and receiving email.
A modem jack is located on the right of the rear panel. Your BrailleNote QT is supplied with a modem cable for connecting BrailleNote QT's modem to a phone line.
If you live in UK, Australia or New Zealand, an adapter that plugs into a standard "BT" type phone jack is also supplied with your BrailleNote QT. The modem cable plugs into the adapter and the adapter plugs into a phone jack.
The modem cable has a phone type plug at either end the cable. Insert one plug into the BrailleNote QT modem jack and the other end into a phone jack. To do this, locate the locking clip on one side of the plug. Orient this side to the bottom of the modem jack, engage the plug in the socket and push the plug home. A latch holds the plug that should hold when the cable is lightly pulled. To unplug, squeeze the clip in towards the plug and pull the cable. The case bottom is scalloped under the modem jack so that you can easily get your fingertip under the clip. When the plug is unclipped it releases freely.
Don't forget to disconnect the cable when you are done. As a precaution check for anything connected to your BrailleNote QT before transporting it.


2.8 Braille Display Care.
Each cell of the Braille display has eight pins. For each pin there is a special crystal that lifts the pin to make a dot, and allows the pin to drop when there is no dot. The pins have to be able to move freely. In normal use dirt unavoidably accumulates on the display and around the touch cursor buttons. To prevent the pins from jamming, the display and touch cursor should be cleaned regularly. Cleaning the Braille display is not straightforward. We recommend that you send the BrailleNote QT back to an authorized BrailleNote QT service center every twelve months to clean the Braille display.
Making sure that your hands are always clean is a good start towards minimizing problems with your Braille display. We suggest that once per week you wipe the surface of the Braille display using a soft damp cloth. The cloth should be squeezed hard to ensure that all excess moisture has been removed. Use only warm water on the cloth.


2.9 PC Cards.
The BrailleNote QT has a slot for plugin PC cards, also known as PCMCIA cards. These cards are about the size of a credit card, only thicker. The PC card slot can be used for a microdrive or PC storage card, or an approved type of wireless card as discussed in 13.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration. To find out what PC card accessories are available or will become available call your BrailleNote QT distributor.
Compact Flash cards can be used in the PC card slot as well as in the dedicated Compact Flash slot in the rear panel, as discussed in the next section. An adapter is available into which you slide the card before inserting it into the slot as described below.
Feel along the righthand edge of the BrailleNote QT and you will find a horizontal slot. The card eject button is located in a recess behind the slot.


2.9.1 General.
The BrailleNote QT has a slot for plugin PC cards, also known as PCMCIA cards. These cards are about the size of a credit card, only thicker. As well as allowing you to use PC cards for extra data storage, the card slot enables accessories compatible with the BrailleNote QT to be added. For example, the SuperDisk drive is a standard disk drive accessory. Instead of a plug, it has a card attached to a cable, and by inserting the card you are effectively plugging in the accessory. To find out what PC card accessories are available or will become available call your BrailleNote QT distributor.
Compact Flash cards can be used in the PC card slot as well as in the dedicated Compact Flash slot in the rear panel, as discussed in the next section. An adapter is available into which you slide the card before inserting it into the slot as described below.
Feel along the righthand edge of the BrailleNote QT and you will find a horizontal slot. The card eject button is located in a recess behind the slot. The PC card slot can be used for an external disk drive, IBM micro drive, ATA memory card or other accessory.


2.9.2 Installing and Uninstalling PC Cards.
PC or PCMCIA cards can be installed only one way. A polarizing key prevents a card from being fully plugged in if it is the wrong way up. A simple strategy for finding the correct orientation is to just try gently plugging it in. If it engages, gently push it home. If it stops with a "clunk" with the card protruding some 10 mm from the slot, take it out, invert it and try again.
You can also identify the correct orientation by touch. The front of the PC card is the short edge on which there are many indentations along its entire length. Hold the front edge away from you. Run your fingers along this edge and just around the corners, where you will find some polarizing ridges. If the card is facing upward, there will be two ridges on the righthand side. The groove between them can be detected with your fingernail. On the left, there will be one ridge. If necessary, turn the card over so that there are two ridges on the right and one on the left.
You could label the PC card once you have identified the correct orientation.
PC cards can be installed with the BrailleNote QT switched on. When you do so the BrailleNote QT displays: "Cardinserted."
To remove a PC card, firmly push the PC card eject button. Remember it is located behind the PC card slot. This disengages the card from its connector and pushes the card out about a quarter of an inch. Always use the eject button even if the card has a cable with a grip. You can now pull the PC card completely out of the slot. If the card is unplugged with the power on, BrailleNote QT displays: "Cardremoved."


2.9.3 Accessing files on the PC Card.
The PC card slot is treated as a drive by KeySoft, where it is listed as Storage card. (Storage card also covers the external disk drive as it plugs into the same slot.) To access files on the PC Card, at any file prompt, go to the drive list and press S for Storage card. Proceed as normal.


2.10 Compact Flash Cards.
A Compact Flash card is 3.5cm by 4cm, about the size of a matchbook. It provides considerable extra data storage, and cards come in a large range of capacities running into several gigabytes.
The BrailleNote QT has a card slot for Compact Flash cards. This slot is located on the back of the unit. As well as allowing you to use Compact Flash cards for extra data storage, the Compact Flash card slot can be used for data storage using a CF memory card, or as a plug for Compact Flash card type accessories. 
Compact Flash cards can be used in the PC card slot as well. An adapter is available into which you slide the Compact Flash card before inserting it into the PC card slot as described in 2.9 PC Cards.


2.10.1 Inserting and Removing Compact Flash Cards.
The Compact Flash card is wider than it is long, so it is important to orient the card correctly, as attempting to plug the shorter side in may damage the pins in the back of the slot. Also, a polarizing key makes the card more difficult to plug in if it is the wrong way up. A simple strategy for finding the correct orientation is to just try gently plugging it in. If it engages, gently push it home. If it resists being inserted, take it out, invert it and try again.
You can also identify most Compact Flash cards' correct orientation by touch. The front of the Compact Flash card is the longer side that has two rows of pin sized indentations. The bottom side of most Compact Flash cards has a slight grip ridge along the opposite edge.
You could label the Compact Flash card once you have identified the correct orientation.
Compact cards can be installed with the BrailleNote QT switched on. When you do so the BrailleNote QT displays: "Cardinserted."
To remove a Compact Flash card, hold the card firmly and pull it out. This is quite tricky if you have big fingers or no fingernails. Most Compact Flash cards have a grip ridge that makes them easier to grasp. If the card is unplugged with the power on, BrailleNote QT displays: "Cardremoved."


2.10.2 Accessing files on the Compact Flash Card.
The Compact Flash card slot is treated as a drive by KeySoft. To access files on the Compact Flash Card, at any file prompt, go to the drive list and press C for compactflash card. Proceed as normal.


2.11 Using a Visual Display.
BrailleNote QT can provide a text output via the serial or infrared ports to a visual display. Sighted observers or teachers can use the visual display screen to view KeySoft's prompts and help messages, and your text if you are typing a document. The visual display can be a terminal or a PC, laptop or handheld computer running terminal emulation software. The terminal or terminal emulation software must emulate a DEC VT100 or an ANSI terminal.
For PC's running Windows, "HyperTerminal" is provided as part of the communications accessories and can be used as the terminal software. To facilitate the use of HyperTerminal as the remote Visual Display for the BrailleNote QT, a program shortcut is provided on the "Software for BrailleNote Family CD" supplied as part of the BrailleNote QT package.


2.11.1 Connecting a Remote Visual Display to the Serial Port.
In the following discussion when we refer to a terminal, we mean either a dedicated terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software.
The following procedure might require the help of a technician if the terminal is unfamiliar to you. The procedure involves connecting the BrailleNote QT to the terminal using a cable and setting up the terminal to communicate at a certain speed and format. This can be done manually for some terminals. Or if the terminal is intelligent, done by the terminal itself as it automatically detects the serial speed and format. The necessary settings are:
bit rate: 38400 bps.
parity: none.
data bits: 8.
stop bits: 1.
1. To connect BrailleNote QT's serial port to a terminal, first plug one end of the serial communications cable into the serial port as described in 2.7.1 Using the Serial Port.
2. Plug the other end of the cable into a mating socket on the terminal. If the terminal has a 25 pin D type connector instead, use the 9 pin to 25 pin adapter. Ensure the terminal is switched on.
3. Finally, direct the BrailleNote QT to drive the serial port by selecting the remote visual display output as described in 2.11.3 Turning the Visual Display On and Off below. Now, when the BrailleNote QT displays something such as a prompt the terminal should also display the corresponding prompt. If the terminal responds when the connected BrailleNote QT displays something but the terminal's display is not intelligible then the speed and/or format are probably not right. Correct the settings and retry.


2.11.2 Connecting a Remote Visual Display using the Infrared Port.
A suitable remote visual display for use with the infrared port is either a portable computer or a PC equipped with an IrDA port. Although there are many IrDA devices available, they are not all compatible. Check first that the computer has an IrDA compatible port.
The following procedure might require the help of a technician if the equipment is unfamiliar to you. First set up the terminal software on the computer to receive its input from its infrared port. Next, position the computer so the infrared port on the BrailleNote QT is facing the infrared port on the remote display device. Finally, direct the BrailleNote QT to send display output to the infrared port as described in 2.11.3 Turning the Visual Display On and Off.


2.11.3 Turning the Visual Display On and Off.
The last step towards providing a visual display is to have your BrailleNote QT send text to the serial or infrared outputs. Press FUNCTIONwithO, then V for Visual display. KeySoft displays: "Visualdisplay,Currentlyoff."
The options are:
To turn the visual display ON press N then ENTER;
To send the visual display to the Serial port press Sthen ENTER;
To send the visual display to the Infrared port press I then ENTER;
Or just press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
To turn the visual display off again after use, press F for OFF then ENTER.
Use the serial port if you are using a standard computer terminal or a PC running a terminal emulator program. Use the infrared port if you are using a desktop or hand held PC with an infrared port and running a terminal emulator program.


2.12 Braille Terminal for Screen Reader.
BrailleNote can act like a remote Braille line or terminal. You can then run a screen reader, for example Window Eyes, JAWS, or HAL on a desktop PC, using the BrailleNote QT as its Braille display.
The serial communications or null modem cable provided with your BrailleNote QT should be used to connect the PC to your BrailleNote QT. If your PC's serial port has a 25 pin connector you will need to use the 9 pin to 25 pin adapter also provided. Plug the cable into the serial port on the rear of BrailleNote QT as described in 2.7.1 Using the Serial Port. Plug the other end into a serial port on your PC.
To access the Braille Terminal, either go to the Main Menu and press T, or from anywhere, press FUNCTIONwithB. KeySoft displays: "BrailleTerminal."
The BrailleNote QT now acts as a Braille display connected to the serial port of the desktop PC. You are able to run a screen reader from the desktop keyboard, and BrailleNote QT displays text on its display. Refer to your screen reader documentation for details of how the screen reader interacts with the BrailleNote QT. The screen reader will have an associated driver, and maybe other configuration files, that determine the function of the BrailleNote QT keyboard when it is being used as a Braille display.
BrailleNote QT cannot be used for its normal functions while it is acting as a remote Braille display, however, you can use the "Change Task" option to temporarily leave the Braille Terminal. For example, during a screen reading session, you may wish to temporarily switch to the Planner to add an appointment, and then switch back to using the Braille Terminal mode. To exit the Terminal for Screen Reader mode, press ESCAPE and you are returned to the Main Menu.
You should plug in the AC adapter if you intend to use your BrailleNote QT as a remote display for an extended period.


2.13 Remote Synthesizer.
Your BrailleNote QT can act like a Keynote Gold Stand Alone speech synthesizer. You can then run a screen reader on a desktop PC, using your BrailleNote QT as its synthesizer.
You must connect your BrailleNote QT to your PC as described for the Braille Terminal in 2.12 Braille Terminal for Screen Reader.
On your BrailleNote QT, at the Main Menu, press R. KeySoft displays: "Remotesynthesizerready."
The BrailleNote QT now acts as a Keynote Stand Alone synthesizer.
On the Braille display, the message "Remotesynthesizerready" will remain while the BrailleNote QT is being used in this mode.
BrailleNote QT cannot be used for its normal functions while it is acting as a synthesizer. To exit the Remote Synthesizer mode, press ESCAPE and you are returned to the KeySoft Main Menu. You should plug in the AC adapter if you intend to use your BrailleNote QT as a remote synthesizer for an extended period.


2.14 General Care.
Apart from recalibrating the battery gauge and cleaning the case, the BrailleNote QT needs no special maintenance. The internal battery should last typically 18 months before needing replacement and this must be done by an authorized service agent. Keep beverages like tea and coffee away from the BrailleNote QT. Periodically wipe the case down with a warm damp cloth. Don't use any cleaning compounds.



3 Word Processor.
This chapter introduces the basics of KeyWord, the word processor part of KeySoft, and describes how to create, read and edit a document. Advanced aspects of KeyWord, including creating documents with more complex formats, and quickly making extensive changes to a document, are covered in Chapter 7.
In the following discussion, the general terms "announcements," "prompts" and "reading" apply to any of the outputs available in the BrailleNote family of products. If your model is a VoiceNote, they refer to audio output only. For BrailleNote models, they can refer to either the Braille display, the audio output, or both.


3.1 What is a Word Processor.
A word processor is like a sophisticated Braille writer or typewriter. The difference is that you do not have to get the document right first time. You can add, delete and change things to your heart's content, and all the time your work is stored in BrailleNote QT's memory. You only need emboss or print your document when you are entirely satisfied with it.
There are other advantages too. You can make changes at a later date, and you can keep all the various versions. It's easy to make copies of documents, and filing and retrieving is much simpler than with hard copy.
Besides writing documents, KeyWord is useful just for reading documents such as emailed documents that have originated elsewhere. These can be read directly without translating them to Braille.


3.2 Text and Braille.
When you start to compose a document, KeyWord assumes that you want to do it in text, so the layout and format are for a print page, suitable for printing directly. This doesn't mean that you are committed to a text document, however. You can send it to an embosser and KeySoft automatically translates it into a suitable format.
Alternatively, you have the option of creating a Braille document directly, with a layout and format for a Braille page. A Braille document requires the use of the FDS and JKL keys to input the Braille characters, which is discussed in 7.16.1 Creating a Braille Document. A Braille document may be embossed directly or printed using automatic BrailletoText translation.
Unlike some other word processors, KeyWord allows you to work with the layout of a document as it will be printed or embossed. This means that you are working with the actual layout while you are editing, and you do not have to make allowances for any effects of formatting commands.
KeyWord allows you to format a document for printing and independently format the same document for embossing. The two sets of formatting controls are independent. Consequently the layout of a document, either text or Braille, can be precisely controlled without making changes between printing and embossing. The document remains unchanged when you send it to a printer or embosser.


3.3 The KeyWord Menu.
To select the word processing functions, start from the Main Menu and press SPACE repeatedly until "Wordprocessor" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, just press W. If you have the Braille display on, you can also use the ADVANCE thumb key to step through the menu and the NEXT thumb key to select an item. KeySoft displays: "KeyWordMenu."
Press SPACEto display the first item in the KeyWord Menu, which is: "Createadocument."
As the prompt suggests, you use this option when you want to create a new document. Press SPACE again, and KeySoft displays the second item, which is: "Openadocument."
You use the "Open" option to read an existing document, or to make changes to one.


3.4 Documents Folders and Drives.
3.4.1 Documents.
Documents are the most common type of file you will use on the BrailleNote QT. You must give each document a unique name enabling KeySoft to distinguish one document from another. For example, when you use KeyWord to write a letter, that letter is stored as a document. Every document name should indicate what type of information it contains. A document name can be up to 250 characters long, including spaces. It cannot contain the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > |


3.4.2 Folders.
When you have been using your BrailleNote QT for a while you could very easily accumulate several hundred documents, and it could become tedious to find any particular one. To make life easier, documents can be organized into groups called "Folders." Initially, there are folders named "General," and "My Books," together with a number of others which KeySoft uses. Besides these, you can create as many new folders as you wish.
If you have a lot of files to organize and are comfortable with the concept, you might want to create a directory structure of folders, where there is more than one layer of folders. Details about how to do this and all other aspects of folder and file management are covered in Chapter 13.
Folders can contain both Braille and text documents. Folder names can be up to 250 characters long, and can consist of any Braille signs except those for the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > |


3.4.3 Drives.
Documents can be stored by different pieces of hardware in the BrailleNote QT, called disk drives, or just drives. BrailleNote QT incorporates a type of memory called flash memory. The associated drive is referred to as a Flash Disk. It provides fast, secure storage, retaining its contents even if the battery is flat. It is the memory you normally use to save your documents. You can copy, rename, erase or edit and resave documents to the Flash Disk.
Another drive is the KeySoft System Disk. This drive stores information installed in the factory. This includes the main operating software, User Guide, and a sample book. Information installed at the Factory is retained even if the battery goes flat, but user information stored in the KeySoft System Disk will be lost. It is therefore not recommended that you save documents in the KeySoft System Disk, but you can open documents like the sample book and the BrailleNote QT user guide that are stored in it. If you do save documents in the KeySoft System Disk, be aware that they will be lost if the battery goes flat or you do a Reset with JKLkeys held down.
You can also add external drives to the BrailleNote QT.


3.4.4 Changing the Current Drive.
There is a way of selecting a drive in KeySoft generally, which is not restricted to the KeyWord. If you are at a prompt for a filename or folder name, and you have not had the opportunity to select a drive, then press BACKSPACE. KeySoft displays: "Drive?(Lastdriveused)."
To step through the list of available drives press SPACE. The list comprises the Flash Disk and KeySoft System Disk, and if in use, the Compact Flash card and/or Storage card and Network. To select a drive, either step through the list of available drives press SPACEorADVANCEthen press NEXTorENTER,or just type the first letter of the drive name.


3.5 Opening a Document. Q
Several documents are provided with KeySoft. If you want to read one of them, how do you select it? From the KeyWord menu, select "Open a document." KeyWord displays:
"PressENTERforFoldername?(name),"
where the word "name" between the brackets is really the name of the last folder used. 
To select a document you must first select the appropriate folder. There are three different methods of doing this:
1. To select the offered folder, just press ENTER. This is the folder that was last used. 
2. To look through the list of available folders, press SPACE or DOWNARROW repeatedly. When the name of the folder you require is displayed, select it by pressing ENTER. You can move back along the list, by pressing BACKSPACE or UPARROW repeatedly. 
While scanning the list you can quickly relocate to an alphabetical position in the list by pressing a letter. For example, pressing T puts you at the beginning of the list of folders starting with T. If you keep on pressing T, you cycle through all the names starting with that letter. 
3. Type the name of the folder you require, and press ENTER. With this method, remember that you have to type the name exactly or it will not work. 
You can change the current drive by pressing BACKSPACE or CONTROLwithD at the "Foldername?" prompt. The Flash Disk is assumed here. If another drive was previously selected, a drive prompt is given as described in above. 
When you have selected a folder, KeyWord asks:
"Documenttoopen?(name),"
where the word "name" between the brackets is really the name of the last document you accessed. 
Just like folder selection, the same three methods are available for selecting a document. Select the offered document by just pressing ENTER, or review the list of documents by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select a document by pressing ENTER, or type the document name and press ENTER. 
This selection procedure is significant because it is general throughout KeySoft, and is not restricted to just opening a document. 
Whether you use the SPACE or DOWNARROW key to scan through a list of folders or documents is a matter of personal preference. 
Similarly, you may use either the BACKSPACE or UPARROW key to move back through a list. 
If you are opening an ASCII text file, or a plain Braille document you will be prompted to review the options associated with the opening and subsequent saving of the document. Section discusses the options given when opening such documents. 

3.6 Naming a Document. Q
In the next section we talk about creating a document, but first we discuss names. Each document must have a unique, meaningful name so that it can be stored and later retrieved by specifying its name. You can use whatever name you like, with up to 250 characters and spaces. It cannot contain the following characters:
\ / : * ? " < > |
If you have several documents on a similar subject, you may find it helpful to put the common part of the name first. For example, you might have:
"Club minutes, January,"
"Club minutes, February,"
and so on. These document names would be grouped together alphabetically for easy location. If the months are put first, the documents are scattered through the list of documents.
Documents can be grouped into folders to make them easier to find. As an example, the documents just mentioned might all be put into a folder called "Club minutes 2001." The rules for naming a folder are the same as for naming a document.
Some characters are reserved and you may not use them in a document name. They are: \ / : " < > | * and ?


3.7 Creating a Document. BQ
We now create a trial document. From the Main Menu, select the Word Processor option. From the KeyWord menu select "Create a document." KeySoft displays: "Foldername?General."
The General folder is fine; so press ENTER to accept KeySoft's suggestion. You are then asked: "Documenttocreate?"
Type in the name: "Sample," with or without a capital S as you wish, and press ENTER. KeySoft displays: "TopofDocument.Blank."
You are now at the top lefthand corner of an empty text document.
Without worrying about mistakes, type half a dozen sentences. Each word is spoken only when you have pressed the space bar to complete the word. You can change the Keyboard Voice so that KeySoft speaks each letter as it is pressed, or both words and letters. How to change the Keyboard Voice was discussed in 1.15.4.4 Setting the Keyboard Voice.
You may also notice that you can type indefinitely without worrying about the right margin. This is because KeyWord automatically starts a new line if it cannot fit another word onto the current line. This process is known as word wrapping.
Start a new paragraph by pressing ENTER to start a new line, and type a few more sentences.
When you have finished typing, press ESCAPE. Your document is saved, and you are returned to the KeyWord menu.


3.8 Reading a Document.
We now discuss the various commands for reading a document. We recommend you open your "Sample" document, or the "DemonstrationDocument" that comes with KeySoft, so that you can practice using the reading commands. The "Demonstration Document" is found in the "General" folder. Open the document as explained in 3.5 Opening a Document. Q.
Reviewing the document by reading the Braille display is, of course, quite different from listening to the document so these two methods are discussed separately below. First we discuss reviewing using the Braille display.
Note: If you are ever unsure which document you are reading, press READwithCONTROLwithI. This will display the name of the document.


3.8.1 Reading on the Braille Display.
You can read through the document up to eighteen or thirtytwo symbols at a time. This depends on the width of the Braille display of your BrailleNote QT and the number of whole words that fit on the display. KeySoft avoids breaking the last word by leaving the last few cells blank.
The Braille display provides a window into the document. You can step this window forwards or backwards through the document using the thumb keys. ADVANCE steps forward one window and BACK steps back a window. After reading across the display press ADVANCE to display the next window.
Repeat the procedure to read through the document. You can go back if necessary by pressing BACK. You can also move the display to the left or right a word at a time. To move the display back a word in the document, press PREVIOUS with BACK at the same time. To move the display forward a word, press PREVIOUS with ADVANCE.
The function of the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys is defined in the Braille Display Options. For information on how to change the setting, refer to 5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next thumb Keys.
The default setting is Up and Down, and using this setting PREVIOUS steps directly up and NEXT steps directly down where the document has text organized in columns or tables. When text is arranged in sentences the cursor moves to the same place in the line directly above or below.
The function of PREVIOUS and NEXT can also be set to move back or forward by sentence or paragraph. By changing the cursor movement mode within the document, these thumb keys commands move by line rather than sentence, and section rather than paragraph. Cursor movement modes are discussed in 3.10.3 Cursor Movement Modes.
To return to the top of the document, press READwithT. KeySoft displays a window of text starting at the very first symbol in the document.
To jump directly to the end of the document, press READwithB. KeySoft displays a window of text ending with the last symbol in the document.
Experiment with the thumb to become familiar. Try reading your "sample" document or the "Demonstration Document" in this way.
You can set your BrailleNote QT to automatically advance the display without you having to press ADVANCE all the time. Each Braille window is displayed for a time before the next window is displayed. You can set the speed to suit your particular preference. To start the automatic advance press READwithSHIFTwithG. Press NEXT to speed up and PREVIOUS to slow down the display rate. You can stop by pressing PREVIOUSandNEXT or READwithSPACE simultaneously. Restart by pressing READwithSHIFTwithG again.


3.8.2 Listening to a Document.
When you are reading sentences or paragraphs, you may be simply listening to the text, or checking it in detail for errors. You can choose to hear the amount of detail you require by setting the punctuation level. You may also choose whether numbers are spoken as words or as digits.
You use the keyboard to enter commands when listening to BrailleNote QT's speech. To listen to a document without stopping, press READwithG, for "Go." KeySoft continues reading to the end of the document unless you stop by pressing READwithSPACE. You can start and stop as you wish with these two commands.
To return to the top of the document, press READwithT. KeySoft says: "Topofdocument."and announces the first word of the document.
To jump directly to the end of the document, press READwithB.
Experiment with the Go, Stop, Beginning and End commands until you are happy that you understand their effects.

There are several other important commands for moving around the text. These additional commands are arranged in groups of three on each row of the keyboard centered on the comma,K,I and 8 column of keys. These are all used in conjunction with the READ key.
For example, try the commands for reading characters:
To move back a character and read it,	press READwithM;
To read the current character, 	press READwithcomma;
To move forward a character and read it, 	press READwithperiod.
This convention also applies to reading whole words, as follows:
To move back a word and read it, 	press READwithJ;
To read the current word, 	press READwithK;
To move forward a word and read it, 	press READwithL.
You may be able to guess the next triplet of commands:
To move back a sentence and read it, 	press READwithU;
To read the current sentence, 	press READwithI;
To move forward a sentence and read it, 	press READwithO.
A similar convention applies for previous, current, and next paragraphs:
To move back a paragraph and read it, 	press READwith7;
To read the current paragraph, 	press READwith8;
To move forward a paragraph and read it, 	press READwith9.
You can follow a sentence or paragraph read command with another sentence or paragraph read command to immediately change the prose being read.
Try reading your "Sample" document or the "Demonstration Document" with these commands. You can refresh your memory by pressing HELP, and opening the "Review Commands" list. Alternatively you can enter the Announce Key mode by pressing READwithA and practice the review keystrokes.
When using several review commands one after the other, you do not have to wait for speech to finish, nor do you have to release the READ key after each command. Here is an example where we move back several words and then move forward a character at a time. First press, and hold down, the READ key. Now, with the READ key held down, tap J several times, to move back several words. With the READ key still down, tap PERIOD several times to move forward several characters. Finally release the READ key. The CONTROL key operates in the same way when it is used for deleting and formatting text as described later. You will find this feature very convenient to use.


3.8.3 Review Voice.
The Review Voice settings determine when KeySoft speaks and how much detail KeySoft includes when reading. When you hold down the PREVIOUS thumb key, press SPACE and release both keys, KeySoft displays the current Review Voice. The options are;Speech On, Speech On Request, and Speech Off.
The Review Voice settings can also be accessed by pressing FUNCTION with O then R, anywhere in KeySoft. KeySoft might prompt: "Speech?Currentlyon."
The options are as follows:
To have speech and sounds on, press N for ON.
To have speech on Request, press R.
To turn off speech and all sounds except alarms, press F for OFF.
When the Speech on Request option is selected, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command that is a specific speech command. For example, in KeyWord, the word processor, when you move forward word by word using READwithL, nothing is spoken. However if you use the dedicated "Speak Word under Cursor" command, READwithK, the word under the cursor is spoken.
After selecting the speech setting above, or pressing ENTER to leave the current level unchanged, KeySoft displays: "Punctuationlevel?(number)."
where the word "number" shown in brackets is really an actual number from 1 to 5. At level 1, no punctuation is announced. At level 5, all characters are spelt out, along with all punctuation. The default setting is 2. The intermediate levels are described in 5.6.3 Punctuation level. This setting applies whenever you are editing or reviewing documents or text.
To leave the setting unchanged, press ENTER. To select a particular punctuation level, press a number from 1 to 5, then press ENTER.
KeySoft then prompts: "NumberFormat?(Words)."
where the word shown in brackets is really the currently selected option either "Words" or "Digits."The options are W, for numbers spoken as words, or D, for numbers spoken digit by digit. If you select the word format, the number 1942 is spoken as nineteenfortytwo, since it is assumed to be a date. The sequence $25.15 is spoken as twentyfivedollarsandfifteencents.
If you select the digits option, the number 1942 is spoken digit by digit. The choice is a matter of personal preference.
To leave a setting unchanged, just press ENTER, or press W or D for the option you prefer, followed by ENTER. You are returned to the point at which you selected the Review Voice settings.


3.8.4 Identifying Indistinctly Spoken Characters.
When you read a character by pressing READwithCOMMA, it is sometimes difficult to distinguish between letters that sound similar. If you press READwithCOMMA, twice, KeySoft expands the current character into its "military call sign", for example A  Alpha, B  Bravo, etc.


3.8.5 Spelling Out a Word.
If you press READwithCOMMA, twice, KeySoft spells the current word.
In a Braille document three presses of READwithCOMMA causes KeySoft to spell a translated version of the word. If the word in question contains one or more grade 2 contractions, those contractions are expanded to their equivalent characters and the expanded word is spelt out. For example, the word "time" is spelled as "dot5T" on the second press but "time" on the third press.


3.9 Review Commands.
The following discussion is applicable when reading the Braille display and when listening to a document.


3.9.1 Moving to Either End of a Line.
You can position to the start of the current line by pressing READwithH. To move to one position past the last word in the line, press READwithSemicolon.


3.9.2 Selecting ReviewOnly Mode.
If you are reading a document that you don't wish to alter, you can avoid having to press READ with all the reading commands. To enter this ReviewOnly Mode, press READwithX.
You can then use all the reading commands without needing to press READ. For example, to read the current word, just press K. This mode continues until you press READwithX again or exit the word processor.


3.10 The Cursor.
The cursor is an important concept because many KeyWord commands use the cursor as a reference to determine where to apply the command. It is also very important to understand exactly where the cursor is in your document so that your changes occur as you intend. Otherwise you may find the changes you make are wrong.
The cursor is a pointer to a single character in a document. The cursor is normally indicated on the Braille display as two dots below the usual six dot Braille cell; dots7and8, This is the factory setting form of the cursor. To find out how to change the form of the cursor, refer to page 5.4 Braille Display Options. When you are using speech you can tell which character the cursor is on by pressingREADwithCOMMA. You can use the read current word, sentence and paragraph commands to determine the context of the cursor.
Editing takes effect at the cursor position. Whether you are using the Braille display or listening to the voice, if you want to edit the document, you must position the cursor at the point you want the change to start. The cursor indicates the position in the document where the next character will appear when it is typed. The character is inserted at the cursor position and everything to the right, including the cursor, is shifted one character to the right to make room. Pressing BACKSPACE deletes the character immediately to the left of the cursor, and everything to the right of the cursor is moved one character to the left to fill the vacated space.


3.10.1 Using the Touch Cursor.
Remember that the buttons immediately behind each cell of the Braille display comprise the touch cursor. To position the cursor at a particular cell you only have to press the cursor button associated with that cell. This is convenient to start editing at that point. First find the Braille cell in the Braille display where you want to start editing. Now move your finger directly above that cell and away from yourself until you feel a vertical ridge that curves upwards slightly. Press this and you notice a tactile action that confirms your press. Read the cell again. You find that the cursor is now positioned at the cell because dots7and8 are displayed, assuming that you are using the standard cursor form. It is as simple as that.


3.10.2 Displaying the Cursor.
Having the cursor always displayed on the Braille display can make reading awkward, but it is needed for editing. KeySoft provides several Braille display modes to suit the situation. When you first enter KeyWord, Automatic mode is the default. You will probably use this mode most of the time when you are typing and/or proofreading. Here the cursor is turned on automatically when you are editing and turned off when you are reading. Reading with the ADVANCE and BACK thumb keys leaves the cursor position unchanged so that you can read the context without losing your place.
You can always bring the cursor to a particular cell in any of the following ways:
Press the touch cursor directly behind the cell;
Press READwithCOMMA to read the current character or READwithK to read the current word;
Bring the cursor to the first cell of the display by pressing BACK and ADVANCEtogether.
Some format indicators are displayed only if the cursor is on the indicator, others are displayed always. Format indicators are discussed later in 3.12 Format Indicators.


3.10.3 Cursor Movement Modes.
KeySoft has a range of specific moving commands designed to make moving around a document quick and accurate. These were listed in 3.8.2 Listening to a Document. When you are reading text organized in sentences and paragraphs, then commands to move the cursor by sentence or paragraph are very useful. For example:
READwithO moves the cursor to the beginning of the next sentence;
READwith9 moves the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph.
However when working with poetry or lists, it would be more convenient to move by a line at a time than by sentence. To allow the most efficient cursor movement for the text you are working with, KeySoft provides 3 cursor movement modes; sentence and paragraph, line and sentence, and column. When you change the cursor movement mode, the moving commands themselves don't change, just the way in which they direct the cursor to move around the text.
To change the cursor movement mode while in a document, press READwithS repeatedly, until you get to the one you want. These affect the operation of the READwithU,READwithO,READwith7and READwith9 reading commands. They also affect what is spoken by these commands and by the CONTROLwith8and CONTROLwithIcommands.
The default cursor movement mode is Sentence and Paragraph. When in Line and Sentence Mode:
READwithO reads the next line; READwith7 reads the next section. Likewise, READwithUreads the previous line and READwith7reads the previous section.
In Line Mode, the word "section" has a specific meaning. The Current Section starts at the last blank line before the cursor, and continues until the first blank line after the cursor. Similarly, the Next Sectionstarts at the first blank line after the cursor, and continues until the following blank line. Line Mode is useful when you are concerned with the layout of the document. Among other purposes, it's a good way of checking for blank lines.
The third Reading Mode is called Column Mode, and acts as follows:
READwithOmoves the cursor down a line but keeping it in the same column. It reads the current word on this line;
READwith9, reads the next section.
Column Mode is effective for reviewing text that is laid out in a table. It allows you to move up or down a column in a table, reading entries one at a time.
Although we have only given two examples, the current cursor movement mode affects all reading commands that relate to sentences and paragraphs. This is also true for deletion commands. For instance, in Sentence and Paragraph mode, CONTROLwithI deletes to the end of the sentence, but in Line Mode it deletes to the end of the line. The cursor movement mode also affects the Quick Mark commands in the Block Menu.


3.11 Braille Display Modes.
In KeyWord you use the Braille display for three purposes:
Reading. For example, your own notes, or a document someone has given or sent you, or an email. You are interested in just reading the text as efficiently as possible. You are not interested in how the author has laid out the text as long as you can tell where paragraphs begin. You definitely don't want a cursor getting in the way of your reading.
Editing and proofreading. Here you need to move the cursor around the document and read all detailed formatting information.
Checking the layout for printing or embossing. You want to check what the margins, indents, tabs, centering, and so on, will actually be like before you convert your document to a format that can be embossed or printed. For example, when editing, a tab appears as a special marker. This is so that you know it is a tab rather than just several spaces. In layout mode the symbol disappears and the display shows how the tab will appear on paper.
To allow you to use the Braille display efficiently for each of these purposes, KeyWord has four Braille display modes. You can check which mode you are in and change the mode using the Braille Display Options in the Options menu. Alternatively you can check or change the mode by pressing the PREVIOUSandNEXTthumb keys together. The first press displays the current mode; subsequent presses cycle through the modes.


3.11.1 Automatic Mode.
Automatic mode is the default setting for KeyWord. This is a combination of the reading and editing modes and you will probably use this mode most of the time when you are typing and/or proof reading. Here the cursor is turned on automatically when you are editing and turned off when you are reading. Reading with ADVANCE and BACK leaves the cursor position unchanged so that you can read the context without losing your place. You can always bring the cursor to a particular position by using the touch cursor or bring the cursor to the first cell of the display by pressing BACKandADVANCE together. Detailed information such as format indicators are displayed only if the cursor is on the indicator.


3.11.2 Reading Mode.
Use this mode for straight reading. In this mode the cursor is never displayed but always resides on the leftmost cell of the display. The only formatting indicated is what is necessary for reading, such as new line indicators and tabs. The format indicator for displaying new lines and tabs is by default based on those recommended by the Braille Authority of North America. If desired you may change the method by which new lines are indicated. This is covered in more detail in 3.12.3 New Line Indicator.


3.11.3 Editing Mode.
In this mode the cursor is always on and all formatting information is displayed.


3.11.4 Layout Mode.
In this mode the document is laid out on the Braille display in the same way as it will appear on paper when it is printed, in the case of text documents, or embossed, in the case of Braille documents. Each line starts with a Braille format indicator, $p, $f, or $l to show whether it is the first line of a page, paragraph, etc. The line is then shown complete with margins, indents, etc., and ends with another Braille format indicator. The display is not word wrapped and does not wrap around lines. Each press of ADVANCE or BACK moves the display by exactly one display width along the line or starts a new line. The NEXT and PREVIOUS thumb keys move the display up and down.


3.12 Format Indicators.
To tell you how a document is formatted, KeySoft places special format indicators at particular points in a document. These format indicators are both spoken and displayed on the Braille display. You may have encountered a number of special groups of symbols on the Braille display when you were reviewing your "Sample" document. They tell you how the document is formatted. When displaying format indicators KeySoft follows the guidelines set for literary Braille format established by the Braille Authority of North America.
When using speech, format indicators are identified by their names. If the cursor is positioned over an indicator, the name of the indicator is displayed. On the Braille display, if the cursor is positioned under a format indicator, it appears under each of the characters of the format indicator.


3.12.1 Common Indicators.
Format indicators are groups of symbols that always start with a computer Braille dollar sign, $. In US computer Braille this is dots1246 which is the same as the grade 2 "ed" contraction. In UK computer Braille it is dots456.There is always a space before the $ and another space after the group of symbols. The symbol or symbols following the $ determine what the format indicator is showing.
For example, the new line indicator, which usually indicates the end of a paragraph, is a space followed by the dollar sign, followed by the letter p, and terminated by a space.
Common format indicators are:
LINE BREAK: KeySoft automatically started a new line because there wasn't any more room on the current line. A line break indicator is shown as the dollar sign followed by the letter l, $l.KeySoft automatically word wraps meaning that it starts a new line if it runs out of room on the current line. A line break indicator is inserted into the text showing you where a new line is started. The line break indicator is announced as "linebreak".
NEW LINE: A new line was started by pressing ENTER. A new line is shown as the dollar sign followed by the letter p, $p. Often a new line indicator marks the beginning of a new paragraph. The new line indicator is announced as "newline".
PAGE BREAK: KeySoft started a new page because the previous page was full in much the same way that word wrap starts a new line when the previous line is full. The page break indicator always appears in conjunction with a line break or new line indicator in a document and is indicated by the addition of an f for new form after the $l or $p indicators. For example, $lf or $pf. The page break indicator is announced as "pagebreak."The position of a page break varies as you add or delete lines of text.
NEW PAGE: The start of a new page is forced by pressing CONTROLwithN. The new page indicator is shown in Braille as the dollar sign followed by the letter f for form, $f. The new page indicator is announced as "newpage."
Don't forget that all of the indicators have a space before them and after them.
The positions of block markers, place markers and a range of other formatting markers described in this chapter and in Chapter 7, are also indicated in a document. The full set of format indicators used by KeyWord is below. If you don't recognize all of them or what they do, don't worry as they are all mentioned in context elsewhere in the user guide.

Line Break:	$l.
New Line:	$p.
Page Break:	$lf or $pf.
New page:	$f.
Placemarker:	$plc
New layout:	$nl
Indent:	$i
Tab:	$t
Tab 2:	$t#2
Center line:	$c
Right Justify Line:	$r
Paragraph Style:	$sp
Heading style:	$h
Sub heading:	$h#n
Outline style:	$ou
Line style:	$sl
Identical to Source:	$si
Ink print layout:	$nli
Ink print Indent:	$ii
Ink print exclusion:	$xis
End ink print exclusion:	$xie
Translation option:	$txi
Ink print page setting:	$psi
Top Block Marker:	$blt
Insert date:	$dtp
Binding space:	$bsp
Start Underline:	$fsu
End Underline:	$feu
Font start:	$fsn
Font end:	$fen
New Braille Layout:	$nlb
Braille indent:	$ib
Braille only inclusion:	$ob
Start Braille exclusion:	$xbs
End Braille exclusion:	$xbe
Braille Grade 0 indicator :	$g#0.
Braille Grade 1 indicator :	$g#1.
Braille Grade 2 indicator :	$g#2.
Braille page setting:	$psb
Braille Translation Indicator:	$txb
Extended character:	$ch
Extended symbol:	$m


3.12.2 Searching for Format Indicators.
If you wish to introduce changes to the layout or presentation of a document, you may need to locate format indicators such as layout indicators, font indicators, underline indicators, etc. If you want to change the format of paragraphs, you may need to locate new line indicators.
The Find command, READwithF, and the Find and Replace command, CONTROLwithF, can be used to locate any of these format indicators. To go to the next occurrence of the selected format indicator, press READ with N.
You can use the following command sequences to search for these indicators, and also to insert Format indicators into a document when entered at the "Replace with?" prompt:
New Line:	CONTROLwithENTER.
New Page:	CONTROLwithN.
New Layout:	CONTROLwithL.
Underline On:	CONTROLwithUN.
Underline Off:	CONTROLwithUF.
Font On:	CONTROLwithTXN.
Font Off:	CONTROLwithTXF.
Center Line:	CONTROLwithE.
Right Justify:	CONTROLwithR.
Indent:	FUNCTIONwithI.
Start Braille or inkprint exclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithX.
End Braille or inkprint exclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithY.
Translation Options indicator:	CONTROLwithO.
Text or Braille only inclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithN.
Text or Braille layout:	READwithCONTROLwithL.
Style of presentation indicator:	CONTROLwithY.
Template Menu:	CONTROLwithA.
Change Braille grade:	CONTROLwithG.


3.12.3 New Line Indicator.
When reading large amounts of text you may find the new line indicator annoying. It is possible to change the way in which new lines are indicated.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. It determines how the start of a new line or paragraph is shown on the Braille display.
For linear Braille format where the start of a new line is indicated by the Computer Braille dollar sign then p, (dots1246p), press L.
For an indent of one cell, press A.
For an indent of two cells, press B.
For two spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press 2.
For three spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press 3.


3.13 Editing a Document.
We have described how to create a new document and review its contents. This section introduces the basic text editing commands. The most common forms of editing are deleting or inserting characters, words, or sentences. These commands are described here, along with searching, search and replace, defining pages, and moving to particular points in a document. Advanced word processing commands are covered in Chapter 7.


3.13.1 Inserting Text.
To insert a character, word, sentence, or any amount of text, you need only to position the cursor at the point where you want to insert the text, and start typing. No special command is required because KeyWord is always in the insert mode.
Text is inserted at the cursor position. The character that was at the cursor, and all following characters, move to the right to make room. Experiment with this by inserting some words in your "Sample" document.


3.13.2 Deleting Text.
There are seven different delete commands available with KeyWord, allowing for the deleting of sections of text from one character to the whole document.
Delete current character 
Press CONTROLwithCOMMA,orDELETE.
This deletes the character under the cursor. A short beep is sounded followed by announcement of the new character under the cursor. This command is also available by pressing the DELETE key. The text to the right of the character is all moved one character to the left to fill the gap. The cursor is now placed on the next character and this character is displayed.
Delete last character 
Press BACKSPACE.
This deletes the previous character, that is, the last character entered if you are typing. The character deleted is displayed followed by a short beep. You can also use the command CONTROL with M.
Delete current word 
Press CONTROLwithK.
This deletes the word under the cursor together with any following spaces. A short beep is sounded and the text to the right of the word is all moved to the left to fill the gap. The cursor is now on the first character of the next word and this word is displayed. If the cursor is on a space, all spaces up to the beginning of the next word are deleted and the cursor is placed on that word.
Delete previous word 
Press CONTROLwithJ.
The word before the cursor is deleted, together with any following spaces.
Delete to end of sentence 
Press CONTROLwithI.
KeySoft prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the cursor position to the end of the current sentence. The cursor will be placed on the first character of the next sentence.

Delete to end of paragraph 
Press CONTROLwith8.
KeySoft prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the cursor position to the end of the current paragraph. The cursor remains in the same position.
Delete to end of document 
Press CONTROLwithD.
KeySoft prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the cursor position to the end of the document. The cursor remains in the same position.
There is no specific command to delete all text from a document, but this can easily be done by pressing READwithT to move to the top of the document and then pressing CONTROLwithD.
Note that the keys used to delete a particular section of text correspond to the commands for reading the same section of text except that the BACKSPACE key is used in place of the SPACE key.
In summary, the full set of delete commands is:
Delete current character,	CONTROLwithCOMMA,orDELETE;
Delete previous character	BACKSPACE;
Delete current word,	CONTROLwithK;
Delete previous word,	CONTROLwithJ;
Delete to end of sentence,	CONTROLwithI;
Delete to end of paragraph,	CONTROLwith8;
Delete to end of document,	CONTROLwithD.
In case it is not obvious, if you press one wrong key while you are typing, you will want to delete the character to the left of the cursor position, not the blank which is currently under the cursor. For this reason you should use BACKSPACE if you have just made a single typing mistake. Use BACKSPACE also to correct mistakes during entry of file names, search strings, etc.
For the same reason, if you realize that the word you have just typed is wrong when KeySoft echoes it, use the deletepreviousword command to remove it.
On reading your document again, you may find a word misspelled. When using speech it is often simpler to delete the word and retype it correctly, followed by a single space, rather than delete one or two characters and correct on a letter by letter basis.


3.14 Breaking your Document into Pages
You can force a new pages in your text manually at any point you choose by putting the cursor where you definitely want a new page to start, such as the start of new chapters and pressing CONTROLwithN.
KeyWord breaks the remaining text into pages automatically, so that the maximum number of lines fit onto each page.
When you have finished editing the document, check that it breaks into pages to your satisfaction. You can examine each page break to verify that important text is not split between pages. If you are not satisfied, you can force a new page before a page break by pressing CONTROLwithN.
To examine each page break, you can move to the start of the next page by using the "Go To" command, READwithR, followed by FUNCTIONwithDOWNARROW. You can also move back a page at a time by pressing READwithR, followed by FUNCTIONwithUPARROW. The "Go To" command is described further in 3.17 Going to a Specified Position.
To cancel a new page, move to the position where the "New Page" indicator is displayed, and use the "deletecurrentcharacter" command to delete it.


3.14.1 Checking the Word Count and File name.
If at any time while in a document, you wish to check the file name or word count, press READwithI. This will give you the Information Menu, with two items, Filename and WordCount. Select an option in the usual manner.
If you select File name, the name will be displayed. If you select Word count, KeySoft will display "Pleasewait" and after a brief pause, the total word count.


3.15 Searching a Document.
The Search Command allows you to find a particular string of text within a large document. The term "string" refers to a sequence of characters which may be part of a word, a whole word, or 2 or 3 words. Searches may be either backwards or forwards from the current cursor position.
Press READwithF to initiate the search. KeySoft prompts: "Searchforwardorback?"


3.15.1 Searching Forward.
Press F to search forward from the current cursor position. KeySoft displays: "Find?"
The last string searched for, if any, is offered as a suggestion.
Press ENTER to select the suggested text, or type the text string to be found, and press ENTER. KeySoft starts to search the document. If the text is found, the cursor jumps to the first occurrence of that text.
KeySoft displays: "Found(word)."
where word is the first word of the text string that was entered. If the text string cannot be found, KeySoft displays: "Cannotfind(string)."
Either press ADVANCE or PREVIOUSto return the display to the document.
If you want to carry on searching forward for the next occurrence of the same text, press READwithN. In a large document the search may take a few seconds.
If searching for a particular email, use the binding space command CONTROLwithSPACE to put spaces between words. This is not necessary in other contexts.


3.15.2 Searching Back.
You can search back from the current cursor position by pressing B, instead of F, at the Search Forward or Back prompt. The rest of the procedure for searching back is the same as that just described for searching forward.


3.15.3 The Search String.
The Search string can be up to 50 characters long and it can contain words separated by spaces.
Either upper or lower case letters may be used as the search process will locate text regardless of capitalization.
It is also possible to search for special indicators such as New Line or New Page markers, printer control markers, underline markers, etc. For information on the way to specify these markers, refer to 3.12.2 Searching for Format Indicators.


3.15.4 Find and Replace.
In addition to searching for a particular word or string of characters, you can also replace one string with another. Only whole words are replaced. This is useful, for instance, if you discover you have misspelled a word which is frequently used throughout a lengthy document.
The command for "Find and Replace" is CONTROLwithF. This command is followed by F for a forward search, or B for a back search. KeySoft prompts: "Find?(Searchstring),"
where "search string" is the text string used last time a search was made. The very first time you use your BrailleNote QT or if you reset it, there is nothing to display. Type the new word or words to find and press ENTER, edit the previous search string and press ENTER, or just press ENTER to search for the same string again.
KeySoft prompts: "Replacewith(replacementtext),"
where "replacement text" is the last entry you made here. Type up to 50 characters of replacement text and then press ENTER, edit the previous replacement text and press ENTER, or just press ENTER to replace the same text as last time. KeySoft then prompts: "Replaceallorfirst?"
To avoid the problem of words which happen to be embedded in other words, KeyWord replaces whole words only.
If you want to replace all occurrences, forward or back as appropriate, with the new text, press A. To replace just the first occurrence, press F.
If the word you are searching for does not occur within the document being searched, KeySoft displays: "Can'tfind(searchstring),"where search string is the text string used.
It is important to remember whether you are searching forwards or backwards in a document. The "Can'tfind" message means that a word cannot be found in the direction that is currently being searched. For instance, if you search forward from the middle of a document, you will miss an occurrence in the first half.
KeySoft always remembers the most recent search and replacement text, and these become the new suggested strings. Special indicators such as New Line Marker and New Page Marker can be replaced in the same way.


3.16 Checking the Cursor Position.
To check where the cursor is currently positioned, press READwithQ.KeySoft responds with the page number, line number and column number of the cursor position. To return the Braille display to the document, press either ADVANCE or PREVIOUS.
Used in conjunction with the cursor movement commands, this is a useful way of checking your page layout for printing or embossing. For example, you can position the cursor on the first character of a particular line by pressing READwithH, and then check the cursor position to find out which column this line starts on. This enables you to check margin settings.


3.17 Going to a Specified Position.
The cursor can be moved to any chosen page, line or column with the "Go To" command. To do this, press READwithR,then enter a page, line and column position in the document, and press ENTER.This command is very flexible, and you can make entries such as the following:
C6 moves the cursor to Column 6 on the current line. P3 moves the cursor to Page 3, Line 1, Column 1.
P5 L10 moves the cursor to Page 5, Line 10, Column 1.
You can also go to the top of the next or previous page by pressing READwithR,followed by FUNCTIONwithDOWNorUPARROW.


3.18 Marking Places for Quick Reference.
Up to 26 positions in a document may be marked with Place Markers, enabling instant future reference. Place Markers are identified by letters. Typically, you might put a place marker where you are editing a document. You can then move to another part of the document, and return quickly to the edited text.
Place Markers are not retained in nonKeyWord documents when they are saved.
A Place Marker is announced as "PlaceMarkerc," where c is a letter which names the Place Marker. It does not affect the document format and is not embossed or printed.


3.18.1 Place Markers on Braille display
A Place Marker is displayed on the Braille display as $pla where ais the letter of the alphabet which identifies the place marker. It does not affect the document format and is not embossed or printed.


3.18.2 Define a Place Marker.
Position the cursor at the point you wish to mark, and press READwithD. KeySoft prompts: "DefinePlaceMarker.Letter?"
Press a letter, such as A, to name the Place Marker. KeySoft displays: "PlaceA."


When you mark your document with a place marker, you may be surprised to see the cursor, usually dots7and8, under each of the four characters of the place marker. KeySoft treats the place marker as a single object which cannot be split so it marks the whole group.


3.18.3 Jump to a Place Marker.
Press READwithP.KeySoft prompts: "JumptoPlaceMarker.Letter?"
Press the letter corresponding to the Place Marker. The cursor is placed just to the right of the Place Marker itself.


3.18.4 Delete a Place Marker.
Locate the Place Marker you wish to delete, using the Jump to Place Marker command. This places the cursor just to the right of the Place Marker, so delete the marker by pressing BACKSPACE.


3.19 The Spelling Checker.
The Spelling Checker can be used in the Word processor or Planner. It finds typing and spelling mistakes in the current document by looking up each word in a dictionary of 65,000 words.
The Spelling Checker can check the whole document or part of a document. Select the Spelling Checker by pressing READwithCONTROLwithS. If the Spelling Checker has not been used since KeySoft was installed, you are asked to install the language. There is an American English spelling dictionary and a United Kingdom English spelling dictionary available. Press SPACEorADVANCE until your dictionary of choice is displayed, and select it by pressing NEXTorENTER.
The Spelling Checker menu contains 6 items:
Document Check:	check the whole document;
Lookup Word:	lookup any word;
Word Check:	check the word under the cursor;
Paragraph or Section Check:	check paragraph or section;
Check from Cursor:	check from cursor to end of document;
Select language.
If the Spelling Checker finds a word which is not in its dictionary, it displays the word and then: "Option?"
There are 7 possible actions at this point. You may wish to press HELPfor assistance. After you have selected your action, checking continues. When the checking has finished, you hear the total number of words checked and the number of unknown words found. The cursor then returns to its original position.
The seven options are now discussed.

3.19.1 Review the Word Using Speech.
If you want to hear the word again, press READwithK.On the first press the word is spoken. On the second press the word is spelled out. This sequence repeats on subsequent presses.
You can also review the word in context at the "Option?" prompt as follows:
1. To read the current sentence, press READwithI.
2. To read the current paragraph, press READwith8.
If Line Reading mode has been selected, these two commands speak the current line or section instead. You can set the Reading Mode at the "Option?"prompt by pressing READwithS.Reading modes are discussed in 3.10.3 Cursor Movement Modes.


3.19.2 Skip this occurrence of the word.
To skip the current occurrence of the word and leave it unchanged, press READwithL.If the word occurs elsewhere, the Spelling Checker queries it again.


3.19.3 Ignore the word.
To leave all instances of the word unchanged, press I, for Ignore. Use this option to ignore a name or specialized word which occurs throughout the document, but is not recognized by the spelling checker, and which you do not wish to add to the dictionary.


3.19.4 Add the word to the dictionary.
To add the current word to the user dictionary, press A.The word will never again be displayed as an unknown word when the Spelling Checker is used. Use this option for names, technical terms, etc which you often use. For more information on the User Dictionary, refer to 3.19.10 The User Dictionary.


3.19.5 Correct the Word.
To correct the word being queried, press C, and KeySoft displays: "Enterreplacement."
Type the replacement word or edit the existing word, and press ENTER.The Spelling Checker looks up your entry in its dictionary before accepting it. If it can't find it, the Spelling Checker asks for confirmation by prompting: "Wordnotindictionary.Use?"
Press Y to use the new word, or N and then reenter the correction.
If you correct a missing space between two words, KeySoft checks each separate word before accepting your correction.
In case the word you are correcting occurs more than once in the document, the Spelling Checker also asks: "Correctallorfirst?"
To correct this and all subsequent occurrences of the word in the document, press A, for All. To correct only this first instance, press F, for First.
When making corrections, don't worry about capital signs or capital letters because the Spelling Checker leaves them as they are.


3.19.6 Review Suggestions.
To obtain a "Suggestions list," press S. This is a list of words which resemble the original, and may be reviewed by pressing SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE. The following 3 options are then available:
1. To display the original word, press I. In speech, subsequent presses alternately spell out and speak the word.
2. To replace the misspelled word in your document with the current suggestion, press NEXT or ENTER. You are given the option of replacing all occurrences or just the first one.
3. To spell out the current suggestion using speech, press FUNCTIONwithO, then S.
If you don't like the suggestions, press ESCAPE to go back to the "Option?" prompt.


3.19.7 Look up the Word in the Dictionary.
This option allows you to browse the dictionary, word by word, until you have found the correct spelling. You can then replace the misspelled word with the correct one.
At the "Option?"prompt, press L, and KeySoft asks: "Wordtolookup?PressENTERfor(word),"
where "word" is the unknown word. You normally press ENTERto select the unknown word. Alternatively, you can enter a possible alternative spelling, or just the first few letters, followed by ENTER.
You are then placed at the word in the dictionary which most closely matches the letters you have typed. To browse through the dictionary until you find the word you are looking for, use SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE.
There are 4 options here, similar to the Suggestions options. These are:
1. To replace the misspelled word in your document with the current dictionary word, press NEXTorENTER.You are asked whether you want to replace the first occurrence or all, in case there are multiple occurrences.
2. To return to the "Wordtolookup?"prompt, press ESCAPE.You can then type another alternative spelling, or press ESCAPE again to return to the "Option?"prompt.
3. To display the original word, press I.In speech, subsequent presses alternately spell and speak the word.
4. To spell the current word in the dictionary, press FUNCTIONwithO, then S.


3.19.8 Leaving the Spelling Checker.
To exit from the Spelling Checker, press ESCAPE.The cursor is placed at the point where the Spelling Checker was interrupted. To restart the spelling check from where you left off, press READwithCONTROLwithS, then C.


3.19.9 Browse The Dictionary.
You can look up any word, and browse the spelling dictionary, without having first found the word with the Spelling Checker. From anywhere in the document, press READwithCONTROLwithS, then L, and KeySoft prompts: "Wordtolookup?"
Type the word, or just the first few letters, and press NEXTorENTER.You are placed at the word in the dictionary which most closely matches the letters you have typed, and the word is displayed. To browse through the dictionary until you find the word you are looking for, use thumb keys SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE.
There are three options available while browsing through the dictionary, as follows:
1. To insert the current dictionary word into your document at the present cursor position, press NEXT or ENTER. No spaces are included, so you may need to add a space if the word is inserted in a sentence. No capital signs are included so you may need to add these, if necessary.
2. To return to the "Wordtolookup?" prompt, press ESCAPE.You can then narrow down the options by typing more starting letters, or enter a different word. To return to the document, press ESCAPE again.
3. To spell the current word in the dictionary, press FUNCTIONwithO, then S.


3.19.10 The User Dictionary.
When you use the "Addtodictionary" option, the new word is stored separately in a KeyWord text document called "User dictionary." The words are arranged one per line. You can review the User Dictionary using KeyWord, and correct or remove words. If you edit the User Dictionary, use only lower case letters and apostrophes.
The User Dictionary is saved in the "Dictionaries" folder.


3.20 Opening ASCII and Plain Braille format Documents
Documents in KeyWord's native format, as well as Microsoft Word, RTF, or WordPerfect documents precisely specify their contents and formatting. However, the contents and formatting of documents containing plain ASCII text and the formatting of plain Braille documents are not at all precisely defined, so it is necessary to give you control over how KeyWord interprets them. This is done through a list of options presented when you open such a document. The initial settings for these options are either the ones you established last time you opened the same document, or if you have never opened the document before, settings that KeyWord assumes are most appropriate for the document and therefore usually you will not need to make any changes. So that you can tell whether or not you have opened this document before, the wording of the prompt changes from "Reviewtheoptions?" to "Reviewpreviousoptions?"accordingly. To continue and open the document without reviewing the options, just pressENTER. To review the options, press Y.
The options given when opening a document are as follows:
IsthisaBrailleorTextdocument?
If the name extension is .brl or .brf indicating that it will be a Braille file, then this option will have already been set to Braille. When open, these documents default to a reading grade of contracted Braille, regardless of the preferred reading grade set, as most Braille documents are in contracted Braille.
If the document is not .brf or .brl but contains Braille, then select "Braille" by pressing B. Otherwise select "Text" by pressing T. Follow either entry with ENTER.
UseLineorParagraphformatwhenopeningthedocument?currentlyParagraph.
When opening a document, it is important that KeyWord knows the difference between the ends of lines within a paragraph and the end of the paragraph itself. Without this knowledge, paragraphs might be run together, or each line within a paragraph may be taken as the end of a paragraph, causing the speech to pause in the wrong places, and stopping the proper reformatting of lines within a paragraph when a change is made. Plain text or plain Braille documents use the same "control characters," for example, "carriage returns" and "line feeds" to show where lines within paragraphs end as they use to show where a paragraph ends. This option allows you to control how KeyWord interprets these control characters to distinguish between ends of lines and end of paragraphs.
The option you choose here depends on the way the document you are opening is formatted:
The Paragraph format option assumes that a single carriage return and/or line feed character sequence, that is not followed by an indent of more than one space, denotes the end of a line within a paragraph and is therefore removed so that KeyWord can reformat the paragraph within the margins that you have set. A sequence of two or more carriage return and/or line feed characters or a single sequence followed by an indent is interpreted as being the start of a new paragraph and is substituted for KeyWord's New Line markers. This option is the initial setting when you first open a document and is the one that you will need for most prose type documents.
The Line format option retains every carriage return and/or line feed sequence as a New Line in KeyWord. Use this setting when opening documents containing lists or documents where each paragraph is formatted as one long line.
To retain "Paragraph" format when opening the document, just press ENTER.To select "Line" format, press L followed by ENTER.
UseLineorParagraphformatwhensavingthedocument?CurrentlyParagraph.
In a similar way to the previous option for opening documents, this option controls the use of carriage returns and line feeds when a plain text or plain Braille document is saved. Paragraph option puts carriage return/line feed sequences only where New Line markers occurred while the document was being edited. Line option puts them where either Line Break indicators or New Line markers occur.
If you are saving a document for use again in KeySoft or for transferring to another word processor, use Paragraph format. This will ensure that all paragraphs, headings, list, etc. are properly formatted when the document is opened next time. However each paragraph will appear as one long line, so if you are saving the document for use on a system which may not be able to handle this, then save using Line format.
To retain "Paragraph" format when saving the document, just press ENTER.To select "Line" format, pressL followed by ENTER.
You may have worked out that if you open a document using Paragraph format and then save it using Paragraph format, then you must open it next time using Line format. KeyWord changes the setting automatically for you so that if you have saved a document using paragraph format, next time you open it, the opening setting will be Line format.
Whether or not KeyWord uses Line Feed control characters in addition to Carriage Return characters is controlled by the "UseofLineFeedcharacters?" option in the ASCII Translation Options in the Translation Menu. The use of the ASCII End of File character is controlled by the "UseofEndofFilecharacter" option in the same list.
ExtendedASCIIcharacteroption?CurrentlyRetain.
The standard ASCII character set uses numbers between 0 and 127 to denote each character within the set. It does not make provision for accented characters and other special symbols, so where necessary this is done by extending this set with numbers greater than 127. This option controls how KeyWord interprets these characters.
Sometimes extended characters occur not because they are accented characters or special symbols, but because the file has been transmitted through a communications system that has added a "parity bit" which in effect has added an offset to some of the characters. To adjust for this, use the "Convert to standard ASCII" option, by pressing C, followed by ENTER.
Sometimes the extended characters are used purely for visual effects such as boxes around paragraphs, etc. In these cases the document will be easier to read if the extended characters are removed altogether, use the "Ignore" option for this.
To retain the extended characters when the document is opened, select "Retain." On selection of Retain, another option is presented:
"Extendedcharacterset?CurrentlyANSI.
More than one system has been used for extended characters, therefore you must tell KeyWord which one to use for this document. The options are the "ANSI" character set and the "MSDOS" character set. If you don't know which one to use, try one and if the extended characters do not come out correctly, try the other. For the "MSDOS" set press M followed by ENTER. For the "ANSI" set press A followed by ENTER.
KeySoft will now display: "Endoflist."
When you are ready to open the document, press ESCAPE.


3.21 Large Documents.
There is no significant limit to the size of a document, but as it gets bigger, some operations take longer to perform. For instance, when you press ESCAPE to exit a document, a delay of several seconds may occur. Moving to the top or bottom of a document may also take a few seconds. In such instances KeySoft displays: "Pleasewait",or"Repositioning,"depending on the situation. Keystrokes are not actioned until such an operation has been completed. If necessary, divide large documents into two or more smaller ones to speed the editing of the text.


3.22 Switching Between Documents.
There may be times when you are working with two or more documents. This can happen when you are modifying a document and need to refer often to the original. While you can close one document by pressing ESCAPE, opening the other can involve several keystrokes.
There is a quicker way. From the current document, press CONTROLwithZ.This closes the current document, and places you at the"Documenttoopen?"prompt. KeySoft then offers the name of the document which was opened before the last one. To open this, press ENTER.This means that you can switch back and forth between your two most recent documents just by pressing CONTROLwithZ, followed by ENTER.
This scheme also works if you are working with several documents, because the document name that KeySoft offers when you press CONTROLwithZ is just the first in a list. If you press READwith9, KeySoft offers the next most recent document, and you can work down the list towards progressively older documents. You can also work back up the list by pressing READwith7.When you find the one you want, press ENTER.
To provide fast access to recently used documents and folders, READwith9is available at most document and folder prompts throughout KeySoft.



4 Book Reader.
BrailleNote QT has a book reader called KeyBook. It enables you to read electronic books in the following formats: KeyWord text and Braille, Microsoft word, ASCII text, RTF, WordPerfect 5.1 and plain Braille files with a BRF or BRL extension. KeyBook has the same reading commands as KeyWord, but KeyBook does not allow the book contents to be modified.


4.1 Instant Braille Transcription.
If the book is in text format, KeyBook can transcribe the text into your preferred reading grade instantly, as you read. For example, if your preferred reading grade is Grade 2 Braille, KeyBook automatically displays the book in Grade 2 as you read. However, the underlying text is still in its original form, and you can examine it in computer Braille, at any time, should you wish.


4.2 Reading the Sample Book.
After selecting KeyBook from the Main Menu, KeyBook displays: "Readbookinwhichfolder?PressENTERforBooks."
Press ENTER. If this is the very first time a book is read, the book name must be selected from the list of books in the Books folder. Press SPACE repeatedly to display the list; then press ENTERwhen "AChristmasCarol" is displayed.
KeyBook prompts: "Reviewtheoptions?" Press ENTER to accept the default options, and the book will load. For more information about reviewing the options, see 4.8 Reading Books Stored on Other Drives.
Note: If a book has been read before, KeyBook will prompt: "Bookname?PressENTERforaChristmasCarol."
To load the book, press ENTER. Once the book is loaded, the beginning of the text will display and, if the speech is on, KeyBook announces: "Topofdocument."You are now ready to start reading.


4.3 Braille Display thumb Key Commands.
The same commands that are used in KeyWord also apply to KeyBook. The following commands can be used to read using the Braille display:
To advance the display forward by one width, press ADVANCE;
To move the display back by one width, press BACK;
To move the display forward by a chosen amount of text, press NEXT.
You can set the amount of text at sentence, paragraph or line in the "FunctionofPREVIOUSandNEXTthumbkeys" option as described in 5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next thumb Keys.
Likewise, to move the display back by the chosen amount of text, press PREVIOUS.
The following commands control the automatic Braille display advance mode:
To start the display advancing automatically, press READwithSHIFTwithG;
To decrease the speed of advance of the Braille display, press PREVIOUS;
To increase the speed of advance of the Braille display, press NEXT;
To stop the Braille display advancing, press READwithSPACE together;
To move the display back a word, press PREVIOUSwithBACK;
To move the display forward a word, press PREVIOUSwithADVANCE;
To turn the Braille display on or off, press SPACEwithNEXT. This was described in more detail in 1.15.4.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off;
To turn speech on or off, first press PREVIOUS, then SPACE and then release both keys. This was described in more detail in 1.15.4.2 Turning Speech On or Off;
To route the cursor to the beginning of the Braille display, press BACKwithADVANCE.
To cycle through the four Braille display modes, press PREVIOUSwithNEXT repeatedly. The Braille display modes are discussed in 3.11 Braille Display Modes. The Factory setting is "Automatic." Leave it this way until you are acquainted with 3.11 Braille Display Modes. To change the text document reading grade, press ADVANCEwithNEXTrepeatedly. This only applies to a book in text format. The options are your preferred Braille grade, 6 dot computer Braille or 8 dot computer Braille.


4.4 The Review Cursor.
When you are reading, the cursor is hidden because it serves no useful purpose. However, in the automatic Braille display mode, when you are reviewing character by character, the cursor is shown to indicate the current character. For grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, the cursor is both dots7and8 by default. For computer Braille the cursor is dot8 only. Remember that KeyBook automatically displays the book in your preferred grade of Braille if the original book is in text format. If you move the cursor onto a word, however, that word is displayed in computer Braille. This gives you a onetoone correspondence between the Braille display and the word you are reviewing. Of course, if the original book is in Braille there is no change as you move the cursor.
When the cursor is under a format indicator, the cursor spans all of the cells of the indicator.


4.5 Additional Reading Commands.
KeyBook's reading commands are the same as KeyWord's, but KeyBook does not allow the book to be edited. This feature prevents intentional or unintentional modification to the text of the book being read.
The following commands can be used to listen to the book that has been opened:
To go forward reading, press READwithG.
Note that while you are continuously reading, you can skip back or forward by sentences or paragraphs without stopping the continuous reading function. This feature is extremely useful if you want to quickly browse forward or back from your current reading position.
To stop reading, press READwithSPACE together.
The following 6 commands can be used both while KeyBook is continuously reading and when you are reviewing:
To move back a sentence,	press READwithU;
To hear the current sentence,	press READwithI;
To move forward a sentence,	press READwithO;
To move back a paragraph,	press READwith7;
To hear the current paragraph,	press READwith8;
To move forward a paragraph,	press READwith9.
The other commands available when reviewing are:
To go to the beginning of the book,	press READwithT;
To go to the end of the book,	press READwithB;
To find a text string in the book, press READwithF.This command is described in 3.15 Searching a Document.
To move back a character,	press READwithM;
To hear the current character,	press READwithCOMMA.(Press this command once to hear the character spoken. Press it again, and if the character is a letter, you will hear its "call sign" e.g. Alpha for A, Bravo for B etc.)
To move forward a character, 	press READwithPERIOD;
To move back a word,	press READwithJ;
To hear the current word, 	press READwithK. The first time you press this command, the word is spoken. The second time the word is spelled out;
To move forward a word, 	press READwithL;
To enter Announce Key Mode, press READwithA;
To query the cursor position, 	press READwithQ;
To go to any page, line, or column, 	press READwithR. This command is described in 3.17 Going to a Specified Position.
Besides accepting the READwithcharacter combinations, KeyBook also accepts the commands without the READ because the meaning is clear. This is the same as KeyWord's "review only" mode that was discussed in 3.9.2 Selecting ReviewOnly Mode.
This is quite a long list to remember, but assistance is always available by pressing HELP.


4.6 Miscellaneous commands.
KeyBook has a group of block commands. These commands are the same as KeyWord's block commands. To go to the block commands menu, press CONTROLwithB.The block commands are described in 7.5 Block Commands.
To open another book, press CONTROLwithZ. KeyBook prompts: "Bookname?PressENTERfor(booktitle)."
where book title is the name of the last book read. You can type the name of the book that you want to load or review the list of books in the current folder by pressing SPACEorADVANCE. You can then select the book you want by pressing NEXTorENTER.
If you want to change the folder, press BACKSPACEat the"Bookname?"prompt. KeySoft displays: "Foldername?(Lastusedfolder),"
To step through the list of folders, press SPACEorADVANCE. This procedure was described in more detail in 3.20 Opening ASCII and Plain Braille format Documents. When you have selected a folder, KeyWord asks for the book name as before.
To check what document you have selected, press READwithCONTROLwithI and KeySoft will display the document name.


4.7 Review Book Opening Options.
Books in KeyWord's native format, as well as Microsoft Word, RTF and WordPerfect format, precisely specify their contents and formatting. However, the contents and formatting of books in ASCII text or plain Braille are not at all precisely defined, so it is necessary to give you control over how KeyBook interprets them. This is done through a list of options presented when you open such a book. The initial settings for these options are either the ones you established last time you opened the same book, or if you have never opened the book before, settings that KeyBook assumes are most appropriate for the book. Because of this, you usually won't need to make any changes. So that you can tell whether you have opened this book before, the wording of the prompt used changes from "Reviewtheoptions?" to "Reviewpreviousoptions?" accordingly. To continue and open the book without reviewing the options, just press ENTER. To review the options, press Y.
The options given when opening a book are as follows: IsthisaBrailleorTextdocument?
If the file extension is .brl or .brf (plain Braille) then this option will have already been set to Braille. If not, you must respond to the question before moving on.
If the book contains grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, then select "Braille" by pressing B. Otherwise select "Text" by pressing T. Follow either entry with ENTER. KeySoft then prompts: "UseLineorParagraphformatwhenopeningthedocument?currentlyParagraph."
When opening a book, it is important that KeyBook knows the difference between the ends of lines within a paragraph and the end of the paragraph itself. Without this knowledge, paragraphs might be run together, or each line within a paragraph might be treated as a separate paragraph. This would cause the speech to pause in the wrong places, and make it impossible to skim by paragraph. Plain text and plain Braille books use the same "control characters," for example, "carriage returns" and "line feeds," to show where lines within paragraphs end. This option allows you to control how KeyBook interprets these control characters to distinguish between ends of lines and ends of paragraphs.
The option you choose here depends on the way the book you are opening is formatted:
The Paragraph format option assumes that a single carriage return or carriage return/line feed pair that is followed by one or no spaces, denotes the end of a line within a paragraph. This end of line marker is removed so that KeyBook can reformat the paragraph within the margins that you have set. A sequence of two or more carriage return and/or line feed characters or a single sequence followed by an indent of two or more spaces is interpreted as the start of a new paragraph. This option is the default setting when you first open a book, and is the one that you will need for most prose books.
The Line format option retains every carriage return and/or line feed sequence as a New Line in KeyWord. Use this setting when opening books containing lists, or poetry, or books where each paragraph is formatted as one long line.
To retain "Paragraph" format when opening the book, just press ENTER. To select "Line" format, press L followed by ENTER. KeySoft then prompts:
"UseLineorParagraphformatwhensavingthedocument?CurrentlyParagraph."
Because KeyBook does not allow the text within a book to be modified or added to, just press ENTER to confirm the prompted option. KeySoft then prompts: "ExtendedASCIIcharacteroption?CurrentlyRetain."
The most common writing system used by computers is ASCII. In this system, each letter, number, and commonly used punctuation mark is represented by a number between 0 and 127 (Since the system was developed in the U.S., "commonly used" means commonly used in the U.S.) There is no way to represent accented characters and other special symbols, so the system has been extended with numbers greater than 127. The Extended ASCII option controls how KeyBook interprets these characters represented by numbers greater than 127, socalled "extended characters."
Sometimes extended characters occur not because they are accented characters or special symbols, but because the file has been transmitted through a communications system that has added a "parity bit" which in effect has added an offset to some of the characters. To adjust for this, use the "Convert to standard ASCII" option, by pressing C, followed by ENTER.
Sometimes the extended characters are used purely for visual effects such as boxes around paragraphs, etc. In these cases the book will be easier to read if the extended characters are removed altogether; use the "Ignore" option for this.
To retain the extended characters when the book is opened, select "Retain" by pressing R, or press ENTER as this is the default setting. If you select Retain, another option is presented: KeySoft prompts: "Extendedcharacterset?CurrentlyANSI."
More than one system has been used for extended characters; therefore you must tell KeyWord which one to use for this book. The options are the "ANSI" character set and the "MSDOS" character set. If you don't know which one to use, try one and if the extended characters do not come out correctly, try the other. For the "MSDOS" set, press M followed by ENTER. For the "ANSI" set, press A followed by ENTER.
KeySoft will now prompt: "Endoflist."
When you have made all your selections, press ESCAPE.


4.8 Reading Books Stored on Other Drives.
The sample book is stored in the Books folder on the KeySoft System Disk. You should be careful about storing other books in the KeySoft System Disk, because any book other than the sample book will be lost if the battery goes flat, or the BrailleNote QT is reset with JKLkeys held down.
If you have a backup of the book, or are not concerned about the possibility of losing it, then storing your books on this drive means that you don't use space on the Flash Disk.
The Flash Disk is shared by the other programs like KeyWord and KeyMail, and its contents are preserved much like files on a conventional hard drive. There is an empty folder called My Books provided on the Flash Disk. However the Flash Disk has limited storage capacity and you would probably not want to store more than six or seven books in it. Many users who have a large collection of books prefer to keep these on a storage card.


4.8.1 Selecting a Drive.
We have previously discussed the selection of files and folders within KeyBook, but we haven't described the selection of a drive. You can change the current drive at any time that you are prompted for a folder name by pressing BACKSPACE. For example when you select KeyBook, it prompts: "Readbookinwhichfolder?(Books)."
Press BACKSPACE. KeyBook then prompts: "Drive?PressENTERfor(lastdriveused)."
You can select the last drive used by pressing NEXT or ENTER, or you can review the list of drives by pressing SPACE repeatedly. You can select a drive by pressing ENTER when the required drive is displayed, or by typing a letter. There are always at least two drive options available. These are:
To select the Flash Disk, press F.
To select the KeySoft System Disk, press K.
To select a storage card, either PC or CF, press S or C as appropriate.


4.8.2 Loading a Book from Another Drive.
After you have selected a drive, KeySoft prompts: "Readbookinwhichfolder?PressENTERfornone."
Select the folder in the usual way. When you have selected a folder, KeyBook asks for the book name as before.


4.8.3 Advanced Storage Methods.
Another way of storing a large book library is to do so on a PC or laptop. There are several methods available for transferring files to and from a PC, including ActiveSync, using Network client, or a card reader attached to your PC. These are all discussed in the Connectivity chapter of this user guide.
Transfer the "Books" folder on the "KeySoft System Disk," or create your own folder.


4.9 Exiting KeyBook.
Exit KeyBook in the usual way by pressing ESCAPE to take you back to the Main Menu. The book is closed when you exit. To reopen the book press B, then ENTER twice, from anywhere in the Main Menu. You are returned to the place where you were last reading.
Remember that you can switch to another task while using KeyBook, as described in 1.16 Switching Between Tasks. For example, to make an entry in the Planner, press FUNCTIONwith6. When you have completed your entry, press FUNCTIONwith9 to return to KeyBook. The BrailleNote QT may beep once or twice, indicating it is busy preparing to resume from where you were when you switched tasks.


4.10 Bookshare.
Bookshare.org is an online service that provides electronic format books that are both in and out of copyright. It is possible to access Bookshare books via KeyWeb on your BrailleNote QT, and read them using KeyBook. Bookshare.org's public domain content is available to anyone, but copyrighted material is available only to members.
For information about Bookshare.org, who is eligible to join and how to join, check out www.bookshare.org, or for more specific URLs, please refer to Appendix B. Pulse Data expects that persons utilizing the Bookshare.org service from their BrailleNote QT will honor the criteria for usage outlined in their membership agreement with Benetech.
In this section on how to access Bookshare.org, it is assumed that you have already set up your BrailleNote QT to use KeyWeb, and are a member of Bookshare.org and have created access codes and passwords etc. Be assured that the Bookshare.org site is very user friendly and set up to be easily accessible using a screen reader like KeyWeb. For information on how to use KeyWeb, please refer to Chapter 12.


4.10.1 How Books from Bookshare work.
When first downloaded from the site, Bookshare.org books are "packed" into a special compressed format that has a .bks file extension, regardless of what book format you have chosen.
Once the book is downloaded, it is then possible to "unpack" it from the .bks file into its normal format such as .brf or .txt. Once this is done, you can then delete the .bks file. To make this clearer, you could think of the .bks file as the bag that Bookshare.org put your book into, and once you have taken it out of its bag, you can throw the bag away.
All copyrighted Bookshare.org books are password protected to help prevent them being used or distributed in ways contrary to the terms and conditions of membership. To unpack the book, you need to enter your password. Books that are in the public domain, that is, out of copyright, do not require a password even though the prompt will still come up. In these cases, you can still enter your password, or just press ENTER to pass over the field.


4.10.2 Supported formats.
Bookshare.org has books in several electronic formats, some titles in more than one format. The BrailleNote QT supports books in brf or txt formats, but not DAISY or HTML formats. If you download a book in an unsupported format, KeyBook will allow you to unpack it, but before the process is complete, it will prompt to say that the format is not available. Books can only be "unpacked" in KeyBook.


4.10.3 Bookshare Favorites.
The Bookshare.org home page is already set up as a favorite in KeyWeb. However if you intend to use Bookshare regularly, it might pay to set up the login page as a favorite instead. For information on how to do this, refer to 12.9.1 Adding a favorite.


4.10.4 Existing Bookshare books.
If you are already a Bookshare.org member and have packed or unpacked books on your PC, you can simply transfer them to your BrailleNote QT via ActiveSync, and open them in KeyBook. The only difference to the procedures below is that when you open KeyBook, you will have to select a folder or drive in the usual way, as it will not default to the correct location.


4.10.5 How to download a book from Bookshare.
Follow the steps below to use KeyWeb to download a book from Bookshare.org.
1. Go to KeyWeb on your BrailleNote QT by either pressing I in the Main Menu, or FUNCTIONwith0(zero) anywhere. KeyWeb will prompt you for a URL.
2. Select Bookshare from your favorites. The BrailleNote QT will connect to the web and you will be in the Bookshare homepage.
3. Navigate to the Login page and log in using your member details. You will end up in a personalized welcome page.
4. Locate the book that you wish to read, and download it in a supported format (all books are available as brf; public domain ones are also in txt), and download it to the folder and drive of your choice. For Download instructions refer to 12.11.1 How to Download a file.


4.10.6 Unpacking the book for reading.
Follow the steps below to unpack your book:
1. Go to KeyBook by pressing FUNCTIONwith9.
2. KeyBook will offer you the folder into which you downloaded the book as default. Press ENTER, and it will offer you the book as the default file. If you downloaded several books, it will offer the last one downloaded. To select the book, press ENTER again.
3. KeyBook prompts: "FolderforunpackedBooksharebook?PressENTERforMyBooks." Either press ENTER straight away or select another file location.
4. You will be prompted for your Bookshare.org password. Type it in and press ENTER, or if no password is required, simply press ENTER
5. The book will now unpack. There will be some progress beeps during this time. When complete, KeyBook prompts: "DeletetheoriginalpackedBooksharebook?" Press Y.
Note 1: If the book format is not supported, KeyBook will tell you at this point and return to the main menu.
Note2: If there is not enough memory available to unpack the book, KeyBook will prompt  "CouldnotsaveunpackedBooksharebook.Diskisfull."
6. KeyBook displays the name of the file, including the file extension, for example, "Harry_Po_b_fl.brf". To open it, press ENTER.
7. KeyBook will ask "Reviewtheoptions?" as it does for every book in a nonnative KeySoft format the first time. As the file will have been set up automatically with the correct settings, press ENTER or N.
8. The book is now ready to read. If you exit the book before completing it, KeyBook will bookmark it for you and the next time you open it, it will open to the same place.
Note: If instead of downloading books directly onto your BrailleNote QT from Bookshare, you have transferred them from a PC or they are on a storage card, the same procedure applies. The only difference is that at step 2, you would navigate to the appropriate location, then continue as above.



5 General Functions.
This chapter discusses the functions listed on the Options Menu, which was introduced briefly in 1.15.4 General Functions. A number of these functions are discussed in other sections of this User Guide as appropriate, and the main purpose of this chapter is to summarize all the Option Menu functions in one place.
The Options Menu comprises general functions that are available wherever you are in KeySoft. You could be using the Word processor, sending or receiving email, using the Calculator, or reading a menu. After using one of these functions, you are returned to the place you were at previously.
To access the Options Menu from anywhere in KeySoft, press FUNCTION with O, and KeySoft will prompt: "Optionsmenu. You can then review the items by pressing SPACEorADVANCE or BACKorBACKSPACE.
The Options Menu comprises the following items:
1. Date;
2. Time Options;
3. Grade of Braille for Keyboard Entry;
4. Braille display options;
5. Keyboard settings;
6. Review voice;
7. Connectivity;
8. Visual display;
9. Next appointment;
10. Power and battery status;
11. User guide;
12. Insertion;
13. Spell. Repeat and spell;
14. Hear punctuation. Repeat with maximum punctuation;
15. Move to another task;
16. 15. Front Thumb keys On/Off;
Speech settings.
To select an item, move through the menu until the required item is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, from anywhere in the Options menu, press the initial letter of your choice. This does not apply to the speech settings, which are discussed in 1.15.4.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch.
Selecting a menu item takes at least two key combinations, for example, FUNCTION with O then D to hear the date. For really fast access, many items are also available through quick commands. These are listed in 1.15.4 General Functions, as well as being mentioned in each relevant section of this chapter..
Some items on the Options Menu will always display the same style of information, for example the time and date functions, while for other options the response will vary depending on where you are in KeySoft when you select the item. An example of this is "CalculatorBrailleLanguage," which is only displayed when the Calculator is in use.
The Connectivity option is discussed in detail in the Connectivity Chapter of this user guide.

5.1 Date.
To display the current day and date, press FUNCTIONwithO, then D.
After the date is displayed, return to your original place in KeySoft by pressing ADVANCE.
The quick key for this function is FUNCTIONwithD.


5.2 Time Options.
There are two time options available  the clock (current time), and the stopwatch.


5.2.1 Current time.
To display the current time, press FUNCTIONwithT. To access the current time through the time menu, press FUNCTIONwithO,thenT, then C for Clock.
After the time is displayed you will be returned to your original place in KeySoft.


5.2.2 Stopwatch.
The stopwatch operates in a similar way to a mechanical stopwatch. It keeps time down to one hundredth of a second, can be stopped, started or returned to zero, and the time display can be copied to the clipboard for pasting into documents or emails.


5.2.2.1 Stopwatch commands.
To access the stopwatch, press FUNCTIONwithW. Or you can press FUNCTIONwithOthenT,thenS for stopwatch. The first time you use it, The stopwatch will be at zero.
There are three settings  stop, start and zero. The zero setting resets the time to zero  however we are not referring to it as reset, as "Reset" has a very different meaning on the BrailleNote QT already!
To zero the time, press CONTROLwithI.
To start or stop the stopwatch, press SPACE. This is a toggle command.
To stop the stopwatch altogether, first stop it by pressing SPACE then zero it by pressing CONTROLwithI.
To copy the time to the clipboard, press CONTROLwithC. You can do this at any time, even when the stopwatch is running.


5.2.2.2 Running in the Background.
Once it has started, the stopwatch will keep running until you press the stop command, or reset the BrailleNote QT. Even if you switch to another task, or switch the BrailleNote QT off, it will still keep running in the background, although it won't display any times automatically. To check on the elapsing time, simply access the stopwatch by pressing FUNCTIONwithW.
The stopwatch will display the elapsing time.


5.2.2.3 Stopwatch on Display.
The time shows on the Braille display as hours, minutes, and seconds in this format: h:mm:ss
The Braille display updates every second while the stopwatch is running.
When the stopwatch is stopped, the elapsed time displays to the hundredth second like this: h:mm:ss.cc
To the right of the time, the display also shows current status, for example: 1:23:45	Running
or 0:34:21.04	Stopped
When the stopwatch is returned to zero while stopped, the BrailleNote QT displays "Zero" and the display shows "0:00:00.00"


5.2.2.4 Stopwatch Announcements.
The running stopwatch will display the time every minute unless you turn speech off. For example: "7minutes"or"3hours,46minutes"
Any other time, you can hear the elapsing time to the second by pressing REPEAT. For example: "1hour,5minutes,48seconds"
To hear the same time repeated, press L.
When the stopwatch is stopped, you can hear the elapsed time by pressing REPEAT.


5.3 Grade of Keyboard Braille Entry.
The BrailleNote QT is primarily designed to handle text information from the computer style keyboard. However, it is possible to open and create Braille documents. In this instance the F,D, and Skeys correspond to Braille keys 1, 2 and 3 respectively. Similarly, the J,K, and L keys correspond to Braille keys 4, 5 and 6 respectively. If you are typing a Braille document in Grade 2 and want to enter something which could be ambiguous, you can temporarily select Grade 1 through this item on the Options Menu. After you have entered the word or passage, you can switch back to Grade 2. You might do this for a list of surnames and initials.
Another choice when typing Grade 2 is to switch to computer Braille, perhaps for a file name such as "program.exe" which contains a period, or for an email address.
If your preferred Braille is Grade 2, KeySoft will occasionally override your preference and force Grade 1.


5.4 Braille Display Options.
To review the Braille Display Options list anywhere in KeySoft, press FUNCTIONwithO, thenB.The list of options presented will depend where you are in KeySoft when you select the Braille Display Options. Experiment at the Main Menu, within a document, and in the Calculator to see how the list of items changes. The complete Braille Display Options list comprises the following items:
Braille On?
Braille Display Mode;
Show new lines in Reading Mode as;
Function of Previous and Next thumb keys;
Cursor shape for standard Braille;
Preferred reading grade;
Text document reading grade;
Braille language;
Calculator Braille code;
Computer Braille code;
Cursor shape for computer Braille;
Display computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots;
Message display time;
thumb key set.
After each item, KeySoft will announce the current setting for that item.
You can move forward or back through the items in the usual way. To leave any option unchanged, just press ENTER. To change any option, enter a new setting and press ENTER.


5.4.1 Turning the Braille Display On and Off.
To turn the Braille display on press Y. To turn it off, press N. You can also turn the Braille display on or off by pressing the NEXT and SPACE keys together. Note that if speech is turned off when the Braille display is off, the Braille display is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.


5.4.2 Braille Display Mode.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner and allows you to choose the amount of formatting information that is presented on the Braille Display and whether the cursor is displayed. There are four modes; Automatic, Reading, Edit and Layout. You may also cycle through the four modes by pressing PREVIOUS with NEXT.
The Braille Display Modes are discussed more fully in 3.11 Braille Display Modes but briefly:
Automatic mode: press A. The cursor is turned on when you are editing and off when you are reading.
Reading mode: press R. Used for reading. The cursor is never displayed. Only formatting necessary for reading is displayed.
Edit mode: press E. The cursor is always on and all formatting information is displayed.
Layout mode: press L. The document is laid out on the Braille display in the same way as it will appear on paper when it is embossed.


5.4.3 Show New Lines in Reading Mode as.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. It determines how the start of a new line or paragraph is shown on the Braille display.
For linear Braille format where the start of a new line is indicated by the Computer Braille dollar sign then p, (dots1246p), press L.
For an indent of one cell, press A.
For an indent of two cells, press B.
For two spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press 2.
For three spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press 3.


5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next thumb Keys.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. The function of the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys can be defined to suit your personal reading preference.
To have them move Up and Down, press U.
To have them move by Sentence or Line, press S. Whether they move by sentence or line is determined by the reading mode, as set via READwithS.
To have them move by Paragraph or Section, press P. Whether they move by paragraph or section is determined by the cursor movement mode, as set via READwithS. Cursor movement Mode is discussed more fully in 3.10.3 Cursor Movement Modes.
To save the settings, return to the Main Menu.


5.4.5 Cursor Shape for Standard Braille.
This setting determines which dots are used to indicate the cursor is in a particular cell. The default setting for grade 1 and 2 Braille is dots7and8, but you may also choose to have dot7 only, dot8 only, dots123456, or all 8dotsof the cell.
To select the cursor for both dots 7 and 8, press B. For dot 7 only, press G. For dot 8 only, press H. For a 6 dot cell, press F. For a whole 8 dot cell, press W.


5.4.6 Preferred Reading Grade.
This is the grade used for prompts, help messages, documents, email, etc. The factory default is Grade 2. If you prefer to read in Grade 1, press A. If you prefer to read in Grade 2, press B. If you prefer Computer Braille, press C.


5.4.7 Text Document Reading Grade.
This option is available within a document, an email, or within the Planner. It allows you to select how text documents are displayed on the Braille display. The default setting is the "Preferred reading grade," which is generally Grade 2. Text documents include BrailleNote QT .kwt files, Microsoft Word, ASCII text and other forms of text documents that you may choose to read or edit.
For on the fly translation to your preferred reading grade, press P. For 6 dot computer Braille, press F. For 8 dot computer Braille, press H.


5.4.8 Braille Language.
BrailleNote QT provides a choice of three Grade 1/Grade2 Braille languages, namely USA, UK and Australian Braille.
For USA Braille, press S. For UK Braille, press K. For Australian Braille, press A.
This setting determines the way grade 1 and grade 2 Braille are represented inside the BrailleNote QT and when it is embossed. It also controls how Braille is translated to text, and vice versa. Usually this setting will have already been set for you before you receive your BrailleNote QT. Be careful about changing it because files created in one language will not be read or embossed properly if another language is selected.


5.4.9 Calculator Braille Language.
This option is only available within the Calculator. Calculations are displayed in your preferred Braille grade on the Braille display in either the Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics or the UK Braille Mathematics Notation.
For Nemeth code, USA, press N. For UK Mathematics Notation, press U.


5.4.10 Computer Braille Language.
The BrailleNote QT is supplied with two Computer Braille tables, namely USA and UK. However, the user may create or install additional Computer Braille tables.
For USA computer Braille, press S. For UK computer Braille, press K. To cycle through all the available Computer Braille tables, press CONTROLwithSPACE.


5.4.11 Cursor Shape for Computer Braille.
This setting determines which dots are used to indicate the cursor when Computer Braille is being displayed. The setting is independent from the cursor shape used to display standard Braille. The default setting is dot8, but you may also choose to have dot7 only, dots7and8only, dots123456, or all8dots of the cell.
To select the cursor for both dots 7 and 8, press B. For dot 7 only, press G. For dot 8 only, press H. For a 6 dot cell, press F. For a whole 8 dot cell, press W.


5.4.12 Display Computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots.
The default setting is 6 dot Computer Braille, but 8 dot Computer Braille is available for those involved with software programming and other tasks requiring an extended range of characters.
To display Computer Braille in 6 dot format, press F. For 8 dot format, pressH.


5.4.13 Message Display Time.
This sets the time in seconds that messages, such as error messages, will remain on the Braille display before the next prompt is displayed. By setting this to 0, the message will remain until you press a thumb key. The time may be set between 0 and 30 seconds.


5.4.14 Thumb Key Set.
The thumb key set can be set up for lefthanded or righthanded operation. You can also create a custom key set to suit your personal preference. The factory setting is righthanded.
To select the standard righthanded set, press R. The function of the thumb keys from left to right is: PREVIOUS, BACK, ADVANCE, and NEXT.
To select the lefthanded set, press L. The function of the thumb keys from left to right is: NEXT,ADVANCE,BACK, and PREVIOUS.
For a custom set, press C, then ENTER. You must then define the function of each of the thumb keys, starting with the left thumb key. For each thumb key in turn, select its function and press ENTER.
For a thumb key to perform the PREVIOUS function, press P. For a thumb key to perform the BACK function, press B. For a thumb key to perform ADVANCE, press A. For a thumb key to perform NEXT, press N. Alternatively, as the thumb key is announced, press SPACE with dots 34 to review the options.
The thumb keys in the custom set are set independently of each other, so there is nothing to stop you from setting all thumb keys to the same function. A good way to check the function of your custom set is to enter the Keyboard Learn mode from the Main Menu. You can then press each thumb key to determine its assigned function.


5.5 Keyboard Settings.
To review the Keyboard settings list anywhere in KeySoft, press FUNCTIONwithO for the Options Menu, then K. Press ESCAPE to leave the Keyboard settings list and return to your original place in KeySoft.
The quick key for this function is FUNCTIONwithK.
A detailed explanation of each KeyBoard Setting option follows:


5.5.1 Setting the Keyboard Voice.
The first of these settings determines how much KeySoft speaks as you type. KeySoft prompts: "Keyboardvoice?CurrentlyWords."
The options are as follows:
To turn off speech altogether, press F followed by ENTER;
To spell words as they are typed, press S followed by ENTER;
To speak whole words, press W followed by ENTER;
To both spell and speak words, press B followed by ENTER;
To cycle through all the items above, press CONTROLwithSPACE.
Or just press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
The suggested setting is "Words." If you are learning to type, you may prefer the "Spell" option or the "Both" option. If you can type quickly, you might select the "Words" option, or turn off speech altogether.
You can press HELP for a reminder of these options.


5.5.2 Preferred Keyboard Braille Grade.
This setting only applies when actual Braille entry is required.
The setting determines the grade of Braille in which you prefer to type. To select Grade 1 Braille, press A; Grade 2 Braille, press B; and to input Computer Braille, press CorJ. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is Grade 2.


5.5.3 Advise when Braille input is required.
Using this setting will cause Keysoft to advise that it is a Braille document and that Braille input is required.
To be advised when Braille input is required, using the home row keys, press Y. For no warning, press N. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER.


5.6 Review Voice.
To examine the Review Voice settings anywhere in KeySoft, press FUNCTIONwithO for the Options Menu, then R. Press ESCAPE to leave the Review Voice settings and return to your original place in KeySoft.
The quick key for this function is FUNCTIONwithR.
There are four items associated with the Review Voice settings. These are:
Whether the speech is On, On Request, or Off;
The level of punctuation spoken by the Review Voice;
The manner in which numbers are displayed;
The volume of the delete and error alert tones.
When you select the Review Voice, you are presented with the first of the four items, and you must either accept or change the setting before moving on to the next item.


5.6.1 Speech On or Off
This option displays the current speech status; On at all times, On request, or Off. Press ENTER to accept the prompted option, or press the appropriate letter followed by ENTER to select your chosen option.
To have speech on at all times, press N. To have speech only when requested, press R. To turn all speech and sound off, with the exception of alarms, press F. These commands have the same effect as cycling through the speech options by pressing PREVIOUS with SPACE, as discussed in 1.15.4.2 Turning Speech On or Off.
If you select Speech on Request, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command that is a specific speech command. For example, in the word processor, when you move forward word by word using READwithL, nothing is spoken. However, if you use the dedicated "SpeakWordunderCursor" command, READwithK, the word under the cursor is spoken. You can use:
READwithG to read continuously;
READwith8 to read the current paragraph;
READwithK to read the current word;
READwithCOMMA to hear the current character;
REPEAT to hear a prompt.
Note that if speech is turned off when the Braille display is off, the Braille display is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.


5.6.2 Speech and Braille shortcuts.
You can easily specify whether you want speech only, Braille only or both, when you switch on the BrailleNote QT. Simply press the C4 key and as soon as it beeps, press one of the following key combinations:
Speech only:	dot2;
Braille only:	dot3;
Speech and Braille:	dots23.


5.6.3 Punctuation level
To select a different level, press a number between 1 and 5. The Factory setting is 2. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER.
The way the 5 levels treat punctuation and format indicators is described below.
Item 1) All punctuation is ignored except for '\'.
Item 2) This is the factory setting. The following punctuation is pronounced: & / > < * + ^ [ ] | \ = % $ #
Item 3) All punctuation is pronounced except for: , . ? ! ; : space, and single quotes within words.
Item 4) All punctuation is pronounced except for single spaces between words and single quotes within words. All special indicators are announced. Spaces nested between the end of a word and a period, comma, semicolon or colon are also announced. Capital letters are indicated by raising the pitch. If the first letter of a word, or all of the word is in capitals, the pitch is raised for the whole word. If a word contains an unusual mixture of capital and noncapital letters, then the pitch is raised even higher as an alert.
Item 5) All text is spelled. This level is not recommended for reviewing text, but it can be of use for other applications. When computer Braille or text is being read, capital letters are spoken by announcing "CAP" before the letter. If the whole word is in capital letters, the spelling of the word is prefixed with the announcement "CAPALL".


5.6.4 Number format
For digits, press D. For words, press W. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER.
The Factory setting is words. For word format, the number 2010 is spoken as twentyten, since it is assumed to be a date. The sequence $20.15 is spoken as "twentydollarsand15cents.
If you select the digits option, the number 2010 is spoken digit by digit. The choice is a matter of personal preference and may depend upon the document with which you are working.


5.6.5 Delete Alert Tone Volume.
The delete tone sounds when characters are deleted with either the BACKSPACE or any delete option. The delete tone does not sound when the speech is turned off To change the volume of the tone, press a number between 0 and 6. 0disables the tone; 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


5.6.6 Error Alert Tone Volume
The error tone sounds when you press an invalid key combination, or make some other error. The delete tone does not sound when the speech is turned off. To change the volume of the tone, press a number between 0 and 6. O disables the tone; 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


5.6.7 Progress tones
Progress tones are there to let you know a page is loading or a download is progressing normally. To change the volume of the tone, type a number between 0 and 6. Zero disables the tone, 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


5.7 Visual Display.
Using and connecting a visual display is described in page 2.11 Using a Visual Display. To select visual display, press FUNCTIONwithO, then V.


5.8 Next Appointment.
To find your next appointment, press FUNCTIONwithO, then N for the "Nextappointment" option.
The appointment details are displayed. When you are finished, press ADVANCE to return to the point at which you selected the Options menu. See also 9.6.2 Checking Your Next Appointment.
The quick key for this function is FUNCTIONwithN.


5.9 Power and Battery Status.
To determine the power and battery status, press FUNCTIONwithO, then P. See also 2.3 Checking Power Status.


5.10 User Guide.
To access the User Guide, press FUNCTIONwithO, then U.
Accessing the User Guide is fully described in 1.21 User Guide.


5.11 Insertion.
The "Insertion" item only appears on the Options menu when you are in a KeySoft function where insertion is possible. For example, if you are in the Main Menu, it will not appear, but it will when in a document in KeyWord.
This item takes you to a menu with several options:
Time,
Date,
Calculator Result,
Unicode Character,
File (only when in KeyMail)
The quick command to go directly to the Insertion Menu is FUNCTIONwithA.


5.11.1 Insert Date or Time.
To insert the time, press FUNCTIONwithA then T.
To insert the date, press FUNCTIONwithA then D.
After choosing to insert the date, you are asked if you want to insert the current date or the printing date. To insert today's date, press T. To insert the printing date, press P, and an "Insert date" marker is placed in the document. When the document is printed, the date on the day of printing is automatically inserted.


5.11.2 Insert Calculator Result.
To insert the calculator result, press FUNCTIONwithA then C.
You are asked if you want to insert the calculator result or the whole calculation. To insert the result, press R. To insert the whole calculation, press C. For example, if the calculation was 3+4=7, pressing R would enter 7 in the document.
Pressing C would enter 3+4=7 into the document.


5.11.3 Insert Unicode Character.
To insert a Unicode character, press FUNCTIONwithA then U.
After choosing to insert a Unicode character, KeySoft will prompt for the character. Lets assume you want to enter an "e acute." Type "e acute" at the prompt for the Unicode character. KeySoft will respond with the character "cap e acute," so press SPACE to find the next "e acute" character. When the desired character is displayed, press ENTER to insert the character.
The Quick Key for inserting a Unicode character is FUNCTIONwithX.
For more information, see also.


5.12 Repeat and Spell.
To repeat the prompt with the important parts spelled out, press FUNCTIONwithO, then S for "Spell."
You are returned to your original place in KeySoft. This is like repeating an announcement, but with more detail.
The quick key for this function is FUNCTIONwithL.


5.13 Hear Punctuation.
To reveal the most detail, you can repeat the last prompt with full punctuation and spaces. To do this, press FUNCTIONwithO, then H for "Hearpunctuation."
You are returned to your original place in KeySoft. See also 1.15.4.5 Repeating an Announcement.
The quick key for this function is FUNCTIONwithP.


5.14 Move to Another Task.
KeySoft allows you to move directly from one KeySoft task to another without returning to the Main Menu. You can switch between the Word processor, Scientific Calculator, Planner, Address List, EMail, Book Reader, Browser, Media Player and Terminal for Screen Reader. For example, if you are writing a document and you need an address, you can switch directly to the Address List, look up the address, and then return to the Word processor. You are placed back at the same point in your document.
The following hot keys are available for switching tasks:
To select the Word processor press FUNCTIONwith4;
To select the Scientific Calculator press FUNCTIONwith5;
To select the Planner press FUNCTIONwith6;
To select the Address List press FUNCTIONwith7;
To select the Email system press FUNCTIONwith8;
To select the Book Reader press FUNCTIONwith9;
To select the Terminal for Screen Reader press FUNCTIONwithB;
To select the Internet browser, press FUNCTIONwith0(zero);
To select the Media Player, press FUNCTIONwithM.
There is also a Task menu available. To access this, either:
1. Press FUNCTIONwithO for the Options menu then Mfor Move to another task, or
2. PressFunctionwithS.
KeySoft displays: "Taskmenu."
You can make a selection by either:
1. Review the menu items using SPACEorADVANCEand select one by pressingNEXTorENTER. or,
2. Press the initial letter of the task; for example, Wfor Word Processor.
Remember that, if necessary, you can always get back to the Main Menu by pressing MENU.



5.15 Front Thumb Keys On/Off.
If you are travelling in a car or public transport, you may wish to turn off the front thumb keys to prevent their accidental activation.
press FUNCTIONwithO, then F.
This is an On/Off toggle command; in other words it will alternate between on and off each time you press FUNCTIONwithO, then F. When the thumb keys are off, a beep will sound when any thumb key is pressed, providing the speech is on.


5.16 Change Speech Volume Rate and Pitch.
The Options Menu reminds you how to change the speech volume, rate and pitch. The following commands can be used from anywhere in KeySoft:
To speak louder, press FUNCTIONwithPERIOD;
To speak softer, press FUNCTIONwithCOMMA;
To speak faster, press FUNCTIONwithEQUALS;
To speak slower, press FUNCTIONwithDASH;
To increase speech pitch, press SHIFTwithFUNCTIONwithEQUALS;
To decrease speech pitch, press SHIFTwithFUNCTIONwithDASH.
There are 32 volumes, 16 speeds and 16 pitches, and they change one step at each key press.
This is the end of the Options Menu.


5.17 Editing at a Prompt.
When you type in response to a KeySoft prompt, you can edit your input with KeyWord commands. You might read on the Braille display what you have typed before you press ENTER. If you find a mistake, you can use the touch cursor to position the cursor on the character where you want to start editing. You can edit your input with these standard commands:
Delete character before cursor:	BACKSPACE;
Delete character at cursor:	CONTROLwithCOMMA,orDELETE;
Delete word at cursor:	CONTROLwithK;
Delete word before cursor:	CONTROLwithJ;
Delete to end of entry:	CONTROLwithI.
You can also use these commands to edit the lastused entry that KeySoft offers at various points. For example, you may have two documents named: "ExpensesQuarter1," and "ExpensesQuarter2." Let's assume you had previously been working with "ExpensesQuarter1." When you go to open the second document, KeySoft prompts: "Documenttoopen?ExpensesQuarter1."
Instead of typing a whole new name, you could use the review and edit commands to change the "1" into "2". Find "1," press the associated touch cursor button, then press CONTROLwithCOMMA,orDELETE to delete the character at the cursor and press 2. You are done entering the document name. Press ENTER, and the document "ExpensesQuarter2" will be opened.
Note that an existing string can be edited only if your first action is a reading or editing command. If you press even one letter, the whole existing string is replaced by your new entry.
When using speech, you can make use of the READwithK and READwithI commands to review the prompt.



6 Embossing and Printing Documents.
If an embosser or printer is connected to your BrailleNote QT, you can emboss or print documents and email, as well as parts of the planner and address list.
The embossing option can be used for either Braille or text documents, the latter being automatically translated before embossing. Similarly, the print option can be used for text or Braille documents.
Set up options are provided for both embossers and printers, and the use of test documents is described. The selection and operation of embossers and printers is outside the scope of this user guide.


6.1 Setting Up the Embosser or Printer.
You can emboss or print from the BrailleNote QT's serial, parallel or infrared ports. The BrailleNote QT's serial, parallel and infrared ports were described in 2.7 Ports. Selecting the appropriate port for your embosser or printer hardware is described later, in 6.6.6 Embosser Port.
You can print or emboss using BrailleNote QT's infrared port if you have an IrDA equipped printer or embosser or you have an IrDA compatible accessory such as the JETEYE printer adapter. If a JETEYE printer adapter is used it also needs to be set up. BrailleNote QT's infrared port needs to face the infrared port on the printer or embosser or adapter at a distance of up to three feet (1 meter). The JETEYE printer adapter's port is at the rounded corner of the housing. The infrared ports do not have to be lined up exactly because the infrared beam is quite wide. After a little experimentation, you will be able to determine the most convenient arrangement of equipment that works reliably.


6.2 Printing a Braille Document.
When a Braille translation is involved during printing or embossing, the page numbers to be embossed or printed may be nominated. For example, if the Braille document contains 6 pages each marked by "NewPage" markers, these same 6 pages can be printed on the ink printer. This feature may either be on a documentbydocument basis or can be set to apply to all newly created documents.
To access this feature on a documentbydocument basis, open the document and go to the Format menu, Ink Print Settings, Translation Options, and move through the list to the "SuppressNewPageMarkers"item. Set the "Suppressnewpagemarkers" to "No" which means that new page markers in a Braille document will cause new pages in the print document.
If you want this to be the default setting for all newly created documents, from the Main Menu go to the File Menu, Translate File, Back Translation Options. The "SuppressNewPageMarkers" option is the sixth item in this list. Set it to "No." if you want a onetoone correspondence between Braille pages marked with a new page marker and the translated print page.


6.3 Embossing or Printing a Document.
The procedures for printing and embossing are exactly the same, except for the prompts that refer to either "print" or "emboss." To avoid repetition, we only discuss embossing.
To emboss a document, start at the KeyWord Menu and select "EmbossaDocument."KeySoft prompts: "EmbossorSetupembosser?"
The Emboss option leads to a series of prompts to select and emboss a document. The Set Up option allows the BrailleNote QT to be matched to the embosser.
Assuming that the embosser has already been set up, you can proceed to emboss a document. Press E for Emboss, and KeySoft prompts: "Foldername?"
If the document you want is not on the current drive, press UPARROW or BACKSPACE and select the new drive, then choose the folder and file names. KeySoft prompts: "Embosserready?
When you reach the "EmbosserReady?"prompt for the first time in a session, it is a good idea to turn the embosser off, then on again. This ensures that its memory is cleared, and avoids spurious characters at the top of the page.
To emboss just one copy of the whole document, press Y for Yes. Embossing starts and you are returned to the KeyWord menu.
If an embosser connected to the serial port produces random characters or nothing at all, the communications parameters are wrongly set. These can be changed from the Embosser Set Up List. This list is explained in 6.6 The Embosser Setup List.


6.4 Embossing Options.
If you only want to emboss certain pages, or you want several copies, then reply to the "EmbosserReady?" prompt by pressing N for No. There follows a list of 3 settings that you may want to change. KeySoft prompts: "Startpagenumber?"
Enter the page number to start embossing from and press ENTER.The suggested setting is the first page. To check the page number range for the document, press HELP. After this setting, KeySoft prompts: "Finishpagenumber?"
Enter the page number to finish embossing at and press ENTER. The suggested setting is the last page. KeySoft prompts: Numberofcopies?PressEnterforone"
The suggested setting is one. Type the number of copies you require and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "EmbosserReady?"
Press Y and the embosser should start immediately.
KeySoft provides a means of pausing or abandoning output from BrailleNote QT to an embosser. However many modern embossers store large amounts of data in their memory. This allows your BrailleNote QT to transfer the data almost instantaneously. Your chances of stopping the transfer of a large amount of information once started are slight. You are left with the only option of turning off the power to the embosser to flush the unwanted data. However if your embosser does not have a large memory the ability to pause or abandon embossing is still useful. To pause or abandon embossing once started you must select the "EmbossaDocument" option from the KeyWord menu again. KeySoft now prompts: "Embossing(name),"
where name is the name of the document being embossed. To emboss another document press ENTER. To pause embossing, press SPACE. KeySoft displays: "Embossingof(name)Paused."
To restart embossing, press SPACE again.
To abandon embossing the current document, press CONTROLwithIfollowed by ESCAPE to exit. You are returned to the KeyWord Menu.


6.5 Embossing a Group of Documents.
You may wish to emboss or print all documents with a certain group of characters in their names. To accomplish this, wild card characters can be included in a document name. For details of wild card use, refer to 14.11 Groups of Files and Wild Cards.
As an example, entering the document name "NOTES," followed by the single character wild card, which is ?, would cause all these documents to be selected:
NOTES1;
NOTES2;
NOTES3.
You can also emboss or print all the documents in one folder. To do this, proceed as for a single document, but at the document name prompt, press *, which is the multicharacter wild card. Remember that HELP provides a convenient list of the options available.


6.6 The Embosser Setup List.
When an embosser is first connected to the BrailleNote, the embosser setup list should be checked and the settings changed if necessary. You need to know about the paper size, the type of feed, and so on. If you plan to use an embosser with a serial interface, you will also need to know its serial communications parameters before you can complete the setup.
Once KeySoft has been set up for the embosser for the first time, it is strongly recommended that you emboss a test document as described in 6.7 Testing the Embosser.
To check or change the Embosser Setup List, start at the "EmbossorSetUp?"prompt and press S for Set up. KeySoft prompts: "EmbosserSetUpList."
To move along the list without changing values, press SPACEorADVANCE repeatedly. To move back along the list without changing values, press BACKorBACKSPACE repeatedly. You can change settings by entering an appropriate new setting and pressing ENTER. The items in the Embosser Setup List are as follows:


6.6.1 Paper Length and Page Width.
These two prompts are for the length and the width of the paper used in the embosser, measured in embossed lines and cells. Typical values are 25 and 40, but if you are not absolutely sure, use the test document described in 6.7 Testing the Embosser to determine what these settings should be.


6.6.2 Use Form Feeds Between Pages.
The factory setting for this item is Yes.


6.6.3 Pause After Each Page.
For automatic sheet feeding or continuous stationery, leave this item at the factory setting of No. If you have to feed individual sheets into the embosser, you should set it to Yes. When you are actually using the embosser, load a new sheet when prompted to do so, and press ENTER to continue.


6.6.4 Does Your Embosser Emboss Both Sides of the Page.
If your embosser embosses both sides of the paper, you should set this item to Yes. Otherwise, leave it set to the factory setting of "No." If you want to emboss a particular document singlesided, the appropriate setting should be changed in the Document Layout list, not here. This is described in 7.17.8 Layout of a Braille Document.


6.6.5 Page Offset.
This defines the position of the left margin of the embossing, in cells from the left edge of the paper. It is like an overall left margin which affects all embossing. The factory setting is zero. Values from 0 to 50 are allowable.


6.6.6 Embosser Port.
You can select any of the following ports on the back of your BrailleNote QT as the embosser port:
Parallel port; the large D connector, press Pthen ENTER.
Serial port; the small D connector, press Sthen ENTER.KeyWord confirms this setting by displaying: "SerialcableonCOM1."
Infrared port, press Ithen ENTER. KeyWord confirms this setting by displaying: "Infraredport."
If you choose the parallel port or the infrared port, this is the end of the Embosser Setup List. Exit the list by pressing ESCAPE, confirm any changes you have made, and you are placed back at the "EmbossorSetUp?"prompt. If you have made any changes, you are strongly advised to use the test document to check the embosser setup.
If you plan to use an embosser connected to the serial port on the back of the BrailleNote QT, press S at the "EmbosserPort?"prompt. There are 4 further items in the Embosser Setup List, relating to the serial connection, as follows.


6.6.7 Baud Rate.
You can type a standard baud rate to suit the embosser, or to step through the available rates, press SPACEwithst,dots3,4.


6.6.8 Parity.
The options are N,E,or O, for None, Even, or Odd parity respectively. Press ENTER to complete the entry. NumberofDataBits?
The options are7 or 8. Press ENTER to complete the entry.

6.6.9 Handshaking.
Responses are S for software handshaking, or H for hardware, then press ENTER to complete the entry. This setting determines the way in which the embosser instructs KeySoft to start and stop the flow of data so that it can keep up. Software handshaking is sometimes known as XON/XOFF handshaking.
This is the end of the Embosser Setup List for the serial port option. To exit the list, press SPACEwithE. You are asked to confirm any changes you have made and you are then returned to the "EmbossorSetUp?"prompt. If you have made any changes, you should use the test document to check the embosser setup.

6.7 Testing the Embosser.
Once KeySoft has been set up for the embosser, it is strongly recommended that you carry out a test. This can be very instructive because embossers behave in various ways, and may have internal settings which are not obvious. Common problems are incorrect page length or width settings, which result in lines occasionally overflowing onto the next line, or pages with only one or two lines embossed on them.
The only foolproof check is a real test. KeySoft is supplied with two test documents for this purpose, and we strongly recommend that you use them when the embosser is first connected, or if changes are made to its setup.
To emboss the first test document, start from the Main Menu and press W for the Word processor, then E for Emboss a document, and E for Emboss. Select the General folder, and then the document called "Embosser Test A." Proceed to emboss this single page and examine the result. The first line consists of a repeated sequence of the letters A to J. The number of repeats in the top line, plus the last character, indicates how many cells can be embossed across the page. For example, if there are 3 full repeats, and the last letter is I, you know that 39 cells can be embossed across the width of the page.
Sometimes an embosser cannot emboss the far lefthand side of the page, and misses the first one or two cells, so you should also check that the first character of the first line is the letter A. If not, note how many cells are missing and put this number in the Page Offset setting in the Embosser Setup list. Then repeat "Embosser Test A" to find the true embossed width of the page.
Now emboss the second document, called "Embosser Test B." This consists of two pages, with a number at the beginning of each line. The lines are numbered sequentially. Check the number on the last line on the first page, which might be 24, for example. This is the number of lines that can be embossed on a page.
Return to the Embosser Setup list and set the Paper Length and Paper Width to the values determined in the tests. This completes the Embosser setup. You should not need to change the settings in the Embosser Setup List, or carry out the embosser test again, unless a different type of embosser or paper is used.


6.8 The Printer SetUp List.
This list contains similar items to the embosser setup list, with some differences. There is no doublesided option, and there is an additional item called "PrinterType," which determines how the font commands embedded in your text are translated for the printer. The "standard" option is programmed into KeySoft and this is suitable for most printers if you do not require any special fonts. If you require Bold and Italics to be printed you should choose a driver appropriate to your printer. If you want to change the Printer Type, press Y and ENTER, and KeySoft prompts: "Printername?PressEnterfor(name)"
Select a printer name in the same way as choosing a filename, by pressing SPACE repeatedly to review the list of files and selecting one by pressing ENTER. Printer Types for a range of popular printers are included in a folder on the KeySoft System Disk called "Printers." If your printer model is not in the list, it will probably print special fonts correctly if you select "HP DeskJet and LaserJet."


6.9 Testing the Printer.
There are two printer test documents that may be used to check the printer setup, in a similar way to the embosser. You may require sighted assistance to check the results of this test.
Print the first document, called "PrinterTestA." Check the top line, which consists of the repeated sequence of the digits 1through9andzero. Use the number of full repeats and the final digit to determine the number of printable columns across the width of the page. If a number of digits are missing at the start of the line, set the Page Offset to this number and run "PrinterTestA" again to determine the printable page width.
Print the second test document, called "PrinterTestB," and count the number of lines that can be printed on a page.
Return to the Printer Setup list, and set the Paper Length and Paper Width to the values determined in the tests. This completes the tests. You should not need to change the settings in the Printer Setup List, or carry out the printer test again, unless a different type of printer or paper is used.



7 Advanced Word Processing.
This chapter describes some of the advanced features of KeyWord that allow you to create documents with more complex formats, and quickly make extensive changes to a document. It also discusses the embossing of text documents and handling documents of differing types, such as Braille or Microsoft Word.
The content of this chapter is probably one of the more involved in the BrailleNote User Guide, but the elegance of KeyWord is such that often the default format settings more than adequately cover document formatting needs. It is suggested that you read the overview presented in the next section, and confine your initial reading of the remaining sections to areas of specific interest to you. As you become more familiar with KeyWord, revisit specific sections to maximize your understanding and use of the BrailleNote.


7.1 Overview.
This chapter starts by defining the difference between "text" and "Braille" documents and how the BrailleNote QT handles them. A text document is prepared for presentation in inkprint format. A Braille document is usually prepared for presentation in embossed or refreshable braille form.
We then look at how the format of a text document, that is an inkprint style document, is controlled. Here we consider Line layout, Page settings, and commands for centering, justifying, underlining, and changing font types.
Next we consider the parameters associated with taking a text document, and performing the "onthefly" translation of this document to provide output to a Braille embosser.
Following that is a section on Block commands, looking at the capability to quickly manipulate large blocks of text and generate form letters.
Next are several sections on ways to make it easier to read a document's content, inserting dates, times and calculator results, binding spaces and pasting details from the Address list.
Saving a document to the same or a different disk drive is covered next, along with abandoning the document without saving changes. The procedure to save documents as different document types is also discussed.
KeyWord's ability to create and open text documents is looked at next, together with the "onthefly" translation of these documents for Braille embossing.
Finally, there is saving and restoring default format settings for a document and Unicode character support for extended characters.


7.2 Document Types.
By default, documents created by BrailleNote QT are stored in "KeyWord Text" format, and are referred to as text documents. BrailleNote QT can also create and open documents that have other file types. For example, Braille documents, Microsoft Word, Rich Text Format, ASCII, WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS, and KeySoft Version 2 Braille and text.
For the purposes of this chapter, the term text document encompasses all file types except Braille documents. That is, KeyWord Text, Microsoft Word, Rich Text Format, ASCII, WordPerfect 5.1, and KeySoft Version 2 Text documents are all considered to be text documents.
Text documents are often created to share information via the inkprint medium, or via a computer screen. As such, the page and line layout of a text document is often related to standard paper sizes handled by inkprint printers.
Braille documents, on the other hand, are usually created with the intention of being embossed on Braille paper, or read on an electronic Braille display.
One of KeyWord's unique features is the ability to open and create documents of different types. Documents created on the BrailleNote QT are predominantly KeyWord Text documents. These documents can be 'seamlessly' shared with other products in the BrailleNote family, printed on an ink print printer, or output to a Braille embosser. Embossing a KeyWord Text document is as simple as choosing the embosser option rather than the ink printer option.
KeyWord can save documents to any of the file types listed earlier. These documents can be reviewed and edited using standard commands. Because KeyWord can open these differing document types, you can directly open a Microsoft Word document, for example, review and edit its contents, and make a print or Braille copy of the document or parts thereof.
Braille documents can be opened or created, and reviewed and edited from the BrailleNote QT's computer style keyboard. Eight keys on the home row of the keyboard are used for Braille input, so a Grade 2 or Grade 1 Braille document can be supported. Embossing or printing a Braille document is as simple as choosing either the embosser or printer option from the KeyWord Menu.


7.3 Formatting a Text Document.
The format of a text document, that is an inkprint style document, is determined by the settings in the Layout List, the Page Settings List, and by individual commands for centering, justifying, underlining, and changing font types.
The settings associated with taking a text document, and performing the "onthefly" translation of this document to provide output to a Braille embosser, are determined by the items in the Presentation Style List, and the Braille Settings Menu.
The preparation of "Templatedocuments"for use with the address list and text files is controlled from the Template Menu.
In the following discussion a paragraph is defined as a group of words that end with a new line indicator.


7.3.1 Layout List.
The Layout List allows you to review and change options that control the layout or formatting of the text document, such as tabs, indents, page numbering, etc. Pressing CONTROLwithL accesses the Layout List for a text document. It is described in 7.3.10 Layout of a Text Document.


7.3.2 Page Settings List.
The Page Settings List allows you to review or change the page layout of the text document. Pressing CONTROLwithP accesses the Page Settings List for a text document. It is described in 7.3.12 Page Settings for a Text Document.


7.3.3 Center a line.
This command centers a line or paragraph. The Center line command is CONTROLwithE. It is described in 7.3.13 Center a Line.


7.3.4 Right justify a line.
This command aligns a line or paragraph so that each line ends at the right margin. The Right justify line command is CONTROLwithR. It is described in 7.3.14 Right Justify a Line.


7.3.5 Underlining.
This command underlines text. The Underlining command is CONTROLwithU. It is described in 7.3.15 Underlining.


7.3.6 Font.
This command selects fonts used for text. The Font command is CONTROLwithT. It is described in 7.3.16 Font.


7.3.7 Style of presentation.
Styles of presentation are used when a text document is translated and reformatted into a Braille document, for example, before being embossed. They allow you to control the way paragraphs; headings, etc. are formatted in the Braille document independently of the text document's formatting. Pressing CONTROLwithY accesses the Presentation Style List for a text document. The styles are described in 7.4.1 Style of Presentation linked with a Text Document.


7.3.8 Braille Settings.
This item allows you to review and change options that affect the way a text document is translated or reformatted as a Braille document. Pressing READwithCONTROLwithB accesses the Braille Settings Menu for a text document. It is described in 7.4.2 Braille Settings linked with a Text Document.


7.3.9 Template Menu.
This item contains options that are used when preparing a Template Document for use with the Address List. Pressing CONTROLwithA accesses the Template Menu for a text document. This is described in 10.10.2 Creating a Template.


7.3.10 Layout of a Text Document.
The Layout option presents a list of settings that determine the layout of a text document, such as the left and right margins. You can change a layout setting at any point in a document. The setting takes effect from the last new line indicator and a new layout indicator appears immediately after the new line indicator to indicate that one or more layout settings have changed at that point. On the Braille display the new layout indicator is shown as $nl. The $ sign is the same as the ed sign, dots 1246.
Remember that this indicator is never printed; it is there to indicate that the layout changes at this point. It is the effect of the layout change that will be seen when you print the document, not the indicator itself.
The New Layout affects only settings that you actually change. Settings that you do not change continue as they were in the previous paragraph. A change to a setting applies from that point until the end of the document, or until the same setting is changed again. Whether or not a setting has been changed in the current paragraph is indicated by the word "changed" or "unchanged" in the prompt for each setting. For example, if you change the Left Margin, it is displayed in the form: "LeftMargin12.(changed)"
The word "changed" indicates that settings earlier in the document do not affect the left margin of this or subsequent paragraphs. For example, a document has a suggested left margin of 10, and it contains 3 paragraphs. Assume that you change the left margin of the second paragraph to 15, so it is announced as "changed." The left margins for paragraph 1 is 10, and the left margin for paragraphs 2 and 3 is 15.
If you now set the left margin of the first paragraph to 12, the left margins are 12, 15, and 15 for paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 respectively. Notice that the margins of the second and third paragraphs have remained at 15.
Now if you need to change the right margin for the whole document, move to the top of the document and use the Layout List to make the change. The new right margin applies to the whole document. New Layout does not affect it in the second paragraph because only the Left Margin was changed at that point.
To check or change Layout settings, position the cursor anywhere in the paragraph where you require the change and enter the Layout list by pressing CONTROLwithL. KeySoft will display: "LayoutList."
You can review the settings by pressing SPACE. Make changes by typing a new value when the current one is displayed, followed by ENTER. If a setting has been changed in this paragraph, you can clear it so that the setting in the preceding paragraph continues to take effect. To do this, use the Clear Field command, CONTROLwithBACKSPACE.
The Layout List for a text document consists of the following items:
Indent first line;
Indent rest of paragraph;
Tab stops;
Line Spacing;
Print page numbers;
Justification;
Left margin;
Right margin;
Word wrap.
The items in the Layout List are now discussed.


7.3.10.1 Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph.
These settings allow a number of indenting styles to be set up. For example, the first line of each paragraph could start with two spaces, or the whole paragraph could be indented, or a hanging indent could be used where the first line of a paragraph starts at the left margin but subsequent lines are indented.
Indent First Line causes just the first line of each paragraph to be indented from the left margin by a chosen number of spaces. Indent Rest of Paragraph causes all lines in a paragraph, except the first, to be indented by a chosen number of spaces. A whole paragraph can be indented by setting Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph to the same number of spaces. Remember that if these settings are changed, the changes apply for the remainder of the document or until the settings are changed again.
To change a setting, type the required number of spaces and press ENTER. The factory settings are zero for both Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph.
The settings for Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph are entirely independent of the Tab Settings that can also be used to indent a paragraph.


7.3.10.2 Tabs.
Tabs provide a way of moving the cursor to predetermined positions on the line, and are used primarily to align columns of text. There are 10 tab stops, numbered 1 to 10. The first is measured in columns from the left margin, and then each subsequent stop is measured from the previous one. Each tab stop has an initial setting of 5 columns, so the actual positions are 6, 11, 16, etc.
Suppose you are editing and the cursor is at column 8. Press TAB to insert a Tab indicator, which appears on the Braille display as $t, and the cursor will move to the next Tab stop, which is column 11. If you then start typing, the text starts at column 11. If you do the same on subsequent lines, a column of text is formed, starting at column 11. When the Braille display is in Editing Mode or when the cursor is on a tab indicator the $t expands to show the tab number, for example $t#2. If you want to see the effect the tab will have when you print the document use the Braille display's Layout Mode.
To review the Tab stop settings, enter the Layout List by pressingCONTROLwithL. Press SPACE or NEXT repeatedly until "Tabstops" is displayed, and press ENTER. You can then review the tab settings by, once again, pressing SPACE repeatedly. To determine which column number a particular Tab falls on, you can press READwithQ, while reviewing the Tab list.
When setting up tabs, first determine the number of columns you need and the maximum width each column must be. Now set Tab 1 to the width of the first column, Tab 2 to the width of the second column, and so on. If you later need to adjust the width of a particular column, simply change the setting for that particular tab stop. The width of all other columns remains the same, but if you increase a tab setting, check that you have not pushed a highnumbered tab stop off the page. To change a Tab stop, move to the tab stop number that you want, as if you were reviewing the setting, then type the required value and press ENTER. Make any other changes you require and then press ESCAPE.


Indenting Tabs.
Any Tab stop can be defined as an "IndentingTab. Indenting Tabs allow you to inset either a whole paragraph, or all but the first line of a paragraph. They are most often used when creating numbered lists and outlines, where the first line of each paragraph starts with a number followed by a tab and the rest of the paragraph is indented underneath that tab. The indent created by an Indenting Tab applies only to the paragraph containing the Tab. Forcing a new line by pressing ENTER releases the indent and the text continues back at the left margin. This is the main difference between Indenting Tabs and indents created using the First Line and Rest of Paragraph Indent settings described in 7.3.10.1 Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph above.
To set any particular Tab stop to be an Indenting Tab, type the letter i before the value. For instance, typing: i5, after the value of Tab 1 is spoken, makes Tab 1 an indent 5 cells in from the left margin. With an indent set in this way, you can inset a paragraph by 5 cells by pressing TAB once at the start of the paragraph and the entire paragraph is indented 5 cells. The factory setting for each Tab Stop is Indent 5.



7.3.10.3 Line spacing.
This allows single or double line spacing to be selected. To change the setting, press S for single, or D for Double.


7.3.10.4 Print Page Numbers.
You can choose to have pages automatically numbered or not as you wish. Press Y or N as required. If you do not want a number on the first page of a document, turn off the page numbering at the start of the first page, and then turn it on at the start of the second page.


7.3.10.5 Justification.
This style is used in most printed newspapers and magazines, and spreads the words out so the last character of each line is at the right margin. It gives the text a tidy appearance, with both sides of the text being straight, but spacing between some words is increased. It is a matter of preference which way you set this option. The initial setting is off. To change the setting, press N for "ON" or F for "OFF.


7.3.10.6 Left Margin.
This is the position of the left edge of the printed text, counted in columns or characters from the extreme left printing position. A left margin of 0 means that printing starts as far left as the printer can go, providing there is no additional page offset. The factory default for the left margin setting is 10.


7.3.10.7 Right Margin.
This is the position of the right edge of the text, counting back from the last column position on a line. The default setting is 10.


7.3.10.8 Word Wrap.
This is the process by which text automatically continues on the next line when there is not enough space for another word on the current line. The initial setting of Word Wrap for a new document is "ON" and, unless you plan to write computer programs using KeyWord, you will probably always leave it switched on. Computer programmers may want to switch it off and use a very large Paper Width setting to avoid carriage returns being inserted automatically in their program lines.
If word wrap is switched off, a beep sounds 10 columns before the right margin is reached, and you must decide where to start a new line by pressing ENTER. To change the word wrap setting, press N to switch it "ON" or F to switch it "OFF.
This is the last item in the Layout list. Methods of reverting to initial settings and changing initial values used for new documents are discussed in.


7.3.11 Layout Indicator.
When you change one or more layout settings, a New Layout indicator appears at the start of the paragraph to indicate that the layout has changed at that point. The new layout indicator was introduced in 3.12.1 Common Indicators. Remember that a paragraph is a group of words that ends with a new line indicator. You can locate Layout markers with the Find command, READwithF, using the search string CONTROLwithL. A Layout indicator can be deleted like any other character. This has the effect of canceling all changes made by the new layout, leaving all layout settings the same as they were in the previous paragraph.


7.3.12 Page Settings for a Text Document.
This group of settings applies to the entire current document. The Page Settings List contains 5 items, as follows:
First page number;
Paper length;
Paper width;
Top margin;
Bottom margin.
You can change the Page Settings at any point in the document, and the change applies to that whole document. Enter the Page Settings list by pressing CONTROLwithP.KeySoft displays: "PageSettingslist.
This is a list of the current settings for that document. You can review the values by pressing SPACE repeatedly. Make changes by typing a new value when the current one is displayed, followed by ENTER. To return to the document, press ESCAPE. If you have made changes, KeySoft asks: "Confirmchanges?"
Press Y to confirm the new settings, or N to abandon the changes. You are then returned to the document.
The Page Settings List for a text document consists of the following 5 items:


7.3.12.1 First Page Number.
This is the number that appears on the first page of the document, if you choose to have your pages numbered. When you create a new document this is set to 1, but if your document was just one chapter of a larger document, you might want to start numbering at a higher number.
Suppose you had typed a large report as two separate documents. The first document might contain pages 1 to 12, and the second, pages 13 onward. The first document would be printed with a "FirstPageNumber" of 1, the second with 13.


7.3.12.2 Paper Length and Width.
These settings define the length and width of the paper that is used when this document is printed.
Usually you will use your standard printer paper when printing a document and you will have already set the Page Length and Page Width settings in the Printer Setup list to the correct values for this paper, as discussed in Section6.7. In this case, leave the Paper Length and Width settings in the Page Settings List set to the standard printer settings. If you later change the size of the paper you are using in your printer, you only have to change the settings in the Printer Setup List. However, if you always want to use a special Paper Length or Page Width for a particular document, then change the settings for that document here accordingly.
If the Paper Length is set to the standard printer settings when you review the Page Settings list, the following prompt is displayed: "Paperlength?Currentlyusingthestandardprintersettingofx.
This indicates that the setting is the same as the value in the Printer Setup list. If you change the setting here in the Page Settings List, the prompt is: "Paperlength?Currentlyl.
where l is the paper length in lines. In this case the printer setting is being overridden for this document. To reset the paper length or width to match the value in the Printer Setup list, use the Clear Field command, CONTROLwithBACKSPACE.


7.3.12.3 Top and Bottom Margins.
These are the numbers of blank lines left at the top and bottom of the page when printing. The initial values for a new document are both set to 6.
These are the last items in the Page Settings list. The method of changing the initial values is discussed in 7.17.11 Initial Format Settings in a Document.


7.3.13 Center a Line.
You can position a line of text midway between the left and right margins. To do this, place the cursor anywhere on the line, and press CONTROLwithE. KeySoft will display: "Centerline"
The line of text is centered horizontally. To maintain the centering effect with long lines, text in excess of 90% of the usable page width overflows onto the next line. Centering applies to the whole of a paragraph. 


7.3.14 Right Justify a Line.
A line of text can be right justified so that the last character is positioned on the right margin. To do this, place the cursor anywhere on the line, and press CONTROLwithR. KeySoft will display: "Rightjustifyline.
Right justification applies to the whole of a paragraph. A line cannot be both centered and right justified; it can only be one or the other.


7.3.15 Underlining.
Underlining can be switched on or off at any point in the text. When switched on, it continues until an "UnderlineOff" command is encountered.
To check or change the underline status at any point, press CONTROLwithU. KeySoft prompts: "Underlineisoff"
Press ENTER to leave it off, N to turn it on, or F to turn it off. You can underline as you type, by turning it on, typing the word or passage, and then turning it off. Alternatively, you can place the cursor at appropriate points in existing text and turn underlining on or off. The Underline Start indicator is shown on the Braille display as $fsu (font, start, underline) and the Underline End indicator is shown as $feu (font, end, underline).
To remove underlining, use the Search command with the search string CONTROLwithU,N followed by ENTER to position the cursor at the Underline On indicator. Press CONTROLwithCOMMA to delete the indicator. Repeat the action using the search string CONTROLwithU,F to remove the Underline Off indicator.
If underlining is on, KeySoft displays: "Underlineon"
each time you press ENTER to start a new line, to avoid large sections of text being underlined unintentionally.


7.3.16 Font.
Most printers can produce special fonts, such as italics, bold, elongated, compressed, and subscripts, to enhance the appearance of a printed document. KeySoft allows fonts to be changed within a text document. A single letter is used to select each font. For instance, I signifies italics, B for bold, E for elongated. The full listing of fonts for any printer is contained in a document for the selected printer, which can be found in the "Printers" folder, located on the KeySoft System disk.
Before using the Font commands you should select the driver appropriate to your printer from the Printer Setup in the KeyWord menu. If the driver is not installed, you will not hear the font type. For example "FontB" would be spoken, rather than "Bold.
To check or change the font at any point, press CONTROLwithT. KeySoft prompts: "Font?"
Press a letter to select the required font. KeySoft prompts: "Font(p).Currentlyoff"
where (p) is the letter designating the chosen font. KeySoft describes the font, if it is implemented by the current printer type, as described in 6.8 The Printer SetUp List. The Font Start indicator is shown on the Braille display as $fsn where n is the type style letter. The Font End indicator is shown on the Braille display as $fen where n is the type style letter.
To turn the font on, press N. To turn it off, press F. To leave the font unchanged, press ENTER.
More than one font can apply to a passage of text. Font commands are displayed in the text when the cursor passes over them, and can be deleted like any other character.


7.4 Formatting a Text Document for Embossing.
When you compose a text document, you normally follow print layout conventions. However, when you come to emboss a text document, or translate it to a braille document as described in Chapter 13, you generally want to use different layout conventions for the embossed text. For example, new paragraphs can be indicated differently, attributes such as bold can't be used, and even the text itself can be different in places. You could translate the text document into a braille document, and then use KeyWord to format the braille document according to braille conventions, before embossing it. That task would soon become tedious, especially if you then modify the text document and have to repeat the entire process. You would also have a text and a braille version of the same document, and these could easily get out of step if you make modifications.
KeySoft therefore allows you to control the embossed layout from within the text document, so that it can be embossed directly and is formatted in braille completely independently of its text formatting. Two items: "StyleofPresentation.and "BrailleTranslationOptions" control these embossing options.


7.4.1 Style of Presentation linked with a Text Document.
KeySoft allows you to indicate various embossing styles. These do not affect the layout of the text document, but when you emboss it, or translate it to a Braille document, KeySoft uses the indicated styles to translate the layout from the text convention to a Braille convention. For example, in text you might have subheadings in bold print with a blank line before and after it. In Braille, however, you might want a subheading on a new line and indented 4 spaces.
There are 6 styles of presentation that cover the presentation styles found in most documents. These are as follows:
Paragraph;
Heading;
Subheading;
Outline;
Lines;
Identical to source.
To check or change a style, locate the cursor anywhere in the paragraph and press CONTROLwithY. KeySoft displays the style of the current section of text. If you wish to leave the Style unchanged, press ENTER. Alternatively, you can review the available Styles by pressing SPACE repeatedly and choose a new Style by pressing ENTER, or press the initial letter of your choice. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph following a New Line indicator, and a change is indicated by a "Style" indicator.
Use the styles by marking the beginning of each part of your document according to its style, whether it is a heading, subheading, paragraphs of text, an outline or numbered list, or just single lines of information, such as the address at the top of a letter. When you then emboss or translate the document, the styles are used to reformat each part appropriately. While the names represent typical uses, the format produced by each style can be altered to suit your taste or purpose. This is described in 14.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options and 14.16.10 Reviewing and Setting Forward Translation Options.
Setting styles is best done when you are typing the document but the style indicators can be added later. Get into the habit of doing it and you will have perfectly formatted embossed documents.
The Styles are now described.


7.4.1.1 Paragraph.
A blank line is placed above and below a heading. Each new print line starts a new Braille line. A blank line in a heading causes a blank line in Braille. Two or more blank lines in a heading cause the style to revert to "Paragraph.
A heading is centered in Braille. A print line can produce more than one Braille line, so a centered heading could fill the page width. This would destroy the centering effect, so lines longer than 90% of the page width overflow onto the next line. The heading style continues until another style indicator changes it, or two or more blank lines are encountered. In the latter case the style reverts to "Paragraph. Once again, this is the suggested formatting convention for headings. It can be changed by altering the Forward Translation Options as described in 14.16.10 Reviewing and Setting Forward Translation Options. The heading style indicator is $h.


7.4.1.2 Subheading.
This style starts in Braille with a new line and an indent of 4 spaces. A subheading may contain more than one line, but a single blank line terminates the style and reverts to "Paragraph"style. The subheading style indicator is $h#l.


7.4.1.3 Outline.
This style is used for simple numbered lists or more complex outlines and produces a first line that starts at the left margin. Blank lines in the text are suppressed in Braille and two or more blank lines cause the style to revert to "Paragraph. The outline style indicator is $ou.


7.4.1.4 Lines.
This style is for a series of separate lines all starting at the left margin. Any overflow onto the following line is indented by 2 spaces. The "Lines" style might be used to format the address at the top of a letter, for example. Another style indicator, or two or more blank lines causes the style to revert to "Paragraph. The line style indicator is $sl. 


7.4.1.5 Identical to Source.
Use this style to preserve the layout of a section in a text document when it is embossed or translated to a Braille document. This style continues in effect until another style is set. The identical to Source style indicator is $si.


7.4.2 Braille Settings linked with a Text Document.
These settings can be used when you are editing a text document to control the format of the document when it is Brailed, or translated to a Braille document. To access the Braille Settings menu when you are editing a text document, press READwithCONTROLwithB. You can review the list and select an item in the same way as all KeySoft menus. The Braille Settings menu contains the following 8 items:
Layout;
Inclusion;
Start Braille exclusion;
End Braille exclusion;
Braille Grade;
Page settings;
Translation options;
Control Translation;
These items are discussed now.


7.4.2.1 Braille Layout.
The settings for a text document, such as left and right margin, are accessed by selecting the Layout List, with CONTROLwithL. In contrast, when you are preparing a text document for embossing or translation, you may need to check or change the settings that are used for embossing. These can be accessed from the Braille Settings menu by selecting Layout.
The Braille Layout list contains a similar group of settings to the text list, including indents, left and right margins, tabs, page number enabling, line spacing and word wrap, but the values are for embossing. The initial values for new documents are Left and Right Margins 0 cells, and Tab Stops of 3.
Values that you set in the Braille Layout are used when your text document is embossed on a Braille printer, or translated to a Braille document. They do not affect the layout of the text document. A change to the Braille layout is shown in a print document by the indicator $nlb.


7.4.2.2 Braille only Inclusion.
You may want to include text or formatting commands in the embossed version that are not required in the text version. For example, you could add an explanatory note, italicize a word, or force a new page. To do this, select the "Inclusion" option in the Braille Settings Menu. KeySoft prompts: "Brailleonlyinclusion?"
In response to this prompt, type the text that you want to appear in the Braille version and press ENTER. You can also include the following formatting commands:
New line:	press CONTROLwithENTER;
New page:	press CONTROLwithN;
Tab:	press TAB;
Center line:	press CONTROLwithE;
Right justify line:	press CONTROLwithR.
You can review the document for inclusion markers, and delete them like any other character. To review or edit the text of an inclusion, position the cursor on the inclusion marker and select the Inclusion option again. The Braille inclusion marker is shown as $ob on the Braille display.


7.4.2.3 Braille Exclusion.
Conversely, there may be text or formatting commands in the text document that you may want to exclude from the Braille version. This is done by marking the start and end of the text or formatting commands you want excluded, as follows: With the cursor at the required point, select "StartBrailleexclusion" from the Braille Settings menu. KeyWord marks the position with a special "StartBrailleexclusion" indicator$xbs.Now type the text or formatting commands that you do not want to appear in the Braille version, and select "EndBrailleexclusion"from the Braille Settings menu. KeyWord marks the position with a special "EndBrailleexclusion" indicator xbe.
Note that you can also add these markers to existing text, if you wish.


7.4.2.4 Braille Grade.
When a text document is embossed or translated into a Braille document, your Preferred Reading Grade setting is used. This setting is in the Braille Display Options item on the Options Menu. However, you may need to override this grade for a particular passage, for example, if your document contains an email address, you want computer Braille used for the email address when the document is translated into Braille. The Braille grade setting appears on the Braille display as $g#n where n is the grade; 0, 1, or 2, with grade 0 indicating computer Braille.
To have a word or passage appear in a different grade, select the Braille Grade option, select the required grade, type the relevant passage, and then repeat the procedure to restore the grade. This option can also be used to change the grade into which a passage of existing text is translated.
For Grade one, press 1. For Grade two, press 2. For computer Braille, press C. For your preferred reading grade, press P. To leave the option unchanged, just press ENTER.


7.4.2.5 Braille Page Settings.
This group of settings applies to the entire current text document if it is embossed, and consists of the same 5 items as the Page Settings for a Text document, namely:
First page number;
Paper length;
Paper width;
Top margin;
Bottom margin.
The suggested values for Paper Length and Width follow the values in the Embosser Setup List, and a prompt indicates if a setting is changed. The Braille Page Settings indicator is $psb and ispositioned at the top of the document.


7.4.2.6 Translation Options.
This group of 11 settings affects the way in which a particular presentation style in a text document appears in the corresponding translated or embossed version. They are collectively referred to as the BrailleTranslationOptionsList. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph, and can be changed at chosen points throughout the document. The initial values are covered in 14.16.10 Reviewing and Setting Forward Translation Options, as well as other translation settings that are not available while editing.
To access the Braille translation options in a text document, press READwithCONTROLwithB, then T for Translation options. KeySoft displays: "Brailletranslationoptionslist.
The settings are as follows:
What type of paragraph boundary is used in the source document?
Interpret larger boundaries as paragraphs also?
New Line translation option?
Convert italics font to Braille italics?
Suppress multiple spaces?
Suppress New Page markers?
Ignore Tabs?
Include capital signs?
Suppress blank lines in Outline style?
Revert to paragraph style after how many blank lines?
Translation find and replace.
The last item allows you to replace a particular formatting sequence with another, as part of the translation process. For example, the text document might use two New Line markers to separate paragraphs, and these could be replaced by 3 spaces in Braille.
To achieve this last scenario you would first move onto the Translationfindandreplace option. At the Find? prompt, press CONTROLwithENTER twice to look for 2 New Line Markers, followed by ENTER to end the find sequence. You will then be prompted for the Replacementfor2newlines?at which point you can press CONTROLwithSPACE 3 times, followed by ENTER.
A Braille Translation Option within a text document is indicated by the marker $txb. 


7.4.2.7 Control Translation.
This option provides control over how fractions, Roman numerals, dates, and math appearing in the text document are treated in the corresponding translated or embossed version.
To access the Control Translation options in a text document, press READwithCONTROLwithB, then C for Control Translation options. KeySoft displays: "TranslatorControloption.
To step through the available options press CONTROLwithSPACE, and press ENTER to select an option. The available options are:
Fractions On/Off;
Roman Numerals On/Off;
Date On/Off;
Math On/Off.


7.5 Block Commands.
The ability to manipulate blocks of text is an invaluable editing aid because it lets you mark a passage and delete it, move it, or copy it. This saves typing time and avoids the introduction of new typing errors. Blocks can be moved from one location to another within a document, copied repeatedly throughout a document, or transferred from one document to another. A block can be copied from one KeySoft task to another. For example, you can copy text between the Word Processor, Planner, Email and Address List.
A "block" of text means any continuous section of text. A block can be any size from a single character, a few words, a sentence, a couple of paragraphs, all the way up to an entire document. You define a block of text by marking one end and then moving the cursor to the other end of the block. If you want to keep the block marked for future reference you can insert markers at each end of the block. You can then move or copy the marked block in a threestep procedure:
1. Move or copy the block to the clipboard;
2. Move to where you want to insert the block;
3. Paste the clipboard to the required place in the text.
The clipboard is simply a temporary storage place for the block of text. It is provided automatically when you use a command that requires the clipboard. The word "paste"comes from the old practice of cutting out a section of printed text from its page and pasting it back in a different place.


7.5.1 Block Commands Menu.
This menu provides all the commands needed to mark a block and manipulate it. These Block Commands are accessed through the Block Commands Menu, which you can enter by pressing CONTROLwithB. There are 13 items in the menu, in order as follows:
Append block to clipboard;
Copy block to clipboard;
Delete block;
Insert file;
Move block to clipboard;
Paste clipboard;
Read block;
Store block;
Top marker insertion;
Bottom marker insertion;
Erase file and exit Keyword;
Zap, erase the block markers;
Grade. Correct Braille grade of block.
Items on the menu can be selected in either of the usual ways.


7.5.2 Marking a Block.
Before performing any block operation, you must define the block. Marking the top and bottom of the text you wish to manipulate does this, or alternatively you can mark one end of the block of text and move the cursor to the other. Follow these steps to mark a block:
1. Move the cursor onto the first character you want included in the block.
2.  Enter the Block Commands Menu by pressing CONTROLwithB
3. Select the "Topmarkerinsertion" option. You are returned to the document and a marker appears in the document to indicate the top of the block. The marker is $blt.
4. Now move the cursor just past the last character you want included in the block. You are now ready to enter the Block Commands Menu and move, copy, or delete the block of text. Alternatively, you can enter a bottom block marker, so that the chosen block remains defined. The marker is dollar sign blb.
Another way of marking a block is with a Quick Mark command. These commands automatically mark a character, word, sentence, line, paragraph or section. Just position the cursor, select the Block Menu and use the following commands:
Mark character under cursor,	press READwithCOMMA;
Mark word under cursor,	press READwithK;
Mark sentence under cursor,	press READwithI;
Mark paragraph under cursor,	press READwith8.
The selection of sentences and paragraphs can be changed to lines and sections by the Reading Mode, as described in 3.10.3 Cursor Movement Modes.
Although it is called "TopofBlock" it does not matter which way around you mark a block of text. Only one block can be marked within a document at a time. To move the block marker, just mark a different position. You can check the position of the block marker by reviewing the text with commands such as reading forward a word using READwithL.You can perform other editing functions without affecting the block marker. It is even saved with a document.


7.5.3 Read Block.
You can have KeySoft speak a block of text to check that you have marked it correctly. To read a block, press CONTROLwithB, for the Block Menu, then R,for "Read.KeySoft says, "Blockread,speaks the text in the block and returns you to the Block Menu. Like the other reading commands, you can press READwithSPACE at any time to stop the cursor at that point, or press ESCAPE to abandon the reading and move the cursor to its final position.


7.5.4 Copy Block to Clipboard.
This command allows you to copy a block of text to the clipboard. To do this, first mark the block of text you wish to copy. Then enter the Block Commands Menu, select the "Copyblocktoclipboard" option and the marked block of text is copied into the clipboard replacing any text already in there. The original text and the cursor position remain unchanged.
Block commands can take a few seconds if a large block of text is involved.


7.5.5 Append Block to Clipboard.
This command is similar to "CopyBlocktoClipboard. The difference is that the marked block of text is added to, or appended to, the current contents of the clipboard instead of replacing it. This allows you to build up a phrase or a list of items in the clipboard. To append a block to the clipboard, first mark a block of text. Then enter the Block Commands Menu, select "Appendblocktoclipboard, and the marked block of text is copied into the clipboard and placed after any existing contents. The original text, including the block markers and the position of the cursor remains unchanged.


7.5.6 Move Block to Clipboard.
This command allows you to remove or cut a block of text from its place in the document, and put it into the clipboard. To do this, first mark the block you wish to move. Then, enter the Block Commands Menu, select"Moveblocktoclipboard"and the marked block of text is removed from the document and placed in the clipboard replacing any text already there.


7.5.7 Paste Clipboard.
This command allows you to copy the contents of the clipboard into a document. Before using the "Paste"command, you should have copied or moved the required block of text into the clipboard. To paste the clipboard, position the cursor at the exact spot that the first character of the text in the clipboard should appear. This can be in the original document, or you can exit the original document and select another.
Enter the Block Commands Menu, select "Pasteblock, and the text in the clipboard is inserted at the cursor position. The cursor is on the first character of the pasted block, and the word under the cursor is spoken. There is no block marker in the pasted text.
The original text and the cursor position remain unchanged by the pasting operation. This allows you to paste the same block of text to various places without needing to copy or move the block to the clipboard again.
The contents of the clipboard are preserved while you carry out any other functions with the BrailleNote QT. For example, you can copy a passage to the clipboard, select the Planner, then return to the Word Processor and the clipboard contents are unchanged.
If necessary, the contents of the clipboard are translated to suit the type of document it is being pasted into. This means that you can directly paste a section of a text document into a Braille document, for example, and the text is translated into Braille of the grade in use at the insertion point.


7.5.8 Delete Block.
This function completely removes a marked block from your document. It is useful for deleting large amounts of text. To delete a block, first mark the block of text you wish to delete. Then enter the Block Commands Menu and select "Deleteblock. KeySoft prompts: "Deleteblock.Sure?To confirm the deletion, press Y, or, if you decide not to delete the block, pressN.


7.5.9 Changes to Text Format.
When you paste a passage into an existing document, make sure that any spaces at the beginning or end are correct. The most common problems are too few spaces at the beginning, or too many at the end. The marked block can contain formatting indicators like New Page indicators, and these are copied or moved and pasted with the block. The exceptions are indicators such as Line Break and Page Break, which are only relevant to the original document. After doing a Block Move, Copy, Delete, or File Insert, you should check the document layout to ensure that it has not been upset by the block manipulation.


7.5.10 Store Block.
This command allows you to store a block of text in another file, instead of in the clipboard. The other file may already exist, or you can create it as part of the Store Block process. To store a block, first mark the block of text you wish to store. Then press CONTROLwithB for the Block menu, followed by S, for "Store. KeySoft prompts for the drive, folder and name of the file to store the block in. Select these in the usual way.
If you are storing the block in an existing file, you are offered the options of appending the block to the bottom of the file, or replacing the complete file.
You can store a block of text directly to a file of another type if you wish. This might be a text document when you are editing a Braille one, or it could be a Microsoft Word document, for example. To create a file of another type press CONTROLwithX repeatedly at the file name prompt until the type of file you are looking for is displayed. To select an existing file, type its name or use the list of files to find it. In the list of files you can change the type of the file displayed by pressing READwithX repeatedly. To change between Braille and computer Braille entry at the file name prompt, press CONTROLwithX repeatedly. Braille is suitable for entry of KeyWord document names and computer Braille is suitable for entering the name of any file.
If you need information about the selection of a directory or file name, you can find this in 14.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories. When storing to an ASCII file, KeySoft uses the options in the ASCII Translation Set Up List, as described in 14.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
The process of storing a block does not remove that block from the current document.


7.5.11 Insert File.
The Insert File command allows you to insert the complete contents of another document into your existing document at the current cursor position. This feature is useful if you wish to send the same letter to a number of different people, as described in the next section. To insert a file, position the cursor at the point where you want the first character of the inserted file to appear, select the Block Menu, and then press I, for "Insert. KeySoft prompts for the drive, folder and name of the file to insert. Select these in the usual way.
As well as inserting KeyWord documents you can insert a file of any type supported by KeySoft, for example, a Microsoft Word document. If you need information about the selection of a directory or file name, you can find this in 14.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories. When inserting an ASCII file, KeySoft uses the options setup in the ASCII Translation Set Up List, as described in 14.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
After the file insert, the cursor is positioned immediately after the inserted text. That is, the file is inserted as though it had just been typed.


7.5.12 Merging Documents.
The Insert File feature is useful for merging a form letter into a number of letters, each addressed to a different person or company. In fact, this feature makes the preparation of any document that contains some standardized text and layout much easier. Follow these steps to generate personalized memos:
1. Prepare a document containing the text that is common to all recipients;
2. Open another document for the first memo. Type the first person's name and any personal text;
3. Now insert the common text in the memo by positioning the cursor at the appropriate point and pressing CONTROLwithB, then I.Follow the procedure outlined in the previous section to select the document containing the common text. Then save this memo, and open another document for the next memo.


7.5.13 Erase File.
This option provides a convenient method of completely removing a file and its contents. If you are unsure as to whether you wish to delete a particular file you can open the file, and after determining it is no longer needed, delete it using the Erase File option on the Block menu. This saves you from having to exit the file and delete it using the File Manager. KeySoft will request confirmation before removing the file.


7.5.14 Zap Block Markers.
If required, the Block Markers can be removed after a block function has been completed. To erase, or "zap, the block markers, enter the Block menu by pressing CONTROLwithB, and select the "Zap" option. The cursor position remains unaltered.


7.6 Cursor Movement Modes.
KeySoft has a range of specific moving commands designed to make moving around a document quick and accurate. These were listed in 3.8.2 Listening to a Document. When you are reading text organized in sentences and paragraphs, then commands to move the cursor by sentence or paragraph are very useful. For example:
READwithO moves the cursor to the beginning of the next sentence;
READwith9 moves the cursor to the beginning of the next paragraph.
However when working with poetry or lists, it would be more convenient to move by a line at a time than by sentence. To allow the most efficient cursor movement for the text you are working with, KeySoft provides 3 cursor movement modes; sentence and paragraph, line and sentence, and column. When you change the cursor movement mode, the moving commands themselves don't change, just the way in which they direct the cursor to move around the text.
To change the cursor movement mode while in a document, press READwithS repeatedly, until you get to the one you want. These affect the operation of the READwithU,READwithO,READwith7and READwith9 reading commands. They also affect what is spoken by these commands and by the CONTROLwith8and CONTROLwithIcommands.
The default cursor movement mode is Sentence and Paragraph. When in Line and Sentence Mode:
READwithO reads the next line; READwith7 reads the next section. Likewise, READwithUreads the previous line and READwith7reads the previous section.
In Line Mode, the word "section" has a specific meaning. The Current Section starts at the last blank line before the cursor, and continues until the first blank line after the cursor. Similarly, the Next Sectionstarts at the first blank line after the cursor, and continues until the following blank line. Line Mode is useful when you are concerned with the layout of the document. Among other purposes, it's a good way of checking for blank lines.
The third Reading Mode is called Column Mode, and acts as follows:
READwithOmoves the cursor down a line but keeping it in the same column. It reads the current word on this line;
READwith9, reads the next section.
Column Mode is effective for reviewing text that is laid out in a table. It allows you to move up or down a column in a table, reading entries one at a time.
Although we have only given two examples, the current cursor movement mode affects all reading commands that relate to sentences and paragraphs. This is also true for deletion commands. For instance, in Sentence and Paragraph mode, CONTROLwithI deletes to the end of the sentence, but in Line Mode it deletes to the end of the line. The cursor movement mode also affects the Quick Mark commands in the Block Menu.


7.7 Moving to the Start of the Next Line.
It is possible to move the cursor to the first position on the next line without inserting a New Line in the document. To do this, press: READwithENTER.
KeySoft will move the cursor to the next Tab position and display the word under the cursor.
If speech is on KeySoft says "NewLine, or "LineBreak, followed by the first word on the next line.


7.8 Moving to the Next Tab.
It is possible to move the cursor to the next tab position without inserting a tab into the document. To do this, press: READwithAPOSTROPHE.
Note that this command jumps to the next tab position, regardless of whether there is actually a tab indicator in the text.


7.9 Inserting the Time, Date or Calculator Result.
You can insert the time, date or calculator result directly into a document instead of typing them. With the cursor in the appropriate place in your current document, press FUNCTIONwithA. In the Insert Menu select Date, Time, or Calculator result as required.
If you select the date, KeySoft prompts: "Inserttoday'sdateorprintingdate?"
If you press T, KeySoft inserts today's date. If you press P, KeySoft puts in a special "Insertdate"indicator $dtp,and the current date is substituted whenever the document is embossed or printed, or when it is used as a template file.
If you choose to insert from the Calculator, KeyPlus prompts: "Insertresultorwholecalculation?"
Press R to insert the Result or C to insert the whole calculation.
The most recent result from the calculator is inserted into the document, which saves you having to remember and retype it. If you select C, the whole calculation is entered, for example 3+7=10.
There is one additional item on the "InsertionMenu, named "Unicodecharacter.This allows the insertion of extended characters from the Unicode character tables. See also page 7.18.1 Inserting Extended Characters.


7.10 Binding Spaces.
A binding space is simply a space that binds the words on either side of it to each other in a way that a normal space cannot.
You can use a binding space to keep two words together on the same line, so that they cannot be split apart by the text breaking at the end of the line at a normal space. For example, it would be undesirable for a first initial and a last name, such as T. Brown, to appear on separate lines.
The other place where binding spaces are useful is in the search function when searching for an email  you need to use binding spaces instead of normal spaces in a string of words to be searched for. In other contexts of search and/or replace, this is not necessary.
PressingCONTROLwithSPACEproduces a "bindingspace. It is shown as $bsp on the braille display.


7.11 Pasting an Address.
A person's name and address, or other details, can be copied from an address list and inserted into your current document. Refer to page 10.11.1 Copying to a Text or Braille Document.


7.12 Working with Documents on other Drives.
While you will usually work with documents on the Flash Disk, KeyWord allows documents to be created or opened directly from any drive available on the BrailleNote QT. If you want to open or create a document on a different drive, follow these steps:
From the KeyWord Menu, select Open a Document or Create a Document. At the "Foldername? prompt, press BACKSPACE. KeySoft prompts: "Drive?(FlashDisk).
Type the name of the required drive, or press SPACE repeatedly to review the list of available drives, and press ENTER to select one. KeySoft returns to the "Foldername?" prompt. You can now follow the prompts to select the required folder and document name in the usual manner. When editing a document on a removable disk or P C card, do not remove the disk or card containing the document until after you return to the KeyWord Menu or the Main Menu.
If you change to a drive other than the Flash Disk, KeySoft reminds you that you are not using the default drive each time you create or open a file. It does this by prompting for the drive, in addition to the folder and document name prompts.
It is not recommended that you create or save important files on the KeySoft System disk, because the contents of this drive will be lost if the BrailleNote QT is reset with JKLkeys held down, or if the battery goes completely flat. This drive should only be used for temporary storage.


7.13 Saving a Document.
Changes to a document are saved automatically when you finish editing it and return to the KeyWord menu or Main Menu, or when switching to another document with the command CONTROLwithZ. However, it is good practice to save a document regularly while you are editing it, especially if you are editing the document for a long period of time. For example, you might delete a significant passage by accident. You can recover by quitting without saving, as described in the next section, and then opening the document again. This puts you back to the last version that you saved.
To save the current document, press CONTROLwithS.If the document has not been changed since the last time it was saved, KeySoft displays: "Documenthasnotbeenmodified"
If this message is displayed and you do not wish to continue saving the document, you can return to the Word Processor by pressing ESCAPE.If the document has been changed, no such message is given.
KeySoft then prompts: "Documentname?(name)"
where (name)is the name of the current document. You can either overwrite the original document by pressing ENTER then Y for Yes, or write the changed document to a new name by typing a new document name and pressing ENTER.If you choose the first option, the new one replaces the old document. If you choose the second option, a new copy of the document is created under the new name, and the old document remains unchanged.
If you wish to save the document to a different folder, press BACKSPACE at the "Documentname" prompt and you will be asked for the Folder name, which can be selected as usual.
You can also change the type of document at this point. For example, if you are editing a Braille document you can save a copy as a text document or as a Microsoft Word document and so on. To save a document as another file type, press READwithX at the "Documentname?" prompt. Repeat the READwithX command until you hear the file format you wish to save in.
If you save the document using a different name or file type, KeySoft gives you the option of opening the saved document or continuing to edit the original document. This is convenient if you want to make copies of the document with different formats without having to reopen the original document.
If you have a large number of documents and the Flash Diskis almost full, there may be insufficient space available to save the current document. In this case you will be given the option of saving to theKeySoft System Disk or the Storage Card, or deleting documents in the Flash Disk to make room.


7.14 Quitting a Document.
Changes to a document are saved when you press CONTROLwithS, or automatically as you return to the KeyWord menu or Main Menu, or when switching to another document. Sometimes you may need to quit the Word Processor without saving the changes made since the document was last saved. For example, you may have made some incorrect alterations and want to abandon your changes.
To do this, press CONTROLwithQ, for Quit. If changes have been made, KeySoft prompts: "Losechanges.Sure?"
If you really wish to quit without saving the document, press Y. To cancel the command and return to the Word Processor, press N.


7.15 Creating Other Document Types.
To create a different type of document, select "CreateaDocument" from the KeyWord Menu in the normal manner. Press repeatedly at the file name prompt until the document type you wish to create is displayed.
Successive presses of CONTROLwithX at the file name prompt cycle through the document types you can create. These are:
Braille (Keyword format);
Text (Keyword format);
ASCII Text;
Microsoft Word;
Rich text format;
WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS;
KeySoft version 2 Braille;
KeySoft version 2 text;
KeyList Definition file;
Computer Braille Table.
For further information on document and file types, refer to 14.14 File Translation
You can also change the default document type; this is discussed in 7.2 Document Types.


7.16 Braille Documents.
So far, we have assumed that our base document is a text document, formatted for inkprint, having around 85 characters per line and 66 lines on a page, suitable for printing on letter or A4 size paper. The alternative is a Braille document written in grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, and having about 40 characters per line and 25 lines on a page.
Text and Braille documents can be stored in the same folder, so you review all document names when you review the contents of a folder. Remember that you can check the type of document by pressing READwithI when its name is displayed.


7.16.1 Creating a Braille Document.
To create a Braille document, press CONTROLwithX repeatedly at the"Documenttocreate?" prompt, until the prompt "CreateaBrailledocument" is displayed. Type the document name, and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "ThisisaBrailledocument.Brailleentryisrequired.Topofdocument.Blank"
When you are in a document BrailleNote QT allows you to input Braille characters using the FDS keys to represent dots12and3 respectively. Similarly, the JKL keys represent dots45and6. The SEMICOLON key represents the ENTER key and the A key the BACKSPACE. You may also use the standard keyboard ENTER and BACKSPACE keys.
While it is unlikely that you would wish to create a long Braille document in this manner, the flexibility of being able to directly create or modify a Braille document can often be useful.


7.16.2 Opening Braille Documents.
As previously noted, text and Braille documents can be stored in the same folder, so you review all document names when you review the contents of a folder. You can check the type of document by pressing READwithI when its name is displayed.
When you open a Braille document with KeyWord, KeySoft prompts: "ThisisaBrailledocument.Brailleentryisrequired."
You are then placed back in the document at the point where it was last exited.
BrailleNote QT's standard review commands may be used with Braille documents. For example:
To read the next paragraph:	READwith9
To read the next sentence:	READwithO
To read the current word:	READwithK.
In a Grade 2 document, pressing READwithK to read the current word functions as follows:
First press:	Says the word;
Second press:	Spells the word in its contracted form;
Third press:	Spells the full word.
Similarly, BrailleNote QT's standard edit commands may be used with Braille documents. For example:
To delete to end of paragraph:	CONTROLwith8
To delete to end of sentence:	CONTROLwithI
To delete the current word:	CONTROLwithK
You may use Place Markers, perform Block operations, and Spell Check the document.


7.17 Formatting a Braille Document.
Formatting of Braille documents is handled in a similar manner to that of formatting text documents. The "LayoutList."PageSettingsList."PresentationStyleList"and the "TemplateMenu" are still available but there are some differences because Braille documents are formatted for embossing directly on a Braille printer.
The commands used to Center and Right Justify a line are still available. The Underline and Font setting commands are not available, as these attributes are not supported in embossed documents.
In the same way as you can include Braille formatting information in a text document that is used when the document is translated or embossed, text formatting information can be included in a Braille document. In a Braille document, the "BrailleSettingsMenu" presented when working in a text document is replaced with the "InkPrintSettingsMenu.
The format of a Braille document, that is a document primarily intended for embossing, is determined by the settings in the Layout List, the Page Settings List, and by individual commands for centering, and justifying text.
The settings associated with taking a Braille document, and performing the "onthefly"translation of this document to provide output to a ink printer, are determined by the items in the Presentation Style List, and the Ink Print Settings Menu.
The preparation of "Templatedocuments" for use with the address list and Braille files is controlled from the Template Menu.
In the following discussion a paragraph is defined as a group of words that ends with a new line indicator.


7.17.1 Layout List.
The Layout List allows you to review and change options that control the layout or formatting of the Braille document, such as tabs, indents, page numbering, etc. Pressing CONTROLwithL accesses the Layout List for a Braille document. It is described in 7.17.8 Layout of a Braille Document


7.17.2 Page Settings List.
The Page Settings List allows you to review or change the page layout of the Braille document. Pressing CONTROLwithP accesses the Page Settings List for a Braille document. It contains the same options as the Page Settings for text documents, and is described in 7.3.2 Page Settings List.


7.17.3 Center a line.
This command centers a line or paragraph. The Center line command is CONTROLwithE. It operates in the same way as the command for centering a line of text described in 7.3.3 Center a line.


7.17.4 Right justify a line.
This command aligns a line or paragraph so that each line ends at the right margin. The Right justify line command is CONTROLwithR. It operates in the same way as the command for right justifying a line of text described in 7.3.4 Right justify a line.


7.17.5 Style of presentation.
Styles of presentation are used when a Braille document is translated and reformatted into a text document, for example, before being printed. They allow you to control the way paragraphs; headings, etc. are formatted in the text document independently of the Braille document's formatting. Pressing CONTROLwithY accesses the Presentation Style List for a Braille document. The styles are described in 7.3.7 Style of presentation.


7.17.6 Ink Print Settings.
This item allows you to review and change options that affect the way a Braille document is translated or reformatted as a text document. Pressing READwithCONTROLwithB accesses the Ink Print Settings Menu for a Braille document. It is described in 7.17.10 Inkprint Settings linked with a Braille Document.


7.17.7 Template Menu.
This item contains options that are used when preparing a Template Document for use with the Address List. Pressing CONTROLwithA accesses the Template Menu for a Braille document. This is described in 10.10 Templates.


7.17.8 Layout of a Braille Document.
Press CONTROLwithL to access the layout list for a Braille document. The items in the Layout List for a Braille document have initial values that are appropriate for embossing. The Left and Right Margins are both set to 0, and the Tab Stops are set to 3.
The Layout List for a Braille document, together with the factory default settings, is as follows:
Indent first line of paragraph.	Default setting 0;
Indent rest of paragraph.	Default setting 0;
Tab stops.	Default setting 3;
Line Spacing.	Default setting single;
Emboss page numbers.	Default setting Yes;
Page number position.	Default setting Top right;
Emboss both sides of the paper.	Default setting No;
Left margin.	Default setting 0;
Right margin.	Default setting 0;
Word wrap.	Default setting On.
The option to "Embossbothsidesofthepaper" only appears on the Layout List if the Embosser Setup has been set to indicate that the embosser supports double sided embossing.


7.17.9 Style of Presentation linked with a Braille Document.
You can attach a style to a section of a Braille document, and this has an effect only when you print the document on an ink printer, or translate it to a text document. This is the converse of the Styles of Presentation described in 7.4.1 Style of Presentation linked with a Text Document. The same 6 style names are available, but their actions are suited to formatting a text document.
To check or change a style, open the Braille document, locate the cursor anywhere in the paragraph you wish to check and press CONTROLwithY. KeySoft displays the style of the current section of text. If you wish to leave the Style unchanged, press ENTER. Alternatively, you can review the available Styles by pressing SPACE repeatedly and choose a new Style by pressing ENTER, or press the initial letter of your choice. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph following a New Line indicator, and a Style indicator indicates a change.
The styles are as follows:


7.17.9.1 Paragraph.
This is the initial style for a new document style. While paragraphs in Braille might start on a new line indented by two spaces, paragraphs in a text document might have no indentation, and be separated by a blank line. While this is the formatting convention for paragraphs, the Back Translation Options described in 14.16.9.1 Type of paragraph boundary used in the source document, allow you to change it to suit your needs.


7.17.9.2 Heading.
Regardless of how a heading is formatted in Braille, in inkprint two blank lines are placed above and below the heading and it is centered and in bold font. If a heading takes up more than one line, each subsequent line is also centered and in bold font. A blank line in Braille produces a blank line in inkprint. The heading style continues until another style indicator changes it, or two or more blank lines are encountered. In the latter case the style reverts to "Paragraph.Once again, this is the suggested formatting convention for headings. It can be changed by altering the Back Translation Options as described in 14.16.9.8 Heading format.


7.17.9.3 Subheading.
In inkprint a blank line is left before and after a subheading. The subheading is bold, and starts at the left margin. Subheadings can take up more than one line, but the first blank line returns the style to "Paragraph.


7.17.9.4 Outline.
This style is used where you have numbered paragraphs or an outline. Usually each item starts on a new line, with subsequent lines belonging to that item being indented. This format is retained in inkprint, but a blank line is left between items whether or not there is a blank line in Braille. Another style indicator or two or more blank lines terminates Outline Style, and in the latter case the style reverts to"Paragraph.


7.17.9.5 Lines.
This style is used to show that the text is a series of separate lines all starting at the left margin. It might be used for the address at the top of a letter, for example. Each New Line in Braille starts a New Line in print. Each blank line in Braille causes a blank line in print. Another style, or two or more blank lines, terminates "Lines" style and in the latter case "Paragraph" style comes into effect.


7.17.9.6 Identical to Source.
You can use this style to preserve the formatting of a section in a Braille document when it is printed or translated. This style continues in effect until another style is encountered.


7.17.10 Inkprint Settings linked with a Braille Document.
These settings can be used when you are editing a Braille document to control the format of the document when it is printed, or translated to a text document. To access the Inkprint settings menu when you are editing a Braille document, press READwithCONTROLwithB. You can review the list and select an item in the same way as all KeySoft menus. The Inkprint settings menu contains the following 6 items:
Layout;
Inclusion;
Start inkprint exclusion;
End inkprint exclusion;
Translation options;
Page settings.
These items are discussed now.


7.17.10.1 Inkprint Layout.
The settings for a Braille document, such as left and right margin, are accessed from the Layout List, accessed by pressing CONTROLwithL. In contrast, when you are preparing a Braille document for printing or translation, you may need to check or change the settings that are used for inkprint. These can be accessed from the Inkprint Settings menu, and then choosing Layout.
The Inkprint Layout list contains a similar group of settings to the Braille list, including indents, left and right margins, tabs, page number enabling, line spacing and word wrap, but the values are for inkprint. The initial values for new documents are; Left and Right Margins 10 columns, or one inch, and Tab Stops of Indent 5.
An additional setting in the Inkprint Layout list is Justification. This style is used in most printed newspapers and magazines, and spreads the words out so the last character of each line is at the right margin. It gives the text a tidy appearance, with both sides of the text being straight, but spacing between some words is increased. It is a matter of preference which way you set this option. The initial setting is off. To change the setting, press N for "ON" or F for "OFF.
Values that you set in the Inkprint Layout are used when your Braille document is printed on an inkprint printer, or translated to a text document. They do not affect the layout of the Braille document. A change to the inkprint layout is shown in a Braille document by the indicator $nli.


7.17.10.2 Inkprint Inclusion.
You may want to include text or formatting commands in the inkprint version that are not required in the Braille version. For example, you could add an explanatory note, underline a word, or force a new page. To do this, select the "Inclusion" option in the Inkprint Settings Menu. KeySoft prompts:
"Inkprintonlyinclusion?"
In response to this prompt, type the text that you want to appear in the inkprint version and press ENTER. You can also include the following formatting commands:
New line:	press CONTROLwithENTER;
New page:	press CONTROLwithN;
Tab:	press TAB;
Center line:	press CONTROLwithE;
Right justify line:	press CONTROLwithR;
Underline:	press CONTROLwithU;
Font:	press CONTROLwithT.

You can review the document for inclusion markers, and delete them like any other character. To review or edit the text of an inclusion, position the cursor on the inclusion marker and select the Inclusion option again. Ink print only inclusion is indicated by $oi.


7.17.10.3 Inkprint Exclusion.
Conversely, there may be text or formatting commands in the Braille document, such as the description of a table layout, which you may want to exclude from the inkprint version. This is done by marking the start and end of the text or formatting commands you want excluded, as follows: With the cursor at the required point, select "Startinkprintexclusion" from the Inkprint Settings menu. KeyWord marks the position with a special "Startinkprintexclusion"indicator. Now type the text or formatting commands that you do not want to appear in the inkprint version, and select "Endinkprintexclusion" from the Inkprint Settings Menu. KeyWord marks the position with a special "Endinkprintexclusion" indicator.
Note that you can also add these markers to existing text, if you wish.


7.17.10.4 Translation Options.
This group of 9 settings affects the way in which the current Braille document is reformatted when it is translated to a text document or printed on an inkprinter. They are collectively referred to as the InkPrintTranslationOptionsList. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph, and can be changed at chosen points throughout the document. The initial values are covered in 14.14 File Translation, as well as other translation settings that are not available while editing.
To access the inkprint translation options, select the "Translationoptions" from the Inkprint Settings Menu. The settings are as follows:
What type of paragraph boundary is used in the source document?
Interpret larger boundaries as paragraphs also?
New Line translation option?
Convert Braille italics to italics font?
Include two spaces between sentences?
Suppress New Page markers?
Include a blank line between items in outline style?
Revert to Paragraph Style After How Many Blank Lines?
Translation find and replace.
The last item allows you to replace a particular formatting sequence with another, as part of the translation process. For example, the Braille document might use 3 spaces anywhere on a line to indicate the start of a new paragraph, and New Line indicators in the text document could replace these. To set up this sequence, at the Find? prompt type:
CONTROLwithSPACE, three times, followed by ENTER.
this sets up the "Find?" string of 3 spaces, then at the Replacementfor3spaces?prompt type:
CONTROLwithENTER, followed by ENTER.
this sets up the "Replacement?" string of one New Line.
The Translation option indicator is $txi. 


7.17.10.5 InkPrint Page Settings.
When you translate a Braille document to a text document, or print a Braille document on an inkprinter, a group of page settings is used for the entire printed copy or text document. To access the Inkprint Page Settings, select "PageSettings" from the Inkprint Settings Menu. KeySoft displays: "InkPrintPagesettingslist."
This is a similar group of settings to the Braille list, comprising first page number, paper length, paper width, and top and bottom margins. The initial values for Page Length and Page Width follow the values in the Printer Setup List, and a prompt indicates if a setting is changed. The initial top and bottom margins are 6 lines, or one inch, suitable for inkprint.
Values that you set here are used in the printed or translated versions of your Braille documents, but do not affect embossing. An inkprint page setting within a Braille document is indicated by $psi.


7.17.11 Initial Format Settings in a Document.
If you have changed one or more settings in a Layout list, you can reach a point in the document where you want the settings to revert to their initial values. That is, the value they were at the start of the document. To do this, ensure that the cursor is at the appropriate place, and from anywhere in the Layout list, press CONTROLwithR, for Revert. This causes all the settings in the Layout list to revert to the values that they had at the start of the document.
The initial settings that KeySoft uses when you create a new document have been chosen to suit most situations, but you can set up different initial settings if you wish. For example, you may decide that you want a right margin of 8 columns in all the text documents you create from now on. To do this, open or create a text document, and change the right margin setting in the Layout list. Then, from anywhere in the Layout list, press CONTROLwithS. This saves all the current values including the new right margin, as the initial settings that are used when you create a Braille document.
To change the initial Page Settings, alter the required setting and then from anywhere in the Page Settings list, press CONTROLwithS.Remember that there are separate initial settings for Braille and text documents, which you can change by opening the appropriate document and carrying out this procedure.


7.18 Extended Characters.
The text characters represented, in the standard 63 dot combination Braille set, or for that matter on the typical QWERTY keyboard, only represent a tiny proportion of the total characters available. These include currency indicators e.g.  and , accented letters e.g.  and , character sets for other languages such as Arabic and Japanese and a whole range of specialist characters for use in sciences, math, phonetics etc. totaling around 35,000. Those characters not represented in your standard character set are referred to as the extended character set.
As a way of managing this enormous character set, a standard called Unicode exists. Unicode assigns a unique numeric code to every character. This allows for use in coding and programming, formatting, and an easy way to enter characters once you know the character code. For more information on Unicode Tables, have a look at www.unicode.org.


7.18.1 Inserting Extended Characters.
Unicode characters only work in text documents. As the QT default document type is text, this should not be an issue, however if converting to or reading these documents in Braille, bear in mind that the inserted symbols will look unusual.
There are three different ways of inserting an extended character, that are suitable for different levels of use:
a. Searching and selecting the character from the Unicode tables  For the first or only time you look up a character and if you don't know its code, you will need to do this to search for it. There are two methods of doing this detailed later in this section.
b. Typing in the character code  This is quick and easy for characters you use occasionally and can remember the code for.
c. Setting up a key combination  assigning a dot combination to the character. This is a good way to manage frequently used characters.


7.18.2 Insertion By Name.
This search is based on the name of the character, for example "eacute" or "Eurocurrencysign.
Follow these steps to insert an extended character using the name search:
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press FUNCTIONwithX. KeySoft will prompt for the Unicode character. If you have used this function before, it will offer the previously selected character. If you want to select it, press ENTER. If not, continue to Step 2.
2. Type in the name, or part of the name, of the character, then press ENTER.
3. KeySoft will respond with a selection, either the character you want or the first one to fit your search criteria. If it is the one you want, press ENTER. If not, view the next search match by pressing READwithNrepeatedly until you do find it and then press ENTER. This will insert the character.


7.18.2.1 An Example:
Let's assume you want to enter the word "resume" with the letter "e" showing as "eacute, but you don't know the character code for "eacute.
Type the letter "r, then press FUNCTIONwithX. KeySoft will prompt for the Unicode character. We know that we want to enter an "eacute, so type in "eacute, then press ENTER. KeySoft will respond with "Capeacute,and using this as your starting point you can search for all members of the "eacute" character family by pressing READwithN. In this instance "eacute"will be the next character prompted. Press ENTER, and the extended character for "eacute" will be entered into your document.
Continue typing "sum, then press FUNCTIONwithX again to enter the last "e acute. KeySoft will prompt the previously chosen extended character, which in this instance happens to be "eacute, so you just have to press ENTER, followed by SPACE to complete the word.


7.18.3 Browsing Unicode Tables.
Unicode characters are grouped into tables according to type. For example, there is a Unicode table for Greek characters, for General Punctuation, for Superscripts etc. You have the choice of searching for a table then for a character within it. This is useful if you are not sure which character you want but you are aware of its general type.
Follow the steps below to browse for a character using the Unicode tables.
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press FUNCTIONwithX. KeySoft will prompt for a Unicode character.
2. To browse the list of Unicode tables, press SPACE repeatedly, or BACKSPACE to go back, or type the initial letter of a table name to narrow down the selection and browse from there.
3. When you locate the table you wish to browse, select it by pressing ENTER.
4. At this point you can either browse the whole table by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE repeatedly, or type the initial letter of a character name to narrow down the selection and browse from there.
Note: While reviewing a table, you can display the numeric code of the character you are currently viewing by pressing READwithI.
If you are already within the Unicode tables and wish to search for a Unicode character by name, press READwithF and you will then return to the "Unicodecharacter?" prompt. To search again for the next matching Unicode character description for within the Unicode tables, press READwithN. If there are no more matches you will remain on the current Unicode character. Once you have completed your search, press ENTER to select the Unicode character.


7.18.4 Inserting Characters Using Unicode Codes.
This method is easy if you already know the character code i.e. the numeric code assigned to it.
Follow the steps below to search for a character using the Unicode tables.
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press FUNCTIONwithX. KeySoft will prompt for a Unicode character.
2. Type the numeric code, and press ENTER.The character will be inserted into the document. (You can, if you prefer, use the hexadecimal value of the code in the form "0x.").


7.18.5 Assigning Keys to a Unicode Character.
KeySoft allows you to assign a key combination to a Unicode character. This is an excellent idea for characters you use frequently. The assignation function is called a macro, and the following steps outline how to define or change a macro for a Unicode character:
1. Enter the Unicode Tables with FUNCTIONwithX, and locate the Unicode character you wish to create a macro for using one of the search methods above, only don't press ENTER.
2. When the character is announced, press CONTROLwithK. If there is no macro assigned, it will announce, "CharacterUnassigned" where character is the actual name of the character. 
If a macro is already assigned, it will announce, "CharacterisassignedtoFUNCTIONWITHCwithkeystroke" where Character is the name of the character, and keystroke is the stroke or strokes assigned to it. For example, "EacuteisassignedtoFUNCTIONWITHCwithEandC."(Note that FUNCTIONwithC appears at the beginning of all macros).
3. Press A. The prompt, "Assign,macrotoassigntoCharacter?"will display, where Character is the name of the character. Press the key combination you wish to assign to the character, e.g. E and C for e acute, and press ENTER.
4. The prompt, "AssignFunctionwithCthenkeystroketocharacter?" will display, where keystroke is the stroke or strokes assigned to it, and Character is the name of the character. For example, "AssignFUNCTIONWITHCwithEandCtoeacute?"Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or exit by pressing ESCAPE. 
Note: A Unicode character can have more than one macro assigned to it. To toggle through all the currently assigned key combinations, press SPACE.


7.18.5.1 Changing a Macro.
If the Unicode character has already been assigned you may press U to unassign or remove it altogether, or R to reassign or change the key combination.
To use either of these functions, follow steps 1 and 2 above. Then:
To Remove or unassign the key combination, press Uatthispoint. The prompt, "UnassignCharacterfromkeystrokes,sure?" will display, where Character is the name of the character and keystroke is the stroke or strokes assigned to it. Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or exit by pressing ESCAPE.
To change the key combination, press Rat this point. The prompt, "Reassign,MacrotoreassigntoCharacter?"will display, where character is the name of the character. Type the new key combination and press ENTER. The prompt, "ReassignFunctionwithCthenkeystroketocharacter?" will display, where keystroke is the stroke or strokes assigned to it, and Character is the name of the character. For example, "ReassignFUNCTIONWITHCwithEandCtoeacute?"Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or exit by pressing ESCAPE.


7.18.6 How to use Unicode Macros.
Once you have created a Unicode macro as above, you will then no doubt wish to use it in a document, a file name, address listing etc.
To use it, at the point where you wish to insert the Unicode character, press FUNCTIONwithC and the key combination you assigned to it, followed by ENTER. Continue typing as normal.
You may be wondering how this character will display on the Braille display. This is covered in the next section.


7.18.7 Appearance of Unicode Characters in Computer Braille.
You may assign a computer Braille dot combination to any extended character so that when the document is translated to computer Braille, that dot combination will be used.
Assigning a dot combination follows a similar pattern to assigning a key combination:
Search the Unicode tables for the character to which you wish to assign a dot pattern and when you locate it, press CONTROLwithD.Press A to assign a computer Braille dot combination. If the Unicode character has already been assigned you may press R to reassign a dot combination, leaving the original dot combination free. Assigned dot combinations can be removed by selecting U. Upon selecting A (assign) or R (reassign) you will be asked to enter the dot combination to assign to the selected Unicode character. Finally, you will be asked to confirm your dot combination selection. To confirm the selection, press Y.
Note that multiple Unicode characters can be assigned to one dot combination. This may be useful if, for example, you use e acute, e breve, and e macron, you could assign a dot combination that for you means "ewithanaccent, or you might assign the same combination to all vowels that have umlauts. You can use this feature any way you see fit.
As soon as a "dotpattern" is assigned to a Unicode character, a "Custom" Computer Braille table is automatically added in the "Dictionary" folder. This file is used in place of the previously selected Computer Braille file.


7.18.8 Interpreting Braille Versions of Unicode Characters.
If you are reading a text document that has been translated to Grade 2 in Braille, whether you have or haven't assigned a computer Braille dot output combination, you will see the same thing.
Using the word cafe as an example: You will observe the letters "caf"on the embossed printout, followed by "dot4", then the letter "e". The "dot4" is the Grade 2 indication for an extended character.
If you are reading a text document that has been translated to computer Braille, you will see either a blank cell if the character is unassigned, or the dot combination you assigned to the character in computer Braille.
On any computer Braille character you can find out the name of the character by pressing the "ReadcurrentCharacter" command READwithCOMMA, twice.



8 Scientific Calculator.
The Scientific Calculator, KeyPlus, can be used for straightforward sums such as addition or division, but is also capable of many more complex operations.
Calculations are displayed in your preferred Braille grade on the Braille display in either the Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics or the UK Braille Mathematics Notation. The desired display format is automatically selected when you set up the Calculator Braille language as described in 5.4.9 Calculator Braille Language. Calculations are also spoken if speech is on.
The result of a calculation is displayed on the Braille display and spoken if both outputs are selected, and either the calculation result or the complete calculation can also be inserted into a document.
Remember that at any point, you can press the HELP key to obtain information on the options available.


8.1 Entering KeyPlus.
You can enter KeyPlus from the Main Menu by pressing S, or from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing FUNCTIONwith5. Your BrailleNote QT restores the display to what it was when you last left the calculator. This might be the result of a calculation or part of one you were entering. Continue entering the calculation or, if a result is displayed, starting a new calculation clears the calculator. To clear the calculator to zero, press CONTROLwithI.


8.2 Entering a Calculation.
A calculation is entered in the same order as it would be typed or spoken.
For example, to add the numbers 3, 4 and 5, then subtract 2, you would press: 	3+4+52
Press ENTER, for "Equals," and KeySoft displays the answer, which in this case is: 10
Note that this is displayed in standard Braille. You can review the calculation by pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys together. The Braille display will show 3+4+52=10, in Nemeth. Pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys again will return to just displaying the answer. If the speech is on, the speech will mirror the content on the Braille display.
To enter numbers into the calculator, you can use the top row of the keyboard for the numbers 1 through 9, and 0. To the right of these are "Minus" and "Plus." (The SHIFT key is not required for the plus function.) The multiplication key, called "star" or "asterisk," is on SHIFTwith8. The division key is SLASH, and is the rightmost key on the second row up from the bottom.
Alternatively, you may prefer to use a group of keys which form a keypad during calculator use. This keypad, is not marked, but has the same layout as a computer keypad or pocket calculator.
The top row is:	7,8,9.
On the next row:	4,5,6, and Minus, are on the U,I,O,andP keys. There is a raised dot on the5.
On the third row: 	1,2,3, and Plus, are on the J,K,L, and SEMICOLON keys.
On the fourth row:	0,Asterisk (for multiplying), and DecimalPoint, are on the M,COMMA, and PERIOD keys.
Try some simple calculations to get the feel of the calculator. If you type in a long sequence such as:
	3*2+5*6+9
the answer will not be determined until you have typed in the complete calculation and pressed the ENTER key.
Press HELP to obtain a complete list of key combinations for the calculator. You can also check key combinations with the "AnnounceKey" mode, by pressing READwithA. In this mode, pressing a particular key or key combination causes the resulting function to be displayed.
To return to the normal calculator function, press ESCAPE.
Remember that the order for entering numbers and operators is just as you would write them.


8.2.1 Reviewing the Calculation.
If you are not sure that you have entered a calculation correctly, you can review the calculation before pressing ENTER.
Pressing the PREVIOUS thumb key moves the Braille display back, that is to the left, one cell at a time. Pressing the NEXT thumb key moves the Braille display forward, that is to the right, one cell at a time.
After pressing ENTER to complete the calculation, pressing the PREVIOUSandNEXT buttons together toggles between displaying the result and the details of the calculation.
When using speech , there are two review commands available before pressing ENTER. They are:
	To review the whole calculation, press READwithI.
	To review the last number or operator entered, press READwithK.


8.2.2 Editing the Calculation.
While entering a calculation you can backspace to delete entries onebyone by pressing BACKSPACE or CONTROLwithM, one or more times.
If the current calculation started with the result of a previous one, BACKSPACE does not delete that number, because it was calculated rather than typed. Entering a new calculation clears the last result.


8.2.3 Calculation Entry Errors.
When you type a calculation, KeyPlus beeps if you make a mistake, such as: 	3+*
Press HELP to find the reason. In this case, KeyPlus displays: "Valueexpected."
Other messages indicate different errors. You may want to review the calculation after an incorrect entry, by pressing READwithI to find out where you are.


8.2.4 Setting the Calculation Precision.
The maximum number of decimal places displayed may be set from 0 to 9. This is done by pressing CONTROLwithPERIOD followed by the desired number of digits. This does not affect the internal precision of calculations but only the number of digits displayed.
For example to set the number of decimal places to 4, first press CONTROLwithPERIOD. KeyPlus displays: "Decimalplaces?(currentsetting)."
Press 4 and press ENTER. If you are checking the precision, just press ENTER to leave the current setting unchanged.


8.3 Basic Operations.
The basic operations provided are:
	Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division
	Negation, Percent and Parenthesis


8.3.1 Addition Subtraction Multiplication and Division.
These operations have the normal order of precedence. This means that expressions inside brackets are evaluated first, and then division and multiplication are performed, followed by addition and subtraction.


8.3.2 Parentheses.
Parentheses, or brackets, are used to change the order in which an equation is evaluated. For example, the equation: 	3+4*5
is evaluated by adding 3 to the product of 4 times 5. The answer is 23.
If you want the addition of 3 and 4 to occur first, and the result to be multiplied by 5, insert parentheses around the 3 + 4, as follows: 	(3+4)*5=35
Parentheses can be placed wherever a number can occur. You can use up to 6 levels. If you try to open more than 6 levels, or close more than are open, KeyPlus beeps.


8.3.3 Negation.
The Negation operator N is used to enter negative numbers. For example to calculate 5 divided by negative 2 you press: 5/N2ENTER
Note that the Negation operator is not the same as the subtraction operator, and that they are on different keys on the keyboard.


8.3.4 Percent.
The Percent operator is used to calculate percentage markup or markdown. It is a special operator that automatically evaluates the calculation without the need to press ENTER. For example,
To calculate a 20% markup on 56 press: 56+20%which gives the result 67.2.
To calculate a 10% markdown on 45 press: 4510% which gives the result 40.5.
To calculate what percentage 17 is of 20, press: 17/20%	which gives the result 85.That is, 17 is 85% of 20.
To calculate 30% of 180 press: 180*30%which gives the result 54.


8.4 Memory Operations.
There are 10 separate memories for storing conversion factors, partial results, etc. They are numbered 0 to 9. The commands for memory number 1, for example, are as follows:
	Clear memory 1: C1;
	Store number in memory 1: S1;
	Add to memory 1: A1;
	Recall contents of memory 1: R1;
	Announce contents of memory,
	but do not use in calculation: SHIFTwithR1.


8.4.1 Clear Memory: C.
This operation clears the particular memory immediately. For example to clear memory 5, press C, then 5. After pressing C, KeyPlus displays "Clearmemory?."After pressing 5 KeySoft displays 5 on the Braille display.


8.4.2 Store Memory: S.
This completes the current calculation and stores the result in a memory. For example to calculate the result of 3 + 5 and store in Memory 4, press: 3+5S4.
When you press S, the letter S is displayed on the Braille display and "Storememory"is spoken.
The resulting value of 8 is stored in memory number 4.


8.4.3 Add to Memory: A.
This completes the current calculation and adds the result to the existing contents of a memory. For example after the previous example Memory 4 contains 8. Now to calculate 9 divided by 5, and to add the result to Memory 4, press: 9/5A4.
When you press A, the letter A is displayed on the Braille display and"Accumulatememory" is spoken.
The calculation is evaluated, resulting in 1.8. This is then added to Memory 4, to give a value in Memory 4 of 9.8.


8.4.4 Recall Memory: R.
This is used to recall the value in a memory and insert it into the calculation. For example to divide the contents of memory 4 by 4 and store the result in Memory 1, press : R4/4S1.
When you press R, the letter M is displayed on the Braille display and "RecallMemory?"is spoken
This calculates 9.8 / 4 = 2.45 which is stored in Memory 1.


8.4.5 Announce Memory: SHIFT with R.
This is used to display the value in a memory at any time without affecting the current calculation. For example, if you press: 	SHIFTwithRfollowedby4.
After pressing SHIFTwithR, KeyPlus displays "DisplayMemory?" After pressing 4, KeySoft displays: "Memory4:ninepointeight."
but this does not affect any calculation in progress, which can continue. To return the display to the calculation, press ADVANCE or continue entering the calculation.


8.5 Scientific Operations.
Trigonometric, logarithmic and exponential functions are available, as well as squares, square roots, powers and roots.


8.5.1 Trigonometric Functions.
The trigonometric functions can be calculated in either degrees or radians. To select degrees press D, to select radians press SHIFTwithD. A setting stays in effect until it is superseded by another.
The trigonometric functions provided are:
Sine	press CONTROLwithS.	displayed as sin(.
Arc Sine	press READwithS.	displayed as arcsin(.
Cosine	press CONTROLwithC.	displayed as cos(.
Arc Cosine	press READwithC.	displayed as arccos(.
Tangent	press CONTROLwithT.	displayed as tan(.
Arc Tangent	press READwithT.	displayed as arctan(.
PI		press Y. 	displayed as dots 46followed byP.
Use the Announce Key mode to familiarize yourself with the location of the trigonometric keys.
To calculate the sine of 30 degrees, press:
	DCONTROLwithS30
followed by ENTER. The result "0.5" is displayed.
If the calculator is already set to degrees, it is not necessary to precede the calculation with D.
Notice that you don't have to close the brackets, KeyPlus does that for you. The meaning is clear because there was only a single number entered. In general, if you don't type an opening bracket the calculator closes the brackets after the following number, otherwise it is up to you. If you wanted to find the sine of the sum of two 15 degree angles, for example, you must put brackets around the addition as follows:
	DCONTROLwithS(15+15)ENTER.
The result "0.5" is displayed.
To calculate the Arc Tangent of 2, press:
	READwithT2
followed by ENTER. The result "63.43495" is displayed.
To calculate the cosine of Pi radians divided by 3, press:
	SHIFTwithDCONTROLwithC(Y/3)
followed by ENTER. The result "0.5" is displayed. Pressing SHIFTwithD selects radians mode. The parentheses causes KeyPlus to calculate PI / 3 before taking the cosine.


8.5.2 Square Roots and Squares.
The square and square root keys are SHIFTwithQ and Q respectively. To calculate the square root of the sum of 3 squared plus 4 squared, press:
	Q(3SHIFTwithQ+4SHIFTwithQ)
followed by ENTER. The result "5" is displayed. The square root operator precedes its number, while the squared operator occurs after its number, following the written convention.


8.5.3 Decimal Exponent.
Very large or very small numbers are often expressed in scientific notation as a power of 10. For example, the number 4000 is equal to 4 x 1000, which may be written as 4 x 10 to the power of 3. This number could be entered into a calculation by pressing: 	4^3,that is, 4followedbySHIFT6,followedby3.
Similarly, the number 0.05 could be entered by pressing 	5^N2,
that is, 5 followed by SHIFT6, followed by N, followed by 2.


8.5.4 Powers and Roots.
These functions are assigned as follows
	x to the power of y:	PressX
 	x to the power of 1/y:	Press SHIFTwithX
For example, to calculate 3 to the power of 4, press: 3X4
followed by ENTER. The result "81" is displayed.
Parentheses can be used where y is a compound expression. For example, to calculate 2 to the power of 6 + 8, press: 2X(6+8)
followed by ENTER. The result "16,384" is displayed.
To calculate the cube root of 27, press: 27SHIFTwithX3
followed by ENTER. The result "3"is displayed.


8.5.5 Logarithmic Functions.
The following logarithmic functions are provided:
	Log base e:	press E;
	e to the power of:	press SHIFTwithE;
	Log base 10:	press T;
	10 to the power of:	press SHIFTwithT.
For example, to calculate the log base e of 10 and save the result in Memory 2, press:
	E10S2
followed by ENTER. The result "2.302585"is displayed.
Now calculate e to the power of 2.302585. Press:
	SHIFTwithER2
followed by ENTER. The result "10" is displayed.
Similarly, to calculate log base 10 of 2 and store the result in memory 3, press:
	T2S3
followed by ENTER. The result "0.30103" is displayed.
Now calculate 10 to the power of 0.30103. Press:
	SHIFTwithTR3
followed by ENTER. The result "2" is displayed.


8.6 Inserting a Result or a Calculation.
Suppose that you are writing a letter, and you want to do a calculation and include the result in the letter. How would you do that?
You could do the calculation before starting the letter. Alternatively, you could begin the letter and then switch from the Word Processor to the calculator by pressing FUNCTIONwith5, do the sum and then switch back to the letter by pressing FUNCTIONwith4.
When you get to the point in the letter where you want to include the result of your calculation, press FUNCTIONwithI for the "InsertMenu," then C to insert from the Calculator. KeyPlus displays: "Insertresultorwholecalculation?"
Press R to insert the Result or C to insert the whole calculation.
The most recent result from the calculator are inserted into the document, which saves you having to remember and retype it.


9 Planner.
KeyPlan is a pageperday planner, which allows you to make notes and reminders for each day of the year. You can also enter appointments for particular times, reschedule them, and include an audible alarm with any appointment. Appointments can be single events or recurring right out until the year 9999. And all of this information can be shared with Microsoft Outlook's calendar via a synchronization function we call KeySync, which is discussed in detail in 13.13 KeySync.
The commands you use with the planner are similar to those used in KeyWord. Planner pages are formatted as Braille documents, and you can use grade 1, grade 2, or Computer Braille as you wish.


9.1 Entering the Planner.
To enter the Planner, select it from the Main Menu by pressing P.This will take you to the KeyPlan Menu. Or you can open the Planner directly from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing FUNCTIONwith6.


9.2 The KeyPlan Menu.
When you select the Planner from the Main Menu, your BrailleNote QT displays "KeyPlanMenu."
Open planner;
Setup options.
If you want to make entries in the planner or review its contents, choose "Openplanner."This option is described first. If you enter the Planner by pressing FUNCTIONwith6, you will go directly to the "Open Planner" option.


9.3 Selecting a Date.
When you select the "Open" option, KeyPlan displays: "Day?PressENTERfor(today'sdate)."
where today's date is the actual date. Before pressing ENTER, you can choose a different date by either typing it in as described in the next section, or by moving around the calendar, as follows:
By day back or forward, use	LEFTorRIGHTARROW;
By week, use	UPorDOWNARROW;
By month, use	PAGEUPorPAGEDOWN;
By year, use	TABorSHIFTwithTAB.
When the required date is displayed, press ENTER to select it.


9.3.1 Entering the Date.
Instead of moving around the calendar to find the required date, you can type a date as:
You can use a 3letter abbreviation for the month, such as:
25dec04,or dec2504
Or you can type the month name in full:
25december04ordecember2504
You can also use numbers separated by a slash or a space in the form:
251204,or 122504,and25/12/04or12/25/04
depending on the KeySoft date format you have set.
If you omit the year, then the current year is assumed.
When you have selected or typed the date, pressENTER and you are placed in the required planner page. If you have selected today's date, the cursor is placed at the beginning of the next appointment for today, if one exists. This allows you to check your next appointment very quickly. For other dates, the cursor will be at the top of the page, ahead of any existing entries.


9.3.1.1 Going to Today's date.
There is a quick way of going directly to today's date from anywhere in the planner. Whatever day you are currently on, if in the Planner itself, return to the calendar by pressing ESCAPE. At the prompt "KeyPlanCalendar.Date?PressENTERfor(date)", type "today" and press ENTER. This will take you directly to today's planner page.


9.3.2 Page Layout.
The planner is laid out as a pageperday desk planner. Each day starts on a new page. The date appears on the first line. On the next line are any general notes or reminders that can use as many lines as required. These are called "allday events" and are not associated with any particular time.
The scheduled appointments then follow. Each of these starts on a new line, and begins with a time. The appointment details follow on the same line.
Here is an example:
"Friday January 23 2005
All day: Mike's Birthday.
All day: Sarah in interviews all day
Don't forget to clear her voicemail.
10:0011:00 am Team meeting
12:301:15 pm Lunch with Bob
7:3011:00 pm Movies Return of the King
 Reading 2, meeting in foyer.
When an appointment is scheduled or rescheduled, it is placed on the correct page, and is sorted into time order with other entries.


9.3.3 Making Notes on a Particular Day.
Notes are recorded as allday events and KeyPlan precedes them with the words "allday:". They are not associated with any particular time during that day.
To make notes on any page of the planner, first select the date. The cursor is placed ahead of any text that may already be on the page. If the page is blank, then just start typing. If there is already text on the page, check that the cursor is in the right place before typing. As soon as you start typing, KeyPlan will automatically schedule an allday event for you. You can move the cursor to a different point in the text by using the cursor movement commands. These are similar to KeyWord commands.
When you have finished typing an entry, you do not need to press ENTER unless you require a new line.
If you have selected today's date, the cursor is placed on a scheduled appointment, if one exists. You can use the cursor movement commands to move the cursor, or you can go to the top of the page by pressing READwithT.


9.3.4 Scheduling an AllDay Event.
You can set up an allday event with the properties of an appointment, such as recurrence, or being marked as busy or out of office. Please note that the default setting for AllDay appointments is set to "free" as it is in MS Outlook. This is because typically people use this function for events such as travelling, birthdays or other anniversaries, and reminders rather than actual appointments where they will be busy. Remember that AllDay means midnight to midnight, not just 8am to 5pm.
If you have already set up the allday event, put the cursor into the text. Select Review or Modify this appointment by pressing CONTROLwithR. This will give you all of the scheduling options.
If you are setting the appointment up from scratch, when scheduling the appointment, specify an appointment time of L for allday. From there continue as normal. Full directions on scheduling an appointment are in the next section of this user guide.


9.4 Scheduling Appointments.
An appointment is made up of a group of settings that the user defines. These include date, start time, end time, title, location etc. The process of scheduling an appointment is basically going through the list of these settings and defining each setting.
You don't have to go through all the settings to make an appointment, in fact they are ordered so that you cover the mandatory settings first and can exit and save by pressing ESCAPE at any point after you have set the date, time, and title. Like all lists in KeySoft, you can move back and forward by pressing BACKorBACKSPACE and SPACEorADVANCE. However, if you follow the procedure below, you will see that KeyPlan steps you through the settings logically and easily. If you wish to change any setting you have made before exiting and saving, use the back and forward commands to return to the setting and make the change.
KeyPlan assumes you wish to schedule the appointment on the date of the planner page you are currently in, and so jumps directly to the time setting.
To schedule an appointment in KeyPlan, follow this procedure:
1. From any planner page, select Schedule an appointment by pressing CONTROLwithENTER.
2. KeyPlan prompts: "Appointmenttime?"
The way you enter appointment times should agree with the setting of 12 or 24 hour format, which is displayed when you press HELP.You can enter a time without using number signs, in the form:
hh:mmwhere "hh" is hours and "mm" is minutes, separated by a colon. You can abbreviate an entry with fewer digits or no colon if it is unambiguous. In 12 hour format, follow the minutes by a space and then aor p, to denote a.m. and p.m. Note that if you use an abbreviated form for an a.m. time, for example 7a for 7:00 am, type a letter sign before the a or it will be read as a 1. And if you forget to type a or p, KeySoft will prompt you to do so. For an allday event, type L instead of a time.
Before you enter a time, you can change the day or date of your appointment by pressing BACKSPACE.
KeySoft prompts: "AppointmentDay?PressENTERfor(currentdayanddate)"
A calendar is being presented. If the offered date is correct, just press ENTER. Otherwise, move around the calendar to the required date, or type it, and then press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Endtimeorlength?PressENTERfor(time)30minutes."where (time) is the time 30 minutes after the appointment time. The default length is 30 minutes, but you can change this. You can type a number by itself for minutes, or follow the number with h for a number of hours, d for days or w for weeks. For h and d, put a letter sign or space between the number  this is not necessary for m and w. To enter a finishing time, type the time in the same format as the appointment time.
Press ENTER to go to the next field. Note: If you want to set a different end date, you can either press BACKSPACE as soon as you hear the End Time or length prompt, or set the end time and then press BACKSPACE twice.
4. KeySoft prompts: "Appointmenttitle?"
Type the reason for this appointment and press ENTER.If necessary, you can add more notes about this appointment after you have finished scheduling it.
5. KeySoft then prompts: "Location?"
This is not a mandatory field. Either type the location and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Recurrence?PressENTERforonce"
For a one off appointment, press ENTER. For more information on recurring appointments, refer to 9.5 Recurring Appointments.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Setanalarmonthisappointment?PressENTERforN"
If you do not, press N.If you want to set an alarm, press Y, and KeySoft prompts: "Warningtime?PressENTERforn(time),"
where "n" is the suggested interval of time (for example 30 minutes) and (time) is the actual time at which it would ring (for example 7:30pm). To change the setting, type either a time in the usual format, or a number of minutes, or a number followed by h for hours, d for days or w for weeks. For h and d, put a letter sign or space before the letter  this is not necessary for m and w. Press ENTER.
8. KeySoft then prompts: "Showtimeas?PressENTERforbusy"
The options are free =f, tentative =t, busy = b and out of office =o. These settings let you know the level of availability you will have with this appointment. If you select "free", you will be able to schedule an overlapping appointment without any reminders from KeySoft. For the other options, KeySoft will remind you at the time setting and at the point of saving the appointment, but it won't prevent you from scheduling it.
9. KeySoft then prompts: "MarkasPrivate?PressENTERforNo". To mark as Private, press Y.
10. KeySoft prompts: "EndofList". At this point, to schedule the appointment, press ESCAPE. KeySoft prompts: "Schedulethisappointment?" Press Y or N. KeySoft displays: "Appointmentscheduled."
The time is inserted in the planner page, on a new line, followed by the title and location. The appointment is sorted into the correct time order for the current date, and the cursor is placed just after the new entry.


9.4.1 Making Notes on an Appointment.
You can make notes on any appointment at any time by placing the cursor in the time and title line and pressing ENTER. From there, simply type your notes. If you have only just scheduled the appointment, the cursor will already be in the time and title line.
When the notes are complete, you will exit when you press ESCAPE, which will take you to the top of the day, or perform any other command such as Scheduling another appointment, using any "go to" or "move" commands etc.


9.4.2 Making another entry.
To make another entry, press CONTROLwithENTER again. The new entry is sorted into order with existing entries. You can set as many appointments as you wish.


9.5 Recurring Appointments.
A recurring appointment is one that is repeated in a regular pattern of times determined by the user. You can schedule your appointment according to dates, or patterns of days, weeks, months or years  for example an event may be on the 25th of every month, or on the third Thursday of every month, or every 25th of March, or every day at 9am, etc. There is a pattern of recurrence to cover just about every type of recurring event you could think of.
For the sake of clarity, we will refer to any use of calendar days as dates  for example the 6th or the 23rd, and we will use the word "pattern" to describe other intervals such as the third Friday in the month, or the last Thursday in November.


9.5.1 Recurring patterns.
Apart from "once" which of course is not recurring at all, the options for a recurring event are: Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly. Each of these is described and relevant instructions given below.


9.5.1.1 Daily.
Daily means any pattern based on a number of days. This could be every day, or every second day, every 5 days etc.
At the promptDaysbetweenoccurrences?PressENTERfor1day(s)", The default setting is 1 day. To change this, type the number of days of your choice. For example, for every second day, type 2.


9.5.1.2 Weekly.
Weekly means any recurring event that happens weekly, or in a weekly pattern. For example, every Monday, every week day, or every second week on a Thursday.
At the prompt Recuronwhichdays?PressENTERforxyz"where x y z are any days you require, type any of the following, with a space between if more than one (and in any order):
Sunday = Su; Monday = Mo; Tuesday =Tu; Wednesday =We; Thursday =Th; Friday =Fr; Saturday =Sa; every day = v; weekdays =d (Monday through Friday) and weekend days =e (Saturday and Sunday).
For example, if your appointment is every Monday, Tuesday and Thursday, you would type "Mo Tu Th". If it were every Saturday and Sunday, type "e" for weekend days.
Note: you can type initial letters only for Monday, Wednesday or Friday as they are the only day names starting with M, W or F. You can also type more or all of the name of a day, for example, Thurs or Thursday.
At the prompt Weeksbetweenoccurrences?PressENTERforn type the number of weeks if different from the default n. For example if it occurs weekly, type 1, if fortnightly, type 2 etc.


9.5.1.3 Monthly.
Monthly recurrence includes dates, or patterns of days or weeks scheduled on a monthly basis.
For example, every 20th of the month, or every third Thursday, or the second week, or even the last weekend day, are all monthly events.
1. When you select Monthly, KeyPlan prompts: "Recurondayxofthemonth?" where x is the date you originally selected. To choose this option press Y for Yes then go to step 4, otherwise press N and go to step 2.
2. KeyPlan prompts: Weekofrecurrence?PressENTERforx.
where x is the correct week for the original date selected. The options are: first, second, third, fourth, last. Either press ENTER, or cycle through the options using CONTROLwithSPACE, or press the hotkey for your choice. These are: first = 1; second = 2; third = 3; fourth = 4; last = l. No number sign required. Press ENTER.
1. KeyPlan prompts: Dayofrecurrence?PressENTERforx where x is the day of the week of the original date selected. Options are the days of the week, weekday, weekend day, or day (refer to note above). To make a selection, cycle through by pressing CONTROLwithSPACE then ENTER.
2. KeySoft then prompts Monthsbetweenoccurrences?PressENTERforn where n is 1 by default. Either press ENTER or type the new number and then press ENTER.


9.5.1.4 Yearly
When setting a yearly recurring event, you have a choice of a date, or a month based pattern.
You already selected a date when setting up the appointment initially, for example every 8 February. KeyPlan prompts: "RecuronFebruary8eachyear?PressENTERforYes"
For Yes, press ENTER as stated.
If you want to schedule a pattern, press Nfor No. KeyPlan assumes you have scheduled the correct month in the beginning. KeyPlan prompts: Weekofrecurrence?PressENTERforx.
The options are: first, second, third, fourth, last. Either press ENTER, or cycle through the options using CONTROLwithSPACE, or press the hotkey for your choice. These are: first = 1; second = 2; third = 3; fourth = 4; last = l. No number sign required. Press ENTER.
KeySoft prompts: Dayofrecurrence?PressENTERforx
where x is the day of the selected appointment date. Options are the days of the week, weekday, weekend day, or day. To make a selection, cycle through by pressing CONTROLwithSPACE then ENTER.


9.5.2 Number of Recurrences.
Having set up the pattern, KeyPlan now wishes to know how many times the event will recur. You have four choices: Endofrecurrence?PressENTERfornone,
"None"  With this option, the event will recur right out until the end of 9999.
# occurrences  with this option, type the number of times the event recurs in digits, the maximum being 999.
date With this option, type in the date when you wish the last recurring event to occur, or to occur before, in usual date format. If the date you select does not fall in the recurring pattern, the last appointment will be the one immediately before it. For example, if your appointment is always on the second Tuesday of the month, but you specify the 31 December 2005 as the end date, the last recurrence will be the second Tuesday of December 2005, which is the 13th.
"length"  You can specify the length of time by a number of days or weeks. To do this, type the number and then D or M, for example 6 weeks is 6w and 15 days is 15d. Or, you can press the relevant hotkey as many times as the number. The hotkeys are: Days = RIGHTARROW; Weeks = DOWNARROW; Months = PAGEDOWN; Years = SHIFTwithTAB. For example, for six months, press PAGEDOWN six times. Press ENTER.
At this point you will be back into the normal Scheduling appointment procedure.


9.5.3 Recurring Appointments scheduled in Outlook
If you are using KeySync to synchronize your calendar with MS Outlook's, you will find that recurring appointments that "come across" from Outlook will take exactly the same form as above, and you can modify and change them as you wish in KeyPlan.


9.5.4 Moving between Recurring Appointments.
It is very likely that you will want to move through the occurrences of a recurring appointment, and there are commands to do this that work when the cursor is in the time and title line of an instance of the appointment.
To move to the next occurrence of the appointment, press SHIFTwithREADwithO. To move to the previous occurrence, press SHIFTwithREADwithU.


9.5.5 Notes on Recurring Appointments.
These notes explain how recurring appointments behave differently to ordinary appointments in the following circumstances:


9.5.5.1 Alarm Warning Time.
In a recurring appointment, the alarm warning time must be shorter than the interval between occurrence. For example  recurring appointment is 5pm daily, a warning time of 25 hours would have the alarm sound before the previous occurrence of the recurring appointment.


9.5.5.2 Modifications and Exceptions.
If you modify just one instance of a recurring appointment in any way at all, it creates an exception. If later you then modify the date, start or end time, and/or recurrence interval of all recurrences of that same appointment, the exception will be overwritten by a normal instance.


9.5.5.3 Privacy Setting.
When reviewing or modifying just one instance of a recurring appointment, the privacy setting is not offered for modification. This is because Outlook doesn't allow exceptions to this setting. However when reviewing or modifying all occurrences, then you can change it.


9.6 Reviewing the Appointments.
9.6.1 The Review Commands.
Most KeySoft review commands are available in the planner, but two groups of commands are unique:
To read all planner entries for the:
Previous day:	READwith7;
Current day:	;
Next day:	READwith9.
To read the planner entries within a particular day:
Previous entry:	READwithU;
Current entry:	READwithI;
Next entry:	READwithO.
These actions will read one complete appointment, or allday event. The previous and next commands will move the cursor to the beginning of the new appointment or line.
Repeated use of the previous or next commands will move the cursor through the planner. A beep will indicate that there are no more entries to read in the calendar. Note: The calendar goes out to the year 9999, so it might pay to put an end time on recurring appointments if you ever want to hear that beep! Note however that if the cursor is in the notes of an appointment, these commands will take you to the next, previous or current sentence or line, as they do in KeyWord.
To move the cursor to the top or the bottom of the current day, press READwithT, or READwithB.
Likewise, when in the notes of an appointment, these commands will take you to the top or bottom of the notes.
To speak continuously, press READwithG.
To stop the BrailleNote QT speaking at any time, press READwithSPACE.
To confirm the date of the current planner page, and how many days away from today's date, press READwithQ.
Press this command again to get the interval of time stated in weeks and days.


9.6.2 Checking Your Next Appointment.
You can check the details of your next appointment from any point in KeySoft, without losing your place in your current activity. To do this, press FUNCTIONwithN. This command recognizes appointments showing their time as busy, out of office or tentative, but not those marked as free. KeyPlan will tell you whether you have any, any more, no, or no more appointments for the day, if you are in a current appointment time, when the next appointment is and on what date and time, and when the next alarm is scheduled for if it is not associated with the next appointment.
When you are finished you are returned to the same place in your original activity.
The other way of checking just your current or next appointment for the current day is to enter the planner and select today's date in the calendar. This places you at the current or next appointment of the day, if there is one.


9.6.3 Overlapping Appointments.
Overlapping appointments occur when two appointments are scheduled with an overlapping start or end time. KeyPlan only recognizes appointments as overlapping if neither are set to show their time as free. As mentioned before, KeyPlan will warn you that you are about to schedule an overlapping appointment but won't stop you from doing so. And of course the synchronization process may also cause overlapping appointments. This is discussed fully in 13.13.7.1 Overlapping Appointments.
While in the planner, you can find the next or previous occurrence of an overlapping appointment. The commands are:
Go to next overlapping appointment: CONTROLwithREADwithO.
Go to previous overlapping appointment: READwithCONTROLwithU.
When you go to the overlapping appointment, KeyPlan will display its date, time, title and location. To hear the appointment with which it is overlapping, press CONTROLwithREADwithO again. The same command will take you to the earlier of the next pair of overlapping appointments.
To resolve an overlapping appointment situation, simply modify one or both appointments in the usual way, as described in 9.7.3 Modifying an Appointment.


9.6.4 Calendar or Appointment Information.
There are two quick ways to get information about either a day in the calendar or a specific appointment. These are by using the information command READwithI, and READwithQ.
When the cursor is in the date line of a calendar page, you can access the following information:
Press READwithI for the number of appointments and number of allday events, when the first appointment starts and the last appointment finishes.
Press READwithQ for the date and how many days away from the current date. Press the command again for the interval of time stated in weeks and days.
When the cursor is in an appointment, you can access the following information:
Press READwithI for a summary of recurrences and alarm status.
Press READwithQ for the date and time of the appointment and how many days away from the current date. Press the command again for the interval of time stated in weeks and days.


9.6.5 Finding an Appointment.
You may need to find an appointment whose date you have forgotten. If you remember a word, name or phrase in the text, then you can use the Find command, READwithF, to find it. If the text is found, you can read the details by pressing READwithI, and you can query the date by pressing READwithQ.
The text can appear more than once in the planner, so you may not find the required appointment on the first try. To continue the search, press READwithN.


9.7 Changing an Existing Appointment.
After you have created an appointment or allday event, you can edit the text of its notes, review or modify its time, date or other properties, or cancel it altogether. These functions are all outlined in this section.


9.7.1 Editing an Appointment.
After you have made an entry in the planner, you can edit, delete, move or change the layout of its text. Most of the KeySoft editing commands are available in KeyPlan. These can be used to make changes to the text of an appointment, but not to change the time and date of an appointment itself. In the case of recurring appointments, changes made this way will only affect the appointment you are in; to change all recurrences you need to use the "Review or Modify Appointment" option.
As with the review commands, there are some minor differences to the edit commands. For example, CONTROLwithI, which in the Word Processor is "deletetoendofsentence," or "deletetoendofline," depending on the Reading Mode, cancels the appointment if the cursor is in the subject line, or deletes to the end of the line or sentence if the cursor is in a note.


9.7.2 Cutting, Pasting and Deleting using block commands.
The marking, cutting and pasting operations that are available elsewhere in KeySoft also work in KeyPlan. Because the Planner is not just a document, however, these operations behave a little differently.
You can copy, cut and paste the title or notes from one appointment to another, but you can't use this method to move an appointment in total. However you can copy a whole appointment and paste it into an email or word document.
You can also mark an entire appointment or block of appointments and delete it using the CONTROLwithBthen D Delete block command. It is wise to note, however, that if you use this function to delete a recurring appointment, it will only delete that one instance of the appointment. Doing this will use more storage space than leaving the recurring appointment in the planner.
You can mark a block and change its language (for multilingual users) and/or Braille grade as elsewhere in KeySoft, but only one appointment at a time.
The Block Commands are detailed in 7.5.1 Block Commands Menu and.


9.7.3 Modifying an Appointment.
This option allows you to reschedule the date or time, change the recurring pattern, alarm status, location etc of any appointment. Position the cursor anywhere in the appointment you wish to modify, and press CONTROLwithR.
If the appointment is a recurring one, you will now be asked if you wish to modify just this one, or all instances. For just this one, pressJ, for all instances, press A. You will be presented with the same prompts and steps as for creating an appointment, the difference being that you will be offered the current appointment's options as defaults at each prompt. Simply change the ones you wish to change and pass over the others by pressing ENTER.


9.7.4 Cancelling an Appointment.
To cancel an appointment, position the cursor in the appointment you wish to cancel, enter the Appointment menu by pressing CONTROLwithI.
KeySoft prompts: "Cancelthisappointment(title).Sure?" To cancel, press Y, to abort, press N. If the appointment is part of a recurring pattern, KeySoft will then prompt: "Cancelalloccurrencesorjustthisone?" For all, press A, for just the currently selected instance, press J.


9.8 Selecting Another Date.
There are two ways to select another date. Assuming you are already in the planner, you can return to the Calendar Day selection prompt by pressing ESCAPE, and then select or Braille the required date, or you can move forwards or backwards to a different date by using the "Goto" command, READwithR.When you press READwithRKeySoft prompts: "Gowhere?"
Press F for forwards, or B for back. Follow this with D,W, MorY, to move a day, week, month or year, and then press ENTER.You can also put a number and space before the D,W, MorY.For example, to move forward 3 days, use the following:
READwithR,f,3,SPACE,D,ENTER.
To find where the cursor is currently located, press READwithQ.
Today's date and day of the week can be checked from any point in KeySoft by pressing FUNCTIONwithD.


9.9 Alarms.
9.9.1 Setting an Alarm
When you schedule an appointment, setting an alarm is one of the steps you go through. You can set an alarm on an appointment that is already set up through modifying an appointment.


9.9.2 When Alarms Sound.
An alarm rings at its programmed time, even if the BrailleNote QT is switched off. The speaker and the headphones sound the alarm. Unlike speech, the speaker sounds the alarm even if the headphones are plugged in.
If not acknowledged, the alarm continues ringing for a length of time called the "Alarmringingtime." It is then silent until:
the "Alarmrepeattime"has elapsed, OR;
a key is pressed, OR;
the machine is switched on;
In which case it sounds again. See 9.9.4 Alarm Set Up
The maximum number of times an alarm can cycle is set to 10. This is to prevent an alarm causing unnecessary battery drain.


9.9.3 Acknowledging an Alarm.
If the BrailleNote QT was on standby when the alarm sounds, it turns itself on and brings up the alarm options menu:
To cancel the alarm:	pressC;
To read and hear appointment details without cancelling:	pressR;
To postpone the alarm for 10 minutes:	press SPACE.
If the BrailleNote QT is on when the alarm sounds, first acknowledge it by pressing READwithSPACE together. You are then automatically placed in the Alarm options menu.
There are four items that you can select by pressing their initial letter. They are:
Cancel the alarm;
Read and hear the appointment details without cancelling;
Postpone the alarm. A number of minutes will be offered; to change it, type a new number of minutes (number sign not required).
Go to the corresponding appointment in the planner. The alarm is cancelled, and the cursor is placed at the start of the appointment so that you can read its details.


9.9.4 Alarm Set Up.
The ringing and repeat times have the same values for all alarms. To review or change the values, first move to the KeyPlan menu. In the KeyPlan Menu select "Setupoptions" and KeySoft enters the "KeyPlansetuplist."
The first item on the list is alarm volume. KeyPlan displays: "Alarmvolume?24."
To change the alarm volume, type a new value between 5 and 32 where 5 is quietest and 32 is loudest, and press ENTER.To test the volume, go back to the alarm volume item and press CONTROLwithT.
The next item on the list is the alarm ringing time. KeyPlan displays: "Alarmringingtime?30seconds."
This is the length of time an alarm sounds before it turns itself off. To change the value, type the required duration in seconds and press ENTER.The value can be between 5 and 600. A number sign is optional.
The second item in the list is: "Alarmrepeatperiod?5minutes."
This is the period of time for which an unacknowledged alarm will be silent before it sounds again. To change the value, type the required duration in minutes and press ENTER.The value can be between 1 and 60.


9.10 Embossing and Printing.
Any part of the planner can be embossed or printed. This section refers to embossing, but the procedure for printing is the same.
To emboss part of the planner, first move to the KeyPlan menu, and then select: "Embossplanner." KeyPlan prompts: "EmbossorSetupEmbosser?"
The Emboss option leads to a series of prompts to select the dates to emboss. The Set Up option allows the BrailleNote QT to be setup to match your embosser. This is the same as the Set Up option presented when embossing a document and is described in 6.6 The Embosser Setup List. If you have already setup your BrailleNote QT for embossing documents, you do not need to set it up again.
Assuming that the embosser has already been set up, you may proceed to emboss part of the planner. Press E for Emboss, and KeySoft prompts: "Embossfromwhichdate?Pressenterfor(date),"
You can accept the date suggested, or type a different date, or choose the starting date from the calendar that is being presented.
The next prompt is: "Embossuptoandincludingwhichdate?"
Select a finishing date, or if you prefer, a length of time from the start date. When "Embosserready?"is displayed, press Y and embossing begins. The default number of print or emboss copies is one.
If you want more than one copy, press N, and you are prompted for the number of copies. Enter a number, press ENTER, and you are placed at the "Embosserready?"prompt again. Press Y and the embosser should start immediately.
Only dates with planner entries and the final date in the specified range will be embossed or printed, and each embossed or print page will show as many days as will fit.



10 Address List.
KeyList is an address list manager. It allows you to enter addresses, phone numbers and other data against a person's name. You can review and edit the information, sort it, and copy it to KeyWord or KeyPlan. It is also possible to synchronize your Address List with an MS Outlook Contacts list  see 13.13 KeySync.
To enter the Address List from the Main Menu, use the SPACEand BACKSPACE keys to review the items in the menu, until "AddressList" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select the Address List from the Main Menu by pressing A.
You can switch directly to the Address List from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing FUNCTIONwith7. If you leave the Address List by switching directly to another application, such as the Word Processor, then pressing FUNCTIONwith7 will return you to the same point in the Address List.
BrailleNote QT displays "KeyListMenu".This menu comprises 6 options as follows:
Add address.
Look up address.
Copy addresses.
Emboss addresses.
Print addresses.
Select KeyList file.
The following chapter describes these options. If you are using KeyList for the first time, the address list is empty until you have added some addresses.


10.1 Introduction.
KeyList is an address list manager. It allows you to enter addresses, phone numbers and other data against a person's name. You can review and edit the information, sort it, and copy it to the word processor, KeyWord or the planner, KeyPlan. It is also possible to synchronize your Address List with an MS Outlook Contacts list  see KeySync. 13.13 KeySync.
To enter the Address List from the Main Menu, use the SPACEand BACKSPACE keys to review the items in the menu, until "AddressList" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select the Address List from the Main Menu by pressing A.
You can switch directly to the Address List from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing FUNCTIONwith7. If you leave the Address List by switching directly to another application, such as the Word Processor, then pressing FUNCTIONwith7 will return you to the same point in the Address List.
BrailleNote QT displays "KeyListMenu".This menu comprises 6 options as follows:
Add address.
Look up address.
Copy addresses.
Emboss addresses.
Print addresses.
Select KeyList file.
The following chapter describes these options. If you are using KeyList for the first time, the address list is empty until you have added some addresses.

10.2 Adding an Address.
This option allows you to enter contact details; last name, first name, and a list of other information. Each item of information, such as a phone number, is called a "field". Up to 25 fields can be associated with a last name to form a contact "record".
At the KeyList menu, select "Addaddress".KeyList displays: "EntrylistforAddressList".
Move to the first item in the list by pressing SPACEorADVANCE, and KeyList prompts you for a Last name. Type a last name and press ENTER.
You are then prompted for text to enter into the following fields. For any field other than the last name field, you can enter text or skip the field by pressing SPACE. The complete list of fields for an address record is as follows:
Last Name
First name
Middle Name
Title
Home Phone
Business Phone
Cell Phone
Home Email
Business Email
Home Fax
Business Fax
Street Address
Street Address Line 2
Street Address Line 3
City
State or County
Zip or Postcode
Home Country
Business Title
Company Name
Department
Business Street Address
Business Street Address Line 2
Business Street Address Line 3
Business City
Business State or County
Business Zip or Postcode
Business Country
Web Page
Notes
For each field, type the information and press ENTER. You are then asked for the next field. When you come to the Notes field, press ENTER to select it. You can then write, edit or read the notes, and return to the list by pressing ESCAPE.


Remember that names and addresses may be printed at some stage, so it is good practice to capitalize proper names as appropriate. KeySoft will put one in if you don't.
All fields except Last name are optional, so if you wish to skip a field, just press SPACE to move to the next one.
You can review the list by pressing BACKSPACEorBACKto move back, and SPACEorADVANCEto move forward. When you are satisfied, add the new record by pressing CONTROLwithENTER.
KeyList displays, "Recordadded", and you are returned to the KeyList menu. If you wish to add another record, press A and repeat the previous procedure.


10.3 Looking Up an Address.
10.3.1 Searching by Surname.
At the KeyList menu, select "LookupAddress".KeyList displays: "SelectionlistforAddressList".
Move to the first item in the list by pressing SPACEorADVANCE, and KeyList prompts: "Lastname?"
You are being asked for data which is used to find matching records. We deal with a simple case, and return to more complex searches later.
For example, you may want to review the records of all people called "Smith". In this case, type "smith" at the last name prompt, and press ENTER. The first name and last name of the first person in the address list called "Smith" is displayed. You can move through the list of "Smiths" by pressing RIGHTARROW. Each press displays his or her first name, followed by the last name, in this case "Smith". Only records which match the selection list are displayed. A beep indicates when there are no more matching last names.
To review the other fields in a particular record, press SPACEorADVANCErepeatedly. Only fields containing an entry are displayed. The format of each item comprises the name of the field, such as "Company name", followed by the entry, such as "Yoyodyne Inc." The movement commands are as follows:
To move to the previous record:	LEFTARROWorPREVIOUS.
To move to the next record: 	RIGHTARROWorNEXT.
To move to the previous field:	BACKSPACEorUPARROWorBACK.
To move to the next field: 	SPACEorDOWNARROWorADVANCE.
To jump to any field:	Press the first letter of the field name.
For example, H for Home phone number, Home email address or Home fax number.
When reviewing using speech you can use the following commands:
To hear the current record:	READwith8.
To read the next record:	READwith9.
To read the previous record:	READwith7.
To hear the next field:	READwithO.
To hear the current field:	READwithI.
To hear the previous field:	READwithU.
To hear the next word:	READwithL.
To hear the current word:	READwithK
(Press twice to spell current word.)
To hear the previous word:	READwithJ.
When you have finished listening to a selection, you can return to the selection list by pressing ESCAPE. You are asked for another Last name. If you have finished searching, you can return to the KeyList menu by pressing ESCAPE again.


10.3.2 Record Matching.
The information which you enter into the Lookup Selection List is used to find matching records. You may include as much or as little data in the List as you wish.
For example, when looking up a telephone number, you might specify just the person's last name. To start the search, press ENTER and the first person with that last name is displayed. If necessary, move through the other entries for that last name by pressing RIGHTARROW, until you locate the one with the required first name. Then press either H or B to move to the home phone number field or business phone number field.
You need only type the first few characters in a field rather than the whole field. For example, if you just type S in the Surname field, you are able to access the records of all people whose surnames begin with S.
You can search for all people who work for a particular company. At the lookup selection list, don't specify a surname, but press SPACE repeatedly until the prompt: "Companyname?"is displayedand then type the company name and press ENTER. You can then use RIGHTARROWorNEXT to move through all the people who work for that company.


10.3.3 Wildcard search.
You can also search for a name fragment within a field, using the multicharacter wild card for the unknown first part. For example, you may remember a company as: "Something and Fox, Incorporated". If you press *, followed by "fox" in the company name field, you should have a very short list of records to review.
When setting up the Lookup Selection List, you can move forward and backward through the entries without changing their values. Press SPACE or BACKSPACE to do this. To change an entry, just type the required setting. When the Selection List is to your satisfaction, start the lookup by pressing ENTER and the first match is displayed.
For example, you may wish to display all entries in your address list with a last name of Smith that live in the city of Seattle. To do this type Smith in the last name field, then press SPACE until the City field is displayed. Type Seattle, and press ENTER. All records matching your search criteria will be presented.


10.3.4 Clearing a Field.
Any fields used in a Lookup will be offered as a suggestion for the next search, unless you exit to the KeyList Menu between searches. You may want to blank out a previouslyused field so it is not used in the next search. To do this, move to the required field using FUNCTIONwithO and press the Clear Field command, CONTROLwithBACKSPACE.


10.4 Changing a Field or Adding More Information.
First we will look at changing an existing field, as would be the case, for example, if you wished to change a person's phone number. From the "Lookup address" option, select the person's record you wish to modify, then move to the field to be changed. Press CONTROLwithK, and you are asked for a new entry for this field. There are three options here:
1. Type a new entry and press ENTER.
2. Edit the old field which is offered as the suggestion, as described in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt.
3. Clear the field by pressing CONTROLwithBACKSPACE, followed by ENTER.
This puts you in an entry list so you can modify or add to any other field as well. You have the same three options for all the fields and you can change any other field in the record.
The second scenario is where you wish to add an additional field to an existing record. From the "Lookup address" option, select the person's record you wish to add to, then press CONTROLwithK. KeySoft will prompt: "Lastname?Currently(name)"
Press ENTER to accept the name, then use SPACE to move through the list of fields until you hear the field you wish to add. Type in the required information and press ENTER. When you are satisfied press CONTROLwithENTER and the modified record will be stored.


10.5 Deleting a Record.
To delete a record, comprising a last name and all its associated fields, use the "Lookup" option. Move to any field in the record and press CONTROLwith8.
You are prompted to make sure, so press Y, and the record is deleted from the address list.


10.6 Duplicating a Record.
You may want to create a new record which is similar to an existing one. There is often less to type if you duplicate an existing record, and then make the required changes. You might do this, for example, if two people work for the same company and many of their details are the same. There is a useful function called "Retrieve last record", which can help here.
Assume that you have just added a new record for someone who works for a particular company, and you want to add another similar record for someone else. Select the Add Address option and when you get as far as the Last name prompt, select the Block Commands Menu by pressing CONTROLwithB.
Note that this is a different menu to the Block Commands menu in KeyWord. Press SPACE and KeyList displays: "Retrievelastrecord".
KeyList is offering to retrieve the last record you added, so press ENTER. KeyList prompts, "Lastname?CurrentlySmith".You now have two identical records, so you should change the fields that are to be different, such as Last name, First Name, and Title. When you have made the changes, add the new record by pressing CONTROLwithENTER.
If you need to add other similar records, continue using the retrieve last record command as necessary. If you want to duplicate an old record, just look it up first, since the retrieve last record command retrieves the last record which was looked up, added or copied.


10.7 Inserting an Address into a Document.
You may wish to insert a name and address, from KeyList into a letter you are typing with KeyWord. This can be done in two steps as follows:
1. Copy the address to the clipboard.
2. Paste the clipboard into the document.
These steps are now described. Select KeyList and from the KeyList menu, press L for Lookup, and locate the person's address. At any field in this record, select the Block Commands Menu by pressing CONTROLwithB. There is only one item in this menu, and if you press SPACE the following message is displayed, "Copyrecordtoclipboard".This is the action you require, so press ENTER.
KeyList then prompts, "Templatename?"for the name of the template that determines which fields in the record should be copied, and in which order. You can create your own templates as described later. For the moment, select an existing one by pressing SPACE repeatedly until "Letterheadtemplate"is displayed and press ENTER.
The record which you just looked up is copied to the clipboard. KeyList displays, "Recordcopiedtoclipboard", and you are returned to your place in the record. The fields which have been copied to the clipboard are formatted in a letterhead style.
Now use KeyWord to create the letter which requires an address. Place the cursor where you want the address to be inserted and paste the clipboard by pressing CONTROLwithB,thenP. If you review this document, you will find the selected person's name and address in a letterhead layout.


10.8 Embossing Addresses.
You may want to emboss a name and address or phone number, or a selection of them. From the KeyList menu select "Embossaddresses".KeySoft prompts: "EmbossorSetupembosser?"
If you haven't previously set up the embosser, press S. The set up procedure is covered in 6.5 Embossing a Group of Documents.
To proceed with embossing, press E, and KeySoft prompts: "Templatename"?


10.8.1 Templates for Embossing.
An address record is a series of fields, whereas an embossed page must have a specific format. So, to emboss address records, you must specify which fields you want to emboss, and how they should be arranged. This is defined by a template, which is a KeyWord document laid out with the required field names in the required arrangement. A template may also contain text and formatting information.
There are two main template categories, namely Braille templates and text templates. To emboss addresses from the address list, you would use a Braille template. Conversely to print addresses from the address list, you would use a Text template. The convention used for naming templates, places the word "Braille" in front of the Braille templates.
KeySoft is provided with several readymade Braille and Text templates for copying, embossing or printing. There is a "Letterhead template", which produces a letter heading in the form:
Line 1: (first name)space(last name).
Line 2: (street address).
Line 3: (street address, line 2).
Line 4: (city)comma(state)(zip or postal code).
Another readymade template is called, "Phone List template", and produces a single line for each record in the form:
(last name)space(first name)
Tab: (street address)space(street address, line 2)
Tab: (city)
Tab: (business phone number).
A new line is then created.
Select a template for your purpose. If there is no template which suits what you want to do, you can modify or create a template as described in 10.10 Templates.


10.8.2 Selecting Addresses to Emboss.
After you have selected the template, KeyList displays, "SelectionlistforAddressList".If you want to emboss every record, press ENTER. However, you can select just those addresses you want to emboss. For example, you might type "Yoyodyne Inc." in the "Company name" field. When you have set up the required search field, or fields, start the lookup by pressing ENTER. KeyList displays the number of selected records, and prompts, "Embossallselectedrecords?"To do this, press Y. All the selected addresses are embossed, and you are returned to the KeyList menu.
Alternatively, you have a further opportunity to choose from the selected addresses. To do this, press N, and you are presented with the first matching record. If you wish to emboss this record, press ENTER and this record is embossed. If you do not want to emboss this record, scan the list, and press ENTERfor each record that you do wish to include.


10.9 Printing Addresses.
The procedure for printing an address list, or a selection of it, is very similar to embossing. From the KeyList menu, select "Printaddresses".KeySoft prompts: "PrintorSetupprinter?"
If you haven't already set up the printer, press S. The set up procedure is covered in 6.9 Testing the Printer. To proceed with printing, press P, and follow the prompts to select a template and choose which address records to print.


10.10 Templates.
Templates are used for copying, embossing and printing. You can use the templates as they are supplied, or you can modify them, or create new ones. The procedure for creating a new template is described.


10.10.1 Braille and Text Templates.
It is important to note that a template can be either a Braille or a text document, and the right one must be used for the purpose. If you want to emboss a Braille document, or insert into a Braille document, then a Braille template is required. Conversely, if you want to print, or insert into a text document, then a text template is needed.


10.10.2 Creating a Template.
Suppose that you wish to copy records from an address list into some business letters. You might want a template which puts your own address at the head of the letter, followed by the date, and then the recipient's name and address. We will assume that the letters will be Braille documents, which could be printed later. In this case you will need a Braille template.
From the KeyWord menu, press C to create a new document. At the "Foldername?"prompt, select "KeyList", which is the folder where templates are kept. At the prompt: "Documenttocreate?" type a suitable name such as: "Business template". Unless you specify otherwise a Braille template is created. If you had wanted a text template, press CONTROLwithX at the promptfor "Documenttocreate?"until "Createatextdocument" is displayed.
Now compose this document in the way you want the record to be formatted. The layout is for a business letter, so first type your own address, followed by a blank line.
Next, insert the date by pressing FUNCTIONwithO, followed by I, then D. KeySoft prompts, "Inserttoday'sdateorprintingdate?"Select the Printing Date option by pressing P. This causes the date to be updated each time you use the template to emboss or print Address List records. The Today's Date option inserts today's actual date, that is the date you created the template document.
The text you have typed so far will be reproduced each time you use this template. Now we want to copy a recipient's first name from the address list. Place the cursor where you want the name to go, and select the list of available field names as follows:
Select the Template menu by pressing CONTROLwithA, and then select the Insert Field option.
KeySoft prompts, "Insertfieldfromwhichdatabase?"Select "KeyList'sAddresslist"by pressing A. You are then presented with the "Fieldselectionlist". This is a list of all the field names in an address list. Press SPACEorBACKSPACE repeatedly to review this list and find the field you want, which in this case is: "Firstname".Press ENTER to select it. You are returned to the document, a "First name field" marker is inserted, and the cursor is placed just after it. Now when a record is copied into a document using this template, a person's First Name appears in the marked position.
To put a space after the first name, press SPACE. To include the last name next, follow the same procedure which you used to select the first name, but select the "Lastname"field instead. This places a "Last name field" marker after the space.
Start a new line by pressing ENTER, and continue to compose the recipient's address, using field names from the list. A template may include whatever punctuation, formatting commands or text that you wish, and these are included with the fields that are specified by the template. The field indicator is shown on the Braille display as $fld followed by the field name.
Other layout rules to remember are:
1. When using a template, KeyList filters out lines which only contain blank fields. For example, the original record may have a blank "Country" field. If your template contains a "Country" field name on a line by itself, a blank line will not be generated.
2. If you want a blank line to be generated when it contains only blank fields, start the line in the template with a marker to indicate "Force Inclusion of Line", by pressing CONTROLwithA, then F.
3. Part of a line in a template can be marked with suppression markers. If the field or fields between the markers are blank, everything between the markers is suppressed when the template is used. To insert these markers, press CONTROLwithA,for the Template menu, and choose Start or End Conditional Suppression. For an example of the use of suppression markers, see the "Letterhead Template" in the KeyList folder.
4. To put a comment line in a template, start the line with a comment marker. To do this, press CONTROLwithAfor the Template menu, and choose: "Mark comment line". The contents of the comment line are not included when the template is used.
5. Records can be printed to fill the page, in a layout suitable for a phone list. Alternatively, they can be printed one per page, to suit envelopes and form letters. In the latter case, a "New Page" marker is required at the end of the template.
When you have finished the template, you can review it as you would review any other KeyWord document. Markers are spoken with character or word review commands.
In the template, fields appears to have a particular length, but the actual field lengths are substituted when you use the template. For example, the "First name" field appears to be 13 characters long in the template, but only 4 characters result if the address list field contains the name "John".
If you create a new template or modify an existing one, you should check the resulting layout to ensure that it is what you intended. You can do this by copying a record into the clipboard, using the new template, and pasting the clipboard into a blank document. You can then review the layout.


10.11 Copying Addresses.
KeyList allows you to copy a subset of the address list, such as all people who work for Fox Corporation, into a chosen file. At the KeyList menu select "Copyaddresses".KeyList displays: "Copyaddressestoadocumentoranaddresslist?"
You have the option of copying the addresses to a KeyWord document, or to another address list file used by KeyList or KeyMail.


10.11.1 Copying to a Text or Braille Document.
To copy to a document, press D, and you hear prompts for a destination folder name and document name. Select an existing Braille or text document, or create a new one.
When you have entered the destination documentname, you are prompted, "Templatename?"This determines the fields to be copied and their format on the page. The offered template is either a Braille or a text document, to match the type of destination document you have chosen. To accept the suggested template, press ENTER, or press SPACE repeatedly to review the list of available templates, and choose one by pressing ENTER.
You are then placed in the KeyList Lookup function, at the prompt: "SelectionlistforAddressNotebook". If you want to copy every record, press ENTER. However, you also have the opportunity to select just those addresses you want to copy, if they have something in common. For example, in the "Organization" field you might type "Fox Corporation." When you have set up the required search field or fields, start the lookup by pressing ENTER. KeyList displays the number of selected records, and prompts, "Copyallselectedrecords?" To do this, press Y.
All the selected records are copied to the destination document, and you are returned to the KeyList menu. Alternatively, you have a further opportunity to choose from the selected addresses. To do this, press N, and you are presented with the first matching record. If you press ENTER this record is added to the document. If you do not want to include this record, use READwith9 to scan the list, and press ENTER for each record you wish to include.


10.11.2 Copying to an Address List File.
You can also copy addresses to another address list file, rather than to a document as just described. At the KeyList menu select "Copyaddresses". Your BrailleNote QT prompts: "Copyaddressestoadocumentoranaddresslist?"
To copy to an address list file, press A, and your BrailleNote QT prompts for a destination folder name and file name.Select an existing address list. If you need to select a different drive or folder, press BACKSPACE.
There are now two possibilities; either the source and the destination files have the same number of fields and the same field names, or there are differences.
The first case applies when you are copying records to a file with an identical structure to the source file. KeySoft advises, "Allfieldsmatch.Reviewfieldmappinglist?"You would normally press N here, and you are placed at the Selection List, from where you may select the required records, as described in the previous section about copying to a document.
Alternatively, if the source and destination structures are different, KeySoft tells you how many field names match, and queries, "Reviewfieldmappinglist?"If you press N at this point, KeySoft copies only those fields which have matching field names in the destination file.
However, if you want to specify how each field in the source file is mapped to the destination file, press Y. KeySoft presents a "Field Mapping List" containing pairs of field names. The first of each pair is a field name from the source file, and the second is a matching field name in the destination file, if a match exists. To change a mapping, review the field mapping list by pressing SPACEor BACKSPACE repeatedly and select a source field name by pressing ENTER. You are presented with a field selection list containing all the field names in a destination record. Review this list and pick the corresponding field name by pressing ENTER. You can then continue to review the field mapping list, making changes as required. To prevent a field being copied, use the Clear Field command, CONTROLwithBACKSPACE, when the field name is displayed. When the field mapping list is to your satisfaction, press ESCAPE and you can proceed to select the required records to copy, as described previously.


10.12 Selecting an Address List.
KeySoft is installed with a blank address file called: "AddressList".Its name is displayed when you select, "Addaddress", or "Lookupaddress".However there is no reason why you can't have multiple address lists, instead of one, and use them for other purposes than storing addresses. For simple, step by step instructions on how to set up a database using an address list file, refer to 10.14.1 Setting Up a Database. You should also read the following section on Creating an Address List before proceeding.
To select a different address list, or to verify which address list is currently selected, select the "SelectKeyListfile"option in the KeyList Menu. You are prompted for a folder and file name. Select the folder and file in any of the usual ways. The selected file remains current until deliberately changed. If the file selected is not of the Address List type then you are prompted to verify the selection when you enter KeyList.


10.13 Creating an Address List.
For easy to follow step by step instructions on how to create a database, refer to 10.14.1 Setting Up a Database.
Each address list has an associated KeyList definition file that defines the fields that are contained in an address record. The definition file for the standard "Address List" may be found in the KeyList folder and is named "Address List.klt".
When you first enter details into the Address List, an associated database volume is created within the "Keylist.cdb" file that is stored in the KeyList folder on the Flash Disk. The entries you place in the Address List are stored within this database file.
We recommend caution in working with database definition files. If you think that you have the necessary skills and wish to experiment with creating your own variant of the "AddressList", we suggest that you first make a copy of the existing Address List definitions file and that you modify this copied file. In this way you will always have the original Address List definition file intact.
From the File Manager, copy the file named "Address List" from the KeyList folder on the Flash Disk to the General folder on the Flash Disk.
Use Keyword to open the Address List file you have copied into the General Folder. We suggest you set KeyWord to line reading mode, by pressing READwithS until "line reading mode" is displayed.
We'll now consider the task of modifying this file so that the associated database is named "Phone List", and the definition file only contains fields for "Last Name", "First name", and "Phone". Now, let's take a closer look at the original address list definitions file that we have just opened.
You will find that the file contains some 33 lines of information. The syntax of each line determines its function.
The first line of the file contains the word "database", followed by the words "Address List". We want to create a definition file called "Phone List", so replace "Address List" with "Phone List", leaving the word "database" at the start of the line.
The second line contains the number "24". Leave this unchanged.
The next 27 lines define each field as it appears in the Address List. Each line starts with a unique number, but the order in which the fields appear in the database is determined by their relative line position, not the number used to identify the line.
Delete the lines starting with "16420" and "16419". These lines represent the fields "Middle Name" and "Title" in the original definition file.
Position the cursor at the start of the line numbered "14856" and place a "Top of Block" marker. Next position the cursor to the start of the line numbered "24594", enter the Block Menu and select "Delete Block".
You should now be left with a file that contains 9 lines. Modify the line starting with "14857" so that the text between the quotes is "Phone" rather than the original "Home phone number". It is important that the word "Phone" is placed inside quotation marks.
The final form of your modified file should be:
database Phone List
24
14865, name, autocap, "Last name"
14854, name autocap, "First name"
14857, phone, autonum, "Phone"
24594, concat, "14865, 14854"
24595, concat, "14854, 14865"
announcement order 14854, 14865
sort order 24594, 24595
Once you are happy with the contents of the modified file, exit the file, and from the File Command Menu, rename it to "Phone List". Ignore the message that there is no database associated with the file. Copy the "Phone List" definition file back into the KeyList folder.
All you have to do now is go to the Address List menu and select the "Phone List" file as your address file. You can then add entries to your new phone list. When you first try to add an entry to the phone list, you will be asked to confirm the creation of the associated database within the "Keylist.cdb" file.


10.14 Using KeyList to Manipulate Databases
KeyList is not restricted to looking up or adding to an address list. It can also be used to manipulate any of the databases in the KeyList folder. To do this, select the folder and name of the required database using the "SelectKeyListfile" option in the KeyList menu as described in 10.12 Selecting an Address List.
You can now use KeyList to Lookup or Add to the selected database in the usual way, as if it were an address list.
When you have finished reviewing or updating a database, remember to reselect the Address List in the KeyList folder for future use.


10.14.1 Setting Up a Database
This section gives simple step by step instructions on how to create your own database, using the address list database as a starting point. As a safety precaution we strongly recommend you back up your address list database before experimenting with other databases. Please note that because these steps require some manipulation of a copy of our existing address list file, and that because individually created databases will vary significantly, Pulse Data's technical support team does not currently provide support in the creation or implementation of any usercreated database, or possible restoration of any corruption to the original address list file.
1. Open the Word Processor.
2. Go to Create a document.
3. Choose the KeyList folder.
4. Press CONTROLwithX to cycle through the types of documents that can be created, until you get to "CreateaKeyListdefinitionfile".
5. Input the name of your new database and press ENTER. For example, if you are creating a credit card database, you might call it credit cards.
6. Now you are at the top of a blank document, where you see computer Braille is required.
7. From here, we want to insert the KeyList definition file called address list. Open the Block commands menu by pressing CONTROLwithB.
8. Press I for "insertfile." You are prompted, "insertdocumentfromdrive?" Select the Flash Disk.
9. At the folder prompt, select the KeyList folder. Press READwithX until you arrive at the list of all files in KeyList.
10. Now, move down through this list of files in your KeyList folder until you get to "addresslist." Press ENTER. This inserts the file into your newly created word processing document, and places you at the bottom of the file. Go to the top by pressing READwithT.
11. You will then see "databaseAddresslist", followed by $(dollar sign) P. Remember, dollar sign in computer Braille is dots1246.
12. Delete the words, "Addresslist", and replace them with the name of your desired database, i.e. credit cards. Be sure to initial cap the first letter of the first word of your new database name.
13. Now, as you read through the file, you will see that each line begins with a number followed by a comma, then the field name followed by a comma, then the field type followed by a comma, then the field label in quotation marks.
14. Delete the fields you do not want by deleting the line from the number to just past the new paragraph marker, dollar sign p.
15. Leaving a number at the beginning of each new line, change the words in quotes (the field labels) to text that will reflect your database needs. Be sure to leave only one new paragraph marker, dollar sign p, between each line. Each new line must begin with a number, and end with a dollar sign p.
For example, If you want to change the field name of "Lastname" to "Creditcardname", simply move to the L of the words "lastname" and delete the word Last, and type in the words "creditcard".Remember, the field label must always be in quotes, with initial caps on the first word of the field label only.
16. Once all editing is done, exit the file by returning to the Main Menu.
17. Move to the address list database. Select your newly created definition file by pressing SPACE, moving you down through the list of definition files, just as you do in any other folder or file list. Once you arrive at the newly created definition file, press ENTER.
18. Now, you are in the familiar KeyList menu.
19. Select add address. It will tell you that your database does not exist and ask if you want to create it. Press Y.
20. Now it is time to start filling in those fields you have created, just as you do in your address list database.



11 Email.
This chapter introduces KeyMail, the BrailleNote QT's userfriendly email package that lets you send, receive and manage your email.
If you are new to the world of electronic telecommunications you may wonder what email is. That is, apart from being short for electronic mail. Essentially email is just the electronic equivalent of paper mail, but it is faster and cheaper than ordinary mail. It takes minutes or hours rather than days to reach its destination even when the destination is on the other side of the world.
In order to send and receive email, computers need to have a set of rules, or protocol, which determines how the information is sent. BrailleNote QT's email program, KeyMail, uses the popular POP (Post Office Protocol) email format. This protocol has become the "industry standard" which ensures easy connection to the majority of Internet Service Providers.
We commence this chapter by describing, in general terms, what KeyMail can do. We then take an overview of the KeyMail package, and follow this with getting started with KeyMail from a first time perspective. Following this is a fuller description of KeyMail and its component parts.


11.1 What Can KeyMail Do.
The KeyMail email program enables you to access mainstream email services and communicate with email users worldwide.
KeyMail provides you with the following capabilities:
KeyMail enables you to communicate with people using many different popular email programs like Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express, Eudora, and Lotus cc:Mail.
KeyMail guides you through the steps of addressing and composing an email message, connecting to an email service provider, sending email and receiving email.
KeyMail helps you organize your email messages so you can find them easily using electronic folders, and it enables you to set up your preferred email options.
KeyMail handles attachments to email. It understands Microsoft Word document formats so you can read Word documents attached to your email. You can also attach files of any format to your outgoing email.
KeyMail eliminates the routine task of appending your name and email address, and facilitates responding to an email message. Replying to a message automatically creates a new message with the address and subject line filled in, and the message area contains the text of the original message.
With a range of connectivity configurations available and the KeyMail software, BrailleNote QT provides everything you need to join the connected world of email.


11.2 KeyMail Menu.
You can access KeyMail by typing E from the Main Menu, or by pressing FUNCTIONwith8. This takes you to the KeyMail Menu, which contains 4 items. These are:
Write an email;
Read email;
Connect to send and receive email;
Set up options.


11.2.1 Write Email.
Choose "Writeanemail" when you wish to send a new message to one or more people. You can enter their email addresses manually, or more conveniently, choose them from your KeyList address list. KeyMail steps you painlessly through the various options that include the following items:
main recipient or recipients;
carbon copy recipient or recipients;
blind carbon copy recipient or recipients;
subject; and,
whether you wish to send any file attachments.
You can then create, review, spell check, and edit the text of your email message using the same friendly commands used in KeyWord. At this point you may choose to send your email, with or without saving a copy, or save it as a Draft, so that you can return to it at a later time.
You may also emboss or print a copy of your email.


11.2.2 Reading Email.
To read email stored on your system, choose "ReadEmail.You can check for new messages before you start, or read messages stored from previous sessions. KeyMail uses a series of folders to organize your mail, and you can add folders of your own to streamline the filing of your mail. KeyMail guides you through selecting the desired folder, and provides tools for replying to and forwarding email, with and without the original text and/or attachments included.
Emails can be marked for further action, such as moving or copying to another folder, or sending to the Trash folder.


11.2.3 Checking for Email.
To check for new email, choose "Connecttosendandreceiveemail. KeyMail prompts you through the necessary steps, and provides feedback about the status of the connection and mail download. If you have any unsent mail, it is also sent at this time.


11.2.4 Setup Options.
The purpose of the"Setupoptions"is to define the details of your email accounts. You can set up as many accounts as you wish. Using the Receive options you can choose not to delete messages from your service provider after they have been downloaded, leaving them available to be downloaded to another computer. A size limit can also be set on emails to be downloaded, and if exceeded, an alert will be given. The Address list set up allows you to define which address list to use, if you have more than one, and to tell it your own name and email address so these can be included in email you send.
Setting up access to the internet itself is handled separately. For more information, refer to 13 Connectivity.


11.2.5 Disconnecting.
When KeyMail connects in order to send or receive email, at the end of the process it will prompt:"Remainconnected?" At this point you can press Yto stay connected to the internet, or Nto disconnect. The reason you have this choice is because you may wish to do other email activities, or switch to KeyWeb, during the same session. When you choose to remain connected, KeySoft returns to the Main Menu. When you disconnect, KeySoft returns to the KeyMail Menu.


11.3 Before You Start.
Before you can send and receive email, you need to set up an email account with an Internet Service Provider, or ISP for short. If you already have an email account, you can configure KeyMail to work with it in most cases. For those unfamiliar with Internet Service Providers, your ISP can be thought of as providing a similar service to telephone banking, only instead of shuffling money, your ISP handles your email.
First you have to choose a Service Provider (ISP) and establish with them what your email address and log on password will be, and the address of their send and receive mail boxes. A typical example of these various items may be:
User Name: Murray_Thorn;
Password: Cheeky;
Pop Server address: pop.clear.net.nz;
SMTP Server address: smtp.clear.net.nz.
In some cases you may require other information such as a DNS address. Either ask your Service Provider for details on setting up a Windows CE machine, or contact your BrailleNote QT dealer.
If using a dialup connection, you will also require a telephone number from them. Some Service Providers also require a User Name and Password for the initial connection, as well as those required to access your actual EMail account.
Some people have email accounts with separate providers, but may only access them using one ISP connection to the Internet. Others may have several accounts and several different ways to get connected. Others will have just one email account through one ISP. This chapter covers the setting up of an email account and the handling of email. For information on how to set up the connection to the internet, refer to the Connectivity Chapter..


11.4 Correcting Input Errors.
Unless you are extremely accurate, it is highly likely that you will input an incorrect keystroke or two while you are filling in the various details. KeySoft has a number of editing and review commands that make it easy to correct such problems. Get into the habit of frequently using KeySoft Help, HELP.It often provides a valuable source of information relevant to what you are trying to do.
If you notice a mistake while typing in, use BACKSPACE to take out the last character. To review an email address, you can display it by pressingREADwithK. Pressing this combination again causes the address to be spelt. You can move forwards and back through an entry using READwithM or READwithPERIOD.
Alternatively, you can locate the character you wish to position the cursor at on the Braille Display, and press the Touch Cursor associated with that cell to route the cursor to that character.


11.5 Writing an Email Message.
KeyMail provides most of the important functions of the popular email programs available today. If you have used any of these programs you have a head start because you already understand what you are doing. KeyMail guides you through the process of addressing, writing an email message and attaching files to email.
There is some essential detail that you must provide, like who you want to send the email to, but there is also much detail that is optional. The following discussion guides you through all of the available options.
When addressing email using KeyMail you may select addresses from an address list. KeyMail provides a way of setting up your own personal address details that are used specifically by KeyMail. This information is needed so that KeyMail can add your details to your outgoing email. Then your email correspondents have a return address for their reply.
Remember that if you need help with your available options at any point, press HELP.
1. From anywhere in KeySoft, press FUNCTIONwith8, or go to the Main Menu and press E. From the KeyMail menu, select "WriteanEmail"
2. KeySoft prompts:"Sendto?"Type in the address and press ENTER. Or, if the address you want to use is in your address book, press the first few letters, or the whole name, of the person you want to send the email to and press ENTER. KeySoft looks for entries in the address list with matching first names. If it finds a match, it displays the first name and surname of the matching record. KeySoft continues at Step 3.
If two or more records are found, it reports "Xrecordsselected."where X is the number of records, and queries "Sendtoallselectedaddresses?"If yes, press Y. KeySoft continues at Step 4.
If you don't want to send to all of them, press N. KeySoft confirms "No"and displays the first name and surname of the first matching record. To send to this person, press ENTER. To skip this person and go to the next, press READwith9,and so on until KeySoft displays your choice, then press ENTER. KeySoft will confirm your selection with the message: "Addressadded".
If KeySoft fails to find a match, it reports "Cannotfindnameintheaddresslist,"where name is the name you typed. You can edit the name and try again.
A person may have more than one email address, in which case you get to choose which address to use.
Other options available when entering an email address are:
Type in the email address, rather than the persons name.
Look up the person in the address list by pressing BACKSPACEwithL. This takes you to the selection list for the Address List.
3. KeySoft now prompts, "Alsosendto? The same options as are discussed in step 2 are available. To skip adding another address here, press ENTER.
4. A prompt: "Copyto?" is displayed. Type a name as discussed in step 2 or press ENTER to skip.
5. A prompt: "Blindcopyto?" is displayed. Again you can type a name as discussed in step 2 or press ENTER to skip.
You may be wondering what blind copy is? It is a copy of an email that is sent without being marked with all "sendto" and "copyto" addresses. Consequently the recipient does not know that anyone else has been sent a copy.
6. KeySoft prompts: Subject?". Type a word or phrase that encapsulates the topic of your email and press ENTER. You can quickly move to the Subject field from any of the previous field by pressing READwith9. This saves you having to"passthrough"all the intervening fields if you do not wish to enter any addresses.
7. KeySoft then queries "Attachafiletothisemail?" If no press ENTER or press N and KeySoft continues at the next step. If yes please refer to section 11.6 Attaching a file to an email.
8. The prompts"Emailmessage,"Topofdocument"and "Blank" are presented. You are placed at the top of a new document in KeyWord where you can type, review and edit your email message. When you are happy with it, pressESCAPE to exit KeyWord. 
9. Now the prompt "Readytosendthisemail?" is displayed. If not press N and you will be returned to the "sendto" prompt. You may review the details you previously entered by pressing SPACE. If you are ready to send the email, press Y. KeySoft now prompts "Saveacopy?" PressN to send the email without retaining a copy. Press Y to send the email and to save a copy of the email message. KeySoft queries which folder to use. Select the folder from existing ones or create a new folder in the usual way. KeySoft returns to the KeyMail menu.
There are 4 other options available at the "Readytosendthisemail?"prompt:
To save the email as a Draft, press D. This saves the email in the "Draft" folder, where it can be retrieved at a later time.
To Print, press P.
To Emboss, press E.
To abandon this email without sending, press ESCAPE.
KeySoft saves your outgoing email in a special folder, called the "Outbox. When you exit the KeyMail menu, KeySoft will prompt if there are any unsent messages in the Outbox, and ask if you want to send them. Pressing N leaves the email in the Outbox to be sent at some other time. If you press Y KeySoft will prompt for an email account and connection configuration, and send the email. KeySoft does not check for newly received email at this time.
If you know that you have email to send and also wish to check for new received email, choose the "Connecttosendandreceiveemail" option on the KeyMail menu.


11.6 Attaching a file to an email.
To attach a file to an email, follow these steps.
1. When KeySoft queries "Attachafiletothisemail?" press Y. KeySoft displays "Foldername?General."
Select a drive, folder, and file in the usual way.
2. You are now asked "Filetoattach?" Press SPACE to access the file list. KeySoft prompts"Listofallfilesin(foldername)folder."Review the list and select the file you want.
3. KeySoft now queries whether you want to attach the file in its current format. For example, KeySoft might query "AttachthisKeyWorddocumentinadifferentfiletype?" If you press Y for Yes, KeySoft queries, "Attachaswhichfiletype?MicrosoftWordfile? Press ENTER to accept this option. To choose a different file type, press CONTROLwithSPACE. The available file types are: Microsoft Word, ASCII text, Plain Braille file, Rich Text Format (RTF), WordPerfect 5.1, and same file type as the source.
4. KeySoft now prompts, "Attachanotherfile?You can now attach another file by typing Y for yes. KeySoft continues at the beginning of this step.
5. When you have finished attaching files, pressN. Continue with the email writing procedure.
Note: When sending a document as an attachment, it pays to consider the reading equipment available to the recipient. For example, a plain Braille file is no use to someone without a Braille reading device. Remember also that you can attach files off the Network, even those whose file type is incompatible with the BrailleNote QT.


11.7 Read Email.
The "ReadEMail" option on the KeyMail menu is likely to be the most frequently used feature of the BrailleNote QT's email system. Using this option you can download new email, read email stored in the KeyMail filing system, including those sent by yourself, organize your email into folders, and send unwanted email to the trash folder.
KeyMail guides you through processes such as reading or detaching email file attachments and moving or copying email to other folders. It provides options for replying to, and forwarding email. KeyMail allows you to perform these options one at a time, or you can mark individual email for later action.
Next we discuss the philosophy behind KeyMail's "ReadEmail" design, then we take a detailed look at each of the available features.


11.7.1 Email Folders.
KeyMail organizes your messages by sorting them into folders. These folders are located within the KeyMail system, and are not part of the normal folder structure of KeySoft. Initially, KeyMail provides 7 internal folders. These are Inbox, Outbox, Sent, Received, All, Draft and Trash. It is highly recommended that you create at least 2 folders of your own. Your folders could simply be called MailIn and Mailout.
Incoming mail is automatically placed in the Inbox. When you have read an email, KeyMail will prompt you to move the email to another folder. This folder must be one that you have created, or the "Trash" folder, and could for example be your MailIn folder. Items moved from the Inbox also appear in the Received folder. A link to this email also appears in the All folder. It is important to understand that if an email stays in the Inbox, it does not appear in either the Received or All folders.
The Outbox stores your outgoing email messages until they have been sent. At the point where you are about to send your email message, KeyMail asks if you wish to save a copy. If you answer yes, you are prompted for the folder into which to save the email. Again, this must be a folder you have created, and could be your Mailout folder. Email saved in a folder prior to sending will also appear in the Sent folder. A link to this email is also placed in the All folder. It is important to realize that sent emails only appear in the Sent and All folders if you have saved them to one of your folders.
The Drafts folder is used to hold messages that have been started, but are not ready to be sent, and the Trash folder stores any emails deleted from the system.
New mail is automatically placed in the Inbox and is stored in the order it is received. If you choose to read the Inbox, KeyMail asks whether you wish to check for new mail before placing you in the Inbox at the last item received.
KeyMail encourages you to organize your email as you read. Once a message has been read from the Inbox, you are prompted to move the message from the Inbox to another folder. In this way you keep the number of items in your Inbox to a manageable number, and you are able to organize your email under useful categories. Email within a folder can be marked, either on an individual basis, or alternatively all items can be marked. This handy feature allows you to move, copy, delete, print or emboss marked emails as a group without having to repeat the procedure for each email.
Reading or detaching file attachments received with email is easy with KeyMail. Document attachments can be read without detaching, or they may be detached and saved in the normal KeySoft folders so that they can be accessed from KeyWord.
The EmailActionMenu" can be invoked from within any KeyMail folder, or while reading an email, and provides tools for replying to email, forwarding an email to another person or group of people, moving, copying, deleting, printing and embossing email.


11.7.2 Receiving incoming Email.
The following steps are required to read your incoming email.
1. Select KeyMail by pressing FUNCTIONwith8.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMailMenu. Select "ReadEmail" from the KeyMail menu.
3. KeySoft prompts "Connectusingwhichconfiguration?PressENTERfor(name).where (name) is the name of a connection configuration you have set up in the Connectivity menu. To use the offered configuration, just press ENTER.If the correct configuration was not prompted, press SPACE repeatedly to find the required configuration. When you have found it, pressENTER.
4. KeySoft prompts: "Usewhichemailaccount?PressENTERfor(account)" To select the offered email account, press ENTER, otherwise press SPACE repeatedly to find the required account. When you have found it, pressENTER.
Note: If you typically use the same email account and the same connection configuration every time, you can simply cut these two prompts short by pressing ENTER, because the offered option is always the last option used.
5. If using a dialup modem to access your email, read this. If not, skip to the next step. KeySoft displays the message dialing, and you should hear the dialing process followed by whistling noises as your modem connects with the modem at your Service Provider. Before the sequence of messages listed in the next step, you will first hear these:
Dialing;
Connected;
Logging On;
Logon Successful;
Connected;
...and at the end of the sequence below, you will get this message:
Remain connected to the modem? (Press Y or N)
6. KeySoft reports the progress of the mail checking sequence by displaying the appropriate message as each significant stage of the operation is completed. The typical sequence of messages, assuming you have one new message to receive and no outgoing email to send, is:
There is 1 email on Server;
Checking for new messages;
There is 1 new email;
Receiving 1;
There is no email to send.


11.7.3 Reading New EMail
When new email appears in the Inbox, you will be presented with the first new email to read:
1. To review the fields associated with the Email press SPACE to advance through the fields, or BACKSPACE to move back through the fields.
Each email entry in a folder consists of a number of fields, depending on whether the email has any attachments, and how many there are. The first field presented is the Subject, followed by the sender. Next the date and time the message was received is given, followed by a field for each attachment, if they are present. Finally, a list of whom the email was to be copied to, followed by the date and time the message was sent in the time zone it was sent from.
File attachments are discussed in 11.7.5 Received Attachments.
2. To read the email, press ENTERat any field other than an attachment field.
3. KeySoft prompts TopofDocument, and you are placed at the top of the email message. Use the normal KeyWord commands to read and review the message. When you have finished reading, press ESCAPE to exit the document.
4. KeySoft prompts "Movethisemailtowhichfolder?"To hear the existing options, press SPACE. These are Trash and My Email. You can create a new folder by typing its name and pressing Yat the prompt. KeySoft will advise that one email has been moved. If you want to leave the email in the Inbox press ESCAPE. You are then returned to the Inbox, where you can review and read your next email.
The following section provides instructions on how to move around the email within the "Inbox, or any folder. 11.7.6 Folder Management discusses Folder Management, folders you have created, and how you may either rename or delete them from the KeyMail folder system.


11.7.4 Reviewing Email.
When you enter any folder, the focus is on the last item entered in that folder. You can move up and down the items in a folder, and read the key fields associated with each item. If desired, you can also read the email message, and if present, any attachment.
KeyMail provides the following commands to review email within a folder:
To read the selected email, press ENTER.
To exit the email message, press ESCAPE.
To move to the next field, press SPACE.
To move back to the previous field, press BACKSPACE.
To move to the next email, press READwith9.
To move back to the previous email, press READwith7.
To move this email to the trash folder, press CONTROLwith8.
To mark an email for further action, press CONTROLwithSPACE.
To search for a subject, name or contents, press READwithF, then S, or N or C; remember that you can add spaces to a search string by using the binding space command. It is shown as $bsp on the braille display.
To select the Email Action Menu, press CONTROLwithENTER.
To move forward or back a day, press CONTROLwithPERIODorwithM.
To move forward or back a week, press CONTROLwithLorwithJ.
To move forward or back a month, press CONTROLwithOorwithU.
To move forward or back a year, press CONTROLwith9orwith7.
To move to the first email in a folder, press READwithT.
To move to the last email in a folder, press READwithB.
To determine the number of emails in the folder press READwithI.


11.7.5 Received Attachments.
If the email being reviewed has one or more attachments, these appear as fields in the email entry. Move forward or back through the fields with the SPACEand BACKSPACE keys. KeySoft displays "Attachment1name,"Attachment2name,and so on, depending on the number of attachments.
Press ENTERon the desired Attachment, and KeySoft asks you to confirm whether you wish to detach or read the file. To read the attachment, press R. To detach, press D.
Choosing Read, places you at the top of the attached document. KeySoft's normal review commands may then be used to read the file. Press ESCAPE to exit the attachment, and you are returned to the folder from which you opened the attachment.
Choosing the Detachoption, causes KeySoft to prompt the attachment file type, and ask whether you wish to detach the file as a KeyWord document.
For example, if the attachment were a Microsoft Word document, KeySoft would prompt: "AttachmentisaMicrosoftWordfile.DetachasaKeyWorddocument?"
To have the file converted to a KeyWord Text Document, press Y. To leave the attachment as a Microsoft Word file, press N. To have the file converted to a KeyWord Braille Document, press B.
KeySoft will then prompt: "Deletethisattachmentfromtheemail?"
Now that you have saved a copy of the attachment, you can save storage space by deleting the attachment from the email. To delete the attachment from the email, press Y, to leave the attachment unchanged, press N.


11.7.6 Folder Management.
Email folders are different to the other kinds on the Flash Disk. They are held in a database, called Email folders.cdb, found in the KeyList folder of the Flashdisk. You cannot access this database any other way than KeyMail, but we hope that by understanding this, it will make the folder management process easier to understand. It also explains why, in order to make more room for emails, the option is called "Free Database Space". For more information on this option, please refer to 11.9.2 Free Database Space.
Organizing your email requires that you give some thought to what folders you need to efficiently categorize your email. New folders can easily be created at any prompt to name a folder, by simply typing in a new folder name. If the folder doesn't already exist you will be prompted to confirm the creation of a new folder.
The following options are available at the FolderName"prompt:
To select the suggested folder press ENTER.
To move forward or back through the list of existing folders, press SPACE, or BACKSPACE.
In the "list of folders, the following commands are available:
To delete a folder, press CONTROLwith8;
To rename a folder, press CONTROLwithR;
To determine the number of emails in the folder, press READwithF;
To jump to folders starting with a particular letter, press that letter.


11.7.7 Marking Email.
Email within a folder may be marked for future action. The marking can either be applied to all email in the folder, or on an individual basis. Email marking is extremely useful when you are organizing your email, as it allows you to perform common actions on a number of files. For example, if you decide, while reading your new emails, that a number of them can be deleted, these emails may be marked. Before exiting the folder you can move all the marked emails to the Trash folder by pressing CONTROLwith8.
To mark individual emails, press CONTROLwithSPACE.To mark all files in the folder, press CONTROLwithENTER to open the EmailActionMenu, and choose the mark all files option.
Email marking only applies while you are in the folder. When you exit the folder the marking is turned off.


11.7.8 Email Action Menu.
The Email Action Menu is available when you are reviewing email within a folder, and is entered by pressing CONTROLwithENTER.The options available from the menu depend on the folder you are reviewing.
Invoking the Email Action Menu within the Inbox presents the following options:
Reply:	Used to send an answer to the person who sent you the message. Choosing this option presents further choices, and after you have chosen the appropriate action, KeyMail creates a new message with the address and subject line filled in. The additional options available after choosing Reply are:
Replytosenderonly:
If you receive a message that has been sent to a group of people you can send a reply to all members of the group as well as the sender, or just to the sender of the message. Answering Y to this option restricts your reply to the sender.
Moveemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to move the selected email to the folder of your choice. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Copyemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to copy the selected email to the folder of your choice. This leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Deleteemailfromthisfolder:
Choose this option to delete the selected email from the current folder. The deleted email is moved to the Trash folder.
Markallemail:
This is a useful feature if you want to perform an action on all email within the current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Markallemail, then choose the "Copyemailtoanotherfolderoption" from the Email Action Menu.
Invoking the Email Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the Reply" andDeleteemailfromthisfolder"options to be suppressed. A new item, "MovetoTrash" will appear on the menu in addition to the other standard items.
Includecopyoforiginalemail:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email text in the message area. 
Includeoriginalemailattachments:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email attachments with the reply. 
Forward:	Used to send an email message you have received to another person or group. Choosing this option presents further choices and input fields to be entered. After you have done the appropriate action, KeyMail creates a new message with the subject line filled in, and the message area will contain the forwarded email. You can then enter your message ahead of the forwarded email. The additional option available after choosing Forward is:
Includetheoriginalemailsattachments:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email attachments with the forwarded message.
You are then presented with the standard prompts for writing an email, such as: Sendto?AlsoSendto?,Copyto?, and so on. From this point, proceed on as if you were preparing and sending a standard email message.
Moveemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to move the selected email to the folder of your choice. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Copyemailtoanotherfolder:
Choose this option to copy the selected email to the folder of your choice. This leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Deleteemailfromthisfolder:
Choose this option to delete the selected email from the current folder. The deleted email is moved to the Trash folder.
Markallemail:
This is a useful feature if you want to perform an action on all email within the current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Markallemail, then choose the "Copyemailtoanotherfolderoption" from the Email Action Menu.
Invoking the Email Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the Reply" andDeleteemailfromthisfolder"options to be suppressed. A new item, "MovetoTrash" will appear on the menu in addition to the other standard items.
Printemail:
Choose this option to print an ink copy of the selected email.
Embossemail:
Choose this option to emboss a copy of the selected email on a Braille printer.


11.7.9 Include copy of original email.
Includecopyoforiginalemail:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email text in the message area.
Includeoriginalemailattachments:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email attachments with the reply.
Forward: Used to send an email message you have received to another person or group. Choosing this option presents further choices and input fields to be entered. After you have done the appropriate action, KeyMail creates a new message with the subject line filled in, and the message area will contain the forwarded email. You can then enter your message ahead of the forwarded email. The additional option available after choosing Forward is:
Includetheoriginalemailsattachments:
Answering Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to include a copy of the original email attachments with the forwarded message.
You are then presented with the standard prompts for writing an email, such as: Sendto?AlsoSendto?,Copyto?, and so on. From this point, proceed on as if you were preparing and sending a standard email message.
Move email to another folder:
Choose this option to move the selected email to the folder of your choice. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Copy email to another folder:
Choose this option to copy the selected email to the folder of your choice. This leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Delete email from this folder:
Choose this option to delete the selected email from the current folder. The deleted email is moved to the Trash folder.
Print email:
Choose this option to print an ink copy of the selected email.
Emboss email:
Choose this option to emboss a copy of the selected email on a Braille printer.
Mark all email:
This is a useful feature if you want to perform an action on all email within the current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Markallemail, then choose the "Copyemailtoanotherfolderoption" from the Email Action Menu.
Invoking the Email Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the Reply" andDeleteemailfromthisfolder"options to be suppressed. A new item, "MovetoTrash" will appear on the menu in addition to the other standard items.


11.7.10 Trash Folder.
The Trash folder is used as a temporary storage folder for emails deleted from any of the KeyMail folders. When you exit KeyMail and return to the Main Menu, KeySoft advises if there are any email in the Trash folder and asks if you want to empty the trash.
Typing N at the prompt to "emptytrash?" returns you to the Main Menu, and leaves the items in the "Trash" folder.
To empty the trash, press Y. To Review the Trash Folder, press R. Pressing Y permanently deletes all email from the Trash folder. Typing R allows you to review the items. The following options are then available:
To review each email by moving through the fields, press SPACE to move to the next field. To move back to the previous field, press BACKSPACE.
To move to the next email, press READwith9.To move back to the previous email, press READwith7.
To delete the email being reviewed, press CONTROLwith8.
To restore emails in the Trash folder to their original folders, press CONTROLwithENTERto enter the 'TrashFolderMenu.From this menu you may choose the option to "Restorethisemailtooriginalfolder.The other option in this menu is "EmptytheTrashFolder.


11.8 Connect to Send and Receive Email.
Connect to Send and Receive Email checks for new email, and sends any emails in the "Outbox. You are prompted through the steps required, and feedback is provided as to the status of the connection and mail download. If you have any unsent mail, this is also sent at this time.
1. From the KeyMail menu select "Connecttosendandreceiveemail.
2. KeySoft prompts "Connectusingwhichconfiguration?PressENTERfor(name).where (name) is the name of a connection configuration you have set up in the Connectivity menu. To use the offered configuration, just press ENTER.If the correct configuration was not prompted, press SPACE repeatedly to find the required configuration. When you have found it, pressENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Usewhichemailaccount?PressENTERfor(account)" To select the offered email account, press ENTER, otherwise press SPACE repeatedly to find the required account. When you have found it, pressENTER.
Note: If you typically use the same email account and the same connection configuration every time, you can simply cut these two prompts short by pressing ENTER, because the offered option is always the last option used.
4. If using a dialup modem to access your email, read this. If not, skip to the next step. KeySoft displays the message dialing, and you should hear the dialing process followed by whistling noises as your modem connects with the modem at your Service Provider. Before the sequence of messages listed in the next step, you will first hear these:
Dialing;
Connected;
Logging On;
Logon Successful;
Connected;
...and at the end of the sequence below, you will get this message:
Remain connected to the modem? (Press Y or N)
5. KeySoft reports the progress of the mail checking sequence by displaying the appropriate message as each significant stage of the operation is completed. The typical sequence of messages, assuming you have one new message to receive and no outgoing email to send, is:
There is 1 email on Server;
Checking for new messages;
There is 1 new email;
Receiving 1;
There is no email to send.
For details on the options available while downloading email, during the download options, refer to the following section.
During the sending and receiving process BrailleNote QT beeps once every few seconds indicating it is busy.
When using a dialup connection, at completion of sending your messages, KeySoft displays "Remainconnectedtomodem?" To disconnect and return to the KeyMail Menu, press N. To remain connected and return to the Main Menu, press Y.
If you wish to terminate the email session at any time, press ESCAPE. If using a dialup connection, KeySoft will prompt, "Abandon email session after current operation or hangup immediately?". To allow KeySoft to compete its current operation before hanging up, press N for no. To hang up immediately, press I for immediately.


11.8.1 Download status.
You can press ENTER at any time during the download process to hear the status of the download. During this process the BrailleNote QT beeps once every few seconds indicating it is busy.
Download status displays the percentage complete, the size of the email currently being downloaded and the percentage complete of the total emails waiting to be downloaded. It is useful to check the status during downloads of long messages, as it provides an indication that the download is progressing satisfactorily.
The maximum size for any email to download, without prompting for User intervention, is initially set to 50K or approximately 50,000 characters. Any email bigger than this setting causes KeySoft to prompt: "Thisemailislargerthanthemaximumsizeallowed.Option?"
The following options are available at this point:
Continue to download:	press ENTER;
Skip this email:	press S;
Delete this email from server:	press D;
Hear information about the email:	press I;
This displays the sender and the subject.
Download only the first 10 lines,
but leave all on the server:	press T;
Download 10 lines and delete
from server:	press A.
Change the size limit:	press L.


11.9 Setup Options.
Selecting Setup Options from the KeyMail menu presents the KeyMail Setup Menu which provides 4 options;"DirectoryofEmailAccounts,"ReceiveOptions,and "FreeDatabaseSpace."
"DirectoryofEmailAccounts" allows you to define account details for email using a particular Service Provider, and provides options for both adding a new account and looking up and modifying an existing account.
"ReceiveOptions" allows you to choose whether or not your email is deleted from your mail box at the Service Provider after you have downloaded it to the BrailleNote QT. It also allows you to set the size limit for automatic download.
"FreeDatabaseSpace" allows you to reclaim space in the email database that had been taken up by unwanted emails.


11.9.1 Directory of Email Accounts.
To select "DirectoryofEMailAccounts, first select KeyMail from the Main Menu, then select Setup Options. You are presented with the KeyMail Setup Menu and "DirectoryofEmailAccounts" is the first item on this menu.
There are two options on this menu; "AddanEmailAccount, and "LookupanEmailAccount.
"AddanEmailAccount" is used to set up the details of a new email account.
"LookupanEmailAccount" allows you to review the details for an existing email account, and modify individual fields as appropriate.
Information relating to a particular email account is stored in a record, and each record has a number of fields that contain the details for that record. KeySoft provides commands for moving between records and reviewing the fields within them. To move to the next record, pressREADwith9.To move back to the previous record, press READwith7.Within a record you can use the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys to move forward or back through the list of fields.
The next two sections provide detailed information on "AddinganEmailAccount" and "LookingupanEmailAccount.


11.9.1.1 Add an Email Account.
To send and receive email you need access to an email Service Provider. When you open an account with a Service Provider you need to obtain details of the service such as the POP server and SMTP addresses, and these details must be loaded into KeyMail before you can use that email account.
Note: Details of the actual internet connection are listed separately. This is because it is not uncommon for users to access the internet in multiple ways, via a different setup to the default one, and this arrangement saves double entering account details or connection configurations.
To add an email account, follow these steps:
1. Select Email from the Main Menu, or press FUNCTIONwith8, anywhere.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMailMenu. Select Set Up Options from the KeyMail menu. KeySoft displays "KeyMailSetUpMenu." Select Directory of Email accounts.
3. KeySoft displays "DirectoryofEmailAccounts. Select Add an account. KeySoft displays "EntryListforDirectoryofEmailaccounts.
4. KeySoft now steps you through a list of details of the service so that you can enter details for each item. KeySoft queries AccountName?Enter the name you wish this account to be called and press ENTER.Typically you would use the name of your provider, for example, "Earthlink.
5. KeySoft prompts "UserName? Enter the user name, for example Murray_Thorn. Typically this is the part of your email address that precedes the @ sign.
6. KeySoft prompts Password?" For greater security, you can leave this blank and you will be prompted for the password each time you connect. Alternatively, type your password. The password is displayed as you enter it. You can review it before pressing ENTER. After pressing ENTER it displays as 5 asterisks. Remember that passwords are often case sensitive, so it is important that you enter the password exactly as you have chosen or been given.
7. You are then prompted for "YourName?"and reminded that computer Braille is required. This is the name that will appear in the From: field when the recipient reads email from you.
8. KeySoft prompts "YourEmailaddress?" Type your full email address for this provider, for example: Murray_Thorn@earthlink.net.
9. KeySoft now queries "POPServer?" Enter the POP server address. For example a POP server address might be "pop.pulsedata.com. The POP server address defines the path via which you receive mail from your email account provider.
10. Next KeySoft queries "SMTPServer?" Enter the SMTP server address. For example a SMTP server address might be "smtp.pulsedata.com. The SMTP server address defines the path via which you send mail to your email account provider.
11. Finally, KeySoft displays, "SMTPauthenticationrequired?"Increasingly, email providers expect users to verify their user name and address on the SMTP server before allowing them to proceed. The BrailleNote QT is set up to automatically provide your username and password if you have turned this feature on. The default is No. Press Y to turn on.
12.  You can review your list of entries with the BACKSPACE and SPACE keys. When you are happy with the entries, press ESCAPEto exit the list and KeySoft prompts "Addthisrecord?"Press Y to save this record in the list of email accounts. KeySoft confirms your choice with the message "Yes,"Recordadded" and returns to the Directory of Email Accounts Menu.
If you have more than one email account that you wish to access on the BrailleNote QT, simply add another record in the same way. Each account will have its own POP and SMTP server addresses, which you can get from the email account provider.


11.9.1.2 Look up an Email Account.
To check or modify details of a particular account, select "LookupanEmailAccount". To do this, follow these steps:
1. Select Email from the Main Menu, or press FUNCTIONwith8, anywhere.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMailMenu. Select Set Up Options from the KeyMail menu. KeySoft displays "KeyMailSetUpMenu." Select Directory of Email accounts.
3. KeySoft displays "DirectoryofEmailAccounts. Select Look Up an account. KeySoft queries "AccounttoLookUp?"
4.  To lookup all account records, press ENTER. To move to the next account record, press READwith9, and to move to the previous account record, press READwith7. Alternatively type part or the entire email account name, then press ENTER. If your entry matches more than one account name, KeySoft displays the number of matches and places you at the first matching account name. To move to the next match, press READwith9, or to move back, READwith7. Make a selection by pressing ENTER.
5.  KeySoft steps you through the fields of the nominated account so that you can check the details of each item. If you want to change a field, press CONTROLwithK anywhere in the list. This takes you into an entry mode where all fields are presented and you can enter or change any field. Press ENTER when you have finished modifying a field and the next field will be presented. ESCAPE takes you back to the review option.
To make a duplicate copy of an email account record, you can use the same technique as discussed in 10.6 Duplicating a Record, for duplicating address list records. This provides a quick and convenient way of duplicating a record, and then modifying a field.
The account record list comprises the following items:
Account Name;
User Name;
Password;
Your Name;
Email address;
POP Server;
SMTP Server;
SMTP Authentication Required?
6. When you are happy with the entries, press ESCAPE to exit the record, and if you changed any details KeySoft prompts "Addthisrecord?" Press Yto save this record in the list of services or Nif you do not want to save your changes.
If you want to delete an account record, select the account you wish to remove, and press CONTROLwith8.


11.9.2 Free Database Space.
Email folders are held in a database. One of the peculiarities of databases is that when you delete items from them, they don't automatically shrink back down again. Because of this, simply deleting your unwanted emails does not free up more space. The "Freedatabasespace" software shrinks the database back to the smallest size capable of storing the emails remaining in the database.
To use this utility, simply go to the email setup menu, and select the item "Freedatabasespace". After running, the utility will report how much space has been freed.


11.9.3 Receive Options.
Receive Options allows you to choose whether you want to delete email from the email service after uploading it to your BrailleNote QT, and to put a size limit on incoming emails.
To select Receive Options, first select KeyMail from the Main Menu, and then select Setup Options. You are presented with the KeyMail Setup Menu and Receive Options is the second item on this menu.
Selecting Receive Options places you in the Email Receive Options Setup List, which contains two items.
1. "Deleteemailfromserviceafterreceiving?currentlyYesorNo"
For the usual option of having each email deleted from your service account after it has been successfully received, press Y.To leave it on the service so that, for example, you can also download it to your PC, press N. This feature can be useful if you wish to keep a complete record of your received email on your PC, and are using your BrailleNote QT to download your messages while you are traveling.
2. "Sizelimitforautomaticdownloadofemail?Currently50K"
If an email is larger than this setting, KeySoft will prompt you with a number of options before downloading it. These options were discussed in 11.8.1 Download status. To change the value, enter the maximum size in kilobytes and press ENTER. For example, to set the limit at 60 kilobytes, enter 60, followed by ENTER. The default setting is 50K, or approximately 50,000 characters.
To exit the Receive Options list, press ESCAPE and you are returned to the KeyMail Setup Menu.



12 Web Browser.
KeyWeb has all the same basic features as Internet Explorer. You can browse the web, use a search engine, download files or read a page online and work through forms. KeyWeb can also be used to open and read locally stored html files, such as a saved web page.
This chapter is designed to demonstrate the features and commands of KeyWeb, and the ways it makes the Internet accessible for users of the BrailleNote family of products. To learn more about how the Internet works, we suggest that you investigate the various tutorials available that are designed to aid persons who are blind or visually impaired in learning to use the Internet and all its accompanying features.


12.1 Overview.
KeyWeb has all the same basic features as Internet Explorer. You can browse the web, use a search engine, download files or read a page online and work through forms. KeyWeb can also be used to open and read locally stored html files, such as a saved web page.
This chapter is designed to demonstrate the features and commands of KeyWeb, and the ways it makes the Internet accessible for users of the BrailleNote family of products. To learn more about how the Internet works, we suggest that you investigate the various tutorials available that are designed to aid persons who are blind or visually impaired in learning to use the Internet and all its accompanying features.


12.2 Connecting to the World Wide Web.
As with KeyMail, in order to use KeyWeb, you will need to set up at least one connection configuration. The connection configuration makes it possible to connect to an Internet service provider and therefore to the world wide web. There are many different setups you can use to do this, and the ones that you choose will depend on what technology you have available and where you want to be when you browse the web.
Here are some examples of available connection configurations:
Use a card modem in your BrailleNote QT and plug into a dialup connection.
Connect to a LAN network using an ethernet card
Using a WiFi card in your BrailleNote QT, access any available WiFi network, at home, school, work, or even out shopping.


12.3 Changing to another Part of KeySoft.
As is standard in KeySoft, you can jump in and out of KeyWeb to go to other applications such as KeyMail, KeyWord etc. The hot key combination for changing to KeyWeb is FUNCTIONwith0(zero). For more information on the Task list, see 1.16 Switching Between Tasks.
If you are using a phone line connection and jump to another task, KeyWeb will ask if you wish to stay connected. If you jump into KeyMail while still connected, you can then use the same connection to check your email. Likewise if you wish to return to KeyWeb from KeyMail, you can continue to use the same connection.
If you jump to another task, perhaps to paste new contact information into the Address list, you will also stay connected, and you can return to KeyWeb when you have finished, using FUNCTIONwith0(zero). You will be returned to the same page you left.
When using a wireless or LAN network connection, you will automatically stay connected until you choose to disconnect.


12.3.1 Disconnecting from outside KeyWeb.
While using a dialup connection, if you have left KeyWeb while still connected to the Internet, and you decide that you dont wish to return to either KeyWeb or KeyMail, you can disconnect from right where you are. Simply press FUNCTIONwithO to access the Options Menu, select Connectivity Menu, and from this menu, select Disconnect. This option only displays in the Connectivity Menu when you are connected to the Internet, and using a dialup connection.


12.4 Logging on.
A URL is the location address of a web page; for example, www.pulsedata.com, or Flash Disk\My Favorites\pulse.
The first prompt displayed when you select KeyWeb from the Main Menu is a request for a URL. At this point you have several options. You can either:
Select the home page, which is the URL offered;
Type a URL;
Select a URL from your favorites (For more information refer to 12.9.2 Selecting a Favorite);
Select a URL from the history list (For more information refer to 12.10.1 History Records);
Select an HTML file from a folder (For more information refer to 12.8 Application Management);
Having made a selection, press ENTER. KeySoft prompts for a connection configuration. If you only have one set up, this one will be offered. If you have several configurations, it will offer the last one used. To change service provider, press SPACE at the prompt and select another one in the usual way.
During the page loading process, you may hear a series of beeps unless you have turned them off; these are progress tones, designed to let you know something is happening while the page is loading. You can also find out what percentage of the page has loaded by pressing HELP. When the page has completed loading, KeyWeb will display the words in the top line of the page.


12.4.1 Progress tones.
Progress tones are there to let you know a page is loading or a download is progressing normally. You can control their volume or turn them off altogether. To do this, go to the Options Menu, Review Voice by pressing FUNCTIONwithOthenR. Press SPACE repeatedly to reach the Progress Tone Volume option. Type a number between 0 and 6. Zero disables the tone, 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.


12.5 Navigation.
12.5.1 Moving around a Page.
Apart from the "moveby" commands outlined below, KeyWeb uses the same commands as the Book Reader for moving through a page. These commands are in the Command Summary and are also covered in 4.5 Additional Reading Commands.
There are different ways you can review or move across a web page:
You can read it, using the standard KeySoft Read commands.
You can skip across it from hyperlink to hyperlink, referred to in KeyWeb as simply links;
You can move through it reviewing another page element such as input controls, headings or frames.
Or you can combine these in any way that works for you. In this chapter, we refer to links, frames, headings and input controls collectively as pageelements.


12.5.1.1 Moving with keys.
You can use the NEXT and PREVIOUS thumb keys to move around all the input controls and links on the page in whatever order they appear. So with each press you may move from, for example, link to button to text field to link, to link etc. This is different to the other page navigations as they only move by one specified element type, whereas this one includes all types of input controls and links. If you have surfed the Web on a PC before, this is the equivalent of using Tab and Shift Tab.


12.5.1.2 Moving by text.
This function allows you to move from section to section of nonlinked text. You can set a minimum number of characters for KeyWeb to search for.
For example, if the minimum size is 50, KeyWeb will find the next section of text that is 50 or more characters long, and skip to the beginning of it ready for you to read. The larger the minimum number, the larger the section KeyWeb will skip to.
This is useful when reviewing news or magazine sites, research sites, or anywhere where you just want to get to the information.
The key commands are:
Move to next section of text: FUNCTIONwithENTER,
Move to previous section of text: SHIFTwithFUNCTIONwithENTER.
Note: These commands are similar to move by paragraph but use ENTER instead of SPACE.
To set the minimum size of the section of text, there is an option in the display settings.To get to this setting, press CONTROLwith2 then D for Display Settings, then select "Textsectionsize?"Enter the number and press ENTER. The factory setting is 50.


12.5.2 Links.
Links will take you to another place, either in the same page or website, or somewhere else entirely. They also can lead to downloads, documents, etc. Moving from link to link is a very useful way to review or use many types of sites. Great for reviewing search results on a search engine, a menu page or frame, the home page of a large site, etc.
Links appear on the Braille display like this: dots 246 name of link dots 135.

12.5.2.1 Moving by Link.
Moving by Link is always available to you in KeyWeb; so you can use it in conjunction with moving by another type of page element.
To move from link to link, use BACKSPACE to move backwards and SPACE to move forwards. Alternatively, press the initial letter of the link to move directly to it, or to an alphabetized list that you can SPACE through quickly to get to it. If you have speech on, you will notice that links are identified by a small beep just before the name of the link.


12.5.2.2 Selecting a Link.
You can follow the link you are on by pressing ENTER, or the touch cursor anywhere above the link on the Braille display.
It is also possible to place the cursor on a character within a link as opposed to following it, perhaps to copy and paste the link into a document or email. When you are on the link, press and hold down the PREVIOUS thumb key, then press and release the touch cursor.


12.5.3 Other Page Elements.
The other three types of page elements you can use to move around the page are Input control, Heading or Frame. You can toggle through these types of page elements using the commands listed below. The default setting is input control. Because these page elements share a separate set of movement commands to links, you can use whichever one you have selected in conjunction with links. You can select links in the same manner as well; the command is included in the list below.
What follows is a brief description of each page element and how it is used.
Input control: Input controls are fields where you can type in text, or some other form of entry is required. They include text form fields, check boxes, radio buttons, buttons, and selection lists. Almost all forms are made up of a combination of these types of fields. Handling forms is discussed in 12.7.1 Handling Forms.
Heading: Headings usually cover the topics on a page and are a good way of finding out what the page is about.
Frame: Many web pages are divided into frames. They are basically windows within the page, usually dividing the page into subjects or groups of links etc. This is a high level search and a good way of skipping around a page quickly to get a sense of what it is about.


12.5.4 Commands for Moving by Element.
These are the commands used to move around the page by element:
Move to next element: TAB;
Move to previous element: SHIFTwithTAB;
Current element: READwithX;
Change move type: READwithC;
Link: L;
Input Control: I;
Heading: H;
Frame: F.
Once you are on an element, you can read from that point. For example, having moved by frame to Frame 2, you can then press READwithG for a speech readout, or READwithSHIFTwithG to scroll your Braille display to read the contents of that frame. If ever in doubt, press HELP.


12.6 Moving from Page to Page or Site to Site.
For pages and sites previously visited in the same session, you can use the forward and back commands RIGHTARROW and LEFTARROW to move between them.
If you wish to move on to a new site at any point, simply press CONTROLwithO. KeyWeb will prompt: Address?PressENTERfor(currentURL)
At this point you have five options (these are the same as when first logging on):
1. To select the current URL, press ENTER.
2. Type in a new URL or favorite name and press ENTER.
3. Go to list of favorites by pressing SPACE.
4. Go to a saved web page by either typing the \pathname with a back slash in front of it, or pressing SPACE and then CONTROLwithT to go into directory mode, and locate it that way. Even if you make a selection that is not online, your Internet connection will stay connected.
5. Go to your history by pressing CONTROLwithH. For more information on History, refer to 12.10 History.


12.7 Page Management.
12.7.1 Handling Forms.
To fill out forms you need to be in "movebyinputcontrol" mode, as forms are made up of input controls such as form fields, combo or list boxes, check boxes, buttons, and radio buttons.
When on an input control, it is not always clear what needs to be input. There are two ways to deal with this:
1. Set the Automaticallyreadinputcontrolprompts to on. This mode will display most of the prompts, or labels, that explain the purpose of the input control. NOTE: Some prompts may be coded in such a way that they cannot be read at all.
2. The alternative way is for when you are working with the Automatically read inputcontrolprompts mode set to "off." Simply press REPEAT to read the prompt.


12.7.1.1 Filling in text fields.
To fill in a text field, type the information in computer Braille, e.g. user name, search criteria etc. Any existing text can be deleted by pressing CONTROLwithI. You can edit or delete what you have written in the usual way. Once you are happy with your input, press ENTER, and your text will be submitted. Note that you have to press ENTER before your input will be accepted. If you change your mind and dont wish to submit the contents of the field after all, you can either delete it all by pressing CONTROLwithI, or if there is a reset button, move to it using TAB and press ENTER there. If the form has more than one text field, you may need to move between them using TAB instead.


12.7.1.2 Selecting from selection lists.
In KeyWeb, selection list is the term used for combo boxes and list boxes. These are the input fields that allow you to make a selection from a list, and sometimes to type in your own entry if none of the list items is appropriate.
Once you are in the selection list field, you can select an item by pressing SPACE and BACKSPACE to go down and up the list. Alternatively, in some selection lists you can type the initial letter and press it repeatedly until you find your preferred selection. This is useful in lists of countries or states, for example, where you know the item you are looking for.
Having selected an item, simply use SHIFTwithTAB or TAB to move on, and your selection will be entered.


12.7.1.3 Selecting Check boxes and buttons.
To click on a button, check a box or select a radio button, press ENTER. KeyWeb will display "click" or "check" or "pressed"respectively. You can also use the touch cursor, by pressing the touch cursor above the cell showing the check/uncheck symbol for the box or button as explained in the next section.


12.7.1.4 Input controls on Braille Display.
The symbols that appear on the Braille display for each input control element are:
Text Start: 	(&)dots12346;
Text End: 	(y)dots13456;
Radio button, checked: 	dots2456,dots123456,dots1235;
Radio button unchecked: 	dots2456,dots36,dots1235;
Check box, checked: 	dots123,dots123456,dots123;
Check box, unchecked: 	dots123,dots36,dots123;
Button: 	dollarsignbtdots1246,dots12,dots2345;
Selection list: 	dollarsignlsdots1246,dots123,dots234;
Multiselection field (where you can select more than one item):
dollarsignls1246,123,234+Checkbox.


12.8 Application Management.
Most application management happens from the Internet Options menu. This is accessible when you are in KeyWeb, either on a web page or a locally stored document, by pressing CONTROLwith2. These are the available options:
* Open HTML file;
* Set current page as home page;
* Go to home page.
* Internet file management:
* Clear cookies;
* Delete temporary files;
* Erase browser history.
* Display settings;
* Hide images without descriptions;
* Automatically read input control prompts;
* Default language for web pages;
* Print current web page.
Here is each of these options in more detail:


12.8.1 Here is each of these options in more detail:
12.8.2 Open HTML files.
For opening a locally stored document, such as a saved web page.


12.8.3 Set Current Page to Home Page.
Your home page is the one that is always presented at the URL prompt. When you first enter KeyWeb, the home page is set to www.pulsedata.com\keyweb. To change this to a home page of your choice, go to that page in the usual manner, and then select this option off the menu.


12.8.4 Go to home page.
No matter where you are on the internet, when you select this option you will go straight to your home page.


12.8.5 Internet File Management.
The three items on this submenu all involve managing cached files i.e. files that save themselves to your BrailleNote QT:


12.8.5.1 Clear Cookies.
Cookies are small files that are uploaded to your computer or BrailleNote QT by web pages. They serve a wide range of functions, but they can build up and from time to time, it pays to delete them all. Select this option to do so.


12.8.5.2 Delete temporary files.
Same as with cookies, web pages upload various files to your BrailleNote QT and they build up over time. Select this option to delete them all.


12.8.5.3 Erase browser history.
This clears all of the URL's and files that are listed in KeyWeb's history. Very useful for teachers and students or other people who share equipment, or simply if you end up with a lot of URL's you will never look at again.


12.8.6 Display Settings.
These settings determine the extra information that will display as you read a web page.


12.8.6.1 Hide images without descriptions? Y/N
Visual images may have a label called an alt tag, which describes in words what the image portrays e.g. Child playing with Dog, back view of BrailleNote QT, etc. Images without these alt tags are not a lot of use and in this option you can choose Y to ignore them altogether. The default setting is N. The exception is when an image is used as a link, in which case it will be treated as a link and not an image, regardless of how this setting is set.


12.8.6.2 Automatically read input control prompts? Y/N
When this is set to Y for yes, KeyWeb displays the label associated with each of the input controls as it reads them, such as text boxes, radio buttons, check boxes, tables, etc. To turn this feature off, press N.


12.8.6.3 Default language for web pages.
If a page is written in a foreign language such as French or German, it may have a hidden HTML code that indicates this. If this is the case, and you have that language on your BrailleNote QT, KeyWeb will automatically read the page in that language. If the page does not have a code marker, you can listen to it and read it using the English setting, or change it to another language in the usual way, again assuming you have that language on your BrailleNote QT.


12.8.6.4 Text Section Size.
This was described in 12.5.1.2 Moving by text. Type a minimum number of characters for the "Move by Text Size" function. Factory setting is 50.

12.9 Favorites.
You can type in the name of a favorite and, assuming that the favorite exists, that page will be loaded.
Pressing SPACE when at the address prompt takes you to a folder / file prompt layer where you can choose an existing favorite to load.


12.9.1 Adding a favorite.
To add a favorite to your favorites folder, you have to be on the page, online. Go to the Favorites Menu by pressing CONTROLwithI, and press SPACEuntil you get toAddtoFavorites? Press ENTER.
KeyWeb will ask you to confirm the name and offer the URL. At this point you can rename your favorite to something shorter, such aspulsefor www.pulsedata.com or yahoo for www.mail.yahoo.com. If you wish to do this, type in the name of your choice before pressing ENTER. When you next review your Favorites list, the page will display as the name you chose.


12.9.2 Selecting a Favorite.
The simple way to do this is to press the SPACE bar at the URL prompt. This will take you to the List of Favorites in your Favorites folder. You can either review them by pressing SPACE repeatedly and pressing ENTER to select one, or simply type the initial letter of the name and press ENTER when it is displayed.


12.9.3 Organizing Favorites.
You can organize your Favorites in exactly the same way as you would normally organize files and subdirectories in KeySoft, as discussed in Chapter 13. Move, change, rename or delete favorites just as you would any other files. The difference is that instead of KeyWord file format files being the default file type, it is HTML. This means that while in My Favorites, KeyWeb will only display URL's unless you use the READwithX command, in which case you can then also choose between txt and html file types.


12.10 History.
History is a record of all the web addresses or local file paths (referred to as URLs) you have accessed using the browser, with an upper limit of 300.
To access the history, press CONTROLwithH.
To go to the history list, press RIGHTARROW.
To navigate to a page listed in the history, select it from the history list using SPACE and BACKSPACE, then press ENTER. Alternatively, use the READwithF find command to locate the history item in the list then press ENTER.


12.10.1 History Records.
Each history record consists of the following information:
Date when last visited  self explanatory;
URL  the whole address path for the page e.g. http://www.pulsedata.com/index.cfm/8,html;
Title  the title given to a particular page;
Domain  the base web address for a page, e.g. www.pulsedata.com.


12.10.2 Sorting history records.
You can change the way in which a history is presented by sorting by day or by domain.
A search by day will sort all the fields in a record by date and time order, then by domain. A search by domain will sort all fields by domain, then date and time.
To toggle the sort mode press CONTROLwithS. The factory setting is by day, and if you change it, the system will always default to the setting you last made, whichever it is.


12.10.3 Reviewing history.
Having established a sorting order for the history records, you may then want to review them. You can do this in two ways  by record or by field. Reviewing by record will take you from record to record in the order defined by the sort. Use RIGHTARROW to review forwards and LEFTARROW to review back.
Review fields within a record by using SPACE for forwards and BACKSPACE for back.
Other commands for reviewing history records are:
Next History record:	RIGHTARROW.
Previous History record: 	LEFTARROW.
Forward one Day:	BACKSPACEwithdot6.
Back one Day:	BACKSPACEwithdot3.
Forward one week:	BACKSPACEwithdot5.
Back one week:	BACKSPACEwithdot2.
Previous Domain name:	BACKSPACEwithdot4.
Next Domain name:	BACKSPACEwithdot1.
Newest History record:	READwithT.
Oldest History record:	READwithB.
Sort by domain/day:	CONTROLwithS.
Note: history is presented alphabetically for day or domain.


12.10.4 Pop Up Dialog Boxes.
KeyWeb is sitting on Internet Explorer, and from time to time, Internet Explorer will open a dialog box. You will know this because KeyWeb will display its title and the fact that it is a dialog box. Wherever possible, the same navigation keystrokes are used as for the rest of KeyWeb. The difference is that at every text input field, you need to press ENTER to submit your input. You then move to the next one using SPACE.
The final entry will almost always be a button control with a label such as YES,NO, OK,orCANCEL. Move to the appropriate button and press ENTER to click on it. Where you end up from there will depend on what the dialog box was for.


12.11 Saving and Refreshing Web Pages.
Downloading files to the BrailleNote QT is easy.
You can use this feature to download:
Software upgrades directly onto your BrailleNote QT;
Books;
Bank Statements;
MP3 files;
and other files that you may wish to use on your BrailleNote QT, assuming they are compatible. You can also download files for moving to a PC later. However, please heed the following warning before making any downloads.
WARNING: Only Pulse Data's proprietary software can run on the BrailleNote QT. KeyWeb does not limit the type of file you can download, but we strongly advise you not to try and run executables on your BrailleNote QT, including those designed to run on Windows CE. Doing this could cause irreparable damage to your BrailleNote QT and to KeySoft, and you do so at your own risk.


12.11.1 How to Download a file.
Follow these steps to download a file off an internet site.
1. When you are on the download link or button, press ENTER.KeySoft will prompt: "Downloadfileintowhichfolder?"
2. Select a folder in the usual way, or press BACKSPACE and select a drive. To select a storage card, press S in the drive list.
3. When you have selected a folder, KeySoft will prompt: "Downloadfilename?PressENTERfor(filename)" where the file name is the current name of the file to download. Press ENTER, or to change the name of the file at this point, type a new name (without a file extension, which is automatically added) and press ENTER.
When the download is complete, you will be returned to a blank page. You can then use the go back or forward commands to return to the web page you were previously in, or press CONTROLwithO to choose another page.
Note: Please remember that the entire available memory of the FlashDisk is 14MB at most. If you attempt to download a file that is too big for the BrailleNote QT to receive, you can abort the download by pressing ESCAPE during the download process. To find out the status of a download at any time, press HELP. And remember, you can download large files to a storage card instead of the Flash Disk.
General Caution: While copying or moving any files onto your FlashDisk from any location, never perform a reset. This can cause your Flashdisk to disappear and can cause corruption.


12.12 Tables.
Tables are a common occurrence on web pages, and are used for everything from setting out items for sale to laying out records in online banking.
KeyWeb has a Table Mode just for navigating tables.
To get into Table mode, you need to be in a table. On the display, a table is marked as:
"dollarsigntb"ordots1246,dots2345,dots12.
Press READwithS to get into table mode. While in table mode, you can find out what cell you are in. Press READwithQ and KeyWeb will display your row and column coordinates.
The cursor moves through a table by row or by column. On the display there will be one space between each column, and two spaces between each row.
While in Table mode the following navigation commands apply.
Move forward one cell along a row: SPACEwithdot4.
To hear the current cell in a row: READwith8.
Move back one cell along a row: SPACEwithdot1.
Move down one cell in a column: SPACEwithdots56.
To hear the current cell in a column: READwithI.
Move down one cell in a column: SPACEwithdots23.



13 Connectivity
This chapter looks at all the different ways the BrailleNote QT can connect to other forms of technology. From cables to cableless, there is bound to be a connection configuration that will suit your requirements.
These connection configurations allow you to access:
The World Wide Web;
Email;
Local Area Network;
Your PC via ActiveSync.
With wireless networking you can access the web and your email anywhere where there is an available wireless network. Use it to view the network on your BrailleNote QT and even manage network files.
LAN networking makes the same things possible, using a cable to connect to the network.
Serial connection allows you to dialup the internet via a modem, or view your BrailleNote QT on your PC.
This chapter assumes that you have a basic understanding of networking and already have a network available. Not all the options discussed require a network however, so don't be put off if this is not something you wish to get into!
The heart of setting up connectivity on your BrailleNote QT is the Connectivity Menu. This is available from the Options Menu.


13.1 Understanding Connectivity Concepts.
The world of connectivity is a world of communication between, or among, devices of all kinds. Just as in the world of human beings, where there are those who speak our language and those who don't, not all devices can talk to all other devices; they have to share a method of communication. And again, just as sometimes people don't like what each other are saying, or don't agree, or misunderstand; in the world of connectivity, even when devices share the same methods of connecting, they don't always manage to connect the first time.
Why is this? Firstly, because electronic and computerized devices are "dumb". They only know what they know, and if a device offers another device a setting even slightly different to what it is expecting, it will ignore it. And while there are industry standards, with so many different companies manufacturing devices that are trying to talk to each other, there is bound to be the odd miscommunication, where theory collides with practice. Then there is the business of which device initiates the connection.
With cableless connectivity options such as wireless networking, this gets even more interesting. When you use cables, you actually plug the cable in between two devices, so there is no ambiguity as to which devices are supposed to be communicating. However, cableless devices have to broadcast their availability to all other devices within range, and then there is a stage of identifying which device goes with which, not to mention security levels etc., before anything else can happen.
In the face of all these possibilities, initiating a connection can take some patience, some tweaking, but most of all, following the instructions.
The BrailleNote QT has been designed to make this as straightforward as possible. There is just one important rule to remember  that the BrailleNote QT initiates all connections. A special case among tens of millions of PC's, laptops and PDA's, it knows best what it needs from other devices, and is set up to initiate connections.


13.2 Connection Configurations.
A connection configuration is a record of the settings required in order to be able to use a particular type of connectivity, such as wireless networking or a phoneline, with a particular device. Because each type of connectivity is different, their configuration needs to be different.
You may also find that you will need to set up different configurations for the same kind of connectivity, such as a network configuration for work, and one for home.
The same connection configuration can be available for a range of uses, such as email, browsing the web, and local network access.
In this section we discuss the devices available to connect your BrailleNote QT with other devices.


13.3 The Connectivity Menu.
The Connectivity Menu is the heart of the connectivity options available on the BrailleNote QT.
The Connectivity Menu is off the Options Menu. It has the following items:
Create a New Dialup or LAN connection: Select this option to set up a new dial up, or LAN connection i.e. using an ethernet card. Refer to 13.5.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection.
Disconnect Dialup connection: Only displays when the BrailleNote QT is online using a dialup connection. Refer to 13.5.4 Disconnect Dialup connection.
Active Connection Details (Name): This option gives you information on any connection that is currently active. Refer to 13.6 Active Connection Details.
Wireless Ethernet: Select this option to turn WiFi on or off. Refer to 13.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
Review an existing connection configuration: This option allows you to make changes to a configuration. Refer to 13.7 Review an existing connection configuration.
Setup Options: When you select this option, KeySoft prompts: "Computer name? Currently BrailleNote". You can change the name of the BrailleNote QT to something unique. This is the name that a network will use to identify your BrailleNote QT as a networked device. This is particularly important if any other network users are using a BrailleNote QT.


13.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
Wireless networking is just a different form of computer networking that doesn't require cables. It is also sometimes referred to as WiFi or 802.11, but they are all the same thing.
To use the BrailleNote QT with a wireless network, you will need a wireless network card. This is a card that fits into the PCMCIA card slot on the BrailleNote QT. Pulse Data supports the Cisco Aironet 340/350 wireless card and cannot guarantee that any other card will work with the BrailleNote QT.
You will also need access to a wireless network. This may be in your home, workplace or school, or in an airport, caf or library. There are two ways in which to access a wireless network  through setting up a connection configuration, and through scanning for and picking up a wireless network. Which method you use will depend on the circumstances.
Although there has been much talk over the past few years about wireless security, or lack of it, most workplaces or institutions will have proper security measures in place on their wireless networks. These comprise a range of settings, passwords and codes that are only made available to legitimate users. In the case of public wireless networks such as in libraries and airports, the network itself will provide most of the settings automatically because they are set up to let you log in, not to prevent you. However, before trying to connect your BrailleNote QT to any nonpublic wireless network, be aware that you will need to have some advance information about the wireless network, usually via the network administrator.
To find out how to:
Create a new wireless networking configuration, refer to 13.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
Scan for a new wireless network and logging on, refer to 13.4.2 Scanning for a Wireless Network.
Connect to wireless network after it is set up, refer to 13.4.3 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
Organize the wireless network configurations already set up, refer to 13.4.4 Wireless Configuration Options.


13.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
When you have a wireless connection available to you on a regular basis, you should set up a dedicated configuration for it. It may be, for example, on your college campus or in your workplace. All wireless networks have an SSID (Service Set Identifier). The SSID is just the name given to the network. For added security, networks not intended for access by the general public may hide their SSID, so it can not be displayed when you scan for visible networks. In this case, the network administrator needs to tell you what the SSID for the network is, and any other applicable settings such a WEP.
To create a connection configuration for a wireless connection, go to the Wireless Network option of the connectivity Menu. Ensure the wireless network card is inserted into the BrailleNote QT's card slot, as without it this procedure is not possible:
1. Insert your Cisco Aironet 340/350 series wireless card into the PC card slot on the side of the BrailleNote.
2. Press the reset button. This allows the BrailleNote to recognize the wireless card.
3. From the Options menu, select Connectivity by pressing C, then Wireless Ethernet, by pressing W.
4. KeySoft prompts, "Wirelesson?CurrentlyNo." Press Y for Yes.
5. You are at the Wireless Ethernet Menu. Select "ConfigureaNewWirelessConnection"and press ENTER. KeySoft presents you with the Entry List for Connection configuration. You can move down the list by pressing SPACE.
6. The first item is Name. Enter any name you like, something that is meaningful to you, and press ENTER.
7. KeySoft prompts, "SSID?" This is the name of the network as determined by the network administrator. Type in the SSID and press ENTER.
8. Next are "UseInfrastructureMode?"and "UseSharedAuthentication?", which both require a Y or Nvalue.The values you need to assign will be given to you by the network administrator.
9. Next is "UseWEP?" If you answer Y,the next item you see on the list is a WEPKey entry field. Type in the WEPkey and press ENTER.
10. Next is 802.1x Authentication. This is also a code. Type it in and press ENTER.
11. The rest of the fields are standard network settings and again, the values will come from the network administrator. The fields are: "ObtainanIPAddressAutomatically?","IPAddress","SubnetMask,DefaultGateway,PrimaryDNS,SecondaryDNS,PrimaryWINS,and SecondaryWINS. Any fields that don't need changing, just pass over them by pressing SPACE.
12. KeySoft prompts, Useaproxyserverforthisconnection? If Nfor No, you will go to the end of the list. If Yfor Yes, you will need to fill in two more fields  "proxyservername" and "proxyserverport."
13. To save and close the record, press ESCAPE. KeySoft prompts, "AddthisRecord?" Press Y for Yes or Nfor No.
This configuration is now available for use as described in 13.4.3 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
To make changes to, or to delete a wireless configuration, use the Reviewanexistingconnectionconfiguration function as described in 13.7 Review an existing connection configuration.


13.4.2 Scanning for a Wireless Network.
An alternative way to log into a wireless network is to scan for it. Wireless networks that have the public display of their SSID disabled will be invisible to a scan, so scanning is not an appropriate way to try to log into those networks. However wireless networks with low, or no security, such as are found in libraries, airports and cafs etc., are set up through scanning. This is because when selected the first time, they then typically transfer most of the settings required in a connection configuration automatically to your BrailleNote QT. This connection configuration is then available to use to log on automatically in the future.
1. To scan for a new wireless network, from the Wireless Ethernet menu, select ScanforWirelessNetworks and press ENTER.
2. KeySoft prompts, "Listofavailableconnections." The connections listed will depend on how many wireless networks are displaying themselves in your vicinity. To review the list, press SPACE. Each network will announce its name, for example:
1.SSID:Vodaphone
2.SSID:Tsunami
3.SSID:AirAmerica
3. Make a selection by pressing ENTER.
4. KeySoft prompts, "EntryListforConnectionConfigurations." Press SPACE. The first field is the connection configuration name. Give it a name and press ENTER. In most cases, the rest of the fields will be correctly configured by the connection itself, however this will vary depending on how the wireless network is set up. In some cases, the venue will provide you with a code to enter, in others the whole configuration is provided. Once completed, exit the configuration using ESCAPE and press Ywhen asked if you wish to save it.
5. KeySoft displays the name of the network, e.g. "1.SSID:Vodaphone,Active" You are now on the Wireless network.
The next time you scan for this network, it will show up with its configuration listed just before its name. For example, if the connection configuration is called VP, you would hear or read, "VPSSID:Vodaphone.Active."Just press ENTER on this option and you will be connected.


13.4.3 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
This option makes it really easy to connect to a wireless network that you use repeatedly. If you only use one wireless network, this option automatically reconnects to it. If you use more than one, a list of configurations is formed. As the BrailleNote QT can only pick up a wireless network that is in the vicinity, this option will always pick up the one that you want. In the unusual situation that you have two wireless networks with configurations in the same vicinity or two configurations for the same wireless network, so that there is a chance it may pick up the wrong one, you can change the order of the list so that the preferred configuration will get picked up first.
To reconnect to a wireless network; from the Connectivity Menu, select ReconnectusingexistingConfigurations and press ENTER. KeySoft will announce, "PleaseWait,connectingto(config)" there will be progress beeps as it locates the network, then "PleaseWait,connectedto(config)."You are now connected to the wireless network.
Of course in order to reconnect, you will need to have your wireless card inserted. If you have performed a reset since the last time it was inserted, insert the card and press reset. This allows the BrailleNote QT to recognize the presence of the wireless card.


13.4.3.1 Changing preferred order.
Wireless network connection configurations will order themselves with the first created at the top. As discussed in the previous section, if this doesn't work for you, you can change the order of the list.
To change the order of the list, follow these steps:
1. From the Wireless Ethernet Menu, select Order Connection Preferences.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Listofconfigurationsinpreferredorder." To review the list, press SPACEorADVANCE. The list will be something like:
1. work
2. home
3. home2
3. When you are on the item you wish to move, press CONTROLwithENTER. This will take you to the Preference Order Action Menu. The options are:
Top: Move to the top of the list,
Up: Move up one position in the list,
Down: Move down one position in the list, and
Bottom: Move to the bottom of the list.
4. Select a move from the list and the order will change accordingly.
For example: I want to move "home2" above "home", as it is the one I use most often. I go to "3. home2" and press CONTROLwithENTER. I press SPACE twice to get to "Up: Move up one position in the list," and press ENTER. KeySoft displays, "2. home2," confirming that "home2" has moved to position 2. I press ESCAPE.


13.4.4 Wireless Configuration Options.
The Wireless configuration options allow you to set some parameters on how wireless operates on the BrailleNote QT. To review the list items, press SPACEorADVANCE to go down the list, or BACK or BACKSPACE to go up.
To get to the Wireless Ethernet Options List, select it from the Wireless Ethernet Menu.
The three options and their purposes are:
1. Notifywhennewnetworksareavailable(currentlyyes/no) When this option is set to yes, a message displays when the device is not yet connected to a wireless network and a network is sensed by the wireless card.
2. AutomaticallyConnecttoNonpreferredNetworks(currentlyyes/no). This option allows the wireless card to try to establish a connection to a network that is not part of the existing configurations database.
3. TypesofNetworkstoAccess(CurrentlyAccessPointsonly). When trying to connect, this option filters out the wireless devices using a different Infrastructure. The default is Access points only with H as its hotkey. This setting detects only network access points. For AdHoc only, press H. This filters out access points and detects only peer to peer devices. For all types of network, press A, this allows any type of network to be accessed.


13.5 Dial up and LAN Connections.
These two kinds of connection are quite different in the way they operate, but have some things in common in how you set them up. This is because both are used to access the internet, and both require cables. Even if you are using a LAN network connection to access a network, instead of just using the internet, the setting up of the network connection configuration is the same.
This section explains how to set up a dial up or LAN connection, and how to use it once you have done so.


13.5.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection.
Use this option to set up a Dial up or LAN connection, as the name suggests. You can also enter a wireless configuration this way but it is preferable to do so via the "Wireless" Menu item.
Before following this procedure, please refer to either or 13.5.2 Using a LAN connection, whichever applies to what you want to do. They provide essential information about devices and settings that are needed to complete the procedure.
1. Configurations are kept in a database, and the first time you go to enter a configuration, you will be prompted to create a database in which to do it. KeySoft prompts:
"Thedatabaseforconnectionconfigurationsdoesnotexist.Createadatabasecalledconnectionconfigurations?"
Press Y for yes and this happens automatically. After the first time you won't hear this prompt again.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Entrylistforconnectionconfigurations." To go to the first field, press SPACE.
3. "Connectionconfigurationname?" Enter a name for the record that is meaningful to you, then press ENTER.
4. "Devicetouse?(name)" Dial up only; if using networking, go directly to step 9. This is where you specify the device through which you are making the connection, such as a type of modem. Select the device you want by pressing ENTER. To cycle through the list, press SPACEwithdots34 and make a selection by pressing ENTER..
5. "PhoneNumber?" For dialup connections only. If using in a work environment, remember to add any dialout prefix to the number.
6. "ServiceUsername?" This is the user name you use to get onto the internet via your ISP. Type it here. Likewise the "ServicePassword?"
7. For the rest of the prompts, leave them set to their default unless otherwise stated in or 13.5.2 Using a LAN connection.
8. For dialup connections only: When you are happy with all the settings, add this configuration by either pressing CONTROLwithENTER, or ESCAPE then Y at the "Savethisrecord?" prompt. The rest of this procedure applies to networking configurations only.
9. The rest of the fields relate to networking using a LAN. As discussed in 13.5.2 Using a LAN connection, you may not need to fill in all, or even any of them, depending on the way in which the network is set up.
IP Address  This identifies the BrailleNote QT as a part of the network. 
Subnet Mask  The part of the IP address that is common to all of the IP addresses in the domain.
Default Gateway  Default connection to the Internet through another piece of hardware or software that provides address translation and/or security.
Primary DNS  Domain Name Server  translates network names into IP addresses.
Secondary DNS"  
Primary WINS  
Secondary WINS 
Proxy Settings:
Use a proxy server for this connection?" Y/N
proxy server name
proxy server port
End Of List	


13.5.2 Using a LAN connection.
LAN is an acronym for Local Area Network. We use the term in this user guide to refer to networking via an ethernet card and cable as opposed to wireless networking, which uses a wireless network card that doesn't need cables. Wireless networking is discussed separately in 13.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
To establish a LAN connection for your BrailleNote QT, you will need an Ethernet Card (type Socket Low Power Ethernet (LPE) EA2902139, CF+ R/LP  E)  which has a ruggedized, i.e. connected, cable.
You will also need access to a working ethernet computer network, via a network capable PC, server, hub/switch/router or DSL modem.
When configuring the connection, use these specific settings:
At the "DevicetoUse?" prompt, select Ethernet Network.
At the "ObtainanIPaddressautomatically?"setting, ensure it is set to yes, unless the network uses static IP addresses as in scenarios a and b below, where it is necessary to enter the IP address manually. When set to Yes, this setting allows the network to fill in the rest of the fields automatically except the proxy server fields.
The scenarios below cover most of the common network configurations found at work, school or at home. In a work or school scenario, you may need to involve the network administrator in this task.
a. Home Network: If you have one PC and only intend to connect to the BrailleNote QT, such as in a home user situation (i.e. No DHCP server, no WINS, maybe gateway), set an IP address in the same range as the PC's IP address. For example, if the PC's is 10.0.0.1, make the BrailleNote QT's 10.0.0.2. If the PC acts as a gateway, add a gateway address. If you use a router, the address is likely to start with 192.168.0.n where n is a number that uniquely identifies your BrailleNote QT.
Note: If another computer is subsequently attached to the network, it MAY take the IP address that the BN has. If this happens, one of the addresses will need to be changed, and setup run again.
b. Local Network with static IP addresses: If the network uses static IP addresses i.e. not automatically assigned, set an IP address on the BrailleNote QT in the range of acceptable addresses. Add a gateway address if available.
c. Local Network with DHCP: This kind of network automatically assigns IP addresses. When creating the new dialup or LAN connection, set the "ObtainanIPaddressautomatically?" setting to Yes. It will pick up the DNS and WINS from the DHCP.


13.5.3 Using a Dialup Connection.
To use a dialup connection, you will need a modem. The BrailleNote QT has its own internal 56k modem. If for some reason you wish to use an external modem, this is also possible. Both are discussed in this section.


13.5.3.1 Using the Internal Modem.
The BrailleNote QT has an internal 56k modem. The modem port used for connecting this modem to a dialup connection is located on the right of the rear panel. Your BrailleNote QT is supplied with a modem cable for use with this port.
If you live in UK, Australia or New Zealand, an adapter that plugs into a standard "BT" type phone jack is also supplied with your BrailleNote QT. The modem cable plugs into the adapter and the adapter plugs into a phone jack.
The modem cable has a phone type plug at either end of the cable. Insert one plug into the BrailleNote QT's modem port and the other end into a phone jackpoint. To do this, locate the locking clip on one side of the plug. Orient this side to the bottom of the modem port, engage the plug in the socket and push the plug home. The plug should hold when the cable is lightly pulled. To unplug, squeeze the clip in towards the plug and pull the cable. The case bottom is scalloped under the modem port so that you can easily get your fingertip under the clip. When the plug is unclipped it releases freely.


13.5.3.2 Using an external modem.
While it is possible to use an external modem with the BrailleNote QT, there is little advantage in terms of speed of connection. However the following two scenarios are possible:
1. Using an external modem connected via serial port: If you are using this combination, connect the modem to the BrailleNote QT using the serial to serial cable. Ensure the modem is on and plugged into a phone line. The device name to choose when configuring the connection is HayesCompatibleModemonCOM1.
2. Using a card modem in the CF card slot: Insert the modem card before setting up a configuration for it, and it will appear on the device list as the name given to it by the manufacturer.


13.5.4 Disconnect Dialup connection.
This option only displays when you are online with a dialup connection. It allows you to hang up without having to be in either KeyMail or KeyWeb at the time.
To disconnect from the dialup connection, select this option off the Connectivity Menu and press Y for Yes. To exit without disconnecting, press N for No.


13.6 Active Connection Details.
This option off the Connectivity menu lists out information on a currently active wireless connection.
The items listed are:
Name:
Status: connected to (name of network)
Signal strength:
IP Address:
DNS address:
Test current connection. This last option is a "ping" function. Although KeySoft prompts you for the IP address, you can also enter a URL such as www.pulsedata.com.


13.7 Review an existing connection configuration.
This option allows you to access connection configurations that you have already created, and view and/or edit the information in them. This applies to all configurations including wireless ones.
From the Connectivity Menu, select "Reviewanexistingconnectionconfiguration". Using SPACE, then RIGHTARROWorNEXT to move from one to the next, find the configuration record that you wish to review. At this point you can review the different fields in the record by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE and BACK or BACKSPACE.
If you wish to make a change to any field, follow these steps:
1. Move to the field to be changed. Press CONTROLwithK, and you are asked for a new entry for this field. There are three options here:
a) Type a new entry and press ENTER.
b) Edit the old field which is offered as the suggestion, as described in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt.
c) Clear the field by pressing CONTROLwithBACKSPACE, followed by ENTER.
2. This puts you in an entry list so you can modify or add to any other field as well. You have the same three options for all the fields, and you can change any other field in the record.
If you want to fill in a field that is blank, simply navigate to it and type in the new entry.


13.7.1 Duplicating a Connection Configuration.
Being able to duplicate a connection configuration is highly useful when you wish to make slight variations to the configuration, such as adding a dial out prefix to a phone number for use at work. It is better, and far simpler, to create two configurations than to keep changing the setting in the one configuration. By duplicating the entire configuration and renaming it, all you then have to do is adjust the settings that need it, and you have a second configuration.
To create a duplicate configuration, follow these steps:
1. From the Connectivity Menu, select "Reviewanexistingconnectionconfiguration". Using SPACE, then RIGHTARROWorNEXT to move from one to the next, find the configuration you wish to duplicate, go to name field by pressing SPACE, then exit with ESCAPE.
2. Select the "CreateanewDialuporLANConnection" option and when you get as far as the "Connectionconfigurationname?" prompt, select the Block Commands Menu by pressing CONTROLwithB. Note that this is a different menu to the Block Commands menu in KeyWord.
3. Press SPACE and KeyList displays: "Retrievelastrecord?".This is the configuration you accessed in step 1, so press ENTER.
4. KeyList prompts, "Connectionconfigurationname?Currently(name)".You now have two identical configurations. Change the name, and any other fields necessary, then press ESCAPE.
5. When prompted to save the record, press Yfor Yes.


13.8 Glossary of terms:
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
WINS: Windows Internet Naming Service  Microsoft specific Name.
Number protocol (similar to DNS, but for NetBIOS)
Gateway: Connection to the Internet through another piece of hardware or software that provides address translation and/or security.
IP Address: Identifier on a Network.
DNS: Domain Name Server, translates network names into IP addresses.
WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy, encryption protocol on wireless networks providing a security level similar to a wired connection.
802.1x: Authentication protocol in use on wireless networks.
Subnet mask: A mask used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to.
LAN: Local Area Network.
Access Point: Device connected to a network that allows other wireless devices to enter this network.
Infrastructure: Type of wireless connection (using an access point or in Ad Hoc mode).
Ad Hoc: Wireless direct (Peer to peer) connection between devices.


13.9 Troubleshooting.
1. "Card not recognized" message on inserting Ethernet card into the BrailleNote QT:
Is the card the correct type? Many network cards do not work reliably with Windows CE  the Socket Communications LPE card specified above has been tested and approved by Pulse Data, and is the only one that should be used.
2. BrailleNote QT doesn't acknowledge your wireless card:
Is it a Cisco Aironet 340/350 series PC type wireless card? This is the only card approved by Pulse Data.
Did you reset after inserting the card? This is important as it enables the BrailleNote QT to recognize the presence of the wireless card.
3. Connection to ActiveSync over Ethernet fails, however, Internet connection (mail, browser etc) via DSL or Cable Modem works:
Is there a firewall program (such as Zone Labs ZoneAlarm, or Norton Personal Firewall) on the PC? If so, have the appropriate ports been opened?
Has "Allow network (Ethernet) and Remote Access Service (RAS) server connection with this desktop computer." been checked in the ActiveSync Connection Settings dialog?
If you have any troubles with ActiveSync once you have set it up, try deleting the partnership and creating a new one. This allows you to reset all the settings in ActiveSync. Alternatively, try a reset on the BrailleNote QT with no keys held down.


13.10 Firewalls.
If there is a firewall in use on your network, disable any firewall blocking for the IP address of the BrailleNote QT. This may require setting a static IP address for the BrailleNote QT, depending on the firewall in use on the network.


13.11 Accessing the Network through your BrailleNote QT.
As well as accessing the internet, you can also use a connection between the BrailleNote QT and a network to access the rest of the network on your BrailleNote QT. This means that you can browse to folders and files on the network, allowing you to open compatible files and/or attach any kind of file to your emails. Open an MS Word file from a network folder, make changes and close it again. Email an Excel spreadsheet using your BrailleNote QT or, if you receive one, move it onto the network where you can open it from a PC. Transfer files quickly and easily onto the network.
This is possible when a LAN or wireless connection is set up without ActiveSync (which has the opposite effect of allowing you to browse the BrailleNote QT file structure on your PC). If you don't already have a connection configuration set up for using with LAN or wireless networking, follow the connection set up instructions in 13.5.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection or 13.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
The network appears as Network on the Drive list.
Note: Network will appear on the drive list even if the BrailleNote QT is not connected to a Network at the time.


13.11.1 Network terminology.
There are several key terms and concepts that are important to understand in order to access a network confidently.
Network Client: A network client is a device that requests and receives data over the network. When connected to a network, the BrailleNote QT is a client device.
Domain: A domain is a group of computers and devices on a network that are administered as a unit. A network may have only one domain, or multiple domains, depending on the way it has been designed. The domain is the highest point available when searching and you need to know the name of the domain in order to do so. Please note that if a network is a workgroup and doesn't have a domain, you won't be able to search by domain.
Server: A server is basically a computer on which the network, or part of the network, resides. There may be one or several servers in a domain. If you wish to access a specific server on the network, you will need to know its name. Otherwise you can search the domain and locate it that way.
Network Folders: We are using this term to cover all of the shared folders and directories or resources on a network. Resources that are not available for use with the BrailleNote QT, such as printers, will not show up at all.
Network Place: The BrailleNote QT allows you to map any frequently used network folders to a list of network places, making it quick and easy to access them. The list of Network Places is the first thing to appear once you select Network Drive. For more information, refer to 13.11.4 Network Places.


13.11.2 How to access Network the first time.
This topic explains how to set up access to a network's servers and folders via your BrailleNote QT.
The first time you access the network, there are no defaults set up as it is previously unchartered territory. However on subsequent uses, you will find that most of the prompts will offer your previous choice as a default, for example, "Network server? Press enter for server1." There are other short cuts for future use that are discussed as they come up.
Before starting this procedure, you will need to know the exact name and spelling of either the domain, if there is one, or the server or servers that you wish to access. You will also need to have a wireless or LAN card plugged in and in the case of a wireless card, be connected. In both cases, you will need of course to have a connection configuration set up to access this particular network using either method. Lastly you will need to know your username and password for logging onto the network, if the network requires this.
From anywhere in KeySoft where you are prompted to select a Drive from the Drive list (for example, FileManager, Directory):
1. Select Network from the Drive list by pressing N.
2. KeySoft prompts, "NetworkPlace?" Ignore this prompt for now and press SPACE twice.
3. KeySoft prompts, "BrowseentireNetwork." Press ENTER.
4. At this point you have two choices; NetworkServer, or press SPACE to choose DomaintoSearch? The one you choose will depend on what information you have available. If you know the name and exact spelling of the server you wish to access on the network, type it at the NetworkServer prompt and press ENTER. If you know the name and exact spelling of the domain and wish to search for a network folder that way, type it in at the DomaintoSearch? prompt and press ENTER.
5. Regardless of which option you chose, if you have to log into this network, at this point you will be prompted for your network server user name. Type it in Computer Braille and press ENTER.
6. At the password prompt, type your password and press ENTER.
7. Press ESCAPE. This extracts you from the login fields. The BrailleNote QT will ask you to verify your choice to save username and password with a Y or N.
8. KeySoft prompts: "Updatethedefaultlogininformation?" This prompt relates to whether you wish to save your login details on the BrailleNote QT. If you type Y for yes, you will hear a warning about the risks of saving it. However if you do save it, you won't need to log in manually again. If you type N for no, you won't run the risk of someone using your BrailleNote QT to gain access to the network with your login, but you will have to reenter your username and password every time.
9. If you chose the Network Server name, skip this step. If you chose the domain search, at this point you will be presented with all of the servers on the network. You can review them all by pressing SPACE, or press the initial letter of the server you are looking for, repeatedly if necessary, until you find it. Press ENTER.
10. KeySoft prompts: "NetworkFolder?" Either type the exact name, review all the folders by pressing SPACE, or press the initial letter of the folder you are looking for until you find it. Press ENTER.
11. KeySoft prompts: "NetworkPlacenameforthisfolder?Pressenterfor(foldername)." Type another name or press ENTER. Network Places are explained in 13.11.4 Network Places.
12. From here on, it is the same as reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote QT.


13.11.3 How to access the Network after the first time.
Once you have been onto the network at least once and set up a network place or places, accessing the network becomes a lot more straightforward. The procedure is almost the same as the first time, but now you have some shortcuts in the Network Places list, possibly a saved login, and default options at each prompt to make the process quicker.
1. Select Network from the Drive list by pressing N.
2. KeySoft prompts, "NetworkPlace?PressENTERfor(name)" where (name) is the last network place visited. Either press ENTER, or go to the list of network places by pressing SPACE,select one, and pressENTER.
3. If you saved your username and password, or do not have one, from here on, it is the same as reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote QT. If you didn't save your username and password, you will be prompted here to enter them.
4. Press ESCAPE. This extracts you from the login fields.
5. From here on, it is the same as reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote QT.
Note: After a reset of the BrailleNote QT, there will be no defaults set up as they are all wiped. If you do a reset while holding down JKLkeys, all your settings will be lost and you will need to start again as described in 13.11.2 How to access Network the first time.


13.11.4 Network Places.
The BrailleNote QT maps network folders to a list of network places, making it quick and easy to access them. The list of Network Places is the first thing to appear once you select Network Drive, so you can go directly to them instead of having to search down through the domain or review all the servers to find the shared folder that you want.
Every time you open a new network folder, KeySoft will ask you to map it to a network place. You can give the network place any name you like, but as it is the convention, KeySoft offers the folder's name as the default. You can accept it by pressing ENTER, or type an alternative name then press ENTER.
Because you may not want to keep a network place for the future, you can delete it. To do this, select the network place from the list of network places, but do not press ENTER. Instead, to delete, press CONTROLwithI. KeySoft will ask you to confirm this by typing Y for yes, or N for No.
You can also rename a network place by pressing CONTROLwithR.
It is not possible to map the same network folder to two different network places, nor is it possible to have two network places with the same name.


13.12 ActiveSync.
The ActiveSync option in the Utilities Menu allows the BrailleNote QT file structure to be viewed on a PC with Windows Explorer.
This feature allows you to manage your BrailleNote QT files from the PC. You can copy, move, or delete Files and Folders, just as you would on the normal PC drives. You can quickly transfer files to and from the BrailleNote QT using this option. To get to the file structure of the BrailleNote QT, Select Explorer from the File menu in the ActiveSync window on your PC. From the Windows Explorer window, select My Handheld PC.
Using ActiveSync, it is also possible to synchronize files between your PC and your BrailleNote QT.
ActiveSync can also redirect internet access via your PC's internet connection when the PC and BrailleNote QT <as1>
Before any ActiveSync connection can be made, you will need to install the ActiveSync program on the PC. This program is provided on the CDROM supplied with the BrailleNote QT.


13.12.1 Serial, Infrared and Ethernet Connection Types.
The BrailleNote QT may be connected to the PC via either the serial or infrared port, or via a LAN connection. Assuming you have access to a suitable PC, you have everything you need to set up the cable connections required for Serial. PC's that are not infrared and/or network enabled require extra PC hardware and/or software before these can be used.
Here are some things you should know about each connection type:
Serial Port: This is the slowest connection type but it has the advantage of not requiring any extra equipment, and is simple to set up and use. Only works with ActiveSync. Refer to 13.12.3 ActiveSync using an Infrared or Serial Connection.
Infrared Port: Faster than a serial connection, but requires a PC that is infrared capable. Only works with ActiveSync. For how to set up an Infrared connection, refer to page 2.7.3 Using the Infrared Port. For how to set up an Activesync connection, refer to 13.12.3 ActiveSync using an Infrared or Serial Connection.
LAN connection: Fastest of all the connections, you have the option of accessing the internet as well as the usual ActiveSync activities. Requires an ethernet card and some configuring at the PC end. For information on setting up LAN, refer to 13.5 Dial up and LAN Connections. For ActiveSync connection set up, refer to 13.12.5 ActiveSync using LAN. Does involve making a serial or infrared connection initially, in order to set up a partnership between the PC and the BrailleNote.
Please note that while you can access the internet using LAN with ActiveSync, you can also do so without ActiveSync.


13.12.2 Installing ActiveSync on your PC.
Before you can use ActiveSync with the BrailleNote QT, it must be installed on the PC. This program is provided on the CDROM supplied with the BrailleNote QT. The current version of ActiveSync is 3.7.1.
To install ActiveSync 3.7.1, follow these steps:
1. Insert the CDROM into your PC CDROM drive. Wait a few seconds, and a window will display with 6 buttons. The top button says "Install ActiveSync". Click on this button.
2. Give the installation file a few seconds to automatically extract and copy files. When this is complete, the first window of a SetUp wizard will display. Although the wizard gives instructions on what to do, the procedure is slightly different than it states, so please follow these instructions carefully. You can now close down the CD installation window by clicking on its Exit button if you wish. In the SetUp wizard window, click on the Next button.
3. The Select Installation Folder window displays. ActiveSync offers a default filepath that you can use. Click on the Next button.
4. At completion of this process, you could click on the Exit button and ActiveSync is now installed. However, until a connection is established, the Get Connected wizard will keep appearing on your PC when you try to set connection types in the Connection Settings window of ActiveSync. To get around this, we suggest you make your first connection Infrared or Serial as they are the easiest to set up. All you have to do is to follow the instructions in section or 13.12.3 ActiveSync using an Infrared or Serial Connection, with the only difference being that instead when you go to the Connection Settings, the Wizard will come up. At this point, press ENTER on the BrailleNote QT straight away.
If for any reason you cannot use the CDRom, you can also download ActiveSync from the Internet. It is free and readily available. A search engine search for "ActiveSync 3.7.1 download" will bring up several download sites.


13.12.3 ActiveSync using an Infrared or Serial Connection.
Follow these steps to make an ActiveSync connection using the serial or infrared ports. For an infrared connection, you will need a PC with an IrDA compatible port that is in enabled, and in operation.
Once ActiveSync is installed on your PC, as per directions in, follow these steps:
1. Connect the BrailleNote QT to the PC with the serial cable provided, or position the BrailleNote QT so that the infrared port lines up with that of the PC's.
2. Go to the Utilities Menu from the Main Menu, and select Miscellaneous Options. Press SPACE once to get to ActiveSync Connection. Type Sfor Serial, or I for infrared, and press ENTER.
3. Return to the Utilities Menu by pressing ESCAPE. Press C or SPACE once to get to "ConnecttoActiveSync". Do not press ENTER yet.
4. On the PC, make sure the connection type is also set to Serial. To do this, in the ActiveSync window on your PC, from the File Menu, select Connection Settings. Check the option "AllowSerialcableorInfraredconnectiontothisport" and click on OK. If it is your first ever connection on the PC, the Get Connected Wizard may pop up instead, in which case just carry on to step 5.
5. Now on your BrailleNote QT, press ENTER. Note: If the connection does not happen within 10 seconds, reset the BrailleNote QT by pressing the reset button, and the connection should come up straight away.
6. If the connection was successful, after about 10 seconds you will hear a chime followed by a slight shriek from the BrailleNote QT. This can happen even if the BrailleNote QT gives an error message about the port not being available. If you don't hear the chime at all, try again. All you need to do is click on the Next button of the wizard screen that comes up, and the Get Connected window will display again. If not using the wizard, try a reset by pressing the reset button.
7. When connected, a "NewPartnership" dialogue box appears. There are two choices, "Yes" or "No". If you are simply going to use ActiveSync to manage files, you could click on "No". If you are going to set up a network connection after this or wish to synchronize files, select "Yes". Click on OK.


13.12.4 Trouble Shooting ActiveSync.
To establish a successful connection with ActiveSync, a number of independent factors must be satisfied. Be prepared to spend time to understand the connection procedure. With patience you will soon be connecting quickly and reliably.
Difficulties usually center around making a successful connection. Make sure you follow the recommended connection procedures outlined in the previous sections.
Factors to check if you cannot make a connection are:
* If you have been using the BrailleNote QT serial port for ActiveSyncing as well as to drive a remote display, you need to release the port for ActiveSync. Do this by selecting the Visual Display from the Options Menu, then pressing F and ENTER to turn off the connection.
* Similarly, at the PC end, if another program has been using the serial or infrared ports, it is necessary to close the program, or if the program provides facilities to do so, release the port.
* Connection setting in ActiveSync is set to incorrect port type (applies only after successful connection has been previously established)  To check this, in the ActiveSync window, go to the File Menu and select Connection Settings. Check the box that refers to your connection type. Click on OK and try connecting again.
* Check that the cables are plugged in correctly and firmly at both ends, or infrared ports are lined up with no objects between them.
* Check that the correct port type is set on the BrailleNote QT in Miscellaneous Options off the Utilities Menu.
* If still unsuccessful, reset the BrailleNote QT. If that doesn't work, uncheck all connections in the ActiveSync Connection Settings, click on OK, then go back in and recheck. Reset the BrailleNote QT again.


13.12.5 ActiveSync using LAN.
Using ActiveSync with a LAN allows you to access the internet. Of course if you have network capability on your PC, you can also do this using the Network Client approach, as discussed in 13.11 Accessing the Network through your BrailleNote QT, but there are different benefits for each. Using ActiveSync means that you can use Windows Explorer on your PC to view and manage the directory system of the BrailleNote QT, whereas with Network client, you can view and manage the files on your network on the BrailleNote QT. Also, if your primary goal is to access the internet, this approach means you don't have to go through quite so much rigmarole to set up the connection configuration.
1. This first step is necessary so that the BrailleNote QT recognizes your PC. Using a serial or infrared connection, connect to ActiveSync, and in the PC popup, say "yes" to establish a partnership.
2. In the ActiveSync window, go to the File Menu and select Connection Settings. Ensure that "Allownetwork(Ethernet)andRemoteAccessService(RAS)serverconnectionwiththisdesktopcomputer." Checkbox is checked.
Technical note for systems administrators: ActiveSync uses ports 990, 999, 5678, and 5679 to communicate with the BrailleNote QT. It also uses the Netbios TCP and UDP ports 137 (naming service), 138 (netbios datagram service) and 139 (netbios session service) to communicate with your BrailleNote QT. If a DNS is used, it will use port 53 for name resolution.
3. Perform a simple reset.
4. From the Main menu, go to Utilities, then the Miscellaneous Options Setup List, and at the ActiveSync Connection option, select E for Ethernet. You are now ready to connect your BrailleNote QT using Ethernet.
5. Having gone through this set up process once, you don't have to go through it again. While ActiveSync connection is set to "Ethernet", and as long as you are connected via the Ethernet cable, everything will behave as normal.
To use this connection to access the Internet, there are a few more simple steps:
1. Enter the Options Menu by pressing FUNCTION with O. Press Cfor Connectivity then SPACE to get to "CreateaNewDialuporLANConnection". Press ENTER.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Connectionconfigurationname?" Type a name that is meaningful to you and press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Devicetouse?" Cycle through the options to Ethernet Network Connection and press ENTER. 
4. Press ESCAPE and at the prompt, "Savethisconfiguration?" press Yfor Yes. This configuration is the one you will need to access the internet.
Now return to the main menu and select Internet. When asked which configuration to use, select the one you have just set up. You can now access the world wide web. Likewise with email  when asked in KeyMail for a configuration, select the one you have just set up. As long as you have an email account set up, this will work fine.


13.12.6 Connecting via ActiveSync.
Assuming you have carried out the steps in, and set up a connection via Serial, Infrared, or LAN successfully, follow these steps to reconnect in the future. Note: Your PC will need to be switched on for this to work.
1. Connect the BrailleNote QT to the PC with your chosen connection type.
2. On the BrailleNote QT, go to the "UtilitiesMenu,"and press C to select "ConnecttoActiveSync" option.
3. The ActiveSync window on the PC should indicate that the PC is "Connecting" to the BrailleNote QT. This process normally takes about 5 to 10 seconds. When connected, the "NewPartnership" dialogue box may appear. If you followed the steps in the last section, a partnership was established, so this dialog shouldn't appear. Select Yes or No and click on OK.
And that's it!


13.12.7 Disconnecting.
To disconnect from ActiveSync, unplug the relevant cable from either the PC or BrailleNote QT, or for Infrared, simply move the BrailleNote QT so that its infrared port is no longer in line with the PC's.
If you need to use the PC's serial or infrared port for another function, on the PC, go to the File Menu of the ActiveSync menu bar, select "ConnectionSettings" and uncheck the "AllowserialcableorinfraredconnectiontothisCommPort" option. Remember that next time you connect, you have to "recheck" this option.


13.13 KeySync.
13.13.1 What is Synchronization.
Synchronization is the act of making two things work in unison. In the world of planners and address lists and files, it specifically means being able to keep the records on two different systems in unison with each other, in this case a PC and a BrailleNote QT. When you synchronize, the information goes back and forth between the two systems in such a way that both sides end up the same, with a little help from you occasionally. So, if you enter a friend's name or an appointment on the BrailleNote QT, you can ensure that by synchronizing, they will end up recorded in MS Outlook as well.
ActiveSync is a Microsoft tool designed to allow PC's and hand held Pocket devices to talk to one another and to synchronize with each other, which is why it has "Sync" in its name. KeySync does not replace ActiveSync. KeySync still uses ActiveSync as an electronic connection, but it does the job of synchronizing KeySoft records such as addresses, appointments and alarms, with MS Outlook's contacts and planner, and vice versa. So, instead of having to enter or update all your contacts and appointments into two systems separately, you can do them at one end and let the synchronization process copy them, update changes or make deletions, for you.
There is one kind of BrailleNote QT to PC synchronization that uses ActiveSync without KeySync, and that is file synchronization. This is discussed in detail in 13.13.8 File Synchronization.
One way to imagine how synchronization works is to think of a pair of scales. Put some sand in one scale, and to balance, or synchronize, the other side, we would add to it the same amount of sand. If we take some or all out of one side, we can synchronize it by either putting the sand back, or taking the same amount off the other side. If we add sand to one side, we can either take it off again, or add the same amount to the other side. If we change the amount of sand on both sides, we can choose which side we like best and change the other one to match it. And all of this is balanced through the center point of the scale. KeySync is like a pair of scales, with one side being MS Outlook and the other being KeySoft. The center point is a database that sits in your PC and keeps a record of all of the pairs of synchronized files, so it can tell if any changes have been made to either side. With KeySync, you get to make the calls about which side to adjust if there is a change, so you are always in control.
This section begins with general information and instructions on KeySync and how to set it up, followed by a section on synchronizing KeyList, and another on KeyPlan.


13.13.2 Getting the best out of Synchronization.
Like so many tools, the efficiency of synchronization is as much in the way you use it as in the design. Synchronization is designed to keep both copies of a record the same. While it is possible to temporarily override the process on a record by record basis, the ultimate objective of synchronizing is to allow you to keep accurate, matched records, and if that is not what you want to do, perhaps synchronizing is not the way to go.
Synchronizing works best when you do it often, rather than leave the records to build up. If you do it often, there won't be so many opportunities for conflicts and duplicates, and so it will work quickly without you having to make lots of judgment calls.
The first time you synchronize records, any records that are unique to either KeySoft or Outlook will copy themselves to the other system. Duplicate records will need user intervention, and the length of time this takes will be determined by how many you have. However, it will never be such a large job again, especially if, as we mentioned before, you synchronize regularly.


13.13.2.1 KeySyncing for the first time.
If you have a sizeable number of records on either or both your PC and BrailleNote QT, the first synchronization could be quite a mission! KeySync will automatically update records unique to one system, but if you have a lot of duplicate or overlapping records already, it may take some time. Duplicate records are discussed in 13.13.5 Duplicates.


13.13.3 Setting up KeySync on your PC.
The software required to set up KeySync on your PC is available on the CD Rom that came with your BrailleNote QT, or by downloading it from the internet, or by installing it off the PC Software CD available from your SMA distributor. Instructions on how to download it from the internet, and from where, are in the readme file which is in the General folder of the FlashDisk. Please note that you can only synchronize the Planner and Address List of your BrailleNote QT with one PC.
1. Put the CD into the CD drive of your PC.
2. A window will appear with 6 buttons. Click on the second button, labeled "Install KeySync PC Software".
3. The KeySync Setup window appears. Read the information on it then click on Next.
4. The Destination Folder window appears. In this window there is a filepath field, in which the filepath C:\Program Files\Pulse Data\KeySync is specified. Click on Next. Note: if reinstalling KeySync, at this point you will get a dialog box saying "You've specified a folder that already exists" Click on Yes.
5. Your PC is now ready to install KeySync. In the window that appears, click on Next.
6. After a short period of installing activity, a dialog box displays asking if you want to run KeySync at every start up. Click on Yes.
7. The Installation Complete window displays. Click on the Finish button.
8. If you are downloading from a CD, the original 6 button window will appear again. You can either try another option, or click on Exit.
KeySync has put an icon in your system tray, but otherwise as KeySync is driven from your BrailleNote QT, there is very little you need to do with it on the PC.
Important Note: If for some reason you wish to reinstall the KeySync PC Software, do not remove the original version of the software, just install over it. This is because the removal process also deletes all the files in the same folder, including the database that keeps a record of the synchronized pairs.


13.13.3.1 Installation of ActiveSync.
Because you are transferring data to and from your BrailleNote QT and PC, you will need to use ActiveSync to set up a connection with a partnership. This can be a serial, infrared or Ethernet connection. The ActiveSync software is on the BrailleNote Family CDROM supplied with your BrailleNote QT, and there is more information on how to install and use it in 13.12.3 ActiveSync using an Infrared or Serial Connection.
If you have a partnership set up already, you don't need to do it again. If you don't, follow these steps to set one up.
1. Connect to ActiveSync, and select "Yes" to a partnership.
If you are presented with the "Select number of Partnerships" screen, check the box for "Yes, I want to synchronize with only this computer" unless you use the file synchronization facility (see 13.13.8 File Synchronization) on more than one PC, in which case choose the other option.
1. The Select Synchronization Settings window will display. If you are using file synchronization, check the files synchronization option. Otherwise, ensure that none of the options are checked.
2. A dialog box will appear. Click on Finish.


13.13.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time.
Having set up the synchronization at both ends, you can now synchronize your contacts and appointments.
Follow the steps below to set up and perform a KeySync synchronization.
1. Connect to ActiveSync using your preferred connection type.
2. If you are not already connected with a partnership via ActiveSync, do so now.
3. From the Main Menu, choose Utilities Menu, then S for Synchronization.
4. KeySoft prompts: "KeySyncMenu".There are two menu items. Select the second option, "Optionsforsynchronization".
5. KeySoft prompts: "KeySyncOptionsList". SPACE down to the option "Synchronizecontacts?Currently(y/n)".Type Y for Yes or N for No and then press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "SynchronizePlanner?Currently(y/n)" Type Y for Yes or N for No and then press ENTER.
If you answered yes, KeySoft prompts: "SynchronizeAllappointments?Currently(y/n)" This option allows you to specify a period of weeks, past or future, that you wish to synchronize. If you want all past and future appointments synchronized, type Yfor Yes and go to step 9. If you wish to specify a period of time, type N for No and then press ENTER.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Pastweeksofappointmentstosync?CurrentlyAll." The values you can enter are, L for All, or a number between 0999, which specifies the number of weeks. If you don't want to synchronize any past weeks, type 0. No number signs required. Type a value and press ENTER.
8. KeySoft prompts: "Futureweeksofappointmentstosync?CurrentlyAll." The same values are valid as for the past. Type a value and press ENTER. Note: In the case of both past and future time frames, all the instances of any new recurring appointments starting in the time frame will synchronize through, even if they extend beyond the time frame specified.
9. You are now set up to synchronize as much or as little as you wish to. The values that you have selected become the defaults until you change them again. To get back to the KeySync menu, press ESCAPE.
10. From the KeySync menu, select "Synchronizenow". This will activate the synchronization process.


13.13.3.3 Synchronizing after the first time.
Once you have set up all the options as described in the previous section, from then on initializing synchronization is a threestep procedure.
1. Connect to ActiveSync using your preferred connection types.
2. From the Main Menu, choose Utilities Menu, then S for Synchronization.
3. From the KeySync menu, select "Synchronizenow".


13.13.3.4 What happens next.
You may have gathered from the previous sections that synchronization is not a completely automatic process; it requires you to provide your judgment and intervention at times to produce the results you want.
This section covers what to do with any conflicts, duplicates, etc.. While conflicts and duplicates may be defined differently for the Address List and the Planner, the process is pretty much the same. The main difference is in the prompts. For address records, the First and Last names of the contact are used as an identifier. For appointments, the date, time and title are used as an identifier. In the procedure below, these identifiers will be represented by the word (identifier) in brackets.
This procedure starts at the point where you have pressed Synchronize now, step 11 of the procedure in 13.13.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time.
Follow these steps:
1. KeySync displays: "ConnectingSyncingcontacts/planner,pleasewait".Some beeps may follow. Then there are three prompts, either one, some, all or none of which may come up, in the following order:
a) Aconflictexistsfor(identifier).Option?". To choose the KeySoft version, press K. To choose the PC version, press P. To leave both copies unchanged and ask again next time, press L. For more information on conflict resolution, go to 13.13.4 Resolving conflicts.
b) "(Identifier)hasbeendeletedfromthe(PC/BrailleNote).Option?" where PC/BrailleNote is either one or the other. Select one of the options outlined in 13.13.5.2 Restoring and deleting records, then go to Step 2.
c) "Thereappearstobeaduplicatefor(identifier).Option?" Select one of the options outlined in 13.13.5 Duplicates, then go to Step 2.
2. KeySync has now presented all the relevant prompts and you have chosen options for them. The first time you synchronize, a dialog box will pop up on the PC, asking if you wish to synchronize with this particular BrailleNote QT, with an accompanying announcement from the BrailleNote QT saying "PleaseconfirmonthePCthatitisOKtosyncdata." To answer yes, press Enter on your PC. If you are not using Office XP or 2000 with the security pack installed, go to step 4.
3. If you are using MS Office XP or 2000 with the security pack installed, a second dialog box may display on your PC. It is a feature that is meant to stop viruses from polling your Outlook records, and warns that a program is trying to get into your contacts list. If you are not using a screen reader, it may seem like the process has hung, but it is a simple routine on the PC to get around the dialog box:
a) Tab to the check box labeled "Allowaccess".
b) Press the space bar to check the box, then Tab to go to a combo box that has a range of times up to ten minutes.
c) Use the arrow keys to select a time from the dropdown list.
d) Tab to the Yes button and press Enter. You can then proceed. Unless you have hundreds of contacts to synchronize, ten minutes should be enough time. If it is not, the dialog box will reappear allowing you to specify another ten minutes in the same way.
4. KeySync will now display: "Syncing(contacts/planner),pleasewait" then proceed to synchronize. During this process, KeySync will let you know what is going on with a series of "Percentage complete" prompts. When it is complete, KeySync will display some or all of this prompt: "Finishedsyncing(contacts/planner).xPCitemsupdated.xKeySoftitemsupdated.xKeySoftitemsdeleted"
5. If you are synchronizing both contacts and planner applications, at this point KeySync will return to step 1 and go through the process again for the other application. Note: Once the synchronization begins, do not interrupt it.
6. When all the syncing is complete, KeySync will display: "Syncingcomplete.KeySyncmenu."


13.13.4 Resolving conflicts.
Conflicts arise when changes have been made to both the KeySoft and Outlook copies of a record since the last synchronization, even if the changes are identical on both systems. KeySync gives a variety of ways with which you can manage conflicts, either automatically, or on a case by case basis. The conflict resolution procedure is the same for both Contacts and Planner records.
Follow these steps to set up what happens when there is a conflict.
1. From the Main Menu, choose Utilities Menu, then S for Synchronization.
2. KeySoft prompts: "KeySyncMenu". There are two menu items, "Synchronizenow", and "Optionsforsynchronization". Select "Optionsforsynchronization" and the KeySync Options List is presented.
From the list, select "ActionifsomethinghaschangedonboththePCandinKeySoft?currently(option)" where (option) is one of the options listed and explained below. These options define what will always happen at a conflict.
To change the setting, press the hotkey for the option of your choice.
These are the options followed by their hotkeys:
* "Asktheusertochoose"A. Choose this option if you wish to make a judgment call on every conflict individually.
* "ChooseKeySoftscopy"K. Choose this option if you trust the KeySoft records completely over Outlook.
* "ChoosethePCscopy"P. Choose this option if you trust the Outlook records completely over KeySoft.
* "Leavebothunchanged"L. Choose this option if you don't wish to synchronize either side at this stage.
KeySync identifies conflicts before processing them, and if you have selected "Asktheusertochoose", KeySync will query all the conflicts first and then do the processing. At this point, KeySync offers the other three options to you  "ChooseKeySoftscopy", "ChoosethePCscopy", and "Leavebothunchanged"; to select one, press its hotkey. The affected record is identified but not the actual cause of the conflict. If you are sure which copy is the version you wish to keep, select one of the Choose Copy options. If you are unsure of the cause of the conflict, select "Leavebothunchanged", so you can review the two copies later and with that information, rerun KeySync and choose the appropriate copy when prompted again.


13.13.5 Duplicates.
Duplicates are records that KeySync recognizes as possibly being the same as each other, but that have not previously been synchronized. In the Address list, duplicates occur when there is an address record on Outlook and one on KeyList with exactly the same first and last name. In the Planner, duplicates occur where Outlook and KeyPlan have either exactly the same title and start time, or start time and duration. While they may be defined differently, KeySoft handles Planner and Address List duplicates the same way.
When you first synchronize, if you have been double entering contacts or appointments, you may have many duplicates, but once these are resolved, a duplicate will only occur when you enter duplicate records separately onto the BrailleNote QT and your PC.
For example, you know two people called Joseph Brown, and so the address records are not duplicates at all, bearing in mind that the only data that is compared are the first and last names. However if they are the same person, you can choose one record or the other from which to make both copies. Or in KeyPlan, you set up a recurring appointment for a meeting at 10am on Mondays, and the meeting chairperson sets a recurring appointment up for all attendees in Outlook for the same time. As they have the same start time and duration, KeySync will recognize them as duplicates.
Resolving duplicates is handled quite differently to conflicts, because they occur so differently  predictably you may have a lot of duplicates the very first time you synchronize, but hardly any after that, as opposed to conflicts, which only show up once you get into the synchronizing habit. For example, there are no global settings for what happens to a duplicate; instead you have a selection of actions available when one shows up.


13.13.5.1 How to resolve a duplicate.
You have started the synchronization process as described more fully in 13.13.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time. In the prompts quoted in the procedure below, the word (identifier) in brackets is a placeholder for the First and Last name of an address record or the date, time and title of an appointment.
KeySync displays: "Thereappearstobeaduplicatefor(identifier).Option?"
* These are the available options followed by their hotkeys:
* "ChooseKeySoftscopy"K. Choose this option if you trust the KeySoft record completely over Outlook.
* "ChoosethePCscopy"P. Choose this option if you trust the Outlook record completely over KeySoft.
* "Keepbothcopies"B. Choose this option to keep both copies as they are if a) you know the two records are not meant to be the same, or b) they are supposed to be the same but you are not sure which one you wish to choose as the master record.
* "UpdateallduplicatesfromKeySoftcopies"S. Choose this option if, during this synchronization session, you will want this and any subsequent duplicates to be updated on both sides from KeyList or KeyPlan.
* "UpdateallduplicatesfromPCcopies"C. Choose this option if, during this synchronization session, you will want this and any subsequent duplicates to be updated on both sides from Outlook.
* "Keepbothcopiesforallduplicates"A. Choose this option if, during this synchronization session, you will want both copies of this and any subsequent duplicates to stay as they are.
* Options B and A, both of which are for keeping copies as they are, behave differently to the conflict option L for "leavebothcopiesunchanged". Once you select either B or A, KeySync assumes that they are not duplicates but unrelated records, and therefore won't ask you next time. So, if you chose these options in order to review the copies and decide which one to keep as the synchronized copy, you will have to delete the other copy manually. The next time you run synchronization, the remaining copy will be synchronized across to the other system.


13.13.5.2 Restoring and deleting records.
If you delete one copy of a pair of synchronized records, during the synchronization process, you will have the opportunity to restore or delete it. However if both copies are deleted, they are both gone for good.
In the prompts quoted in the procedure below, the word (identifier) in brackets is a placeholder for the First and Last name of an address record or the date, time and title of an appointment.
At the delete prompt: "(identifier)hasbeendeletedfromthe(PC/BrailleNoteQT).Option?" you can choose from the following options:
Restore this item. R
Delete this item D.
Always restore deleted items A.
Always delete deleted items E.
Options R and D apply only to the currently mentioned item. Options A and E apply to all of the items deleted since the last synchronization. Only select A or E if you are sure that all the changes to that device, be it the BrailleNote QT or the PC, are the accurate ones.
Because by choosing to delete items, they are then unrecoverable, there are safety messages that appear after you choose options D or E:
For D  deleting one item, the message reads, "Youareabouttodelete(identifier).Areyousure?"
For E  deleting several items, the message reads, "Youareabouttodelete(x)items.Areyousure?" where x is the number of items.
Press Y for Yes, or N for No. If you select Y, the synchronization process continues. Select N and you will return to the deletion options prompt.


13.13.5.3 Editing Considerations.
This information applies to the Notes field in an Address List record, and to the Location, Title and Notes fields of an Appointment in the Planner.
In order for KeySoft and MS Outlook to speak to each other, they need a common language, and that is text. This means that if you use contracted Braille entry on your BrailleNote QT in one of the fields mentioned above, you may notice a slight change to an entry after synchronizing if that entry has been changed at the Outlook end. This is because the contracted Braille you originally typed for this entry has been replaced with the text from Outlook, but if you are using contracted Braille as your preferred reading grade, it should appear the same because of the BrailleNote QT's onthefly translation.
There are two implications of this process  firstly there may be changes to the way the contracted Braille appears, caused by back and forward translating from Braille to text to Braille, and secondly when editing any fields. Instead of editing in contracted Braille, you will need to use computer Braille.


13.13.6 Synchronizing the Address List.
KeySync works by pairing Outlook and KeyList records with each other. It initially identifies pairs of records by looking for identical first and last name fields on each side, and creates copies of single records to make them into a pair. After that, any changes to the pairs are updated when you synchronize. KeySync works with the whole KeyList address database on the BrailleNote QT, and on Outlook the main Contacts folder, not including any subfolders or renamed contacts folders or any group or distribution lists set up on Outlook.
KeySync carries out the following functions:
When you add a new address record to either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will add the record to the other system.
When you delete an address record in either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will ask whether you want to delete it from the other system, or restore it.
Note: When you delete both copies of a record, they are gone for good.
When you make a change to an existing address record in either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will update the other system with the changes.
When you make changes to the same record on both sides, KeySync will detect the conflict and ask you what you want it to do.
Here are some examples:
1. Initially, your friend Andie is in your BrailleNote QT as Andie Brown, but in Outlook as Andrea Brown. Both records are synchronized across as the names are not identical, and you can delete whichever one you don't wish to keep at both ends.
2. You update Kyle Jones' email address on the BrailleNote QT but not on your PC. When you run KeySync, it automatically updates Outlook with the new email address.
3. You update a customer's mobile phone number on Outlook, but when you try to ring her while out of the office, you find it is incorrect. You get the correct number and enter it into KeyList as you have your BrailleNote QT with you. When you run KeySync, the conflict will be detected and as you have set KeySync to always ask you about a conflict, you tell it to use the KeySoft copy.
4. On Outlook, you delete the contact record for a supplier that you no longer use. When you synchronize, KeySync asks if you wish to delete it off KeyList, or restore it to Outlook. You select the delete option and wipe it completely.


13.13.6.1 Fields.
Because there are a lot more fields in an Outlook Contacts record than in a KeyList address record, and they have different names, only the fields that are in both systems are synchronized. The pairs in order of KeyList then Outlook are:
Last Name	Name, Last
First name	Name, First
Middle Name	Name, Middle
Title	Name, Title
Home Phone	Home, Phone
Business Phone 	Business, Phone
Cell Phone	Home, Mobile
Home Email	Email Address
Business Email	Email Address 2
Home Fax 	Home Fax
Business Fax 	Business Fax
Street Address	Home Address
Street Address Line 2	Home Address
Street Address Line 3	Home Address
City	Home Address City
State or County	Home Address State
Zip or Postcode	Home Address Zip
Home Country	Home Country
Business Title	Job Title
Company Name	Company
Department	Department
Business Street Address	Business Address
Business Street Address Line 2	Business Address
Business Street Address Line 3	Business Address
Business City	Business Address City
Business State or County	Business Address State
Business Zip or Postcode	Business Address Zip
Business Country	Business Country
Web Page	Web Page
Notes	Notes


13.13.6.2 Unused Fields in Outlook.
The fields in an Outlook record that are not synchronized by KeySync are not generally affected by the synchronizing process. However, if you delete a previously synchronized record off KeySoft, and during synchronization choose to delete the Outlook record as well, the entire Outlook record will be deleted, including the unused fields.


13.13.6.3 Note on Area Codes.
It is a characteristic of Outlook that if you do not put an area code onto a phone number, it fills in the default country and area code for you, regardless of whether it is correct or not, and while you can change them, you cannot delete these codes entirely, so you have to have these codes even if the number is local. The phone number fields in KeyList do not do this, however; they simply take whatever numeric combination you type into them. This means that if a number in a KeyList record without a country and area code synchronizes to Outlook, Outlook will add the default one at the Outlook end. And the next time you synchronize, those codes will synchronize back to KeyList. However if you type a country and area code in KeyList, using a space between each code, Outlook will recognize these and sort them into the appropriate fields. For example, the number +1 415 8206820 in KeyList will synchronize accurately into Outlook.


13.13.6.4 Notes on Refreshing Outlook.
If you happen to be displaying an individual contact record when you synchronize, the display does not automatically refresh itself with the new information. It will however refresh once you close it.


13.13.7 Synchronizing the Planner.
13.13.7.1 Overlapping Appointments.
Overlapping appointments happen when two appointments are scheduled in all or partly the same timeframe, for example one for 10am  11am and one for 10.30am  12noon on the same day. Both MS Outlook and KeyPlan will allow you to schedule these appointments, although you will get a notification message from either system. However in this section we are just going to look at the BrailleNote QT end of the process and overlapping appointments that occur when synchronizing with Outlook.
When synchronizing, there is a greater chance of getting unwanted overlapping appointments caused by scheduling on both systems. If you are synchronizing regularly, however, your current schedule will be fairly up to date in both systems, so overlapping appointments will be fairly uncommon. But just in case, KeySync will notify you of any overlaps caused as a result of the synchronization process, when the syncing is finished. This is different to conflicts and duplicates, which come up before the actual synchronization has taken place. The overlapping appointment announcement will only come up for instances occurring in the next 365 days.
The following procedure starts where the Synchronization procedure ends at step 10, 13.13.3.2 How to Synchronize for the first time.
1. After any conflicts or duplicates have been resolved, and the syncing is 100% complete, KeySync displays: "Finished Syncing Planner, x KeySoft items updated, x PC items updated" where x is a number.
2. If there are any new overlapping appointments, KeySync will display: "There are overlapping appointments, review them now?" To ignore them, press N. Unlike unreviewed conflicts and duplicates, these will not be displayed again. If you wish to review them straight away, press Y.
3. KeySoft returns you to the planner at this point, to the first overlapping appointment resulting from the synchronization. Once in the Planner, you can review any or all overlapping appointments using the two commands:
Go to next overlapping appointment: CONTROLwithREADwithO, and
Go to previous overlapping appointment: READwithCONTROLwithU.


13.13.8 File Synchronization.
It is also possible to synchronize files between the BrailleNote QT and a PC. This means you can, effectively, keep copies of files on both your BrailleNote QT and PC at the same time, with a choice of having them updated automatically in either direction, or only when you choose to update them. For example, if you have a report that you may wish to work on while traveling to work, then on your PC, then on your way home, simply put it into the Synchronized Files folder on either your BrailleNote QT or PC, and when you ActiveSync, both versions will synchronize to the latest version.
File synchronization is not a KeySync function, but works with ActiveSync alone. So, even if you don't want to synchronize your planner or address list, you can still take advantage of this tool, and you don't need to install the KeySync PC software. Also unlike KeySync synchronization, you can synchronize files with more than one PC.


13.13.8.1 How to Set Up File Synchronization.
Follow these steps to set up file synchronization between your BrailleNote QT and your PC.
1. Connect to ActiveSync and say "Yes" to a partnership. Note: If you already have a partnership set up, in the ActiveSync window on your desktop, go to Tools then Options, and skip to step 3.
2. If you are presented with the "SelectnumberofPartnerships" screen and only want to sync with this computer, check the box for "Yes,Iwanttosynchronizewithonlythiscomputer". If you synchronize with more than one PC, however, it is fine to check the other box.
3. The Select Synchronization Settings window will display. Ensure that the Files option is checked, no others. Note: KeySync will still function if Files is checked.
4. A dialog box will appear telling you that a synchronized files folder will be set up on your desktop. Click on the OK button.
5. You are back in the Select Synchronization Settings window. Click on OK and a window called Set Up Complete appears. Click on the Finish button.
6. ActiveSync will set up a folder in My Documents called "BrailleNote QT Synchronized Files", for storing synchronized files. Likewise, it creates a folder called "Synchronized Files on the KeySoft System Disk of your BrailleNote QT. It is only the files you put into either of these folders that will be synchronized.
7. At this stage you can select how you want the synchronization to operate. From the Tools menu, select Options, then the Sync Mode tab. You have three choices; they are: Continuous, only at connection, and manually. Select the one that you prefer. Stay in this window for the next step.
8. Lastly, you need to turn off the Convert Files function (see Tip 2 in the next section for exceptions). This function is set up for handheld PC users, and converts files to formats such as Pocket Word and Excel. Select the Rules tab in the Options window, and click the Conversion Settings button. Select the "General" Tab and then uncheck the "Convert Files when" check box. Then click on OK.
Your File Synchronization is now set up.


13.13.8.2 Tips on File Synchronization.
1. The Synchronization folder on your BrailleNote QT will set itself up on the KeySoft System disk. Because of this, during a JKLkeys reset, any files in this folder will get erased. While the copies on the PC will still be available, if you synchronize again, these too will be deleted. So, if you wish to restore the PC copies to your BrailleNote QT, before connecting to the PC with ActiveSync, move the files out of the Synchronization folder on your PC and into another folder, connect, and then move them back. They will then be restored to the BrailleNote QT synchronization folder. However none of this can restore any changes made to the BrailleNote QT copy of the files since the past synchronization.
2. While the instructions for file synchronization say to turn off the converter function, if the file on your PC is a Microsoft 2000 or XP document, you may wish to leave the converter function turned on, and convert the file to Pocket Word. Alternatively, save the Word document as a rich text format file before transferring to the synchronize folder.



14 File Manager.
A file is the name given to any organized information stored in an electronic form. File types stored by the BrailleNote QT are word processor documents, email attachments, address lists, dictionaries, and so on. The File Manager provides tools for manipulating and organizing files using folders and a directory structure
To select the File Manager, go to the Main Menu and press F. KeySoft displays: "FileManagermenu."
As always you can review the options in the menu by pressing the ADVANCE and BACK thumb keys or SPACE and BACKSPACE, followed by NEXT or ENTER to select an item, or just press an initial letter. The File Manager comprises the following items:
1. Directory: To check all the files in a folder;
2. Copy File: To copy a file;
3. Erase File: To erase any file;
4. Rename File: To change the name of a file;
5. Move File: To move a file from one location to another;
6. Protection: To protect or unprotect any file. Once a file is protected, it cannot be accidentally erased or altered without first unprotecting it;
7. Translate File: Firstly, to translate a Braille file to a text file, or vice versa. Also, to change a file format from KeySoft to, for example, ASCII or Microsoft Word and from these formats into KeySoft. The discussion about file translation starts at 14.14 File Translation.
Secondly, to import a file that is in some other format, for example, ASCII or Microsoft Word into the BrailleNote QT format. The file may be on a disk or storage card or brought in through the serial port.
Thirdly, to export a document from BrailleNote QT's KeySoft format into some other format; for example, ASCII or Microsoft Word format. The file may be written to a disk or storage card or sent out through the serial port;
8. Folder Manager: To create, rename or erase a folder.
General Caution: While copying or moving any files onto your FlashDisk from any location, never perform a reset. This can cause your Flashdisk to disappear and can cause corruption.


14.1 Selecting Files Folders and Drives.
Documents, folders and drives were discussed in 3.4 Documents Folders and Drives. Remember documents are just particular types of files and they can be handled in the same way as far as the File Manager is concerned.
When you choose an option from the File Manager menu, such as Copy File, you are first asked to select the drive. The selection of a drive was discussed in 4.8.1 Selecting a Drive. The selection of a folder and file follows the same procedure as discussed in 3.5 Opening a Document. Q.
There is another way of selecting a drive in KeySoft generally, which is not restricted to the File Manager. If you are at a prompt for a file name or folder name, and you have not had the opportunity to select a drive, then press BACKSPACE. KeySoft prompts: "Drive?(Lastdriveused),"
You can choose a drive, and then follow the prompts to select a folder and file.


14.2 Checking the Spelling of Folder or File Names.
Folder or file names can be easily checked using the Braille display. You can also easily check the spelling of a file or folder name with speech. When KeySoft displays the name of a file or folder, you can repeat the name by pressing REPEAT. Any punctuation and spaces within the name are not usually spoken. If you wish to hear the file or folder name spoken with punctuation and spaces included, press FUNCTIONwithO, then H. To check the exact spelling of a file or folder name, press FUNCTIONwithO, thenS.


14.3 The Directory Option.
To obtain information about a file, folder or drive, use the Directory option. From the File Manager menu, press D for Directory and KeySoft displays: "Drive?(Lastdriveused),"
You can select the drive and then the folder as usual. KeySoft then displays a list of files in the selected folder. Review the list in the usual way. Let us say that you are reviewing the files in a folder, and the file name "Frank"has been displayed. If you press READwithI, KeySoft provides information about the file. That might typically be as follows: "Brailledocument.Size:945.Lastmodified:Saturday24May2002,at8:21PM.Unprotected."
At the point where KeySoft displays "Listoffolders" on a particular drive, you can request information about the selected drive by pressing READwithI.
This might typically be as follows: "Diskname:(name).(number)charactersfree.Disksize:(number)characters."
Similarly, you can obtain details as to when a folder was created by stepping through the list of folders presented after the "Listoffolders" prompt is displayed until your desired folder is presented, and then pressing READwithI.
For details on how to view subdirectories, see 14.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories.


14.4 Folder Manager.
The Folder Manager allows you to create, rename or delete folders and subdirectories. From the File Manager menu press F, for Folder Manager. You can review the options in the usual way. You can also select an option in the usual way by pressing NEXT or just press the initial letter of the option name.


14.4.1 Creating a Folder.
From the Folder Manager menu, press C, for Create a Folder. KeySoft prompts: "Createfolderonwhichdrive?FlashDisk."
Select the required drive, and KeySoft prompts: "Newfoldername?"
Type the new name, of up to 250 characters and press ENTER. A new, empty folder is created, and you are returned to the Folder Manager menu.
Note that this is not the only place you can create a folder. You can create a folder at most "foldername"prompts just by typing a new name.
For instructions on how to create a subdirectory, see 14.13.1 Creating a SubDirectory.


14.4.2 Renaming a Folder.
From the Folder Manager menu, press R, for Rename. KeySoft prompts: "Renamefolderonwhichdrive?(Suggesteddrive)"
Select the drive, and then the folder you wish to rename. KeySoft prompts: "Newnamefor(originalname)?"
Type in the new name and press ENTER, or use the prompt editing commands as discussed in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt. to modify the original name, and press ENTER. The name is changed and you are returned to the Folder Manager menu.
For instructions on how to rename a subdirectory, see 14.13.2 Renaming a SubDirectory.


14.4.3 Erasing a Folder.
Before a folder can be removed, all files in it must be erased. If the folder is not empty, KeySoft does not allow it to be erased. From the Folder Manager menu, press E, for Erase. KeySoft prompts for a drive, and then for a folder. Select the folder you wish to erase and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Foldertoerase?"
Press Y to confirm this. The folder is erased, and you are returned to the Folder Manager menu.
For instructions on how to erase a subdirectory, see 14.13.3 Erasing a SubDirectory.


14.5 Document and File Types.
When giving information about a file, KeySoft displays the file type in addition to the size and date, etc. The file type indicates what type of information the file contains and whether it is a Braille document, a Microsoft Word document, an address list and so on. It determines how the information contained in a file is to be interpreted by KeySoft. KeyWord, for example, recognizes certain file types and interprets these file types to extract meaningful information. In the BrailleNote QT file system, files can contain information that be interpreted in all manner of different ways. In KeySoft, files which contain text or Braille are called documents.
The following document or file types are supported by KeySoft:
Braille Document: A document type where the contents are interpreted as Braille characters and symbols;
Microsoft Word: The Microsoft Word, word processor document format;
Rich text format: A standard word processor format that converts formatting to instructions that other programs, including compatible Microsoft programs, can read and interpret;
Word Perfect 5.1: A file type used by the Word Perfect 5.1 DOS word processor;
KeySoft version 2 Braille: This is the Braille document format of version two of KeySoft, the version used by the Braille Companion;
KeySoft version 2 text: This is the text document format of version two of KeySoft, the version used by the DOS versions of KeySoft Companion, the KeyNote Companion and the Braille Companion;
ASCII text. An ASCII text document contains only ASCII characters. It allows only very simple formatting using, for example tab characters;
UNICODE text. A standard character encoding format that supports international languages;
Plain Braille. A standard form of Braille.
When reviewing a folder in the File Manager, KeySoft's default setting only displays files that are likely to contain text. This prevents system files from "cluttering" the list of files and limits the accidental deletion of system files.
KeySoft also provides the option to view all files in the folder. To select this option press READwithX when the prompt "Listoffilesin(foldername)"is displayed. There are two additional file views available. These are: "Listofall,includinghidden,files and "ListofKeySoftfiles"
Each time you repeat the READwithX key sequence a different type of file view is presented.


14.6 Copying a File.
This option allows any file to be copied to another folder or drive. You can also copy within a folder.
A file is often copied so it can be used as the basis for a similar document or as a template. You might also copy an important file to another disk for security.
Copying is a process of duplication, it does not remove the original file. If you wish to do this, refer to 14.7 Erasing a File. During the process, prompts use the terms "Source" and "Destination," which refer to the original file and its copy, respectively.
To copy a file, start from the File Manager menu and press C. KeySoft prompts: "Sourcedrive?(suggesteddrive),
Follow the procedure as previously described; select the required drive, and answer the subsequent prompts for folder and file name. The file is initially assumed to be a KeySoft type meaning that it may only be in Braille. To type the name of any file, remembering you must type the name in computer Braille, press READwithX. The first time you press READwithX, KeySoft displays the current entry type. The second and subsequent times, KeySoft changes the entry type. In the list of files, READwithX can be used to narrow or widen the list of options as described in 14.5 Document and File Types.
After a source file name has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "Destinationdrive?(suggesteddrive)"
The choices of destination drive and folder are made in exactly the same way as in choosing the Source File name.
The destination file name is the same as the source file name except if a file is copied within the same folder. Then the words "Copyof"are put in front of the file name to differentiate it from the original file. You can, of course, rename file as described in 14.8 Renaming a File.
When a selection has been made, copying commences and after a few seconds you are returned to the File Manager menu.
If the chosen Destination File name already exists in the destination folder, KeySoft prompts: "(Filename)alreadyexists.Replace?"
KeySoft is asking if you want to replace the existing file. Remember that it cannot be recovered later if you change your mind. If you do want to replace it, press Y. Pressing N returns you to the File Manager menu without the file being copied.


14.7 Erasing a File.
To conserve disk space, or to make file management easier, you may wish to erase files you no longer need. The Erase File option accomplishes this.
From the File Manager menu, press E to select the Erase File option. KeySoft prompts: "ErasefilefromDrive?(suggesteddrive)"
Choose a disk, folder name, and file name in the same way you would choose a file to copy, as described in the previous section. When a file has been chosen for erasing, KeySoft prompts: "Erase(filename).Sure?"
This is your last chance to abandon this destructive process. Press Y to erase the file, or N to abandon the operation.
NOTE: Protected files cannot be erased until they are first "unprotected," as described in 14.10 Protecting a File. In addition, files on some back up disk drives cannot be erased until the write protection on the disk is disabled.


14.8 Renaming a File.
The names of files often have to be changed as their contents alter with editing, or to avoid confusion with other files. This can be done using the Rename File option. From the File Manager menu, press R, for Rename. KeySoft prompts: "RenameFileonwhichDrive?(suggesteddrive),"
Select the drive, and follow the prompts for folder and file. Once a file has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "Newnamefor(filename)?"
Type the new filename or edit the existing filename and press ENTER. Editing the existing filename is the same as editing at a prompt as discussed in 5.17 Editing at a Prompt. Providing the file is not protected, the name is changed, and you are returned to the File Manager menu.


14.9 Moving a File.
With this option you can move a file from one folder/directory/drive to another in one action. This is different to the Copy file option in that it does not leave a copy of the file in the source folder. Otherwise it is almost the same procedure.
To select the Move File option, start from the File Manager menu and press M. KeySoft will display: SourceDrive?PressENTERfor(suggesteddrive)
Locate and select the file you wish to move in the usual way. When you select the file, KeySoft will display: DestinationDrive?PressENTERfor(suggesteddrive)
Locate the destination folder or directory. When you select it, KeySoft will display: Onefilemoved.FileManagermenu
As the prompt says, you are back in the File Manager menu.


14.10 Protecting a File.
Files can be protected against accidental erasure. Once a file is protected, it cannot be changed, erased, or copied over with a new file without first removing the protection. It can however, be moved. It also prevents alteration by editing.
To select the Protect File option, start from the File Manager menu and press P. KeySoft prompts: "ProtectFileonwhichDrive?(suggesteddrive)"
Select the file to protect in the same way as choosing a file to copy, erase or rename. Once a file has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "(Filename)isunprotected,"
or protected, as appropriate. Press P to protect, or U to unprotect, and you are returned to the File Manager menu.


14.11 Groups of Files and Wild Cards.
Often you may want to copy a group of related files, such as all letters to a particular company. You could do this one file at a time, but it is slow if there are more than 2 or 3 files.
To speed things up, KeySoft allows the use of two "wildcard" characters to specify a group of files with related names.
Any single character can specified by ?. For example, the file name:
NOTES, followed by ?,
would select all the following files:
NOTES1;
NOTES2;
NOTES3.
You can use the single character wild card more than once. For example, the file name:
NOTES, followed by ?, twice,
would select NOTES13 and NOTES24, but would ignore NOTES7.
The second wild card is *. This is the multicharacter wild card, used to represent any group of characters. For example, the file name:
SCIENCE, followed by * would select all the following files:
SCIENCENOTESJAN;
SCIENCE;
SCIENCE3.
To Copy, Erase, or Protect a group of related files, include the appropriate wild card characters in the file name that you enter at a "Filename?" or "Documentname"prompt. Use Help, HELP to remind you of the commands.
To select every file in a folder, use just the multicharacter wild card, *, as the file name. You might do this to copy the entire contents of one folder to another folder. If you save the copies in the same directory, KeySoft prefixes "Copyof" to the file name of each copy.
When using wildcards KeySoft gives the opportunity to confirm each file individually or to let KeySoft operate on all files without interruption. KeySoft prompts: "Confirmeachfile?"
You can select Y to confirm each file individually, or N to for KeySoft to perform the operation without interruption. If you select "confirmeachfile," KeySoft requests confirmation for each file before completing the operation and moving onto the next file.
For example, when using wildcards to erase files, KeySoft prompts: "(Number)fileswereselected.Confirmeachfile?"
where number is the number of files. If you press Y, KeySoft prompts for each file: "OKtoerase(filename)"
where file name is a matching file name. Y confirms the action for this file, N cancels the action for this file and A confirms the action for this and all the other matching files.


14.12 What is a Directory.
The idea of folders was introduced very early on in this user guide because this provides a convenient way to organize documents. When used in one layer only, we call them folders. However when folders are organized in a tree structure with any number of levels, we refer to them as directories. The distinction is not in what they are but in how they are used. It might help to think in terms of being in foldermode i.e. one layer, ordirectorymodei.e. several layers. Folder mode is the standard folder management mode in which the BrailleNote QT operates. The reason for having two modes is to make management simpler. If you never intend to use the directory structure, folder mode saves having to type slashes at prompts. If you do have a directory tree of several layers, folder mode will give you the topmost layer of directories only. You can then swap to directory structure to work in the subdirectories of the selected directory.
The directory structure is particularly relevant when importing or exporting files. For instance, you might want to import a file from an external Super Disk drive. The disk might be organized as a directory tree with several subdirectories.
If you find yourself comparing this with how MS Windows Explorer works, it pays to be aware that you cannot view the subdirectories and files in a directory in the same list. For example, if you are listing the subdirectories in a directory, no files will be listed. If you list the files in the directory, no subdirectories will be listed.
When in directory mode, a folder becomes a directory and this is indicated by a slash character /,appearing before the folder name. This initial slash represents the "root" directory, which contains all the other directories on this drive. The root is called the "parent" of the directories beneath it.
A typical directory name starts with the slash, followed by a directory name followed by one or more subdirectory names separated by "/." For example, a directory name on a Super Disk connected to the PC card slot might be: "/storagecard/mydocuments/correspondence." Or a directory on the FlashDisk might be /flashdisk/general/letters.
What does this mean? The name can be broken down into the following parts:
The first slash which is the root.
"flashdisk" is a subdirectory of the root directory. In this case it is the FlashDisk drive.
The next "slash" is just a separator.
"General" is the name of a subdirectory of the "FlashDisk" directory. Its parent is "FlashDisk."
The next "slash" is another separator.
"letters" is the name of a subdirectory of the "general" directory. Its parent is "general."
This naming convention allows us to find a document or file in any directory structure.


14.12.1 Switching to a Directory Structure.
You can choose to use directories at any prompt for a folder name, not just in the File Manager. For example, from the File Manager Menu select Copy File and then select a drive such as the Flash Disk. KeySoft prompts: "Sourcefoldername?(Lastusedfolder)"
If you now press CONTROLwithT, KeySoft replies, for example: "Sourcedirectoryname?/(Lastusedfolder)"
where "/(Lastusedfolder),"is the last used directory.
You can select directories in exactly the same way when using the File Manager, Directory option.


14.12.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.
Following on from the previous section, there are two basic ways to choose a different directory at this point. You could type the full name including slashes etc., but this can be rather prone to errors, especially if you are not sure of the arrangement of the directories.
Alternatively, you can browse the directory structure to find what you want. This is rather like using KeySoft's menus. You can move "down" by selecting a subdirectory from a list, or move "up" by selecting the parent. Let's see how this works. For the purposes of this example, we will assume that we are currently in the "/General" directory on the Flash disk and we wish to go to the "/Key Mail/Attachments" directory. You could be at anyFoldername?prompt on KeySoft, although the exact prompts will vary. The example is taken from the Open a File function in KeyWord. At the prompt, pressCONTROLwithT.
At the "Directoryname?PressENTERfor/General"prompt, press LEFTARROW to move up to the parent directory. KeySoft displays: Directoryname?PressENTERfor/
This is a list of subdirectories of Flash Disk, which you can review by pressing DOWNARROWor UPARROW.Now we want to move to the "KeyMail" directory. Press DOWNARROW repeatedly to explore the root directory, and at some point "KeyMail" is displayed. Press ENTER to select it, and KeySoft displays: "Directoryname?PressENTERfor/KeyMail."
Press DOWNARROW to view the subdirectories of the "KeyMail" directory. KeySoft displays: "SubdirectoriesofFlashDisk/KeyMail."
Press DOWNARROW to explore this directory, and "attachments"is displayed. Press ENTERto select it, and KeySoft displays: "Directoryname?PressENTERfor/KeyMail/attachments."
Press ENTER. You have reached your goal. See what happens when you press DOWNARROW to review this directory. There are no more subdirectories. Press UPARROW to go back up to the "attachments" subdirectory.
You can press ENTER, putting you at the familiar "Document/FiletoOpen?" prompt. You might now review this directory for files. There are short cuts for moving up and down while you are reviewing a directory. To move downinto a subdirectory, press RIGHTARROW when the subdirectory name is displayed. This is similar to pressing ENTER, except that you skip the "Directoryname" prompt, and are placed at the beginning of the list of subdirectories of the selected subdirectory. To move UP to the parent directory of the subdirectory you are reviewing, press LEFTARROW. This is like selecting the parent directory, except that it takes you back to where you came from, rather than to the beginning of a list.
Directories are one of the most demanding concepts to master. Finding files in a complex directory structure can be difficult. Remember to change to directories when prompted for a folder name. Remember too, to press DOWNARROWwhen prompted for the source directory name before selecting a directory. The shortcut commands to move up and down are handy when exploring the whole directory tree.


14.12.3 Relationship Between Folders and Directories.
All folders are directories in the root directory of a drive, with the exception of the folder called "None," which is the root directory itself. Subdirectories below this level are not accessible in folder mode.


14.13 Creating Renaming and Erasing SubDirectories.
It is possible to create, rename and erase any subdirectories using a variation on the same processes for creating, renaming and erasing folders. This is because, as discussed before, they are basically one and the same, only used in a different way. It is important to know how to do this if you find that you cannot erase a seemingly empty folder, as it almost definitely contains subdirectories that are not visible in that view.
Three procedures are listed below in a step by step format. You may notice that the prompts refer to both folders and directories, but it still works! Please note also that if you wish to create a subdirectory that is deeper than root level, for example /general/recipes/brownies, please note that this whole branch will be displayed at prompts that include /foldername.


14.13.1 Creating a SubDirectory.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press C for Create a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the NewFoldername? prompt, press CONTROLwithT. The New Folder prompt will repeat.
4. Press SPACE and search through the subdirectories (folders) until you find the one in which you want to set up the subdirectory using FUNCTIONwithDOWNorUPARROWto drill down or up if necessary, and select it by pressing ENTER. KeySoft will prompt NewFoldername?PressENTERfor/foldernamewhere folder name is the name of the currently selected directory.
5. Type the name you wish to give the subdirectory without a / before it, and press ENTER. KeySoft will prompt Directorydoesnotexist.Createnewdirectory?
6. Press Y for Yes. KeySoft displays: Foldercreated.FolderManagermenuYou are back in the folder manager menu.


14.13.2 Renaming a SubDirectory.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press Rfor Rename a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the FoldertoRename? prompt, press CONTROLwithT. The Rename Folder prompt will repeat.
4. Press SPACE and search through the subdirectories (folders) until you find the one in which you want to set up the subdirectory using the FUNCTIONwithDOWNorUPARROW to drill down or up if necessary, and select it by pressing ENTER. KeySoft will prompt FoldertoRename?PressENTERfor/foldernamewhere folder name is the name of the currently selected directory. Press ENTER.
5. KeySoft will prompt NewNamefor/directoryname?where directoryname is actually the parent directory of the one you have selected. Type the new subdirectory name and it will update that, not the parent directory.
6. Press ENTER to complete the renaming. KeySoft will return you to the Folder Manager menu.


14.13.3 Erasing a SubDirectory.
Remember you can only erase an empty folder or subdirectory. If a subdirectory refuses to erase, check to see if it has any subdirectories beneath it first.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press E for Erase a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the FoldertoErase? prompt, press CONTROLwithT. KeySoft will promptDirectorytoErase?
4. Press SPACE and locate the subdirectory you wish to erase, using the FUNCTIONwithDOWNorUPARROW to drill down or up directory paths if necessary.
5. When you have found it, press ENTER. KeySoft will prompt:Directorytoerase?PressENTERfor/directorynamewhere directoryname is the selected subdirectory. KeySoft will repeat the directory name and ask Sure? Press Y and the erasure will be completed, then you will be returned to the Folder Manager menu. If the subdirectory is not empty, KeySoft will let you know and then return you to the Folder Manager menu without making any changes. Should this happen, return to the beginning of this procedure and at step 4, go down another layer into the directory to check if there are any subdirectories in it. You can also press READwithX to check if there are any files, but to erase these you will have to go to the Erase File option off the File Manager Menu.


14.14 File Translation.
As well as creating and reading your own documents and books, you may want to exchange information with other people especially using email. KeyWord can directly open a file of any of the supported types listed in 14.5 Document and File Types. KeyWord can also save a file as any of the supported types. The supported types include Microsoft Word format; the de facto standard for Word Processor document exchange. The following sections of this chapter are needed only when you specifically want to convert a file without going into KeyWord.
The Translate File option of the File Manager Menu allows you to take a file in ASCII, or Microsoft Word, or WordPerfect 5.1 and others and translate it so that it can be read or edited on your BrailleNote QT. This process of converting a file into KeyWord format is called "importing." Braille files created by another Braille system can also be imported into KeySoft.
The Translate File option also works in the other direction as well. You can take a KeySoft document and translate it to the format used by Microsoft Word, or WordPerfect 5.1, or to ASCII format and other formats. This is called "exporting." KeySoft documents can also be exported as Braille files for use by other Braille systems.
The Translate File option also translates KeySoft Braille documents into text documents, and vice versa.
Apart from an ASCII set up list which specifies how documents are translated between KeySoft format and ASCII format, there are also set up lists for Braille to text, and text to Braille translation. These provide a lot of layout flexibility in the translated document if required, but you may not need to change any settings because the default settings have been chosen for typical usage.


14.15 Translation Menu.
To use the Translation Menu, start from the Main Menu, select the File Manager, and then the "Translatefile" option. The Translation Menu consists of the following items:
Import file;
Export document;
Translate between Braille and text;
ASCII translation options;
Back translation options, Braille to text;
Forward translation options, text to Braille.
Note that the ASCII translation options apply in the case of ASCII imports and exports including those to or from the serial port. The serial port options are included in the ASCII translation options.
The Translation Menu items are now discussed.


14.16 Importing Files.
To import a file, follow these steps.
1. From the Translation Menu, press I, for import a file. KeySoft prompts: "Importfromwhichdevice?PressENTERforfile"
2. The options are:
1. If the file is stored on a plug in card or an external disk drive, press Fto import from a File.
2. If you want to import from a host using the serial cable provided with your BrailleNote QT press Sfor Serial port.


14.16.1 Importing from a File.
After selecting "File" as the device to import from, KeySoft prompts: "Importfilefromwhichdrive?(Suggesteddrive)."
Select the drive. KeySoft then prompts: "Directoryname?(Suggesteddirectory).ComputerBrailleisrequired."
The slash character is used to separate the different parts of the directory path name. For a description of directory path name, refer to 14.12.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.
You can accept the suggested directory, or type a new directory path name using computer Braille, or edit the old name. Alternatively you can press SPACE to review a list of subdirectories of the suggested directory. Next select the desired file to import when KeySoft prompts: "Filetoimport?ComputerBrailleisrequired."
Remember that you can press SPACEorADVANCEto list all files in the selected directory. If the file is of a type unknown to KeySoft, possibly a plain text file, you are asked, "IsthisaBrailleortextfile?" If you know that the file is a Braille file, press B. If it is an ASCII text, press T and KeySoft then asks if you want to translate the file into Braille. Press Y if yes or N if you want to leave the file in text format. When you have selected the file KeySoft prompts: "Destinationfoldername?(Suggestedfolder)".Select a folder.
KeySoft displays: "Text(orBraille)documentname?"
Next type the name of the destination file and press ENTER.If the file already exists you are asked if you want to append to it or replace it? Press A to append or R to replace. KeySoft imports the file or document and saves it as the destination file in the selected folder. KeySoft then returns to the Translation Menu.


14.16.2 Importing from the Serial Port.
After selecting "Serial"as the device to import from, KeySoft prompts: "Serial.IsthisaBrailleortextfile?"
If you are importing a text file KeySoft queries: "TranslateintoBraille?"
If you press Y to translate a text file into Braille, the file is converted into Braille when it is received. If you press N the file is left as a text document. Specify the destination folder name and file name in the usual way. When you have done that KeySoft queries: "Hostreadytotransmit?"
Check that the host is ready to transmit, and press ENTER orY on the BrailleNote QT keyboard. On the host's keyboard, type any commands required to start transmitting the file. You should hear a periodic beep as the file is transferred. When the beeps stop, wait a few seconds and then press ESCAPE.If the host stops transmitting or does not start KeySoft displays: "Hosthasnotsentanycharactersforsometime.ToexitpressESCAPE."
If you do exit KeySoft displays: "Fileimportcomplete."
You are returned to the Translation Menu.


14.16.3 Importing a Foreign Braille File.
Note that while you can import files that are in either North American Braille Computer Code format or in United Kingdom Braille Computer Code format, the importation process does not convert the Braille language of the file. If your BrailleNote QT is set to USA Braille and you import a file in UK Braille format, for example, the contents of the file appear strange when you read it with KeyWord. To read an imported file that is in another Braille language, you can temporarily change the language that your BrailleNote QT uses, then change it back again when you have finished. The Braille language your BrailleNote QT uses can be changed using the Braille display Options in the Options Menu as described in 5.4 Braille Display Options.


14.16.4 Exporting a Document.
To export a document press E, in the Translation Menu. You can export the document as one of the following document formats:
Plain Braille file;
Microsoft Word file;
Rich text format file;
Word Perfect file;
KeySoft version two Braille document;
KeySoft version two text document;
ASCII text file;
The original document remains unchanged.
1. Select the drive in the usual way when prompted. KeySoft then prompts:
"Exportdocumentfromwhichfolder?(Suggestedfolder)"
2. When you have selected the folder KeySoft prompts:
"Documentname?(Suggestedfilename)."
3. Select the document to export. KeySoft prompts:
"Exporttowhichdevice?PressENTERforfile"
The options are:
To export from a File press F.
To export from the Serial port press S.


14.16.5 Exporting to a File.
After selecting "File" as the device to export to, KeySoft prompts: "ExportasanASCIItextfile?"
1. To export as an ASCII text file press ENTER.To select another file type, press CONTROLwithSPACE repeatedly to step through the list of file types that you can export. The available file types were listed in 14.5 Document and File Types.
2. When you have selected the file type, select the destination drive. KeySoft then prompts:
"Directoryname?(suggesteddirectory).ComputerBrailleisrequired."
3. Select the suggested directory or type the path name of another directory. Remember that the slash character, dots34, is used to separate the different parts of the directory.
4. After the file is exported you are returned to the Translation Menu.
To find out how to access files in another directory, see 14.12.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.


14.16.6 Exporting to the Serial Port.
If you select "Serial" as the device to export to, KeySoft will display: "SerialcableonCOM1."
"COM1" is the 9 pin male connector at the left of the rear panel. A serial cable is provided with your BrailleNote QT. Of course you must connect one end of the cable to COM1 and the other end to a mating connector of a host; most likely a P C. Both ends of the cable are the same. The connectors are discussed in 2.7.1 Using the Serial Port. The Serial Port settings are listed in the ASCII translation options list which is discussed in 14.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options. Remember that the BrailleNote QT and host serial port must be set exactly the same to transfer a document.
When you have selected a device KeySoft prompts: "ExportasaBrailleortextfile?"
Press B for Braille or T for a text file. When you have selected the file type KeySoft queries: "Hostreadytoreceive?"
Prepare the host to receive the file and when it is ready press ENTER or press Y.You hear a periodic beep as the document is transferred. When the transfer is finished, you are returned to the Translation Menu.


14.16.7 Translating between Braille and Text.
To translate a document from Braille to text or vice versa, select Translate between Braille and Text from the Translation Menu. This is useful if, for example, you have written a Braille document which you now intend to print, but before printing, you want to check out the inkprint formatting. You can translate it into a text document and have it reviewed.
KeySoft guides you through the translation procedure. Select the source folder name when prompted by KeySoft. Either type a folder name and press ENTER, or press SPACE to review the List of Folders. Alternatively to select a path name, press CONTROLwithT.
To change the current drive, press BACKSPACE. For the Flash Disk, press F.For the KeySoft System Disk, press K.If you have a PC card installed you can press S for the Storage Card. To review the list of drives, press SPACE.
After you have selected the drive and folder, select the source file. Either type a file name or select it in the usual way.
Follow the same procedure to select the destination folder name and enter the destination file name.
If you type a document name that does not exist, KeySoft asks if you want to create a new document. Conversely, if the document already exists, you are asked if you want to append the translated document to the end of the existing one, or replace it entirely.
When you have entered the destination file name, the source document is translated to its complementary format. That is, a Braille document is translated to text, or vice versa. The source document remains in its original format, and you are returned to the Translation Menu.


14.16.8 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
The ASCII translation options are used by KeySoft when translating between KeyWord and ASCII formats including when exporting documents to the Serial Port.
To review and set ASCII translation options select ASCII Translation Options from the Translation Menu. Press SPACE to display the ASCII Translation Options list. Each item in the list is discussed below. When you have reviewed the list, you can use BACKSPACEto move back through the list to check the settings. The current setting is displayed for each item. Remember that you must press ENTER after you have changed the setting. Press ESCAPEto exit when you are satisfied with your settings.


14.16.8.1 Use line or paragraph format.
Press P for Paragraph, or L for Line. Press ENTER to complete the entry. This option determines the way that lines are terminated during document exporting or file importing. During document exporting, if the Line option has been selected, a carriage return is added at the end of each line. If the Paragraph option is selected, a carriage return is added only at the end of each paragraph, giving a line that is as long as the paragraph. The Line option is usually best when exporting to a communications program. The Paragraph option is most suitable when exporting a document to a word processor because it allows the text to be reformatted after it is received.
The Line or Paragraph format option also determines how KeySoft treats each incoming line of text during file importing. If the Line format option is selected, KeySoft leaves the text unaltered. In the Paragraph option, KeySoft removes single carriage returns. Where there are two or more carriage returns, or a carriage return followed by an indent to indicate a new paragraph, no change is made.
If you go into KeyWord and insert any hard carriage returns to format the file contents, these will be retained next time the file is opened in the BrailleNote QT.
When importing an ASCII file, for example a Braille book, that has a single space in front of each line, the left margin is automatically stripped out so that KeySoft doesn't interpret it as if every line is the start of a new paragraph.


14.16.8.2 Extended ASCII character.
The options are:
To convert extended ASCII characters to standard ASCII characters, press C. This options removes the high order bit. It is useful in situations where this bit may be inadvertently set.
To ignore ASCII characters, press I.This options removes characters with the high order bit set. It is useful where graphical symbols have been used extensively. For example, when boxes have been drawn around text.
To retain ASCII characters as extended ASCII characters, press R.Extended ASCII characters are 8 bit characters such as characters in foreign languages or graphical symbols. In most cases KeySoft can name or use the character. In other cases the character will be referred to as "charactern" where n is the ASCII value of the character.


14.16.8.3 Use of end of file character.
The options are N to turn on the use of an end of file character, or F to turn off and ignore the use of an end of file characters. This option determines whether an ASCII end of file character (1AH or ^Z) is appended to a document being exported after the end of the text. In most cases this will cause a communications program to stop receiving text and save it on disk.


14.16.8.4 Use of line feed character.
Press N to turn on the appending of a line feed character after a carriage return character is exported. Press F to turn off appending a line feed character. Appending a line feed character may be required when exporting to a communication program depending on the program.


14.16.8.5 Baud Rate.
Type a new baud rate value if you know the standard values or press CONTROLwithSPACE to cycle through the list of available values.


14.16.8.6 Parity.
Press N,E or O, for None, Even or Odd parity respectively. If you are unsure which setting is correct select none; this is usually preferred for short cables.


14.16.8.7 Number of data bits.
Press 7 or 8 for the number of data bits and press ENTER. Standard ASCII characters use only 7 data bits while extended ASCII characters have 8 bits.


14.16.8.8 Handshaking.
The options are S for Software or H for Hardware. Handshaking determines how the BrailleNote QT and a host computer control the flow of data from each other. Handshaking is needed if the BrailleNote QT or host computer cannot keep up with the flow of data when a high baud rate is selected. BrailleNote QT supports both types of handshaking. You know when it is needed because large blocks of data are lost when exporting documents or importing files. Try the software option first if information about the host computer is limited.


14.16.8.9 Transmit delay.
This is the delay between each character when exporting a document. It should be zero when using a communications program on the host. Where a document is being exported directly into a word processor or other program, a value from 1 to 5 may be used to allow the word processor to keep up. Use the smallest value which does not cause characters to be lost.
This is the end of the ASCII Translation Options list.


14.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options.
These are the general settings which are used during the translation of a KeySoft Braille document to a KeySoft text document. These settings are used throughout KeySoft whenever a document is back translated. For example, when exporting a Braille document. The first 6 items and the last item may be overridden in a document by changing the Inkprint Translation Options, as described in 7.17.10 Inkprint Settings linked with a Braille Document.
To review and change Back Translation Options from Braille to Text, select Back Translation Options from the Translation Menu. Press SPACE to display the Braille to Text Translation Set Up List. Each item in the list is discussed below. When you have reviewed the list, you can use BACKSPACE to move back through the list to check the settings. The current setting is displayed for each item. Note that you must press ENTER after you selected a new setting. Press ESCAPE to exit when you are satisfied with your settings.


14.16.9.1 Type of paragraph boundary used in the source document.
The way paragraphs are formatted in Braille is usually different from the way the are formatted in inkprint. For example, paragraphs in Braille are commonly indented two spaces whereas paragraphs in inkprint are commonly separated by one or more blank lines. This option tells KeySoft how to recognize a paragraph in a Braille document so that it can be formatted correctly in the text document.
KeySoft needs to know what type of paragraph boundary is used in the source document. It needs to know this in order to correctly interpret where one paragraph ends and the next starts in the Braille document. There are 3 options, as follows:
1. For an Indented line, or one or more blank lines, press I. This is the suggested setting. For a new paragraph to be started in the destination document, the source document must have either a New Line followed by an indented line, or a blank line. Single New Line markers which are not followed by an indented line are not taken as the start of a new paragraph and therefore are not passed over into the text document.
2. For one or more New line markers, press N. This setting causes every New Line marker to indicate the end of a paragraph.
3. For one or more Blank lines, press B. Use this option if every line in the source document ends with a New Line marker and paragraphs are indicated by blank lines.
The way paragraphs are formatted in the resulting text document is not affected by this setting but is determined by the "Paragraphformat?" setting below.
This setting is also used by KeyWord to determine the paragraph boundary when the paragraph reading commands are used.


14.16.9.2 New line translation option.
This applies to Heading, Subheading and Lines styles of presentation and determines how New Line markers in a Braille document are translated.
To leave the line formatting Unchanged, press U.
To remove New Line markers and thereby Join lines together, press J.
To expand single New Lines into Blank lines, press B. This is the suggested setting.


14.16.9.3 Convert Braille Italics to Italics Font.
To have Braille italics converted to italics font press Y. To have italics ignored press N.


14.16.9.4 Include two spaces between sentences.
In Braille, sentences are usually ended by a period followed by a single space whereas in inkprint sentences are usually ended with a period followed by two spaces. To have a space after a period in a Braille document converted to two spaces after the period, press Y. To leave as a single space press N.


14.16.9.5 Suppress new page markers.
The places where you have forced a new page in a Braille document by pressing SPACEwithP are often not the correct places to force a new page in inkprint. This option excludes New Page markers in the Braille document from the text document. You can force new pages in the text document by using the Inkprint Inclusion option in the Braille document as described in 7.17.10.3 Inkprint Exclusion.


14.16.9.6 Include a blank line between items in outline style.
To save space in Braille, items in an outline may start on the next line, rather than after a blank line. If this is the case and you want a blank line left in the text document, press Y to turn this option on. Press N to turn it off.


14.16.9.7 Blank lines before and after a heading.
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the text document before and after a section of text which has the Heading presentation style. The factory setting is 2 and 1. To change the setting, type the new number of blank lines before a heading, a comma and then the new number of blank lines after a heading. Number signs are not needed. For example "1,2."


14.16.9.8 Heading format.
This sets the format indicators to be inserted at the beginning of each line in a heading in a text document. These format indicators are: center the line, right justify the line, insert tab, fonts, underline, space, or force new line or new page. Entering format indicators here is the same as when searching for them. Refer to 3.12.2 Searching for Format Indicators for details. The factory setting for the heading format is: "Centerline,""Boldon."


14.16.9.9 Blank lines before and after a subheading.
This sets the number of blank lines which will be left in the document before and after a section of text which has the Subheading presentation style. The factory setting is 1 and 1. The same procedure as discussed in Item 7 above is used to change the setting.


14.16.9.10 Subheading format.
You can enter the commands to be inserted in the text document at the beginning of each line in the Subheading presentation style. You can use the same format indicators as listed in the Heading Format item above. There is no factory setting for this item.


14.16.9.11 Paragraph Format.
This item determines the format indicators that are inserted between paragraphs in the text document. You can enter a combination of New Lines, spaces and tabs. To enter a New Line press CONTROLwithENTER. The default is 2 New Line format indicators.


14.16.9.12 Revert to paragraph style after how many blank lines.
When either the heading, subheading, outline or line styles of presentation are used, the style will continue in effect until another style is selected or the number of blank lines set here are encountered.
This is the end of the Braille to text translation setup list.


14.16.10 Reviewing and Setting Forward Translation Options.
These are the general settings which are used during translation from a KeySoft text document to a KeySoft Braille document. These options are used throughout KeySoft wherever a document must be translated into Braille. The items are generally similar to those for back translation, but there are differences to cater for the direction of translation. The first 8 items may be overridden from within a text document by using the Braille Translation Options, as described in.
To review or change the settings in the Forward Translation Options list, select Forward translation options, from the Translation Menu. The 15 items in the list are as follows:


14.16.10.1 Types of paragraph boundary used in the source document.
KeySoft needs to know this in order to correctly interpret where one paragraph ends and the next starts in the text document. The options here are the same as for Item 1 in the Back Translation Options. Refer to 14.16.9 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options above for details.


14.16.10.2 New line translation.
This applies to Heading, Subheading and Lines styles of presentation and determines how New Line markers in a text document are translated into Braille. There are four options:
To leave the line formatting unchanged, press U.
To remove New Line markers and thereby Join lines together, press J.
To replace New Line markers with two Spaces, press S.
To have new lines in the text document start new lines in the Braille document but remove any blank lines, press B. This is the factory setting.


14.16.10.3 Convert italics font to Braille italics.
To have italics font converted to Braille italics press Y. To have italics ignored press N.


14.16.10.4 Suppress multiple spaces.
Multiple spaces may be used in a text document between sentences or for visual formatting. This option can be used to remove these from the Braille document during translation, leaving only one space.


14.16.10.5 Suppress new page markers.
The places where a new page has been forced in text are often not the correct places to force a new page in the Braille document. This option excludes New Page markers in the Braille document from the text document.


14.16.10.6 Ignore tabs.
If the text document uses tabs extensively for visual formatting, you can have these replaced by a space in the Braille document using this option.


14.16.10.7 Include capital signs.
Usually you would want capital signs included in Braille document, but if you are translating a text document where every word is in capitals, for example, then this option will become very useful.


14.16.10.8 Suppress blank lines in outline style.
This option enables you to save space in Braille by eliminating blank lines left between items in an outline.


14.16.10.9 Blank lines before and after a heading.
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the Braille document before and after a section of text which has the Heading presentation style. The factory setting is one before and one line after.


14.16.10.10 Heading format.
You can enter the format indicators to be inserted in the Braille document at the beginning of each line in the Heading presentation style. You can include format indicators to center the line, right justify the line, insert tabs, and spaces, or force new lines or new pages. For details, refer to 3.12.2 Searching for Format Indicators. The factory setting is: "Centerline."
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the Braille document before and after a section which has the Subheading presentation style. The factory setting is one and zero.


14.16.10.11 Subheading format.
You can enter the format indicators to be inserted in the Braille document at the beginning of each line in the Subheading presentation style. You can use the same indicators as listed in the Heading Format item above. The factory setting is 4 spaces. To enter a space as the first character in the Subheading, press CONTROLwithSPACE.


14.16.10.12 Paragraph format new line (two spaces)
This item determines the format indicators which are inserted between paragraphs in the Braille document. You can enter a combination of New Lines, spaces and tabs. To enter a New Line press CONTROLwithENTER. The factory setting is a New Line followed by 2 spaces.


14.16.10.13 Revert to paragraph style after how many blank lines.
When either the heading, subheading, outline or line styles of presentation are used, the style continues in effect until another style is selected or the number of blank lines set here are encountered. The factory setting is two.


14.16.10.14 Size of indent for wrapped lines in the lines and outline styles.
Often a line of text in inkprint takes up more than one line in Braille. Sometimes this makes it difficult to find an item in a list or an outline when reading an embossed copy. This option does not affect the first line of each item in Braille, but if more than one line has to be used for an item, the second and subsequent lines will be indented by this number of cells. The factory setting is two.
This is the end of the Text to Braille options list.



15 Utilities Menu.
The Utilities Menu provides a number of generalpurpose functions. This chapter covers most of the functions available from the Utilities menu.
To enter it, select the "Utilities" option in the Main Menu. The available operations are as follows:
* Connect to ActiveSync, which allows documents and files to be copied in either direction between a PC and the BrailleNote QT. This option is discussed fully in page 13.12 ActiveSync.
* Synchronization. This option is discussed fully in 13.13 KeySync.
* Backup or Restore Files, which allows all working files to be backed up or restored to a backup drive.
* Pronunciation Dictionary, which corrects the pronunciation of unusual words.
* Date and Time Set, used to reset the internal clock.
* Application Program, which runs optional KeySoft software.
* Miscellaneous Options, which allows you to select a connection type for ActiveSync.
* Key Management  for keeping track of separately purchased KeySoft products.
You can select an item by reviewing the list and pressing ENTER, or by pressing the initial letter of the required item.


15.1 Backup or Restore Files.
You can use the Backup Options in the Utilities Menu to save and restore all KeySoft working files, including word processor and email documents, planner files and address lists. By default, KeySoft stores these files on the Flash Disk.
It is good housekeeping to backup your files to an external drive. This could be a storage card, an IBM Micro drive, or a PC or network. This safeguards your information against loss caused by accidental overwriting or deletion of files and other mishaps. You may use the Restore option to restore your working documents or files in the event of a problem, or to return to an older version.


15.1.1 Backing Up.
From the Utilities menu, select the "BackuporRestorefiles" option. KeySoft prompts: "DoyouwishtoBackuporRestorefiles?"
If you want to backup your working files, press B, for Backup. KeySoft prompts: "Backupwhichdrive?PressENTERforFlashDisk."
Press ENTER to backup the Flash Disk. KeySoft prompts: "Backupwhichfolder?All"
KeySoft assumes you want to backup "All" folders. You would normally do a complete backup of all folders on the Flash Disk together with their contents. Alternatively you can backup a folder at a time if you wish. To backup all folders, press ENTER, or to backup one folder at a time, press SPACE to review the list of folders and press ENTER to select the desired folder. KeySoft prompts: "Makebackuponwhichdrive?PressENTERfor(suggesteddrive)."
Backups are normally done to a storage card, either PC or CompactFlash, or to a Network.
Select the appropriate drive from the drive list then press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "MakeBackupinwhichFolder?PressENTERfor(suggestedfolder)."
The suggested folder name is based on the current date, and is in the form"June10,2005backup."Press ENTER to accept the suggested folder, or press SPACE to review the list of folders on the backup drive. Alternatively you can type in the name of a folder. If the folder does not already exist you will be asked to confirm creation of the new folder, press Y to do this.
The time taken for the backup process depends on the number of files being backed up, and BrailleNote QT continues to beep about once per second during the process. At the completion of the backup KeySoft confirms the number of files copied to the backup disk, and you are returned to the Utilities menu.
To speed up the backup process you can perform an incremental backup, which only copies files modified since the last backup. This procedure is described in the next section.


15.1.2 Incremental Backup.
Incremental Backup can be used to reduce the time taken to copy the files to the backup drive. Only those files changed since the last backup are copied. You should back up your files into the same folder name used for the previous backup.
From the Utilities menu, select the "BackuporRestorefiles" option. KeySoft prompts: "DoyouwishtoBackuporRestorefiles?"
Press B for backup then press I, for Incremental Backup. KeySoft prompts: "Backupwhichdrive?PressENTERforFlashDisk."
Press ENTER to backup the Flash Disk.
From this point on, the procedure is as outlined in 15.1.1 Backing Up.
Given that you are performing an incremental back up to an existing folder, KeySoft requests confirmation before backing up files modified since the previous backup. Even if you have only created one new file, you will be asked to confirm the replacement of the KeySoft.ksd file that resides in the Dictionaries folder. Press Y to confirm that you want this system file to be updated.


15.1.3 Restoring Files.
From the Utilities menu, press Bto select Backup Options. KeySoft prompts: "DoyouwishtoBackuporRestorefiles?"
To restore files that have been backed up, press R. KeySoft prompts: "Restorefromwhichdrive?PressENTERforStorageCard."
Press ENTER to select the offered backup drive, or select the drive which has the backup you wish to restore. KeySoft prompts: "Foldername?(suggestedfolder)"
Select the folder that you want to restore. KeySoft prompts: "Restoretowhichdrive?PressENTERforFlashDisk."
Your backup files are copied from the backup disk, and you are returned to the Utilities menu. BrailleNote QT continues to beep once per second during the process, and on completion displays the number of files copied.
If a file already exists, you are asked to confirm that you wish to replace the existing file with one on the backup drive. To replace the existing file press Y, to skip this file press N, to accept all files press A. Before starting the backup process, you can press HELP to get detailed information on the date and time of creation of a file, and the file size of both the source and destination files.
Backup and Restore work on the entire contents of a folder. If you want to restore an individual file, you should use the Copy File option in the File Manager described in 14.6 Copying a File.


15.2 Pronunciation Dictionary.
The Pronunciation Dictionary allows KeySoft to correctly pronounce unusual words, and to expand abbreviations. KeySoft's accuracy is superior to most speech products, but proper names or technical words can be corrected by adding a suitably misspelled version to the pronunciation dictionary.
This is done by entering the correct spelling of the word, together with a suitable misspelling. Before speaking a word, KeySoft searches the pronunciation dictionary and if it finds the word, the misspelled version is spoken instead. Commands are provided to add, delete and change words in the pronunciation dictionary.
To access the Pronunciation Dictionary, start from the Utilities Menu and press P.The Pronunciation Dictionary Menu includes the following 3 options:
Add a word;
Change a word;
Delete a word.


15.2.1 Adding Words to the Pronunciation Dictionary.
If KeySoft mispronounces a word, you may add it to the Pronunciation Dictionary. From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press A and KeySoft prompts, "Typewordtoadd." Type the normal spelling of the word, without spaces or numbers, and press ENTER.
 KeySoft then prompts,"Typemisspelling."Type in a misspelling of the word, using only letters and spaces, which gives a correct pronunciation for the word. Spaces are useful for changing the stress. Do not pressENTERyet. To check the new pronunciation, press READwithI.If it does not sound correct, change it with the prompt editing commands, or delete it by pressing REPEAT, and try again. If it sounds OK, press ENTER. You are then returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary Menu.


15.2.2 Changing Words in the Pronunciation Dictionary.
If you are concerned about the pronunciation of a word, you can review the Pronunciation Dictionary to check whether it is included. If it is, you can change the misspelling to improve the rendition.
From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press C. KeySoft prompts, "Typewordtochange."Either type the normal spelling of the word and press ENTER, or review the pronunciation dictionary by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select the word from there. KeySoft then prompts: "Typemisspelling,pressENTERfor(default)"
You can now amend the offered default by using the prompt editing commands, or you can type in a new misspelling. Before pressing ENTER, listen to the new pronunciation by pressing READwithI. If you are not happy with the sound, continue to edit the misspelling until you are satisfied with the pronunciation, and then press ENTER. The latest misspelling is saved, and you are returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary menu.


15.2.2.1 Foreign words.
It is unusual to find a word which is seriously mispronounced, but people's names and foreign words may be exceptions. Typical problems are a shift in vowel sound, and misplaced stress.
To correct the way a word is spoken, misspell it phonetically, and use a space to shift the stress. For example:
Change "MikhailGorbachov" to "MikhileGorbachoff".
Change "Socrates" to "Socratees".
Change "TajMahal" to "TaajMahharl".


15.2.2.2 Substituting a Text String.
There are various reasons why you may wish to put a substitute text string in the Pronunciation Dictionary. For example, KeySoft correctly speaks many acronyms that contain vowels, such as "IBM".However, a less common acronym may be spoken as a word, so you may wish to use the Pronunciation dictionary to change the rendering. For example:
Change "ATM" to "ATM", or "automatictellermachine".
Change "NaCl" to "NACl", or "sodiumchloride".
You can change the way symbols are spoken. For example, KeySoft says "star" when it encounters the symbol often called "asterisk".If you prefer to hear "asterisk", you may do this with the Pronunciation Dictionary. To do this Braille an asterisk symbol at the "Typewordtoadd" prompt and then Braille the word "asterisk" at the "Typemisspelling"prompt. The pronunciation of the plural of the punctuation name also needs entering. To do this Braille an asterisk symbol followed by an "s" at the "Typemisspelling" prompt and then Braille the word "asterisks" at the "Typemisspelling" prompt.


15.2.2.3 Braille Signs.
You can change the way KeySoft displays the grade 1 and grade 2 signs. For example, KeySoft speaks the dot 3 sign as "apostrophe", but you may prefer to hear "dot3". From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press A. KeySoft prompts: "Typewordtoadd."
Press the Computer Braille sign for "apostrophe", which happens to be dot3. For the misspelling, type dot 3, remembering that 3 is a lowered C in computer Braille.


15.2.2.4 Military Renditions.
Finally, you can change the word which KeySoft says when you press READwithCOMMA, twice to identify an indistinct letter. For instance, if you prefer to hear "toffee" instead of "tango"when you check the letter T, go to the "Addword"option and press T, followed by an exclamation mark. For the misspelling, type "toffee".This now does as you wish, but it does not alter the pronunciation of the word "tango" in normal text.
You can have fun changing the way things are spoken, but take care! It can be a source of mystery later on, when you have forgotten that you made the change.


15.2.3 Deleting Words from the Pronunciation Dictionary.
From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press D. KeySoft prompts, "Typewordtodelete."Either type the normal spelling of the word and press ENTER, or review the pronunciation dictionary by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select the word from there. The word is deleted and you are returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary Menu.


15.3 Date and Time Set.
Follow these steps to set KeySoft's internal clock and calendar. Remember that at each point in the process you can obtain relevant help by pressing HELP.
From the Utilities menu, press D for Date and time set. KeySoft prompts: "Dateformat?(default).PressENTERforUSA."
Press S for USA format, which is: month/day/year, or K for UK format which is: day/month/year. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. To leave the date format unchanged, just press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Timeformat?PressENTERfor12hour."
Press A for 12 hour or B for 24 hour clock format, followed by ENTER. To leave the time format unchanged, just press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Time?PressENTERfor(currenttime)."
Enter the time, without number signs, in the form: hh:mm
where "hh" is hours and "mm" is minutes, separated by a colon. You may abbreviate an entry with fewer digits and no separator if it is unambiguous. In 12 hour format, follow the minutes by a space and then A or P to denote before noon and after noon. Press ENTER, and KeySoft prompts: "Date?PressENTERfor(currentdate)."
If the date is correct, press ENTER to retain it, or enter a new date. If USA date format has been selected, enter the date in the form: month/day/year, such as 4/22/04for April 22, 2004. If UK date format has been selected, enter the date in the form: day/month/year, such as 25/10/04for 25 October 2004. When you have typed the date, press ENTER.
As an alternative to entering the date, you may move around the calendar until the date you want is displayed. To move back or forward a day at a time press LEFTorRIGHTARROW. To move a week at a time press UPorDOWNARROW. To move a month at a time press PAGEUPorPAGEDOWN. To move a year at a time press TABorSHIFTwithTAB. After the date entry is made, you are returned to the Utilities menu.


15.4 KeySoft Application Programs.
This option allows you to run optional software applications written specially for the BrailleNote QT. The most common of these is the Setup program that performs an upgrade to your KeySoft operating software.
To run an application program, start from the Utilities Menu and press A to select an Applications Program. KeySoft prompts: "Runprogramfromwhichdrive?PressENTERfor(defaultdrive)"
Press ENTER, or use SPACE to select another drive from the drive list. KeySoft prompts: "Directoryname?PressENTERfor(defaultdirectory)"
Type in the directory name, or use SPACE to select the required directory. KeySoft prompts: "ProgramName?"
Either type the program name, or review the list of programs by pressing SPACE, and press ENTER to complete your entry. The program is now loaded and you will be prompted for a "CommandLine." Refer to the instructions associated with the Application Program you are running to determine if a Command Line parameter is required. If you don't have information on this, try pressing ENTER which will run the program without a command line parameter. The Application Program immediately starts running.


15.4.1 Upgrading Software using a Storage Card.
Please Note: If you know you are already running a version of KeySoft from the Flash disk, you will be requested to press Reset with SDFkeys held down until the BrailleNote QT speaks, and then to run the Setup program again.
1. Insert the card into the appropriate card slot.
2. Select "ApplicationProgram" on the Utilities menu, and at the prompt "RunProgramfromDrive?"press SPACE repeatedly to select the Storage Card or Compact Flash Card, then press ENTER.
3. At the prompt "DirectoryName?" the default directory should be presented as "Slash." Press ENTER to select this directory, then press SPACE repeatedly to select "Setup." Press ENTER to run the Setup program.
4. At the prompt, "CommandLine?"press ENTER again. BrailleNote QT will now display: "WelcometoKeySoftVersionX.xinstallation.TostarttheinstallationpressENTER,tocancelpressESCAPE."
5. Press ENTER and you will be returned to the Utilities Menu. The setup program will advise that Version X.x installation is complete, and that for the new program to run, you must press the Reset switch.
Following a successful installation of the upgrade, and a reset of the BrailleNote QT, KeySoft should restart and you should hear that it is running KeySoft CE Version X.x, build zzzz.


15.5 Miscellaneous Options.
The Miscellaneous Options setup list contains two items. The first allows you to nominate which connectivity method to use for ActiveSync communication. The second option provides a keyboard compatibility mode for users making the transition from Blazie notetakers.
To access the Miscellaneous Options, start from the Utilities Menu and press M.


15.5.1 ActiveSync Connection.
From the Miscellaneous Options setup list, press SPACE until KeySoft displays: ActiveSyncConnection?(default)
where the word "default" shown in brackets is the current setting. The options are:
To connect to ActiveSync using the serial port, press S followed by ENTER.
To connect to ActiveSync using a "low speed" 19,200 baud serial connection, press L followed by ENTER. This mode is provided to supported older PC's that can not run the serial port at the 115K baud expected when the S option is chosen.
To connect using the infrared port, press I followed by ENTER. Depending on the infrared port on your PC, it may be necessary to limit the maximum data rate at the PC to 1 Megabit/second.
To connect using Ethernet, press Efollowed by ENTER.


15.5.2 Compatibility Mode.
The keyboard compatibility mode is included to ease the transition to the BrailleNote QT for people used to the command structure of Blazie notetakers.
From the Miscellaneous Options setup list, press SPACE until KeySoft prompts: CompatibilityMode?Currently(default)
where the word "default" shown in brackets is the current setting. The options are:
To select KeySoft "native" commands press F followed by ENTER.
To turn the keyboard compatibility mode On press N followed by ENTER.
With keyboard compatibility mode On, the BACKSPACE key function of deleting the previous character is duplicated by the command CONTROLwithB. The Block Commands menu is then transferred to ENTERwithdots23.


15.6 Key Management.
The purpose of this menu item is to give you access to information about what kind of addon software products you have installed on your BrailleNote QT. There are two options on the Key Management Menu as follows:
Enter a new product key  If you purchase an add on software product, sometimes part of the installation process may require typing in a security code. This is the place where one would do that. If it is necessary, instructions for correct usage would be included in the add on software's documentation.
System Options  If you press ENTER at this option, the BrailleNote QT will display a list of addon software products. This includes extra languages, software maintenance agreements etc.



16 Accessories.
16.1 Media Player.
The KeySoft Media Player allows you to play music, readings and any other audio in MP3 format, on your BrailleNote QT. You can play just about any size of MP3 file from either the BrailleNote QT itself or a peripheral storage card or disk. When the track is playing, you can skip back and forward through it, stop, pause or resume the track as you wish.
Other features include volume control that operates independently of speech, changing tasks with one keystroke and track information.
This section describes the features and their uses in detail.


16.1.1 Loading MP3 files onto the BrailleNote QT.
You can store MP3 files anywhere you would store any other file. However as they can be large files, they are best stored on an external storage card or disk.
You can transfer MP3 files to your BrailleNote QT via ActiveSync, load them directly onto a storage card from a PC card writer, or download them directly off the Internet using the web browser on your BrailleNote QT.


16.1.2 How to play an MP3 file.
Opening an MP3 file to play is the same as opening a file anywhere else in KeySoft. The steps are laid out below. In this procedure, it is assumed that you know how to select a drive, folder or file from a list.
1. To open the Media Player, either press M at the Main Menu, or press FUNCTIONwithManywhere.
2. The BrailleNote QT will display one of the following two prompts:
a) KeySoft prompts Playmediafileinwhichfolder?PressENTERfor(foldername)" where the folder name is "General" the first time you use the media player, and after that, it's the last folder accessed. Go to step 3.
b) KeySoft prompts Continueplaying(file)? where file is the last file you exited while it was playing. To start the track playing from the same point it was exited, press Y. To select a different file, press N and refer to a) above.
3. There are three possible actions at this point:
a) If the folder you want was offered at the prompt, simply press ENTER and go to step 4.
b) If you want a different folder on the same drive as the folder offered, press SPACE and select another folder, then go to step 4.
c) If the folder you want is on a different drive or on a card, press BACKSPACE and select the drive or card from the drive list. Select a folder from the list of folders, and go to step 4.
4. KeySoft will prompt for a file name. Select a file from the list. The track will then start playing.
5. When the track has finished, KeySoft will prompt, "Playmediafileinwhichfolder?PressENTERfor(foldername)" where folder name is the last folder accessed. At this point you can select another file, or exit the media player by pressing ESCAPE.


16.1.3 How to stop a track from playing.
There are two different ways to interrupt a playing track  pause track and stop track.


16.1.3.1 Pause.
To temporarily pause a track, press READwithSPACE. The track will resume when you press either READwithSPACE again, or READwithG.


16.1.3.2 Stop Track.
To stop the track and select another, press ESCAPE. KeySoft will prompt, "Playmediafileinwhichfolder?PressENTERfor(foldername)" where the folder name is the last folder accessed.


16.1.4 Skipping Through a Track.
Sometimes you may want to skip through a track rather than listen to it straight through. There are two ways to do this. These operate while you are in the Media Player application, not while a media file is playing in the background of another task.
1. The Braille Display acts as a progress indicator for the track  once the track begins to play it will go blank except for a lowerg(dots2356) indicator that moves evenly along the Braille display as the track progresses. So, for example, half way through the track, the indicator will be on cell 16 of a 32 cell display and cell 9 of an 18 cell display.
As the Braille display represents the total length of the track, this will affect the rate and increments at which the indicator will move. For example, with a 5 minute track, it will move more slowly along the display than with a 3 minute track.
You can use the Braille display to skip along the track in either direction, simply by pressing the touch cursor buttons. The indicator will skip to the position of the button, and the track will skip to that spot as well.
There are also skip commands that use the keyboard. These skip commands skip forwards or backwards by either 1, 5 or ten percent of the total file.
They are:
Skip forward 1%	RIGHTARROW,
Skip back 1% 	LEFTARROW,
Skip forward 5% 	CONTROLwithRIGHTARROW,
Skip back 5% 	CONTROLwithLEFTARROW,
Skip forward 10% 	READwithRIGHTARROW,
Skip back 10%	READwithLEFTARROW,
You can use these singly or repeatedly to skip through a track.


16.1.5 Restarting a Track.
If you are part way into a track and want it to start from the beginning, press READwithT. This is the same command as used elsewhere in KeySoft for returning to the beginning.


16.1.6 Volume Control.
The media player volume controls are:
Louder:	CONTROLwithEQUALS
Softer:	CONTROLwithHYPHEN
They operate independently from the speech volume, so you can change the volume without changing the volume of the speech.


16.1.7 Information on your media file.
There are two types of information available about your media file as it is playing  track information and elapsed time.


16.1.7.1 Track Information.
You can check out file information while playing a media file. The list of information available in order is Title, Track Length, Sample rate and bit rate. Time is given as hh:mm:ss.
For example:
Title: Sample.mp3
Track length: 0:1:1
Sample rate: 44100 Hertz
Bit rate: 128 kbps.
To access this information, press READwithI. To pass from one item to the next, press either SPACE or ENTER. To go back to the previous item, press BACKSPACE. To exit from the information at any point, press ESCAPE.


16.1.7.2 Elapsed time.
You can also find out the elapsed time, that is, how long the track has been playing and the total length of the track. To access this information, press READwithQ. Time is given as hh:mm:ss.
For example: Elapsed time: 0:0:27 of 0:1:1



17 Command Summary.
17.1 General Commands.
17.1.1 Operating Modes.
Speech: On Request/Off/On:	PREVIOUSThumbKey, then SPACE.
Braille: On/Off:	NEXTThumbKey, then SPACE.
Braille Display:
Auto Display:	SHIFTwithREADwithG.
Slow Down:	PREVIOUSThumbKey.
Speed Up:	NEXTThumbKey.
Stop:	PREVIOUSwithNEXTThumbKey.
Back a Word:	PREVIOUSwithBACKThumbKey.
Forward a Word:	PREVIOUSwithADVANCEThumbKey.
Route Cursor Beginning:	BACKwithADVANCEThumbKey.
Mode:	PREVIOUSwithNEXT (Cycle x 4).


17.1.2 In a Menu or List.
Move forward in a menu or list:	SPACE or DOWNARROW.
Move back in a menu or list:	BACKSPACE or UPARROW.
Select spoken item:	ENTER.
Jump to item:	Press firstletter.


17.1.3 Options Available at Any Point.
Return to Main Menu:	MENU key.
Exit current option:	ESCAPE key.
Obtain help for current operation:	HELP key.
Increase volume of speech:	FUNCTIONwithPERIOD.
Decrease volume of speech:	FUNCTIONwithCOMMA.
Speak faster:	FUNCTIONwithEQUALS.
Speak slower:	FUNCTIONwithMINUS.
Raise pitch of speech:	SHIFTwithFUNCTIONwithEQUALS.
Lower pitch of speech:	SHIFTwithFUNCTIONwithMINUS.
Stop reading, or
acknowledge alarm:	READwithSPACE.
Date announcement:	FUNCTIONwithD.
Time announcement:	FUNCTIONwithT.
Stopwatch:	FUNCTIONwithW.
Keyboard Settings:	FUNCTIONwithK.
Review Voice:	FUNCTIONwithR.
Power and Battery status:	READwithESCAPE.
User Guide:	READwithHELP,orFUNCTIONwithU.
Next appointment:	FUNCTIONwithN.
Repeat the last message
or prompt:	REPEATkey.
Repeat last prompt, spelling
the default prompt:	FUNCTIONwithL.
Repeat last prompt, announcing all punctuation in default prompt:
FUNCTIONwithP.
Caps Lock On:	CONTROLwithSHIFT.
Caps Lock Off:	SHIFT.
Page Up:	FUNCTIONwithUPARROW.
Page Down:	FUNCTIONwithDOWNARROW.
Home:	FUNCTIONwithLEFTARROW.
End:	FUNCTIONwithRIGHTARROW.
Options menu:	FUNCTIONwithO.
Unicode character entry:	FUNCTIONwithX.
Unicode Macro:	FUNCTIONwithC.


17.1.4 Switch Programs.
Cycle through Programs:	FUNCTIONwithS.
Go to Wordprocessor:	FUNCTIONwith4.
Go to Calculator:	FUNCTIONwith5.
Go to Planner:	FUNCTIONwith6.
Go to Address List:	FUNCTIONwith7.
Go to Email:	FUNCTIONwith8.
Go to Internet:	FUNCTIONwith0 (Zero)	
Go to Book Reader:	FUNCTIONwith9.
Go to Braille Terminal:	FUNCTIONwithB.
Go to Media Player:	FUNCTIONwithM .

Repeat the last message or prompt:	REPEATkey.


17.1.5 At "Folder Name" Prompt.
Type folder name and press ENTER, or
Cycle forward through folder list:	SPACE or DOWNARROW.
Move back through folder list:	BACKSPACE or UPARROW.
Select a directory path:	CONTROLwithT.
Change Drive:	CONTROLwithD.


17.1.6 At "List of Folders" Prompt.
Cycle forward through folder list:	SPACE or DOWNARROW.
Move back through folder list:	BACKSPACE or UPARROW.
Jump to a folder name starting with:	Press "letter."
Hear Disk name and space available on disk:	READwithI.
Return to "FolderName" prompt:	ESCAPE.


17.1.7 Within a Folder List.
Return to "FolderName" prompt:	ESCAPE.
Select prompted "FolderName":	ENTER.
Hear Folder information:	READwithI.


17.1.8 At "Document to Create" prompt.
Type name of new file and press ENTER, or
Toggle document type to create:	CONTROLwithX.
Return to "Folder Name" prompt:	CONTROLwithD.


17.1.9 At "Document to Open" prompt.
Type document name and press ENTER, or
Cycle forward through list of docs:	SPACE or DOWNARROW.
Move back through list of docs:	BACKSPACE or UPARROW.
Toggle document type to view:	READwithX.
Hear document information:	READwithI.
Cycle forward through most recently opened documents:
	READwith9.
Cycle back through most recently opened documents:
	READwith7.


17.1.10 Other Options.
Braille Options:	FUNCTIONwithO,B.
Visual Display:	FUNCTIONwithO,V.
Stopwatch:	FUNCTIONwithO,T,S

17.2 Wordprocessor.
17.2.1 KeyWord, text review.
Read continuously:	READwithG.
Stop reading:	READwithSPACEBAR.
Top of file:	READwithT.
Bottom of file:	READwithB.
Previous character:	READwithM or LEFTARROW.
Current character:	READwithCOMMA.
Next character:	READwithPERIOD, or RIGHTARROW.
Previous word:	READwithJ, or
	CONTROLwithLEFTARROW.
Current word:	READwithK.
Next word:	READwithL, or
	CONTROLwithRIGHTARROW.
Start of line:	READwithH.
End of line:	READwithSEMICOLON.
Start of next line:	READwithENTER.
Next Tab position:	READwithAPOSTROPHE.
Reviewonly mode toggle:	READwithX.
Check or change reading mode:	READwithS.
Check file name:	READwithCONTROLwithI.
In Sentence and Paragraph reading Mode, the following commands review sentences and paragraphs:
Previous sentence:	READwithU.
Current sentence:	READwithI.
Next sentence:	READwithO.
Previous paragraph:	READwith7.
Current paragraph:	READwith8.
Next paragraph:	READwith9.
In Line Mode, the same commands review lines and sections.
In Column mode, the same commands review the current word on the line above or below and section above or below.


17.2.2 Other Review Commands.
Define Place Marker:	READwithD.
Jump to Place Marker:	READwithP.
Hear cursor position:	READwithQ.
Go to:	READwithR.
Previous page:	PAGEUP, which is,
	FUNCTIONwithUPARROW.
Next page:	PAGEDOWN, which is,
	FUNCTIONwithDOWNARROW.
Go to next Tab position:	READwithAPOSTROPHE.
Find:	READwithF.
Find Next Occurrence:	FUNCTIONwithN.


17.2.3 Editing Commands.
Backspace:	BACKSPACEkey.
Delete current character:	CONTROLwithCOMMA, or
	DELETE.
Delete current word:	CONTROLwithK.
Delete previous word:	CONTROLwithJ.
Delete to end of sentence:	CONTROLwithI, in Sentence and paragraph reading mode.
Delete to end of paragraph:	CONTROLwith8, in Sentence and paragraph reading mode.
Delete to end of line:	CONTROLwithI, in Line and Column reading modes.
Delete to end of section:	CONTROLwith8, in Line and Column reading modes.
Delete to end of document:	CONTROLwithD.
Find and replace:	CONTROLwithF.


17.2.4 Formatting Commands.
New line:	ENTER key.
New Page:	CONTROLwithN.
TAB:	TAB.
Binding space:	CONTROLwithSPACE.
Document Layout:	CONTROLwithL.
Page settings:	CONTROLwithP.
Style of presentation:	CONTROLwithY.
Center line:	CONTROLwithE.
Right justify line:	CONTROLwithR.
Underline:	CONTROLwithU.
Font:	CONTROLwithT.
Insert the Time:	CONTROLwith4.
Insert the Date:	CONTROLwith6.
Insert calculator result:	CONTROLwith5.
Insertion menu:	FUNCTIONwithI.
Template Menu:	CONTROLwithA.


17.2.5 Format Text Document for Braille.
Braille Settings Menu:	READwithCONTROLwithB.
Braille page settings:	Braille Settings Menu, P.
Braille layout list:	READwithCONTROLwithL.
Braille only inclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithN.
Start Braille exclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithX.
End Braille exclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithY.
Braille translation options:	CONTROLwithO.
Braille grade, query or change:	CONTROLwithG.


17.2.6 Format Braille Document for Text.
17.2.6.1 Inkprint Settings.
Ink Print Settings Menu:	READwithCONTROLwithB.
Inkprint page settings:	Inkprint Settings Menu, P.
Inkprint layout list:	READwithCONTROLwithL.
Inkprint only inclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithN.
Start inkprint exclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithX.
End inkprint exclusion:	READwithCONTROLwithY.
Inkprint translation options:	CONTROLwithO.


17.2.6.2 Block Commands.
Block menu:	CONTROLwithB.
Append block to clipboard:	Block menu, A.
Bottom marker insertion:	Block menu, B.
Copy block to clipboard:	Block menu, C.
Delete block:	Block menu, D.
Erase file & exit Keyword:	Block menu, E.
Insert file:	Block menu, I.
Move block to clipboard:	Block menu, M.
Paste clipboard:	Block menu, P.
Read block:	Block menu, R.
Store block:	Block menu, S.
Top marker insertion:	Block menu, T.
Zap block markers:	Block menu, Z.


Quick Mark commands.
Mark word:	Block menu, READwithK.
Mark sentence or line:	Block menu, READwithI.
Mark paragraph or section:	Block menu, READwith8.


17.2.6.3 Miscellaneous KeyWord Commands.
Extended character entry:	SHIFTwithREADwithcharacternumber.
Find where the cursor is:	READwithQ.
Query value of Tab stop:	READwithQ.
Switch document:	CONTROLwithZ.
Save document:	CONTROLwithS.
Quit document:	CONTROLwithQ.


17.2.6.4 Spelling Checker Commands.
Spelling Checker menu:	READwithCONTROLwithS.
Check to end of document	SpellCheckmenu,C.
Document check:	SpellCheckmenu,D.
Lookup Word in dictionary:	SpellCheckmenu,L.
Word check:	SpellCheckmenu,W.
Paragraph or section check:	SpellCheckmenu,P.
Select Language	SpellCheckmenu,S.
At the Spelling Checker "Option?" prompt, the following are valid:
Review the word:	READwithK.
Ignore the word:	I.
Skip this occurrence of the word:	READwithL.
Add the word to the dictionary:	A.
Correct the word:	C,newword.
Review suggested spellings:	S.
Look up a word in the dictionary:	L.
Read sentence containing word:	READwithI.
Read paragraph containing word:	READwith8.
During Suggested Spelling Review:
Announce original word:	I.Secondpressspellsword.
Spell current suggestion:	FUNCTIONwithL.
Use suggestion:	ENTER.
Return to option prompt:	ESCAPE.


17.2.6.5 When Looking up Word in Dictionary.
Spell current word in dictionary:	FUNCTIONwithL.
Announce original word:	I.
Replace original word:	ENTER.


17.2.6.6 Template Commands.
Template Menu:	CONTROLwithA.
Insert Field:	TemplateMenu,I.
Force inclusion of line:	TemplateMenu,F.
Start conditional suppression:	TemplateMenu,S.
End conditional suppression:	TemplateMenu,E.
Mark comment line:	TemplateMenu,M.


17.3 Calculator.
0:	0 or M.
1:	1 or J.
2:	2 or K.
3:	3 or L.
4:	4 or U.
5:	5 or I.
6:	6 or O.
7:	7.
8:	8.
9:	9.
Plus:	+or=orSEMICOLON.
Minus:	orP.
Multiplied by:	*orCOMMA.
Divided by:	/.
Equals:	ENTER.
Decimal point:	PERIOD.
Negative number:	N.
Percent operator:	%.
Left parenthesis:	(.
Right parenthesis:	).
Set decimal places:	CONTROLwithPERIOD, then 0to9.
Clear calculation:	CONTROLwithI.
Delete last key:	BACKSPACE.
Announce calculation or result:	READwithI.
Read last number or operator
entered:	READwithK.
Square root:	Q.
Squared:	SHIFTwithQ.
Decimal exponent:	^.
Log to base e of:	E.
e to the power of:	SHIFTwithE.
Log to base 10 of:	T.
10 to the power of:	SHIFTwithT.
To the power of:	X.
To the power of 1 divided by:	SHIFTwithX.
Degrees:	D.
Radians:	SHIFTwithD.
PI:	Y.
Sine:	CONTROLwithS.
Arc sine:	READwithS.
Cosine:	CONTROLwithC.
Arc cosine:	READwithC.
Tan:	CONTROLwithT.
Arc tan:	READwithT.
Clear memory:	C,then0through9.
Store memory:	S, then 0through9.
Add to memory:	A, then 0through9.
Recall memory:	R, then 0through9.
Announce memory:	SHIFTwithR, then0through9.
Announce Key Mode:	READwithA.


17.4 Planner.
17.4.1 Selecting a New Date.
At the calendar:
Move by day:	RIGHT or LEFTARROW.
Move by week:	UP or DOWNARROW.
Move by month:	PAGEUP or PAGEDOWN.
Move by year:	TAB or SHIFTTAB.
In a planner page:
Go to a new date:	READwithR, then
	F for forward, or B for back, then
	Move by day, week, month:	D,W,M.


17.4.2 Reading the Entries.
Previous entry:	READwithU.
Current entry:	READwithI.
Next entry:	READwithO.
Note: In Notes, the above commands move by sentence or line as in KeyWord.
All entries for previous day:	READwith7.
All entries for current day:	READwith8.
All entries for next day:	READwith9.
Top of current day:	READwithT.
Bottom of current day:	READwithB.
Note: In Notes, the top and bottom commands take you to top or bottom of the notes.
Read continuously:	READwithG.
Find text string:	READwithF.
Schedule appointment:	CONTROLwithENTER.
Review or Modify appointment:	CONTROLwithR.
Cancel appointment:	CONTROLwithI.
Hear next appointment anywhere
in KeySoft:	FUNCTIONwithN.
Go to next overlapping appt:	CONTROLwithREADwithO.
Go to previous overlapping appt:	CONTROLwithREADwithU.
When the cursor is in the date line of a calendar page:
Number of appointments and all day events	READwithI
Date and days away from current date	READwithQ
When the cursor is in an appointment:
Summary of recurrences and alarm status	READwithI
Date and time and days away from current date READwithQ.

17.4.2.1 Recurring Appointments.
Move to next instance:	SHIFTwithREADwithO
Move to previous instance:	SHIFTwithREADwithU
Patterns:	
Daily:	Type number of days
Weekly, Yearly:	Sunday	Su
Monday	Mo
Tuesday	Tu
Wednesday	We
Thursday	Th
Friday	Fr
Saturday	Sa
every day	v
weekdays	d
weekend days	e
Note: you can type less letters for Monday, Wednesday or Friday as their initial letters are unique. You can also type more of the name of a day, for example, Thurs for Thursday.	
Weeks between occurrences	Type number of weeks
Monthly, Yearly:	first week	1
second week	2
third week	3
fourth week	4
last week	l
Months between occurrences	Type number of months
Number of Recurrences: (not all options documented)
Days	RightArrow
Weeks	DownArrow
Months	Pagedown
Years	ShiftTab

17.4.3 Alarms.
Acknowledge alarm:	READwithSPACE,
	then:
Read alarm details:	R.
Cancel alarm:	C.
Postpone alarm:	P.
Go to planner entry:	G.


17.4.4 Miscellaneous Functions.
Move from planner page to calendar:	ESCAPE.
Hear the current time:	FUNCTIONwithT.
Hear today's date:	FUNCTIONwithD.
Query day and date:	READwithQ.
Announce Key Names:	READwithA.


17.5 Address List.
17.5.1 Manipulating Records.
Previous record:	LEFTARROW.
Current record:	READwith8.
Next record:	RIGHTARROW.
Previous field:	UPARROWorBACKSPACE.
Current field:	READwithI.
Next field:	DOWNARROW or SPACE.
Previous word:	READwithJ.
Current word:	READwithK.
Next word:	READwithL.
Add a completed record:	CONTROLwithENTER.
Select a record to copy:	ENTER.
Change current field:	CONTROLwithK.
Clear current field:	CONTROLwithBACKSPACE.
Delete record:	CONTROLwith8.
Copy record to Clipboard:	CONTROLwithB.


17.6 Email.
17.6.1 In an Email Folder.
Read Email:	ENTER.
Next field:	SPACE,orDOWNARROW.
Previous field:	BACKSPACEorUPARROW.
Next Email:	RIGHTARROW.
Previous Email:	LEFTARROW.
Move Email to Trash:	CONTROLwith8.
Mark Email:	CONTROLwithSPACE.
Mark All:	CONTROLwithENTER, then A.
Search:	READwithF.
Email Action Menu:	CONTROLwithENTER.
Move forward by day:	CONTROLwithPERIOD.
Move back a day:	CONTROLwithM.
Move forward by week:	CONTROLwithL.
Move back a week:	CONTROLwithJ.
Move forward by month:	CONTROLwithO.
Move back a month:	CONTROLwithU.
Move forward by year:	CONTROLwith9.
Move back a year:	CONTROLwith7.
Move to first email:	READwithT.
Move to last email:	READwithB.


17.6.2 In a List of Email Folders.
Select prompted folder:	ENTER.
Delete folder:	CONTROLwithI.
Rename folder:	CONTROLwithR.
Display Number of emails:	READwithI.


17.6.3 At "Ready to send" prompt.
Send email:	Y.
Return to "send to" prompt:	N.
Save email as a Draft:	D.
Print email:	P.
Emboss email:	E.
Abandon email without sending:	ESCAPE.


17.6.4 Email Trash Folder.
At "EmptyTrash?" prompt,
Leave items in Trash:	N.
Delete items in Trash:	Y.
Review items in Trash:	R.
Options after selecting Review,
Move to next email:	RIGHTARROW.
Move to previous email:	LEFTARROW.
Delete email being
reviewed:	CONTROLwith8.
Trash Folder Menu:	CONTROLwithENTER.
	then,
Restore email to original folder:	R.
Empty Trash folder:	E.


17.7 Unicode Characters.
Unicode character entry:	FUNCTIONwithX.
Select Unicode Table:	SPACE,thenENTER.
Select Unicode Character:	SPACEorletter.
Review or change the way a character is displayed in Braille:
	Unicode Table, CONTROLwithD.
Review or change a macro for a character:
	Unicode Table, CONTROLwithK.
Unicode Macro:	FUNCTIONwithC.


17.8 Web Browser.
Open a new URL:	CONTROLwithO.
Go forward one page:	READwith RightArrow.
Go back one page:	READwith LeftArrow.
Save web page:	CONTROLwithS.
Refresh Page:	CONTROLwithR.
Modem disconnect:	FUNCTIONwithO then Select from Menu.
Progress Tone:	FUNCTIONwithOthenR, select from list.
Internet Options Menu:	CONTROLwith2.
Favorites Menu	CONTROLwith1.


17.8.1 Move by Element.
"Click" on an item:	ENTER.
Read Input Control Prompt:	REPEAT.
Move to next element:	TAB.
Move to previous element:	SHIFTwithTAB.
Current element:	READwithX.
Change move type:	READwithC.
Link:	L.
Input Control:	I.
Heading:	H.
Frame:	F.


17.8.2 Move from link to link.
Move backwards:	BACKSPACE.
Move forwards:	SPACE.


17.8.3 Tables.
Table Mode:	READwithS.
Query Cursor Position:	READwithQ.
While in Table Mode:
Move forward one cell along a row:	SPACEwithdot4.
To hear the current cell in a row:	READwith8.
Move back one cell along a row:	SPACEwithdot1.
Move down one cell in a column:	SPACEwithdots56.
To hear the current cell in a column:	READwithI.
Move down one cell in a column:	SPACEwithdots23.


17.8.4 History.
History command list:	READwithCONTROLwithH.
Navigate to current record:	ENTER.
Next Field:	SPACE.
Previous field:	BACKSPACE.
Next History record:	RIGHTARROW.
Previous History record:	LEFTARROW.
Forward one Day:	READwithPERIOD.
Back one Day:	READwithM.
Forward one week:	CONTROLwithL.
Back one week:	CONTROLwithJ.
Previous Domain name:	CONTROLwithO.
Next Domain name:	CONTROLwithU.
Newest History record:	READwithG.
Oldest History record:	READwithB.
Sort by domain/day:	CONTROLwithS.
Note: history is presented alphabetically for day or domain.

17.8.5 Braille Display of Page Elements.
Text Start:	(&)dots12346.
Text End:	(y)dots13456.
Radio button, checked:
	dots2456,dots123456,dots1235.
Radio button unchecked:	dots2456,dots36,dots1235.
Check box, checked:	dots123,dots123456,dots123.
Check box, unpressed:	dots123,dots36,dots123.
Button:	dollarsignbtdots1246,dots12,dots2345.
Selection field:
	dollarsignls	dots1246,dots123,dots234.
Multiselection field (where you can select more than one item): dollarsignls	1246,123,234+Checkbox.
Table:	dollarsigntbdots1246,dots2345,dots12.


17.9 Stopwatch.
Go to StopWatch:	FUNCTIONwithW, or
	FUNCTIONwithOthenT,thenS
Stop or Start Stopwatch:	SPACE
Set time back to Zero:	CONTROLwithI.
Stop stopwatch altogether:	SPACE then CONTROLwithI.
Hear elapsed time:	REPEAT
Hear elapsed time again:	L

17.10 Media Player.
Go to Media Player:	FUNCTIONwithM,orMfrommainmenu.
Pause track:	READwithSPACE
Restart track:	READwithSPACEor
	READ withG
Skip forward 1%	RIGHTARROW
Skip back 1%	LEFTARROW
Skip forward 5%	CONTROLwithRIGHTARROW
Skip back 5%	CONTROLwithLEFTARROW
Skip forward 10%	READwithRIGHTARROW
Skip back 10%	READwithLEFTARROW
Elapsed time of total time	READwithQ
Track Information	READwithI
Stop track and exit	ESCAPE

End of Command Summary.


Appendix A User Settings for BrailleNote QT.
The following User settings should be setup and/or checked on the BrailleNote QT.


A.1 Speech; volume, rate, and pitch.
Refer to: 1.15.4.6 Setting Speech Volume Speed and Pitch

A.2 Time and date set, and in preferred format.
Refer to 1.19 Setting Time and Date: or 15.3 Date and Time Set.

A.3 Keyboard input voice setting; words, characters, or off.
Refer to 1.13.1 Help Messages.

A.4 Braille language; US, UK, or Australian.
Refer to: 5.4 Braille Display Options, then Section 5.4.8 Braille Language.

A.5 Braille grade for keyboard input; grade 1, 2, or computer Braille.
Refer to:

A.6 Calculator Braille code; Nemeth math, or UK math.
Refer to 5.4 Braille Display Options, then 5.4.9 Calculator Braille Language.

A.7 Computer Braille language; US or UK.
Refer 5.4 Braille Display Options, then 5.4.10 Computer Braille Language.

A.8 Computer Braille; 6 or 8 dot.
Refer to 5.4.12 Display Computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots.

A.9 Spelling checker dictionary language installed.
Open the "DemonstrationDocument" in the "General" folder, and access the spelling checker by pressing READwithCONTROLwithS. If the spelling dictionary has not been installed you will advised that there is no language currently installed, followed by a prompt to choose the language. Press SPACErepeatedly until the dictionary name is displayed, for example "USASpellingDictionary," then press ENTER.

A.10 Address list data base installed.
From the Main Menu select the Address List, then press A to add an address. You will be advised if the address list data base does not exist, followed by the prompt to create a data base called "AddressList." Press Y to create the data base named "AddressList."

A.11 Email data base installed.
From the Main Menu select the Email option, then press S for Setup, and select the "DirectoryofEmailAccount" item from the Setup menu. Press A to add a service. You will be advised if the data base for "DirectoryofEmailAccounts"does not exist, followed by the prompt to create a data base called "DirectoryofEmailAccounts."Press Y to create the data base.
You will then be placed in the entry list for the "DirectoryofEmailAccounts." Unless you wish to continue on and setup a "DirectoryofEmailAccounts" record, press ESCAPE to exit, and answer N to the prompt "Addthisrecord?"


Appendix B Information on BookShare.
At the time of publishing, the Bookshare service is only available to residents of the United States. Up to date information on Bookshare.org and eligibility to join etc is available from their website: http://www.bookshare.org.

For membership information, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/web/AboutMembership.html

To join Bookshare.org, go to:
https://www.bookshare.org/web/MembersJoinForm.html

For Frequently Asked Questions about Bookshare.org, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/web/SupportFAQ.html

There is also a book available called "FindingebooksontheInternet", by BrailleNote user Anna Dresner, available through National Braille Press, which tells you how to find, download, and access electronic books from a variety of sources, including Bookshare.org. Sources for free public domain eBooks, as well as for commercially available accessible eBooks, are also included. For more information, including a link to the table of contents, visit:
http://www.nbp.org/ebook.html



Appendix C Troubleshooting the BrailleNote QT.
If the BrailleNote QT does not respond as you expect, there are a number of things you should check:
C1. Make sure that the BrailleNote QT has power.
Connect the AC adapter. The BrailleNote QT should detect the AC adapter when the adapter is powered on even if the BrailleNote QT is switched off. The message "ACadapteron," is normally spoken.
C2. Switch off then on again.
If the BrailleNote QT does not respond, leave the AC adapter connected. Wait 10 minutes, then try switching the BrailleNote QT off, then on again.
C3. Resets  The three types and their uses.
i.ResetButton
Press just the reset button when:
 asked for by an upgrade/new feature installation program to install new drivers and restart KeySoft
 the BrailleNote QT stops responding for any reason (assuming the problem is not that the power is off, or the battery is flat!)
 the BrailleNote QT generally seems to not be its normal self.
Switch the BrailleNote QT on and gently press the reset switch with a pointed instrument until it clicks. The BrailleNote QT should beep immediately. After about ten seconds silence, a chime should sound and the BrailleNote QT should speak.
You will lose data if you have to press reset while a file is open in the word processor or the planner is open or an email is being written and changes have been made and not saved before reset is pressed. Same in the address list if changes are made to a record and not saved before reset is pressed.

ii.ResetwithSDFkeyshelddown.
Keys must be held down until you hear the BrailleNote QT chime.
Runs the original factoryinstalled software. Necessary before an upgrade. Useful if an upgrade or addon has become corrupted and the BN will not start after a reset due to this. The data lost will be the same as above.
iii.ReinitializewithJKLkeyshelddown(HardReset).
If KeySoft still does not start, BrailleNote QT's memory may have been corrupted. If this has happened, then it is necessary to reinitialize the memory. Make sure the BrailleNote QT is switched on. Hold down JKLkeysand gently press the reset switch with a pointed instrument until it clicks. The BrailleNote QT should beep immediately. Continue to hold down JKLkeys. After about ten seconds silence, a chime should sound and the BrailleNote QT should speak. Release the keys. KeySoft reports the software version and prompts for the date and time to be set.
"KeySoftCE,version3.0x.Build(number).Theclockneedssetting.Dateformat.PressENTERforUSA."
Press ENTER or S for USA format or press K for UK format. Press HELPat any time if you need help. KeySoft then prompts:
"Timeformat.PressENTERfor12hour."
Press 1 for a 12 hour clock, press 2 for the 24 hour clock followed by ENTER.
"Time?PressENTERfor(time)."
Press HELP to obtain help on how to set the time.
"Date?PressENTERfor(date)."
Press HELP to obtain help on how to set the date.
Finally KeySoft announces:
"MainMenu."
C4. Still doesn't start.
Telephone your BrailleNote QT Distributor for further advice.


Appendix D Computer Braille Reference List.
The BrailleNote QT supports USA and UK Computer Braille in both 6 dot and 8 dot forms.
This Appendix contains 6 tables which give you the dot combination used for each ASCII character available in each of the supported configurations. The 6 tables are listed in the following order:
United States 6 dot Computer Braille  Lower Case
United States 6 dot Computer Braille  Upper Case
United States 8 dot Computer Braille
United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille  Lower Case
United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille  Upper Case
United Kingdom 8 dot Computer Braille
Each table has two columns. The first column contains the actual ASCII character enclosed in single quote marks so that it is read at all punctuation levels. The second column lists the dots required to obtain this character. Each table is divided into sections according to the type of character. For example, the lower case letters are in one section, the digits are in another, and so on. The sections are divided by a blank line.
Reading of this Appendix may be best accomplished by using KeyWord to select Appendix D from the Manual folder on the "KeySoft System Disk"
To find a particular character, first find the start of the relevant table. Next set your Reading Mode to the "Line Reading" option, by pressing READwithS as many times as necessary. Now, using the "Read next line" command, which is READwithO, start reading the first line of the table. As soon as you have heard the character name, if it is not the character you are looking for, press DOWNARROW again to cut off the speech and instantly start reading the next line. If you determine that the character you are looking for is in another section, press READwith9 to start reading the next section. Continue skimming through by line or section until you find the character you are looking for. Now let KeySoft read the whole line, and you will hear the dot combination required to enter this character. Remember that while skimming through the table you can leave your finger on the SPACE key and tap dot4 or dots5,6 to skip to the next line or section.


D.1 United States Computer Braille
D.1.1 United States 6 dot Computer Braille  Lower Case
exclamation mark	'!'	2,3,4,6
quotation mark	'"'	5
hash sign	'#'	3,4,5,6
dollar sign	'$'	1,2,4,6
percent	'%'	1,4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	1,2,3,5,6
right bracket	')'	2,3,4,5,6
asterisk	'*'	1,6
plus sign	'+'	3,4,6
comma	','	6
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	4,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	1,5,6
semi colon	';'	5,6
less than	'<'	1,2,6
equals	'='	1,2,3,4,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,4,5
question mark	'?'	1,4,5,6
underscore	'_'	4,5,6
grave accent	'`'	4
left curly brace	'{'	2,4,6
right curly brace	'}'	1,2,4,5,6
upright slash	'|'	1,2,5,6
tilde	'~'	4,5

zero	'0'	3,5,6
one	'1'	2
two	'2'	2,3
three	'3'	2,5
four	'4'	2,5,6
five	'5'	2,6
six	'6'	2,3,5
seven	'7'	2,3,5,6
eight	'8'	2,3,6
nine	'9'	3,5

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6
UnitedStates6dotComputerBrailleUpperCase
The following table shows the combinations which change when a keystroke is immediately preceded by SPACEwithU or when Caps Lock has been turned on by pressing SPACEwithU twice in succession.
'A'	1
'B'	1,2
'C'	1,4
'D'	1,4,5
'E'	1,5
'F'	1,2,4
'G'	1,2,4,5
'H'	1,2,5
'I'	2,4
'J'	2,4,5
'K'	1,3
'L'	1,2,3
'M'	1,3,4
'N'	1,3,4,5
'O'	1,3,5
'P'	1,2,3,4
'Q'	1,2,3,4,5
'R'	1,2,3,5
'S'	2,3,4
'T'	2,3,4,5
'U'	1,3,6
'V'	1,2,3,6
'W'	2,4,5,6
'X'	1,3,4,6
'Y'	1,3,4,5,6
'Z'	1,3,5,6

at symbol	'@'	4
left square bracket	'['	2,4,6
right square bracket	']'	1,2,4,5,6
back slash	'\'	1,2,5,6
carat symbol	'^'	4,5
underscore	'_'	4,5,6

United States 8 dot Computer Braille

exclamation mark	'!'	2,3,4,6
quotation mark	'"'	5
hash sign	'#'	3,4,5,6
dollar sign	'$'	1,2,4,6
percent	'%'	1,4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	1,2,3,5,6
right bracket	')'	2,3,4,5,6
asterisk	'*'	1,6
plus sign	'+'	3,4,6
comma	','	6
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	4,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	1,5,6
semi colon	';'	5,6
less than	'<'	1,2,6
equals	'='	1,2,3,4,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,4,5
question mark	'?'	1,4,5,6
at symbol	'@'	4,7
left square bracket	'['	2,4,6,7
back slash	'\'	1,2,5,6
right square bracket	']'	1,2,4,5,6
carat sign	'^'	4,5,7
underscore	'_'	4,5,6,7
'_'	4,5,6
grave accent	'`'	4
left curly brace	'{'	2,4,6
upright slash	'|'	1,2,5,6
right curly brace	'}'	1,2,4,5,6
tilde	'~'	4,5
Delete	8
Delete	1,2,3,4,5,6

'0'	3,5,6
'1'	2
'2'	2,3
'3'	2,5
'4'	2,5,6
'5'	2,6
'6'	2,3,5
'7'	2,3,5,6
'8'	2,3,6
'9'	3,5

'A'	1,7
'B'	1,2,7
'C'	1,4,7
'D'	1,4,5,7
'E'	1,5,7
'F'	1,2,4,7
'G'	1,2,4,5,7
'H'	1,2,5,7
'I'	2,4,7
'J'	2,4,5,7
'K'	1,3,7
'L'	1,2,3,7
'M'	1,3,4,7
'N'	1,3,4,5,7
'O'	1,3,5,7
'P'	1,2,3,4,7
'Q'	1,2,3,4,5,7
'R'	1,2,3,5,7
'S'	2,3,4,7
'T'	2,3,4,5,7
'U'	1,3,6,7
'V'	1,2,3,6,7
'W'	2,4,5,6,7
'X'	1,3,4,6,7
'Y'	1,3,4,5,6,7
'Z'	1,3,5,6,7

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6


D.2 United Kingdom Computer Braille.
D.2.1 United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille Lower Case.
exclamation mark	'!'	3,4,5,6
quotation mark	'"'	4
hash sign	'#'	5,6
dollar sign	'$'	4,5,6
percent	'%'	4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	4,5
right bracket	')'	3,4,5
asterisk	'*'	3,5
plus sign	'+'	2,3,5
comma	','	2
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	2,5,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	2,5
semi colon	';'	2,3
less than	'<'	2,3,6
equals	'='	2,3,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,5,6
question mark	'?'	2,6
grave accent	'`'	2,3,4,6
left curly brace	'{'	1,2,3,5,6
upright slash	'|'	5
right curly brace	'}'	2,3,4,5,6
tilde	'~'	6
Delete		
Delete		
Delete	3,4,6

'0'	1,2,3,4,5,6
'1'	1,6
'2'	1,2,6
'3'	1,4,6
'4'	1,4,5,6
'5'	1,5,6
'6'	1,2,4,6
'7'	1,2,4,5,6
'8'	1,2,5,6
'9'	2,4,6

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6
United Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille Upper Case
The following table shows the combinations which change when a keystroke is immediately preceded by SPACEwithU or when Caps Lock has been turned on by pressing SPACEwithU twice in succession.
'A',	1
'B',	1,2
'C',	1,4
'E',	1,5
'D',	1,4,5
'F',	1,2,4
'G',	1,2,4,5
'H',	1,2,5
'I',	2,4
'J',	2,4,5
'K',	1,3
'L',	1,2,3
'M',	1,3,4
'N',	1,3,4,5
'O',	1,3,5
'P',	1,2,3,4
'Q',	1,2,3,4,5
'R',	1,2,3,5
'S',	2,3,4
'T',	2,3,4,5
'U',	1,3,6
'V',	1,2,3,6
'W',	2,4,5,6
'X',	1,3,4,6
'Y',	1,3,4,5,6
'Z',	1,3,5,6

at symbol	'@',	2,3,4,6
left square bracket	'[',	1,2,3,5,6
back slash	'\',	5
right square bracket	']',	2,3,4,5,6
carat sign	'^',	6
underscore	'_',	3,4,6
United Kingdom 8 dot Computer Braille

exclamation mark	'!'	3,4,5,6
quotation mark	'"'	4
hash sign	'#'	5,6
dollar sign	'$'	4,5,6
percent	'%'	4,6
ampersand	'&'	1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe	'''	3
left bracket	'('	4,5
right bracket	')'	3,4,5
asterisk	'*'	3,5
plus sign	'+'	2,3,5
comma	','	2
hyphen	''	3,6
period	'.'	2,5,6
forward slash	'/'	3,4
colon	':'	2,5
semi colon	';'	2,3
less than	'<'	2,3,6
equals	'='	2,3,5,6
greater than	'>'	3,5,6
question mark	'?'	2,6
at symbol	'@'	2,3,4,6,7
left square bracket	'['	1,2,3,5,6,7
back slash	'\'	5,7
right square bracket	']'	2,3,4,5,6,7
carat sign	'^'	6,7
underscore	'_'	3,4,6,7
grave accent	'`'	2,3,4,6
left curly brace	'{'	1,2,3,5,6
upright slash	'|'	5
right curly brace	'}'	2,3,4,5,6
tilde	'~'	6
Delete	3,4,6

'0'	1,2,3,4,5,6
'1'	1,6
'2'	1,2,6
'3'	1,4,6
'4'	1,4,5,6
'5'	1,5,6
'6'	1,2,4,6
'7'	1,2,4,5,6
'8'	1,2,5,6
'9'	2,4,6

'A'	1,7
'B'	1,2,7
'C'	1,4,7
'D'	1,4,5,7
'E'	1,5,7
'F'	1,2,4,7
'G'	1,2,4,5,7
'H'	1,2,5,7
'I'	2,4,7
'J'	2,4,5,7
'K'	1,3,7
'L'	1,2,3,7
'M'	1,3,4,7
'N'	1,3,4,5,7
'O'	1,3,5,7
'P'	1,2,3,4,7
'Q'	1,2,3,4,5,7
'R'	1,2,3,5,7
'S'	2,3,4,7
'T'	2,3,4,5,7
'U'	1,3,6,7
'V'	1,2,3,6,7
'W'	2,4,5,6,7
'X'	1,3,4,6,7
'Y'	1,3,4,5,6,7
'Z'	1,3,5,6,7

'a'	1
'b'	1,2
'c'	1,4
'd'	1,4,5
'e'	1,5
'f'	1,2,4
'g'	1,2,4,5
'h'	1,2,5
'i'	2,4
'j'	2,4,5
'k'	1,3
'l'	1,2,3
'm'	1,3,4
'n'	1,3,4,5
'o'	1,3,5
'p'	1,2,3,4
'q'	1,2,3,4,5
'r'	1,2,3,5
's'	2,3,4
't'	2,3,4,5
'u'	1,3,6
'v'	1,2,3,6
'w'	2,4,5,6
'x'	1,3,4,6
'y'	1,3,4,5,6
'z'	1,3,5,6

a acute	''	8
a grave	''	4,6,7,8
a circumflex	''	5,6,7,8
Cap A diaeresis	''	2,5,6,7,8
a diaeresis	''	4,5,6,7,8
Cap a ring	''	3,4,7,8
a ring	''	1,2,3,4,6,7,8

cap a diphthong	''	1,2,6,7,8
a diphthong	''	1,6,7,8
feminine ordinal	''	1,2,3,4,6,8
masculine ordinal	''	3,8
	
c cedilla	''	7,8
cap C cedilla	''	3,7,8

cap E acute	''	1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
e acute	''	4,7,8
e grave	''	3,5,7,8
e circumflex	''	4,5,7,8
e diaeresis	''	3,4,5,7,8
	
i acute	''	3,4,5,6,8
i grave	''	3,6,7,8
i circumflex	''	2,7,8
i diaeresis	''	2,3,5,7,8
	
cap N tilde	''	4,6,8
n tilde	''	4,5,6,8
	
o acute	''	4,8
o grave	''	1,5,6,7,8
o circumflex	''	1,4,6,7,8
cap O diaeresis	''	2,4,6,7,8
o diaeresis	''	1,4,5,6,7,8
	
u acute	''	5,6,8
u grave	''	1,2,4,5,6,7,8
u circumflex	''	1,2,4,6,7,8
Cap U diaeresis	''	2,5,7,8
u diaeresis	''	3,4,5,6,7,8

y diaeresis	''	1,2,5,6,7,8
Exclamation inverted	''	3,6,8
question mark inverted	''	4,5,8
	
Start of 	''	3,5,8
Logical NOT 	'?'	3,4,5,8
Right double angle quotation	''	3,4,8
Left double angle quotation	''	2,5,6,8
	
Pounds sign	''	2,3,6,7,8
cent sign	''	2,3,7,8
Florin sign	'?'	2,6,7,8
Yen sign 	'?'	3,5,6,7,8
Peseta sign 	''	2,3,5,6,7,8
	
half 	''	2,3,5,8
quarter	''	2,8
Plus or minus	''	1,2,3,4,5,8
Greater than or equal to	''	1,2,3,6,8
Less than or equal to	'?'	2,3,4,8
Greater than or equal to	'?'	1,2,3,5,8
Nearly equals	'?'	2,4,5,6,8
Identity symbol	'?'	1,2,3,4,8
Superscript 2 	''	2,3,4,5,6,8
Superscript n	'?'	5,8
Radical symbol 	'?'	1,2,3,5,6,8
Integral sign 	'?'	2,3,4,5,8
Integral sign 	'?'	1,3,6,8
degree sign	''	1,3,4,6,8
Intersection symbol 	'?'	1,3,5,8
Greek epsilon	'?'	1,3,4,5,8
	
''	1,3,5,6,8
'?'	1,3,4,5,6,8
Solid square 	'?'	6,8
	
Greek alpha 	'?'	2,3,4,6,8
Greek beta, 	''	1,8
Greek Gamma 	'?'	1,2,8
Greek pi 	'?'	1,4,8
Greek Sigma 	'?'	1,4,5,8
Greek sigma 	'?'	1,5,8
Greek mu 	''	1,2,4,8
Greek tau 	'?'	1,2,4,5,8
Greek Fi 	'?'	1,2,5,8
Greek Theta 	'?'	2,4,8
Greek Omega 	'?'	2,4,5,8
Greek delta 	'?'	1,3,8
Infinity 	'?'	1,2,3,8
Greek fi 	'?'	1,3,4,8
	
Upper left	'?'	1,3,5,6,7,8
Center box 	'?'	1,4,6,8
Lower Left	'?'	2,3,4,6,7,8
Upper right 	'?'	2,6,8
Lower right	'?'	1,3,4,5,6,7,8
Middle box	'?'	1,2,7,8
Left middle	'?'	1,4,7,8
Box intersection	'?'	1,5,7,8
Right middle	'?'	1,4,5,6,8
Middle box	'?'	1,7,8
Center box	'?'	1,4,5,7,8
	
Double upper left	'?'	2,4,7,8
Double center box 	'?'	2,5,8
Double lower left	'?'	1,2,5,7,8
Double upper right 	'?'	2,3,8
Double lower right	'?'	2,3,6,8
Double middle box	'?'	1,3,7,8
Double left middle	'?'	1,2,3,7,8
Double box intersection	'?'	1,3,4,5,7,8
Double right middle	'?'	2,4,6,8
Double middle box	'?'	2,4,5,7,8
Double center box	'?'	1,3,4,7,8
	
Double horizontal upper right	'?'	1,2,5,6,8
Double horizontal right middle 	'?'	1,5,6,8
Double horizontal left middle	'?'	1,2,4,8
Double horizontal lower right 	'?'	3,5,6,8
Double horizontal upper right	'?'	1,3,6,8
Double horizontal lower left	'?'	2,3,4,5,7,8
Double horizontal top middle	'?'	1,2,3,4,5,7,8
Double horizontal intersection	'?'	1,3,4,6,7,8
Double horizontal bottom middle	'?'	1,3,5,7,8
	
Double vertical upper right	'?'	1,2,4,5,6,8
Double vertical left middle 	'?'	1,2,4,5,7,8
Double vertical right middle	'?'	1,2,4,6,8
Double vertical lower right 	'?'	2,3,5,6,8
Double vertical upper left	'?'	1,2,3,6,7,8
Double vertical intersection	'?'	2,4,5,6,7,8
Double vertical lower left	'?'	2,3,4,7,8
Double vertical top middle	'?'	1,2,3,5,7,8
Double vertical bottom middle	'?'	1,2,3,4,7,8
	
Fill character 	'?'	1,2,3,4,5,6,8
Fill character 	'?'	1,6,8
Fill character 	'?'	1,2,6,8
Solid fill 	'?'	5,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	6,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	3,4,6,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	1,2,3,5,6,7,8
Solid fill 	'?'	2,3,4,5,6,7,8
End of Appendix D Computer Braille Reference List.


18 Index
A
AC Adapter  46
ActiveSync
about  361, 423
connecting to  367
disconnecting  367
infrared  362, 363, 370
installing  362
LAN  362, 366
serial  362, 363, 370
Troubleshooting  365
Add e-mail account  311
addition  224
Address list
adding an address  261
changing a field  266
clearing a field  266
Copy to address list file  276
Copy to braille document  197, 275
Copy to text document  197, 275
copying a record  268, 313
copying addresses to a file  275
creating an address list  278
deleting a record  267
embossing  269
entry list  261
fields  261
inserting an address into a document  268
look up address  264
manipulating databases  280
menu  260
printing  271
record matching  265
records  260
searching  264
select an address file  277, 280
selection list  264
starting  260
synchronising with Outlook  380
templates  206, 270, 271
templates for embossing  270
Advanced word processing
about  161
overview  162
Alarm
about  254
acknowledge  256
Repeat period  255, 257
ring time  255, 257
Set up  255, 257
setting  254
status  251
volume  255, 257
Application program
KeySoft  432
Appointments
editing  252
entering  240
modifying  250, 253
next  143
recurring  241, 243
rescheduling  250, 253
reviewing  248
set alarm  254
synching with Outlook  384
arc cosine  230
arc sine  230
arc tan  230
ASCII text
export document as  408
ASCII Translation
about  191, 192, 410, 412
Baud rate  414
End of file character  413
Extended ASCII  413
Handshaking  414
Line feed character  413
Number data bits  414
options  191, 192, 410, 412
Paragraph format  412
Parity  414
Transmit delay  414
Attachments  295, 298
auto-advance of braille display  74
B
Back translation
about  178, 415, 419
Braille italics  416
Heading blank lines  417
Heading format  207, 417
New line  416
New page markers  417
Outline style  417
Paragraph boundary  207, 415
Paragraph format  418
Revert after  418
Spaces between sentences  416
Sub-heading blank lines  418
Sub-heading format  418
Backup
files  36, 424, 425
Incremental  425
on superdisk  36, 424, 425
Battery
about  46
capacity gauge calibration  48, 51
care of  47
check capacity  33
critical warning  46
life expectancy  47
low warning  46
Binding space  197
Block commands
about  117, 185
append a block  188
copy a block to clipboard  188
delete a block  189
erase file  193
format considerations  190
insert a file  192
mark block  186
menu  186, 252
merging documents  192
move a block  188
paste to clipboard  189
quick mark  186
read a block  187
store a block  191
zapp markers  193
Book reader
about  111
Block commands  117
Book storage  121
Bookshare  122
exiting  122
Reading commands  115, 320
reading from another drive  112, 120
Review cursor  114
review opening options  118
select another book  117
Thumb key commands  113
Book reading  112
Bookshare
about  122
downloading from  124
membership information  1
unpacking new book  124
Bottom margin  174
Braille Display
about  15
calculator language  28, 135, 223, 1
care of  55
computer 6 or 8 dot  136, 2
Cursor shape computer braille  136
cursor shape standard  134
display mode  132
Message display time  136
Options  80, 131, 408, 1
preferred reading grade  20, 134
Turning on/off  21, 30, 113
turning on/off  132
show new lines as  133
text document reading grade  134
computer braille  135, 1
Braille display modes
about  83, 114, 132
automatic  84
editing  84
layout mode  85
reading  84
Braille document
about  163, 201
general  202
layout  155, 204, 206
open  203
reference 1  66
review and edit  203
style  207
Braille entry  66, 202
Braille Grade
reading grade selection  20, 134
text reading grade  134
Braille language selection  135, 1
Braille settings for text document
about  165, 179
braille grade  182
braille layout  180
control translation  184
exclusion from braille  181
inclusion for braille  181
page settings  182
translation options  183
Braille terminal
braille for screen reader  63, 64
Braille translation
instant transcription in bookreader  111
Browser  317
Dialog boxes  334
display settings  329
downloading  124, 335
Favorites  330
forms  323, 325
General functions  319, 328
History  325, 332
homepage - go to  329
homepage - set  328
links  321
Logging on  319
moving commands  324
progress tones  142, 320
tables  336
C
Calculation insertion  144
Calculator
about  223
add to memory  229
addition  224
announce key  224
announce memory  230
arc cosine  230
arc sine  230
arc tan  230
basic operations  227
clear  223
clear memory  228
correcting input errors  226
cosine  230
decimal exponent  232
decimal places  226
decimal point  224
degrees  230
division  224
edit entry  226
entering a calculation  224
insert calculation  234
insert result  234
inverse trig functions  230
log functions  232
memory operations  228
multiplication  224
negation  227
parentheses  227
percent  228
PI  230
powers  232
precision  226
radians  230
recall memory  229
review calculation  225
roots  232
sine  230
square  231
square root  231
starting  223
store memory  229
subtraction  224
tangent  230
trig functions  230
Calendar - in planner  236
Cards
CompactFlash Storage  58
LAN network  346, 347, 349
PC Storage  56, 58
Wireless Ethernet  340, 341, 349
Care - general  64
Carry case  14
Center line  164, 174
Check for e-mail  286
Checklist of Equipment  9
Column reading mode  74, 82, 103, 133, 187
Command summary
address list  462
address list record manipulation  462
Browser  466
Browser braille display  470
Browser history commands  469
Browser moving commands  467
Browser moving link to link  467
calculator  455
e-mail  463
e-mail at ready to send  464
e-mail in list of folders  464
e-mail inside folder  463
e-mail trash folder  465
in a menu or list  441
KeyWord block  451
KeyWord dictionary look up  454
KeyWord editing  448
KeyWord format braille document for text  450
KeyWord format text document for braille  450
KeyWord formatting  449
KeyWord miscellaneous  452
KeyWord other review  447
KeyWord spelling checker  453
KeyWord template  454
KeyWord text review  446
operating modes  441
options at document to create prompt  445
options at document to open prompt  445
options at folder name prompt  444
options at list of folders prompt  444
options available at any point  442
options within a folder list  444
other options  445
planner  457
planner alarms  461
planner miscellaneous functions  461
planner reading entries  458
planner select date  457
unicode characters  466
word processor  446
Commands
for moving  74, 82, 103, 133, 187
for reading  75, 82, 194
Compact Flash cards  58
about  58
Installing and uninstalling  59
Computer braille
Computer braille  6 or 8 dot format  136, 2
reference list  1
US or UK  135, 1
use with KeyMail  288
Computer Braille reference list  1
Connect to send and receive  307
Connectivity  286, 337
ActiveSync  361, 423
configurations  339
connectivity menu  340
dial-up connections  350
glossary  354
LAN connections  346, 347, 349
menu  340
network client  356, 366
understanding  338
wireless connections  340, 341, 349
Copy
a file  394, 426
addresses  275
block  188
record  268, 313
Copying address list  275
database  277, 278, 280
Create a document
Braille  66, 202
Microsoft Word  201
text  72
text  201
Create folder  390
Cursor
computer braille shape  136
concept of  80
Display  81
position of  99
relocate position  95, 99, 116
standard shape  134
start of next line  195
D
Date
Display  128
format  431, 1
insert  196
Date and time insertion  144
Date set  431, 1
Delete
current character  92
current word  92
last character  92
previous word  92
text  92
to end of document  92
to end of paragraph  92
to end of sentence  92
Delete alert tone volume  142
Dial-up connections
creating new connection  340, 346, 356
dial using  350
disconnecting from  340, 351
Dictionary
Spelling  102
Directory
about  399
access file  401, 407, 410
Root  399
Switching  400
Directory of email accounts
about  311
Disk drive
description of  68
file operations  388
Document
about  67
Braille  66
creating  72
creation of  72
Editing  90
emboss  151
handling of large  109
listening to  75, 82, 194
naming of  71
opening  107, 117
Print  151
reading in braille  74
types  163, 201
types  391
review options at opening  107, 117
save  199
save as another type  199
selection of  69, 73, 388
Text  66
word count  95
Double spacing  170
Double-sided embossing  151, 154, 258
Download and read e-mail  294
Downloading using browser  334
Drive
change  198
description of  68
selection  69
selection reference 3  388
Duplicating  353
E
Earphones  20
Editing
a document  90
at a prompt  148, 266, 352, 390, 395
delete to end of sentence  92
layout mode  85
quit  200
replacing text  98
Receive options  313
Service
Service  307
Service name  307
Service Provider  287
Service, look up  313
E-mail
about  283
add service  311
All folder  293
attach file  290, 291
Attachments  295, 298
before you start  287
capabilities  284
change email account details  313
connecting to send and receive  307
correcting input errors  288
Detaching  295, 298
dial tone  311
directory of email accounts  311
download and read  294
Drafts folder  293
Eudora  284
Folder management  296, 299
folders overview  293
free database space  310
Inbox folder  293
Keymail menu  285
Mark e-mail  300
maximum message size  307
Outbox folder  293
Outlook Express  284
Preparation  287
Received folder  293
reviewing e-mail  297
Sent folder  293
service name  307
set up options menu  310
Trash folder  306
Folder management  296, 299
E-mail action
Copy  304
Delete  304
Emboss  304
Forward  304
Mark all  304
Move  304
Print  304
Embosser
setting up  149
Embossing
about  149
Group of documents  153, 269
options  152
pausing embosser  152
set-up list  151, 154, 258
via Infrared port  54, 149, 156
via Parallel port  54, 149, 156
via Serial port  54, 149, 156
Erase file
from file manager  394, 395
using block commands  193
Erase folder  391
Error alert tone volume  142
Exiting
bookreader  122
Exiting current activity  22
Export document
about  408
to a file  409
to serial port  410
Extended characters
about  215
assigning braille dots  220
entry by name  216
entry by unicode code  217
methods of entering  196, 215
F
Favorites
Adding  123, 331
Organizing  331
Selecting  319, 331
Fields
Address list  261
File Manager
about  387
Copy file  394, 426
Directory  389
Erase file  394, 395
move file  396
protect file  395, 396
rename file  394, 395
File synchronization  368, 371, 385
File translation
about  201, 212, 387, 405
ASCII translation options  191, 192, 410, 412
Back translation options  178, 415, 419
export document  408
exporting to serial port  410
forward translation options  178, 183, 419
from other file types  201, 212, 387, 405
Import Braille file  408
Import from file  407
Import from serial port  408
File types  391
Files
File  153, 397
synchronizing  368, 371, 385
Find  96, 115
Find and replace  98
First page number  173
Folder
description of  68
Folder manager
about  389
Create folder  390
Erase folder  391
Rename folder  390
Font  165, 176
Format
Braille document for printing  205, 209, 415
factory settings  174, 214
text document for embossing  177
Format indicator
about  81, 85
common types  86, 172
Line break  86, 172
New line  86, 172
new line indicator  84, 90
New page  86, 172
Page break  86, 172
Format marker, search for  89, 97, 417, 421
Forward translation
about  178, 183, 419
Heading blank lines  421
Heading format  421
include capital signs  420
Indent size  422
Italics font  420
Multiple spaces  420
New line  419
New page markers  420
Outline style  421
Paragraph boundary  419
Paragraph format  422
Revert to paragraph after  422
Sub-heading blank lines  421
Sub-heading format  421
Tabs  420
Frames - on web pages
about  323
database space  310
G
Go to
another date  254
Cursor position  95, 99, 116
H
Handshaking  151, 154, 258
Hardware  45
Hayes compatible  351
Heading style
braille to print  207
Headphones  20
Help
keyboard learn  35
Hibernate Mode  18
Hyperlinks  321
HyperTerminal  54, 60, 142
I
Identical to Source style
braille to print  208
print to braille  179
Import file
Foreign braille file  408
from file  407
from serial port  408
Incremental backup  425
Indent  168, 170
Indenting tab  170
Information  22, 24
Infrared port  54, 362
Insert
address  197
date  196
field  206, 270, 271
text  91
time  196
Internet connection
disconnect or stay online  318
disconnecting outside KeyWeb  319
Internet Options Menu  319, 328
ISP  287
J
JET EYE
PC  54, 362
Justification  171
K
Keyboard
compatibility mode  434
shortcuts  25
Keyboard learn  35
Keyboard settings
about  137
voice  138
Keyboard voice
setting  32, 72
KeySoft
menus  23
KeySync
address list  380
all  368
conflicts  373, 374
duplicates  369, 373, 376
PC set up  369
planner  384
KeyWord
advanced features  161
L
LAN Networking  346, 347, 349
Layout
list for text document  164, 167
marker  164, 167
Layout Indicator  172
Layout mode for Braille display  85
Left margin  171
Line reading mode  74, 82, 103, 133, 187
Line spacing  170
Lines style
braille to print  208
print to braille  179
Loading a Book from Another Drive  121
M
Main Menu
about  23
description of  22, 24
reviewing items on  22, 24
Selecting from  25
Margins  174
Mark e-mail  300
Marking places  100
Media Player
How to play a file  435
playing file  435
restarting track  438
skipping through tracks  437
track information  438
menu  67
Menu
Block commands  186, 252
file translation menu  406
KeyMail  285
KeyWord  67
main menu  22, 24
navigating  23
planner  235
shortcuts  25
Merging documents  192
Message display time  136
Microsoft Word
attachments  295, 298
create document  201
email attachments  284
export document as  408
translation to and from  201, 212, 387, 405
Modem
external modem  351
Hayes compatible  351
internal modem  350
PC Tel  351
Move file  396
MS Word
email attachments  284
N
Network client  356, 366
Networking  346, 362
connecting via  346, 347, 349
favorites  357, 359, 360
wireless  340, 341, 349
New document  72
New line indicator  84, 90
Next appointment
reference 1  143
reference 2  143, 249
Numbers
spoken format of  141
O
Online forms - Internet
How to fill out  323, 325
On-line Manual  39, 143
Open book
understanding settings  118
Outline style
braille to print  208
print to braille  179
P
Page
break  95
number of first page  173
numbering  170
settings  164, 172
Paper length and width  173
Paragraph style
braille to print  207
Parallel port  53
Password
detail  307
Pasting text  189
PC Card
about  56, 58
installing & removing  57
Slot  56
Place marker
about  100
Defining  100
Deleting  101
jumping to  101
Planner
about  235
alarms  254
all day events  239
calendar  236
date selecting another  254
editing appointments  252
embossing and printing  258
finding an appointment  251
Making notes  239
menu  235
modifying  250, 253
page layout  238
recurring appointments  241, 243
rescheduling  250, 253
review commands  248
Scheduling appointments  240
set alarm  240
KeyList  260
KeyBook  111
KeyPlan  235
Power Status
battery capacity  47, 143
Power switch  18
Presentation style  165, 177, 207
Printer
about  149
printing braille documents  150
setting up  149
set-up list  159, 176
test  159, 271
Prompts
about  21
cutting off  22
on Braille display  21
repeating spoken  22
Pronunciation Dictionary
about  427
add word  427
change word  428
delete word  430
misspelling  427
Protect file  395, 396
Punctuation
set level  78, 141
Q
Quit
edit  200
spell check  105
R
Read e-mail  292
Reading
auto-advance of braille display  74
e-mail  286
modes  74, 82, 103, 133, 187
review commands  79
Reading books
sample  112
Reading grade
setting  20, 134
text document  134
Recurring appointments
about  241, 243
daily  243
frequency  246
monthly  244
moving between  247
weekly  244
yearly  245
Remote Synthesizer  64
Rename file  394, 395
Rename folder  390
Repeat
and spell  32, 145
hear punctuation  32, 145
Reset button
in brief  18
J-K-L keys reset  1
S-D-F keys reset  1
Restore files  426
Review commands  79
Review voice
Number format  78
Punctuation  78
Speech on request  78
Review-only mode  80, 116
Rich text format
export document as  409
Justify  165, 174
Right justify  165, 174
Right margin  171
S
Save document  199
Screen reader
braille display for  63, 64
Search
about  96, 115
next occurrence  96
Search string  97
Searching back  97
Searching forward  96
Search and replace  98
Sub-Folders  390, 403
Sentence and paragraph reading mode  74, 82, 103, 133, 187
Serial port  52, 60, 63, 410
Shortcuts
Keyboard  25
Software upgrade
instructions for  432
Speech
about  19
Controls-how to set  19, 30, 33, 128, 1
Hear punctuation  145
keyboard settings  32, 72
military call sign  79
Pitch  147
Repeat and spell  145
review voice  78
settings  140
Speed  147
spelling of words  79
Turning on/off  21, 31, 113, 140
Volume  147
Speech Settings
review  139
Spell checker
about  102
add word to dictionary  103
Browse dictionary  106
correct word  104
exiting from  105
ignore word  103
look up word  105
review suggestions  104
Review word  102
skip word  103
User dictionary  103, 106
Spell folder or filename  388
Startup
turning speech on/off at  31
stopwatch  129
Storage card  56, 58
Style of presentation  165, 177, 207
Sub-Directories
Creating  390, 403
Erasing  391, 404
Renaming  390, 403
Using  400
Sub-heading style
braille to print  208
print to braille  179
Switching documents  110
Switching off  36
Switching Tasks  22, 34, 122, 318
Synchronization
address list  380
files  368, 371, 385
how to  371, 373, 377, 384
planner  384
setting up  369
Synthesizer  64
T
Tab
go to next tab  195
indenting  170
regular  169
Tables
Navigating online  336
Task switching
documents  110
KeySoft applications  22, 34, 122, 318
Templates
creation and use  206, 270, 271
embossing  270
Text document
about  163, 201
default settings  174, 214
layout list  164, 167
page settings  164, 172
reference 2  66
style  165, 177, 207
Text settings for braille document
about  205, 209, 415
Ink print exclusion  212, 417
ink print inclusion  211
layout  210
page settings  213
translation options  212
Thumb Keys
about  15
function of previous and next  74, 113, 133
On/Off  147
set layout  15, 137
use in lists and menus  23
Time
Display  128
format  431, 1
insert  196
stopwatch  129
Time set  431, 1
Time and Date
set  36, 1
Top margin  174
Touch Cursor
about  16
using  81
Translate file
about  201, 212, 387, 405
ASCII  201, 212, 387, 405
between braille and text  411
between text and braille  411
Export to file  409
Import file  406
MICROSOFT  201, 212, 387, 405
WordPerfect 51  201, 212, 387, 405
Translation Menu  406
Trash  306
Trash folder  306
E-Mail  293
U
Underline  165, 175
Unicode character insertion  145
Unicode characters
about  215
macros  218
view unicode tables  217
User guide  143
User Guide On-line  39, 143
User settings
Customizing  38
initial setup  1
Utilities
miscellaneous Options  433
Utilities Menu
about  423
V
Version 6.0 BrailleNote PK  42
View all Files  391
Visual Display
about  54, 60, 142
commands  142
connect to Serial port  60
Infrared port  61
Turning on - off  61, 62
use with HyperTerminal  54, 60, 142
Volume
planner alarm  255, 257
Volume of browser progress tones  142
Volume of delete tone  142
Volume of error tone  142
Volume of speech  19
W
Dial tone  311
Web page
moving to another page  324
Reading and navigating  320
Wild cards
file operations  153, 397
when embossing  153, 269
Windows CE
about  12
Wireless  340, 341, 349
about  340, 341, 349
creating a wireless connection  56, 341, 342, 356
list of configurations  345
reconnecting to wireless network  341, 343, 344
scanning for wireless  341, 343
Word Count  95
Word processor
advanced features  161
description of  65
Word wrap  171
WordPerfect
translation to and from  201, 212, 387, 405

























Printed on 7 February, 2005


Printed on 7 February, 2005












































































































































Printed on 7 February, 2005




Printed on 7 February, 2005




Printed on 7 February, 2005




Printed on 7 February, 2005






Printed on 7 February, 2005


Printed on 7 February, 2005




Printed on 7 February, 2005


